yles 5. 1 yles, selection and play 1. 24 witch action pedals 3. 15 witch sounds 2. 8 stem Exclusive, Edit Preset 3.

7 stem Exclusive Impolmentation A. 28

IMPORTANT Read Before Using Keyboard!

belle Styles A. 21 p Tempo 1. 28 board by Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so mpo Lock 5. 2 that your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advanme Signature, Song 6. and 4 new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your tages me Signature, Song recording 6. 12 instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with your uch Sensitivity, Edit Preset 3. 19 authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in the fuack 1. 6 ack configuration, Edit Preset 3. 5 ture. ack Icons 1. 7 acking envelope, programming example 2. 22With the instrument turned OFF, insert the SK SE Operating System Disk acks/Splits, Edit Preset 3. 19 (OS-Disk) included in your materials packet into the disk drive. After anspose, Edit Preset 3. 19 you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON. anspose events, Edit Song 6. 26 anspose events, Edit Style 5. 21 You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says: ansposing tracks by octaves 1. 36 ning/Scale, General 8. 2 Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to

Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM SK760/SK880 Special Edition World Key-

STEP 1

STEP 2

ndo 5. 13, 6. 14 nison mode, Vocal Processor 7. 4 p-dateable operating system iv er programmable Scales 8. 2 er Styles, programming 5. 5 ing the Keypad to Select a Sound 1. 16 lity, Disk 4. 22

riation style 1. 26 locity, Edit Song 6. 25 locity, Edit Style 5. 20 locity range, Edit Preset 3. 20 deo controls, Score 6. 34 cal On/Off, General 8. 7 cal Processor 7. 1 cal Processor, activation 7. 2 cal Processor Edit 7. 4 coder mode, Vocal Processor 7. 3 ice Set, Vocal Processor 7. 5 lume (Edit Sound) 2. 19 lume e Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 19 lume Tracking 2. 20

abort> Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the following message in the instrument display screen: Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue>. At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below. IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP! As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until the following message appears in your display screen: !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!! <Enter to clear/Escape to abort> Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your SK760/880 SE World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded. Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.

FINAL STEP

Dial

few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears when P 100/250 FORMAT 28 you 4. power-up the instrument.

AIT (handshake message): A. 28 arnings 1. 8 Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument. ave Library, Sample Translator 2. will 44 not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a This message heels 1. 11, 3. 15

48 Index

271329

rmat Hard Disk 4. 23 rmat MS-DOS disk 4. 22 rmatting Floppy disks 4. 22 rward >> button, Song 6. 2 ont Panel 1. 1 ll keyboard playing 1. 14

eneral Edit 8. 1 obal Presets, selection 3. 1 obal Presets, selection & play 1. 31 and Piano Preset 1. 9

ard disk 4. 1 ard disk (Preload) 6. 6 ard Disk Backup 4. 24 ard Disk Check/Recovery 4. 23 ard Disk Protection 4. 24 ard Disk Restore 4. 25 ard Disk sleep time 4. 24 ard Disk Utility 4. 23 ardcopy (Pads) 3. 18 armony 3. 21 armony On/Off 5. 2 armony Type 5. 2 armony type 3. 21 eadphones 1. 10 elp 9. 1 ow to use HELP 9. 1

Load All, Disk 4. 9 Load Group, Disk 4. 7 Load Group User Style, example 4. 8 Load Operations, Disk 4. 5 Load Single, Disk 4. 5 Load Single Sound, example 4. 6 Load songs to memory 6. 1 Load WX/SX Songs & Styles 4. 10 Loading data into RAM 1. 40 Loading samples, Sample Translator 2. 46 Local ON, Local Off, Edit Preset 3. 10 Locator, Song 6. 3 Low Frequency Oscillator 2. 34 Lower Memory, Styles 5. 1 Lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Lyrics on display 1. 21

M
Macintosh 8. 5 Mask, Edit Style 5. 24 Master Pitch, General 8. 2 Master Track event edit, Edit Song 6. 30 Melody Off 6. 8 Memory, Styles 5. 1 Mic/Line On/Off, General 8. 7 Microscope event edit, Edit Song 6. 27 Microscope event editing, Edit Style 5. 21 MIDI channel configuration, Edit Preset 3. 5 MIDI Channels 3. 5 Midi Clock, Edit Preset 3. 6 MIDI Dump, Edit Preset 3. 9 MIDI, Edit Preset 3. 5 Midi File Player 1. 38, 6. 7 MIDI File, saving 4. 12 MIDI filters, Edit Preset 3. 6 MIDI Implementation Chart A. 27 MIDI Lock, Edit Preset 3. 10 MIDI Merge, Edit Preset 3. 6 Midi Panic 9. 2 MIDI Sample Dump Standard 2. 54 Mixer, Edit Preset 3. 10 Mixer Lock 5. 2 Mode (F8) for Pedalboard options 8. 4 Models with Optional Hard Disk Installed iv Modulation 3. 15 Monophonic mode, Edit Preset 3. 20 Move events, Edit Song 6. 18 Move events, Edit Style 5. 16 Move operations, Disk 4. 20 Move Single Sound 4. 20 Multi Track List 3. 3 Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI 4. 26 Multicopy options 4. 27 Multicopy SCSI to H.Disk 4. 27 Multifunction 8. 4 Multimedia 1. 21

portant Preliminary Notes iv sert measures, Edit Song 6. 23 sert Measures, Edit Style 5. 19 serting a score (notes and chords) 6. 33 serting chord symbols, Edit Score 6. 35 serting lyrics, Edit Score 6. 36 serting notes, Edit Score 6. 35 olate a single sound 1. 18

Z 1G/2G FORMAT 4. 28 kebox 6. 4

y Assign 3. 18 y On/Key Off Amp. Envelopes 2. 24 y On/Key Off Balance envelope 2. 27 y On/Key Off Envelope programming example 2. 25 y On/Key Off Filter Envelope 2. 31 y On/Key Off Pan Envelope 2. 37 y On/Key Off Pitch Envelope 2. 33 y range, Edit Preset 3. 22 y Start 1. 27 yboard Scale, General 8. 2 yboard sensitivity, General 8. 2

Owners manual
Cod. 271329
English

O
Overlapping samples, Sample Translator 2. 49

st Selection Memory 8. 6 yer dynamic range, Edit Sound 2. 38 yer key range, Edit Sound 2. 38 yers, Edit Sound 2. 15 O, Edit Preset sound 2. 6 O, Edit Sound 2. 34

P
Pads 1. 11, 3. 18 Pan, Edit Sound 2. 36 Pan Envelope Control 2. 36 Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37

46 Index

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
1. 2. 3. Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product. Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to rain. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly instructions found at the back of the manual. This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation. This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product. This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or c) the product has been exposed to rain; or d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured before use. Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owners manual for additional information.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. 11. 12.

13. 14.

15.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons resulting from improper use of the instrument. Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check with an authorized Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center. Copyright Generalmusic 2000. All rights reserved. Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS, Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate this product.

44 Appendix

Stock Code 271329

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

PRINTED IN ITALY

Sales Division: I -47848 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy Via delle Rose, 12 Tel. +39 541 959511 fax +39 541 957404 tlx 550555 GMUSIC I

Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

Contents
}; ushort date; };

// total 2 bytes

total 20 bytes 1.// 1 Rear panel connections 1. 2 r completion, the description of the file inside the HEADER.hdr refers instead to a more complex stucture: The display 1. 3 struct F_HEADER { Navigation, Data Entry, Confirmation/cancellation 1. 3 F_HEAD f; Alphanumeric entry 1. 4 char long }; name[16]; offset;

Introduction struct F_HEAD { unsigned char name[8],ext[3],flags; // 12 TIME_INF time; // 2 DATE_INF date; // 2 Chapter 1 Layout long length; }; Front layout

QUICK GUIDE

&//Display 1. 1 4

Getting to know your instrument 1. 9

Adjust the general volume 1. 9 Power up 1. 9 eation of the Resource Header Play with headphones 1. 10 Play with the pedals 1. Data 10 File which is then sent. The Format of the file is the fore sending the Resource File, a Resource Header is sent which describes the entire Play with the wheels 1. 11 owing: Play the Programmable Pads 1. 11 es rel.addr. name description Select sounds 1. 12 0 resource type Resource ID 1 nfile number of file Change Sound Bank 1. 13 2 len total length of the effective binary file 1. 13 Play on a splitresource keyboard 6 name name of the complete structure associated to the file Return to full keyboard playing 1. 14 Play up to 8 sounds at the same time (Multi) 1. 15 a total length of files equal to 21 bytes. Using the Keypad to Select Sounds 1. 16 Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 1. 17 The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 1. 18 Listen to the Demo Songs 1. 19 Multimedia 1. 21 Automatic loading of Songs at power up 1. 22 To display lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles 1. 24 Start a Style with Key Start 1. 27 Start a Style with Tap Tempo 1. 28 Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 1. 28 Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 1. 28 Select and play the Flash memory User Styles 1. 29 Select a Style Performance 1. 30 Select the Performances 1. 31 Saving to the same Performance 1. 33 Store Performance 1. 33 Saving to a different Performance 1. 34 Transpose the instrument up or down 1. 35 To clear the keyboard transpose setting 1. 35 Transposition 1. 35 Transposing tracks by octaves 1. 36 To clear the Track Octave setting 1. 36 Bypass the effects 1. 37 To activate the effects 1. 37 Play with Effects or bypass them 1. 37 Using the Midi File Player 1. 38 Loading data into RAM memory 1. 40 Quick Rec Recording 1. 42 Record a Song (Quick rec.) 1. 42 Play along with your recorded Song 1. 44 Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk 1. 45

42 Appendix

Contents i

REFERENCE GUIDE
Sounds 2. 1
GMX Banks 1, 2 and 3 2. 1 Banks 4 - 16 2. 1 Drum Kits and Drum Sounds 2. 1 Selecting Sounds 2. 2 Moving Between Families 2. 2 The sound group families 2. 3

Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 2. 4

Edit Performance Sound 2. 5 Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Save the modifications to a Performance 2. 12

Advanced Edit Sound 2. 13

Entering EDIT SOUND 2. 13 Procedure 2. 13 Temporary escape from Edit Sound 2. 14 Permanent escape without saving 2. 14 The Edit Sound main Menu 2. 14 Layers 2. 15 The Algorithms 2. 16 Waveform 2. 17 Volume e Balance 2. 19 Volume 2. 19 Volume Tracking (F2) 2. 20 Balance 2. 21 Balance Tracking (F2) 2. 21 Programming a tracking envelope 2. 22 Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope 2. 23 Amplitude Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 24 Programming Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 25 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 2. 26 Balance Envelope 2. 26 Balance Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 27 Balance Envelope Tracking 2. 28 Filter 2. 29 Filter Cutoff Tracking 2. 30 Filter Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 31 Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 Pitch Envelope 2. 32 Pitch Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 33 Pitch Envelope Tracking 2. 33 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) 2. 34 Pan 2. 36 Pan Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 37 Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37 Storing Sounds 2. 40

Sample Translator 2. 44
Sample loading methods 2. 44 Entering Sample Translator 2. 44 Selecting Samples from the waveform display 2. 45 Loading samples 2. 46 Loading samples from disk or SCSI device 2. 46 Loading Samples and Programs 2. 47 Receiving Samples via a Dump 2. 48 Assigning samples 2. 48 Cancelling samples 2. 50 Sample Editing 2. 51 General notes on Sample editing 2. 52 Sample MIDI Dump 2. 54

ii Contents

e procedure is as follows: from each bytes of the 7 in sequence, the least significan bit isRequest extracted and saved an eighth byte, therefore the same Send Sample / Sample (F7) 2. in 54 e is shifted to the right; finally all is transmitted in the order. For example: Storing Samples 2. 55

Performances 7 real bytes = 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77

3. 1

Selecting the Performances 3. 1 n shifting to the right and memorizing in a byte the extracted Realbits: Time panel operations 3. 1 0x11 = 0x09 + 1 (b0) 8 byte: 0x01 Arrange On/Off 3. 2 0x22 = 0x11 + 0 (b1) 0x01 Style Lock 3. 2 0x33 = 0x1A + 1 (b2) 0x05 Multi Track List 3. 3 0x44 = 0x22 + 0 (b3) 0x05 Programming the Performances 3. 3 0x55 = 0x2B + 1 (b4) 0x15
0x66 = 0x33 + 0 (b5) 0x77 = 0x3C + 1 (b6) 0x15 3. 5 MIDI 0x55 MIDI

Channels 3. 5 3. 5 MIDI filters 3. 6 mat =4 (nibble data dump): the single bytes containing only 4 significant bits to3. be 6 able to represent any data stream. For example, the stream General settings ao corresponds to the ASCII data 0x63 0x69 0x61 0x6f and will, therefore, be represented by the following bytes: 0x06 0x03 0x06 0x09 0x06 0x01 Common Channel/Arrangement 3. 8 06 0x0f. MIDI Dump... 3. 9 Transmission of data to a sequencer 3. 9 this is a format particularly useful mat =5 (BCD data dump): the single bytes are subdivided in two nibbles and subsequently converted in BCD; h numerical data which does not permit direct visualization. For example, the number 0x12345678 corresponds to the ASCII data 0x12 0x34 Reception of Dump data from a sequencer 3. 10 56 0x78 which subdevided in nibbles give: Local ON, Local Off 3. 10 MIDI Lock 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 3. 10 Configuration 8 byte Midi = 0x09 0x11 0x1A 0x22 0x2B 0x33 0x3C 0x55.

ich when conve rted in BCD give:

Mixer 3. 10

e Set function of the System Exclusive is able to automatically identify the amount of the field to update, regardless of the format with which the Effects 3. 12 a is sent with the following exceptions:

Volume 3. 10 3. 10 Random pan 3. 11 ich when shown on the terminal gives the stream 12345678, representing the initial data. Audio Out 3. 11 servations: 3D Effect 3. 11
0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 Pan

the format 0 always modifies a bytes relating to the addres of theA variable to update, therefore, if for example, we want to modify with format 0 Group 3. 12 ariable of 32 bits of the current value equalling 0x12345678 (hexadecimal value), after sending the data 0x7F we will obtain the variable updated Groupwith B a3. 13 greate than 7 bit (correspnding to the decimal value 127) is to use he value 0x7F345678. The correct method to update a variable value Send Level 3. 130x1234 you can send: format 1 or 2; in the way, to update a 16 bit variable to the hexadecimal value
format 1: format 2: 0x24 0x34 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 (2 data bytes) Programming Effects (4 data bytes).

Effects type 3. 12

General Eff1 Balance 3. 13 3. 13

the formats 4 and 5 do not consider the limits acceptedWheels by the filed in 15 memory for which case should be taken not to send a numder of data 3. her than the accepted limit. Pedals programming 3. 15

Controllers/Pads 3. 15

PPENDIX B

Pedals assignment 3. 16 The continuous pedal Functions 3. 16 The switch pedal Functions 3. 17 eation of RESOURCE ACCESS files. Pads 3. 18 control the resources via system exclusive (RESOURCE ACCESS) makes the solution of packaging the various files which constitute the Ped./Pad Lockuse 3.of18

me resource into a single buffer. Tracks/Split nerally, therefre, we would have the following situation:

3. 19

Transpose 3. 19 Resource File = Master FILE.000 transpose enable/disable 3. 19 FILE.001 Detune 3. 19 FILE.002 Random pitch 3. 19 ... TouchFILE.00n Sensitivity 3. 19 Mode/Priority 3. 20 a total of (n+2) files (with n which can also be 0). Velocity curve 3. 20 ch file can be identified by a set of three numbers which represente their own 3. description: Velocity range 20 Harmony 3. 21 File ID = type (Resource ID) Harmony 3. bank type (0xFF if not21 exist) (0xFF Delayperf 3. 22 if not exist) Key range 3. 22 s document wants to indicate how to identify the files concerned for each resource to be accessed, how to operate to manipulate these files and, Create track 3. 22 ally, the effective transmission mode. Copy track 3. 22 Erase track 3. 23

40 Appendix

Contents iii

Store Performance 3. 23
Saving to the current Performance 3. 23 To save to a different Performance 3. 24

Disk - Hard disk - SCSI 4. 1

Selecting the storage device 4. 1 Choose the desired Disk command 4. 1 The file selector 4. 2 The general Disk procedure 4. 3 Load Operations 4. 5 Load WX/SX Songs and Styles 4. 10 Save operations 4. 11 Erase operations 4. 17 Copy operations 4. 18 Move operations 4. 20 Utility 4. 22 Floppy disk utility 4. 22 Hard Disk Utility 4. 23 Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI 4. 26 Multicopy SCSI to H.Disk 4. 27 SCSI utility 4. 28 FAST zip 100/250 format 4. 28 ZIP 100/250 FORMAT 4. 28 FAST JAZ 1G/2G format 4. 28 JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT 4. 28 Additional Disk functions 4. 29 Disk handling information 4. 31

Styles 5. 1
About the SK760/880SE ROM Styles 5. 1 Flash Styles 5. 1 Selecting and playing the Styles 5. 1 The functions which control the Styles 5. 1 Arrange On/Off 5. 1 Arrange Mode 5. 1 Memory 5. 1 Lower Memory 5. 1 Tempo Lock 5. 2 Mixer Lock 5. 2 Bass to Lowest 5. 2 Harmony On/Off 5. 2 Style Lock 5. 2 Single Touch Play 5. 2 Style Performance 5. 2 Arrange Mode options 5. 3 Auto Chord and Fixed Chord modes 5. 3 Chord Recognition modes 5. 3 Dynamic Arrange 5. 4 Autobacking 5. 4 Changing the split point 5. 4

User Styles 5. 5
The basic structure of a Style 5. 5 What is a Riff? 5. 5 Recording 5. 6 Restoring the User Styles memory 5. 7 Time Signature 5. 9 Scale Conversion 5. 9 Quantize 5. 9 Scale Conversion tables 5. 11

Edit Style 5. 13
Entering Edit Style 5. 13

iv Contents

AMPLES of Resource Request message compositions Escape from Edit Style 5. 13

Undo 5. 13 Style Name 5. 14 2F 50 03 00 00 00 00 Edit F7 procedure 5. 14 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Erase (9) 5. 15 Move 5. 16 Exclusive Status manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Copy 5. 16 Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) Quantize 5. 18 Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) Insert Measures 5. 19 Model ID (0=WK4) Delete measures 5. 19 c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) Velocity 5. 20 Resource ID (0=Setup ) not used for Setup Req Transpose 5. 21 EOX Microscope 5. 21 Access to the Event Edit 5. 21 xample 2> : System Sound request: Mask 5. 24 2F 50 03 00 00 01 00 F7 Song 1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 6.(9) Song-Performances 6. 1 Exclusive Status Programming Song Performances 6. 1 manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Load Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) songs to memory 6. 1 Song playback 6. 1 Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) Model ID (0=WK4) Play/Rec mode 6. 3 c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) Jukebox 6. 4 Resource ID (1=Sound ) Preload 6. 5 Selected ( 00 = All files) Playback all the songs or MIDI files on a disk 6. 5 EOX Midi File Player 6. 7

xample 1> : System Setup request:

xample 3> : Request for the 3rd Song in the System:

Recording Songs 6. 9

03 The F7 Quick Rec method 6. 9 (8) The (9) Record method 6. 10 Time/Tempo page 6. 11 Exclusive Status Time Signature 6. 12 manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) Tempo 6. 12 Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) Quantize 6. 13 Model ID (0=WK4) Restoring the Songs memory 6. 13 c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

05 (7)

Entering Edit Song 6. 14 Escape from Edit Song 6. 14 Undo 6. 14 EVICE PARAMETER ACCESS Edit procedure 6. 15 Erase 6. 16 ssages relating to the DEVICE PARAMETERS ACCESS allows access to specific information relating to the instrument; the protocol invludes the Move 6. nsmission of a request message which will be followed by the eventual18 reply. Copy 6. 19 Quantize 6. 21 arameter Request message: Insert measures 6. 23 H = System Exclusive Message status Delete measures 6. 24 H = Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC Velocity 6. 25 H = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Transpose 6. 26 H = Subfunction ID = PARAMETER REQUEST Microscope 6. 27 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 = not checksum, format 0 Master Track 6. 30 = Parameter ID The Score track 6. 33 = Bank Select The SCORE button 6. 33 = PrChange Select (only for SOUND) Score Controls 6. 33 H = EOX Video controls 6. 34
Parameter ID :

Resource ID (5=Song ) Selected ( 3 = 3^ file selezionato ) EOX

Edit Song 6. 14

Edit Score 6. 35

STATUS of the system SOUND Name GLOB PRST. 6. Name How to enter Edit Score 35 PRST. How to exit EditSTYLE Score 6. Name 35 STYLE Name Inserting notes USER 6. 35 SONG Name

Inserting chord symbols 6. 35 Inserting lyrics 6. 36

0 1 2 3 4 5

38 Appendix

Contents v

Vocal Processor 7. 1
The Vocal Processor features 7. 1 Connections 7. 1 Activate the Vocal Processor 7. 2 Working with the Vocal Processor 7. 2 Chord 7. 2 Vocoder 7. 3 Unison 7. 4 Edit 7. 4

Edit General 8. 1
Description of the Main Menu page 8. 1 Keyboard sensitivity 8. 2 Footswitch polarity 8. 2 General Controls 8. 2 Master Pitch 8. 2 Keyboard Scale 8. 2 User programmable Scales 8. 2 Tuning/Scale 8. 2 Pedalboard/Computer 8. 4 Pedalboard 8. 4 Computer 8. 4 Date & Time 8. 5 Set date 8. 5 Set time 8. 5 Display controls 8. 6 Chord Language 8. 6 Help language 8. 6 Display mode 8. 6 Last Selection Memory 8. 6 Mic/Line Input 8. 6 Mic/Line On/Off 8. 7 Vocal On/Off 8. 7 Equalizer 8. 7 The Edit General Main Menu Options 8. 8 Battery & release 8. 8 System Info 8. 8 Restore 8. 8 Restore All 8. 9 Restore Styles 8. 9 Restore Performance 8. 9 Restore Songs 8. 9 Restore Style-Performance 8. 9 Restore Sounds 8. 9

Help 9. 1
How to use Help 9. 1 Panic 9. 2 How to activate PANIC 9. 2 Display Hold 9. 2

Appendix A. 1
ROM Sound tables A. 2 Drumkit tables A. 10 ROM Style tables A. 20 Performance tables A. 22 Effects tables A. 22 Wave tables A. 23 Recognized Control Change messages A. 25 MIDI Implementation chart A. 26/27 System Exclusive Implementation A. 28 Index (alphabetical) A. 45

vi Contents

RACK SELECT 20 00

ddress(H)

Size (H)

Introduction Range(H)

Parameter

Description

Default

00 1F 00 31 Edition and SK880 Special Edition World Keyfor purchasing the Selected GEM SK760 Special board by Generalmusic. YSTEM OBJECT ACCESS MESSAGES These instruments provide high quality sounds and accompaniments, and a simple user interface with YSTEM RESOURCE ACCESS a graphic instrument display which allows total control of all the performance and programming activissages relating to the RESOURCE ACCESS allow the transfer via MIDI of the same basic resources of the instrument that can be exported to k, and which are: ties.
System SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS

00 00 01 you Thank

POWER AND MULTIMEDIA FACILITIES

The new Special Edition Series instruments, SK760SE and SK880SE, incorporate a Flash-ROM memory which allows thefiles, instruments be transmitting, updated are bycompacted disk with latest operational advantages and new ch type of resource can constitute several in which case,to before intothe a single data block.. e transmission canfunctions. take place in handshake mode for higher speeds and better controlfeatures of the data transmitted (the of system automatically recogThe basic Operating System, which 24 Mbytes ROM sounds, an advanced Edit es the mode utilized according to the reply given or not after the transmission of the File Header Message). Sound function and the Sample Translator is common to both versions, not to mention the Audio Vocal e MIDI message transmitted consists of the following structure: Processor for vocal harmonizer possibilities as well as multi-effect processing of incoming line/mic sigH = System Exclusive Message status nals. Both models incorporate 8 Megabytes of Sample RAM (D-RAM) memory to increase the number H = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC H = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) of on-board waveforms with samples from a wide range of choices. Both models incorporate an on= Subfunction ID = Model ID, 00 = WK4 board Floppy disk drive, an on-board 2.5 IDE Hard Disk and a SCSI interface. = c = checksum (0-1), f = Data Format (0-3) A guitar player can connect to the audio inputs of the SK760/880SE Series instruments and play the = packet number (optional) chords which appear on a monitor connected to the instruments video outputs, and mix his sounds with ata > = (optional) those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!). At the same time a group of singers can follow the lyrics projected on a television (or other video projection device) by the SK870/880SE video = checksum (optional) H = EOX interface.
6

Subfunction ID:

HOW TO USE THE OWNERS MANUAL

To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owners Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside. First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the SK760/880SE which explains the functions of e transmission of one of the available resources starts by sending a message (Fileunderstand Header message ) to indentify the successve blocks of data each button and the display. This will help you the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical sired (File Data message). illustrations are included for a itbetter of the instrument. pically the files concerned can be relatively long, therefore is betterunderstanding to subdevide the information into several brief packets which can be ividually tested and eventually retransmitted (in the case of using handshake mode and the reception ofuse an ACK reply confirms the Guide correct- to discover all Once you are acquainted with thethe instruments basic functions, the Reference ss of the packet received, while a reply of the type NACK forces the retransmission of the error packet). the potentials of your it SK760/SK880SE World Keyboard. ould it be necessar to interrupt the transmissoin, is always possible to send the CANCEL command at any moment during the course of the mmunication. At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
e Header message:
= = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = FILE HEADER Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 3 (octect) 3 octects 8 EOX

File Header File Data Resource Request Parametr Request Parameter Data ACK NACK CANCEL WAIT

01H 02H 03H 40H 41H 7 7FH 7EH 7DH 7CH

WAIT command has also beed included for future implementations.

H H H H

H ata > H

e Data message:
= = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F)

H H H

36 Appendix

Introduction i

FEATURES OF THE SK760SE & SK880SE

Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32 parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to the auto-accompaniment section. Sound generation Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modified by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned singularly or in pairs to up to a maximum of 3 Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 Waves per voice. ROM-Sounds ROM (permanent memory) contains up to 24 megabytes of samples which are the source of over 1,000 ROM-Sounds. RAM-Sounds You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or can be created by the user with the sound editor program. Sounds can be loaded from SK760/ 880SE, previous series SK, WK, PS and WX/SX Series disks. Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch The Edit Perf Sound and Edit Sound Patch functions permits quick modification of Sounds and Drumkits to produce Performance-Sounds. The modifications are stored in Performance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or Real-Performances to load the correct sounds.

Drawbars A unique set of Drawbar Performance for instant access to vintage electronic organ sounds using the 8 panel sliders as drawbars, with key-click, percussion, etc.. Sound Edit SK760/880SE features and advanced, powerful and highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes you deep into the heart of sound synthesis at its

very best. You can shape envelopes, control Waveforms and open and close filters with the help of high definition graphical representations projected on the display. The Sound Edit also features the Sample Translator, an incorporated Waveform creating program which allows you to create new Sounds starting from disk-based samples or data received via MIDI. Sample-RAM (D-RAM) SK760/880SE is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM to allow the loading of disk-based samples to create RAM -Sounds. The D-RAM is backed by a Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning off the instrument. Volatile Sample RAM (optional) It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of additional Sample-RAM via standard 72 pin computer SIMMs (single in-line Memory Modules) obtainable from most computer outlets. Digital Effects Processor Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs and modulations). A flexible matrix allows different effects to be assigned to every track. 32 track Sequencer The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer has a Microscope function (microscopic edit) and Score facility (to display Score, chords and Lyrics). The QuickRec recording method allows the rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles. Midi File player The SK760/880SE models feature a MIDI File player capable of reading any MIDI File available on the market and world wide web. Jukebox & Preload The Jukebox function allows you to chain the Songs in memory and play them one after the other with a single command. The Preload function allows you to create a list of disk-based Songs or MIDI Files and play them all by means of a single command, without first loading all data in memory.

ii Introduction

Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor 0 The internal ROM Styles provide automatic muThe Audio/Video card offers the possibility of FFECTS B sical accompaniments, consisting of 8 tracks. processing Mic/Line signals with the instruments ddress(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default Every Up to 32 disk based 14 00 00 00 01Style has 00 4 Variations. 17 Eff_Type1 0 -> 23 internal Effects 2= Hall3 Processor and includes the VoStyles can be loaded and to add vocal harmonies to 14 01 00 00 01 (User programmable) 00 7F eff_vol1 0 -> 127 cal Processor 37H = function 55 14 02 00 00 01 par#1_1 automatically stored in the battery backed sysyour performance. 14 03 00 00 01 par#2_1 tem Each Style can par#3_1 also be automatiAdvanced MIDI operation & System Exclusive 14 04 00 00 memory. 01 cally reconfigured by means of up to 8 associat14 05 00 00 01 00 1F Eff_Type2 0 -> 31 SK760/880SE 0=MonoDelay1 has two independent MIDI circuits 14 06 00 00 01 Performances. 00 7F eff_vol2 0 -> 127 79H = 121 ed Style (A and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with 14 07 00 00 01 par#1_2 Flash Styles MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System 14 08 00 00 01 par#2_2 14 09 00 00 01 par#3_2 SK760/880SE contains an additional set of Styles Exclusive communication. 14 0A 00 00 01 00 7F Eff2ToEff1 0 -> 127 0 stored in the User Style Flash memory banks, Direct connection with a computer RACK SOUND ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) reserved for factory use where the contents may The Computer jack Default permits the connection of ddress(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description vary from market to market. From time to time, computers not fitted 15 00 00 00 02 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) with a MIDI interface to Generalmusic may offer operating systems which 15 01 00 00 01 0 Ctrl32 no sound ifSK760/880SE no zero 0 serial cable. via a single contain upgrades of the User Flash banks. DI CONFIGURATION ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) SCSI port ddress(H) Size (H) Parameter Description Default Disk drive Range(H) For 4 off-line storage, SK760/880SE is fitted with 16 00 00 00 01 00 03 source Track source Data can be 00 stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks,Track in destination 5 port, so you can store files on an external a SCSI 16 01 00 00 01 03 destination SK760/880SE expanded format (1.6 megabyte), 16 04 00 00 01 01 02 Midi_In_Port 1 = MidiIn storage A, 2= MidiIn B connected via the SCSI port device 16 05 00 00 01 MS-DOS 01 10 megabyte) Midi_In-Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 standard (1.44 or Atari ST/ (ZIP, Disks, etc.). This also makes 16 06 00 00 01 01 02 Midi_Our_Port 1 = MidiOut A, 2= JAZ, MidiOut Hard B Falcon format (720 Kb). SK760/880SE is able it possible to load files from a CD-ROM drive. 16 07 00 00 01 01 10 Midi_out-Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 to initialize disks for every format. It is possible OMMON ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) Up-dateable operating system (OS) to load RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from ddress(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Since the operating Default system resides in a flashSK760/880SE , WK6/8, and SX2 floppy 17 00 00 00 01 00 7F WX2volume load 17 01 00 00 01Thanks 00 78 transpit is also pos-60 -> +60 ROM, it is possible to 3CH = 0 updates from floppy disks. to the Sample-RAM, disk. Operating updates can add new 17 02 00 00 02 00 samples 0300 from delay nibblized if > 127system 0 sible to load new disk (as RAM 0 -> - 768 Use 17 03 00 00 01 00 07 dyn_resp 0 functions to the instrument. Sounds). compatibility permits MIDI file 17 04 00 00 01 MS-DOS 00 01 m_transp 1 The Multitasking operating system allows you to exchange TERNAL ( xx = CHANNELwith = 0 -other 1F ) instruments and computers. execute several operations simultaneously, such Hard disk Range(H) ddress(H) Size (H) Parameter Description Default as modifying sounds 0 while a song is playing, load18 00 00 00 01 00 02 mode SK760/880SE is fitted with a 2.5 IDE or E-IDE play, formatting a disk 18 01 00 00 01 00 01 m_priority Poly.Monoing a song during song 0 internal disk which a vast assort18 02 00 00 01 Hard 00 7F contains detune -64 -> +63 while playing. 40H = 0 18 03 00 00 01 00 03 analog_out 0 ment of data (Songs, User Styles, Sounds, etc.). 18 04 00 00 01 00 01 effect_group Selection effects group A or B Refer to the Hard Disk contents, a booklet sup18 05 00 00 01 00 7F vol_group_A Volume sent of eff. group A plied with models fitted with the 18 06 00 00 01 00 of the 7F instrument vol_group_B Volume sent of eff. group B 18 07 00 00 01 3E pan -31 -> +31 3EH =31 Hard Disk. 00
0 -> 127 18 08 18 09 18 0A 18 0B 00 00 01 Score 00 00 01 view 00 00 01 The display 00 00 01 00 00 01 can 00 07 07 0B the show 0C rand_pitch rand_pan Harmony 1 -> 11 score, the lyrics and PitchRange 0 -> 12 0 0 1 0

13 09 13 0A

00 00 01 Automatic accompaniment par#3_2 00 00 01 00 7F Eff2ToEff1

DI IN FILTER (eo xx = CHANNEL = 0 - interface 1F ) (RGB-S/VHS) 19 00 19 01 19 02 19 03 19 04 19 05

ddress(H)

chord symbols of a song. By connecting the Vidto a video system Size (H) Range(H) Description (monitor, domestic TV, closed Parameter circuit video), it is 00 00 01 00 64 filter_in1 0 -> 100 also possible 00 to display lyrics on a tel00 00 01 64 score and filter_in2 0 -> 100 00 00 01 (or other 00 external 64 video filter_in3 0 -> 100 evision device). Lyrics 00 00 01 00 64 filter_in4 0 -> 100 can be projected onto a monitor during a per00 00 01 00 64 filter_in5 0 -> 100 formance to allow with the player. 00 00 01 00 others 64 to sing filter_in6 0 -> 100

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

34 Appendix

Introduction iii

IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES

OBSERVE THESE IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES BEFORE USING YOUR INSTRUMENT: AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.= MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a precautionary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any factory-loaded files. The protection is removed in the Disk Utility page. UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument. The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained in the instruments Flash ROM. To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk: (1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort appears, press ENTER to start the OS update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the message Loading successful (Enter to continue) is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows below to insure proper operation. RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instruments memory has been damaged, either by being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate properly. The remedy is a power-up reset: (1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the message !!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort> appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.

1 +

!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort >

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1. The SK760/880SE should contain the following items from the factory: a) Instrument with power cord; b) 1 Floppy disk containing the Operating System (OS-Disk); c) Owners manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder). 2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate). 3. Generalmusic on Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com

iv Introduction

04 01 04 02

00 00 01 00SOME 00 01

00 01 Footswitch[2] 0=Normally closed, 1=open USEFUL BEFORE STARTING 00 INFORMATION 01 Footswitch[3] 0=Normally closed, 1=open

0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd

ENERAL) DISPLAY CONTROLS

ddress(H)
05 00 05 01 05 02

THE RECHARGEABLE BATTERY Size (H) Range(H)

Parameter

Description

Default

00 00 01 00 01ChordLanguage 0 =after English, 1 = Italiano The SK760/880SE conserves the data in RAM turning off, thanks to a0=English rechargeable battery. 00 00 01 00 01Help_Language 0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0=English battery while the instrument is turned on (not plugged in!). 00 00 01 is recharged 00 01Display_Mode 0 = Positive 1 = just Negative 0=Positive

The

GENERAL) NOTE TUNING/SCALE ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) served two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instruddress(H) Size (H) for about Range(H) Parameter Description Default
06 00 06 01 00 00 01 00until the maximum 7F level is reached. coarseIf the battery0discharges, -> 127 ment is left on, leave the instrument on for 00 00 01 01 7F finetune -63 -> +63; at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.

When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is con-

ddress(H)
07 00 07 01

ENERAL) TUNING/SCALE To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least 00 00 01 01 7F Master_pitch -63 -> +63; 0 - Sounds based on kbd_scale sample RAM (RAM are conserved 00 00WARNING 01 00 0D 0 -> -Sounds) +13 0=Equal after power down only if the Backed

Size (H) Range(H) Description once a month. In most cases, Parameter normal use of the SK760/880SEDefault will keep the battery charged.

DI CLOCK 08 00

ddress(H)

LOBAL SET 09 02

Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after powering up Size the (H) instrument Range(H) Parameter Description Default again 00 00 01 00 01 MidiClock Int/Ext 0=Internal Note: It is possible to load RAM -Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.

ddress(H)

WHAT REMAINS 00 IN MEMORY IS CANCELLED 00 00 01 30 AND WHAT transpose -24 +24 [semitones]
Size (H)after turning Range(H) Stored off Parameter

Size (H)

Range(H)

Parameter

Description

Default
18H = 0

DI GENERAL SET

ddress(H)
0A 00 0A 01 0A 02 0A 03 0A 04 0A 05 0A 06 0A 07 0A 08 0A 09 0A 0A

Description Default Not stored after turning off

0=Off; 1->10 = chan 1->16 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 0 = Off 1 = In A 1 = Out A 1 = On 1 = On 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = On 0=GMidi 1

00 00 01 00 10 Common_ch Programmable Performances 00 00 01 01 02 Common_In 00 00 01 01 02 Common_Out Modified Style-Performances 00 00 01 00 01 Midi_lock 00 00 01 00 buttons) 01 Clock_Send User Styles (User 00 00 01 00 01 Midi_Merge Songs 00 00 01 00 01 MidiInTran 00 00 01 00 7F MidiFixedDyn Setup (general settings) 00 00 01 00 01 Midi_sysex 00 00 01 00 01 saveFrm RAM-Sounds (based on samples SMF in ROM) 00 00 01 00 01 Bank_select

0 -> 127 0=Excl System OFF, 1=ON 0 = GMidi, 1 = smfformat

ENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 1 0B 00 0B 01 0B 02 0B 03 0B 04 0B 05 0B 06 0B 07 0B 08 0B 09

RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)

RAM

-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)

ddress(H)

Samples S-RAM Size (H) in Backed Range(H)

Parameter

Samples in Volatile S-RAM Description Default

00 00 01 00 7F Volume 0 -> 127 7FH =127 00 00 01 00 01 EffGroup 0 The of 00 the following buttons also remain ARRANGE ON/OFF, MEMORY, 00 00 status 01 7F Eff1Send 0 memorized: -> 127 40H = ARRANGE 64 00 00 01 MEMORY, 00 7F Eff2Send -> 127 BASS TO LOWEST and 40H = 64 ARRANGE MODE LOWER TEMPO LOCK, MIXER 0 LOCK, the 00 00 01 00 05 FltType 0 settings. 00 00 01 00 BF FltCutoff 0 191, Use nibblized if > 127 0 00 00 01 00 7f FltResonance 0 -> 127 0 00 00 01 00 3E Pan -31 -> +31 3EH = 31 00 00 01 00 03 AnalogOut 0 00 00 01 00 01 Mic/Line On/Off 0

ENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 2

ddress(H)
0C 00 0C 01 0C 02 0C 03 0C 04 0C 05 0C 06

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Parameter
Volume EffGroup Eff1Send Eff2Send FltType FltCutoff FltResonance

Description
0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0->191, Use nibblized if >127 0 -> 127

Default
7FH=127 0 40H= 64 40H= 64 0 0 0

7F 01 7F 7F 05 BF 7f

32 Appendix

Introduction v

RAM RESET
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can reset the backed RAM. 1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter the Edit General menu.

BATTERY DISCHARGED MESSAGE If the instrument has been left turned off for a long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge. When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data. If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following message:

2. Press the soft button F4 to select the Restore all command. The following dialogue window is displayed.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is confirmed, the instrument can be played after few seconds.

The message cancels automatically after 2/3 seconds. After the message cancels, be sure to save all of your edited work to disk until after the battery has sufficiently charged. Leave the instrument on for a few hours to recharge the battery. One hour of charge time corresponds to approximately one day of use - the battery charge remains active for approximately 15 days of non-use. If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off for a long period of time, be sure to save all userprogrammed data to disk to safeguard your data against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.

vi Introduction

AMPLES OF EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES AND CHECKSUM CALCULATIONS lating to the structure of the Address Data Interface)

xample 1> : The setting for the 1st Effect Type of Group A on Hall 3 using the common channel 7, the format 0 (7 bit data value) and without ecksum. cording to the address map relating to the Performance Parameters -EFFECTS A the address is 00 13 00H (effctnr1) and the value relating to LL3 is 02H; therefore the set streams is as follows:

Quick Guide
1 Layout & Display 2 User Guide

2F 36 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 13 00 address

02 F7 data (7)

Exclusive Status manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (6=7 device ID) Set Subfunction Model ID (0=WK4) c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) EOX

xample 2> : The setting for the Attack of track 11 to +13 using common channel 2 (N.B. the 1st channel is 0 ), format 0 (7 bit data value) and with ecksum. cording to the address map relating to Performance Parameters - T_SLIDER the address relating to track 11 (the first track is 0) is 0A 1C 00H tack) and the value to set is 4DH; therefore the set stream is as follows:

0 2F 31 ) (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

10 (6)

0A 1C 00 address

4D cc=?? F7 data checksum (7)

Exclusive Status manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) Set Subfunction Model ID (0=WK4) c=1(Yes checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) EOX

e checksum value is obtained with an XOR of all the bytes starting from the GeneralMusic ID (2FH) included; using ^ as the operator XOR ( OR clusive ), then: cc=checksum = 2F ^ 31 ^ 01 ^ 00 ^ 10 ^ 0A ^ 1C ^ 00 ^ 4D = 54 message to send is:

2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D 54 F7 .

xample 3> : Setting the M.Transpose to -6 using common channel 2, format 0 (7 bit data value) with and without checksum. cording to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - GLOBSET the address is 00 09 02H (transpose) and the value to set is 2418=12H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows:

2F 31 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 09 02 address

12 F7 data (7)

Exclusive Status manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) Set Subfunction Model ID (0=WK4) c=0( No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) EOX

h the checksum, the stream will be:

2F 31 01 00 10 00 09 02 12 16 F7 .

xample 4> : setting the parameter FltCutoff of the group AUDIOIN1 to 147 ( >127 ) on command channel 2 and format 2 ( data in nibble ) h and without checksum. cording to the address map relating to Global Parameters - AUDIOIN1 the address is 00 0B 05H (FltCutoff) and the value to set in nibble format 09 03H; infact 147=93H, therefore the value is sliced in two nibbles 9 and 3 obtaining 09 03H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as ows:

2F 31 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

02 (6)

00 0B 05 address

09 03 F7 data (7)

Exclusive Status

30 Appendix

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Power source

Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before connecting to the mains. DC power cannot be used to power this instrument. If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
Handling the power cord

Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands. Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug. Never forcibly bend the power cord. If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified technician.
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument

Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased. As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
If the instrument plays in an abnormal way

Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store where it was purchased. Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other unexpected damage or accident.
Important notes

Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it. Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume slider at about two thirds of the course). Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
General user maintenance

Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a soft, dry cloth. Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they may damage the instrument finish. Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.

User Guide

K760/880 Special Edition System Exclusive Implementation

FRONT LAYOUT

NIVERSAL NON-REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES

Chapter 1 Layout & Display

11. Headphones jacks (2). 12. Keyboard (SK760SE: E1-A7, SK880SE: A0C8) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from C1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the Transpose function, the entire range C1 - G9 can be covered on the keyboard. 13. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name writing situations. 14. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <, Fill ><, Fill >. 15. Style Groups. 16. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending. 17. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P. 18. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial. 19. Directional buttons (cursor arrows). 20. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4. 21. Octave /+, Transpose b/#.

AMPLE DUMP STANDARD

e transfer of data relating to the samples contained in the sounds of the instrument ias based on the standard protocol, called SDS (Sample Dump andard). The formats of the various commands available are as follows: 10. Wheels (Pitch Bend, Modulation).
= = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID ACK ID packet number EOX

CK (handshake1. message): Sliders

(M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/ 3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H]. H 2. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower H Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer ACK (handshake message): Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off H = System Exclusive Message status H = Non-Real Time extension 3. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play, = device ID Store Perf. H = NACK ID = packet number 4. H = EOX 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll butPage Select buttons, Soft buttons AH, ANCEL (handshaketons, message): F1F8. H = System Exclusive Message status H = Non-Real Time extension 5. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad. = device ID H = CANCEL ID 6. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score, = packet number H = EOX Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time. AIT (handshake message): 7. Sound Groups. H = System Exclusive Message status H = Non-Real Time extension 8. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads, = device ID H = WAIT ID Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General, = packet number H = EOX Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED. UMP HEADER: 9. Disk Drive location.
= = = = = = = = device ID Sample number (LSB first) Sample format(# of significant bits from 8-28) Sample period in nanoseconds (LSB first) Sample length in words (LSB first) Sustain loop start point word number (LSB 1first) 2 3 Sustain loop end point word number (LSB first) Loop type (00=forward,01=backward/forward,7F=loop off)

H H

7E cc 01 ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj F7

ss

f ff gg gg hh hh ii

5 6 7

UMP REQUEST:
= = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DUMP REQUEST ID Request sample (LSB first) EOX

H H

H ss H

ATA PACKET:
= = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DATA PACKET ID running packet count (0-127) data (7 bit data format) checksum (XOR of 7E cc kk <120 bytes>) EOX

H H

20 bytes>

9 10 11

12

13 14

15

16

17

18 19 20

21

28 Appendix

Front & Rear panel 11

REAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)

1. 2. 3. 4. SCSI port. Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume. Pedalboard port. Computer port (serial connector for direct computer connection (Apple Macintosh or IBM PC and compatibles). 5. MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/ B, MIDI OUT A/B). 6. Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard). 7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack. The auxiliary outputs emit dry sounds (i.e. with no effects). 8. Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 1, 2 (audio inputs for Microphone or Line signals and Gain controls for the input signals). 9. Power On/Off Switch. 10. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power cord into this socket.

2 34

9 10

10

12 User Guide

THE DISPLAY
The SK760/880SE display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all times.
Aux Messages System Real Time Notes These messages are available on the Common channel only (1) Vocal Processor Controllers o: YES x: NO

TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS

Active sensing All Sound Off Reset All Contr. Local ON OFF All Note Off Clock Commands Song Position Song Select Tune True number Mode 1 OMNI ON - POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON - MONO

Common

System

System Exclusive

Program Change 0-127 *****

PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS

93 98,99 100,101

o o o

o o o o Start, Stop Continue

26 Appendix

o o o o o o o o o o

Chorus depth NRPN RPN

SOFT BUTTONS A H
0-127 o

NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT CURSOR

SOFT BUTTONS F1 F8

93 Chorus depth (send) 98,99 NRPN 100,101 RPN

Cntrl 81 OFF [0,63] ON[64,127] 0,1,2 Fill><-Fill<-Fill> 61 Rotary 1 (Off=slow) [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 (Off=slow) [GrpB]

Cntrl 80 (ONE SHOT): 0 Fill>< 1 Fill< 2 Fill> 8 Intro 16 End 24-27 Variations 0-1-2-3 40 Key start 61 Rotary 1 slow/fast [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 slow/fast [GrpB] 64 Start/Stop 66,67 Tempo inc. dec. 68,69 Perf inc. dec.

NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION

The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on the left and right of the display, and the TRACK SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons ( ) above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/ NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers when the KEYPAD LED is on. The displays cursor is a negative highlight zone which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
0-127

o o o

ENTER/ESCAPE AND DIAL

CURSOR ARROWS

0 = Fill>< Off, 64 = Fill>< On 1 = Fill< Off, 65 = Fill< On 2 = Fill> Off, 66 = Fill> On

61 = Rotary 1 Slow, 125 = Rotary Fast 62 = Rotary 2 Slow, 126 = Rotary 2 Fast

EDIT/NUMBER SECTION ENABLED FOR NUMERIC ENTRY WHEN THE KEYPAD LED IS ON

Display 13

ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY
In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of alphanumerical data where each note of the central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter, symbol or number. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone.

ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE

THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SHOWS HOW TO MODIFY A PERFORMANCE NAME:

1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button. An entry zone appears showing the status of the current Performance:

4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character, processing command or number. Two options appear below the name (Caps On/Caps Off and Insert/Overwrite) which can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and D#2 respectively. The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard zone provide word processing functions:

2. Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate the Change name... function. A second entry zone appears where a name can be inserted. The current name appears selected (shown in negative highlight).

D2: D#2: E2: F2: G2:

CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off; INS/OVER - toggles between Insert / Overwrite mode; SPACE - inserts a space between two entries; DELETE - cancels the selected character or the one after; < (BACKSPACE) - cancels the previous character;

3. To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.

5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode, the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight). 6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and close the window.

14 User Guide

avetables

THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: SOUND VIEW PAGE

This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. SD_HEAVY4(2) Sound ViewPHONEWAVE(1) is the default viewing mode. FORM1 DIGI2 PRPSAWJM BD_KIK(1) A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime (other Sound View pages showing slight FORM3 FARFIS PULSE_JM BD_ROCK(2) mode SD_P70(1) REVERSEBD1(1) variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes). REVERSEBD2(1) FORM4 FINGBMS RDPHAS BD_Z1_HHC(2) SD_ROCK(2) FORM5 FISA REZOBASS BD_Z1_LAYH(2) SD_SH1(1) REVERSEBD3(1) FORM7 FMISH SEQ_TONE BD_Z1_LAYL(2) SD_SH2(1) REVERSHRT1(1) FV FORM1 SEQSNP BD_Z2(1) SD_SH3(1) REVERSHRT2(1) GLASVOX FORM3 SHAPE BD1(1) SD_STD1(1) REVERSHRT3(1) WAVE44 FORM4 SHARP BROKENOISE(2) SD_STD2(1) REVERSNAR1(1) AWALA FORM5 SNAPSYN DNC_BD1(1) SD_STD3(1) REVERSNAR2(1) PANCH FORM7 SPECT1 FALLING_BD(2) SD_STD4(1) REVERSNAR3(1) PPG2 FRETW SPECT3 LNG_BD1(1) SD1(2) REZO_IT(3) LOGSTRT FV SQ_COOK2 HOU_TOM(1) SD2(2) SCRATCH3(1) MARIMVOX GLASSES SQ_STICK HOUSETCON(1) SD3(2) SCRATCH4(1) MY_VOX GLASVOX SQ_STLDR TIMP_JM(1) TEKBRUSH(2) SCRATCH5(1) PAD_01 GM_DIST SQ_WOODY TIMPANI(1) 808_CL_HH(1) SCRATCH6(1) PAD_02 GOFUNK STRATO TOM_10_DYN(2) 808_OC_HH(1) WEEP(1) PLUCK_PD GRING STRINGK TOM_13_DYN(2) 808_OPHHLP(1) IMPACT HAMCLICK STRNNOIS TOM_14(1) 9091_CHH(1) SEQSNP HAMDRAW SYNBASS TOMHIGH2(2) 9091_OCHH(1) SPECT1 HAMPERC SYNTH_7 WAYAW(2) 9092_CHH(1) SPECT3 HIT_BASS TELEPH 909_SD_LNG(2) 9092_OPHH(1) VOXNOIZ IMPACT THIN BEAT_SD(1) HH_CL1_DR(1) a. Track status icons . Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / . MECH_LP INHARM1 TONE BORDER_1(2) HH_CL2_DR(1) b. Sound names . The name of the GroupBORDER_2(2) to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound MECH_WAV INHARM2 TRIAN_JM HH_LOOP_CL(1) name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which SQ_COOK2 INHARM5 VOXNOIZ D_SD(1) HH_LOOP_OP(1) are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name. 12STRWAV INHARM9 WAVE44 EFF_RIM(1) HH_OP_DR(1) ABRASS KALI WEDGBASS EFF_SD2(1) HH_PED_DR(1) If the track KALI_GM has been modified with Edit Perf Sound, the symbol appears after the Sound name. ABRASS1 ACOUST_KIK(1) HATORSNARE(2) HHCL_70(1) c. Menu or Function which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In ARMONICI LFX_SYN list. Contains BD_70_F(1) options NOISNARE1(2) HHFT_70(1) Style/RealTime mode theBD_70_P(1) soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu AWALA LOGSTRT NOISNARE2(2) HHOP_70(1) shows the MARI_GM options to select: BASSCONT BD_AC_1A(1) NOISNARE3(2) NOISE_C1HH(1) BASSFRET BD_AC_1B(1) the track MARIM status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi). NOISNARE4(2) NOISE_C2HH(1) BASSPICK MARIMVOX BD_AC_1DYN(1) RIM_1(1) NOISE_OPHH(1) the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone BLEEP_BS MBIRA BD_AC_2A(1) RIM_2(1) NOISE_OPRV(1) for the automatic accompaniment. BOINK MECH_LP BD_AC_2B(1) RIM_70(1) CRASH_18(1) d. Status barMECH_WAV showing general information. BOSMIC BD_AC_2DYN(1) ROLL_70(1) RIDE(1) e. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINBOSS MINPULJM BD_DEEP_DN(2) ROLL_F(1) RIDECUP2(1) GLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name. BRASS_T MINSAWJM BD_DMG_SD(2) ROLL_F_LN(2) CLAP(1) BT_SYN MKS_80 BD_DMGD_LN(1) SD_909(1) CLAP_MIX(1) A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by BUZ1the symbolMUTEDCGT BD_DN1_ZP(2) SD_BB(1) COWBL2(1) is identified by the symbol [*]. []. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance CHOIRA MY_VOX BD_DN2_HI(2) SD_BR(1) DYNA_PERC(2) f. Tempo (varied with the DIAL). CLICK_BS ORCHIT BD_DN2_ZP(2) SD_BR_DYN(2) DYTEK_TIMB(2) g. Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff). CLVWAVJM PAD_01 BD_DN3_HI(2) SD_F70(1) HARD_CLAP(1) h. Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol. CRUNCH PAD_02 BD_DN3_SD(2) SD_FSN(1) TOMLOW2(2) CRUNCH PANCH BD_DN3_ZP(2) SD_HEAVY1(2) Glasses(1) DBASS PLUCK_PD BD_DNC2_LN(1) SD_HEAVY2(2) GLASSALG(2) DIGI1 PPG2 BD_DNC3(1) SD_HEAVY3(2) LONG_REVRS(1)

LI M_DIST ; RUNCH RATO RUNCH UTEDCGT OFUNK RFIS MDRAW MPERC MCLICK SA ASSES LEPH PSAWJM IAN_JM VWAVJM LSE_JM NSAWJM NPULJM GI1 GI2 APSYN Q_TONE Q_WOODY Q_STICK HARM1 HARM2 HARM5 HARM9 BIRA OINK RING IN Z1 X_SYN ARP APE DPHAS RNNOIS NTH_7 STRWAV KS_80 _SYN MISH Q_STLDR OSS

24 Appendix

Display 15

THE DISPLAYS EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS

Every edit environment has a relative icon:

Edit Effects

Edit MIDI

Edit Mixer

Edit Controllers/Pads

Edit Tracks

Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit

Edit Style/Song

Edit General

Edit Disk / Preload

Edit Sound

TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS

A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from 4 to 8 tracks of the current Performance. A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative Group name appears on the main display. Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up to 32 tracks. Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a SK760/880SE Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the MIDI OUT. In this case, MIDI is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers (MSB-LSB) on the main display when SK760/880SE is set to Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes only the Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown.

16 User Guide

erformances (Real) Most of the operating modes display the Effects tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the display. 00 PC Performances CC00 PC Performances CC16 DSP A/B select CC16 DSP A/B select The status of a track can be shown in four different ways: oup 1 Group 5 0 Eff1 (Reverbs GrpA) 64 Eff2 (Mod. GrpA) 1 keyboard; Eff1 (Reverbs GrpB) 65 Eff2 (Mod. GrpB) it can be played on the 1 GrandPiano in key-play 48 if33 Mantovani CC48 Rev Eff type select CC48 Mod. Eff type select 2 E.Grand1 Clarinet is temporarily deactivated; in mute if the34track 48 0 Hall 1 48 0 Mono Delay 1 3 Rhodx1 35 Ahnsemble 1 Hall 2 1 Mono Delay 2 in record if the 4 FM Piano 36 track Blatteris in a record pending status; 2 Hall 3 8 Stereo Delay 1 5 Vibes theLeroyBrown track contains recorded notes. in seq-play if37
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 EP PadX 9 Long Hall 16 Multitap Delay 1 change the track Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can OrcheXtra 39 MezzoForte 10 St.soft Concert 17 Multitap Delay 2 mode, you can pressing the corresponding button. For example, in RealTime Church status by repeatedly 40 SambaParis 16 Chamber 24 Ping Pong toggle between Groupthe 6 mute and play status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly. 32 Studio Room 1 25 Pan Mix E.X.Tines 48 41 NotInLove 40 Studio Room 2 32 Chorus 1 PianoWarm 42 2010 CC 41 Studio Room 3 33 Chorus 2 SplitAhead 43 Marsians 48 Club Room 1 40 Ensemble 1 RagIntime 44 Last James 56 Club Room2 41 Ensemble 2 Synth2X 45 Ole Devil KEY-PLAY ICON (KEYBOARD PLAY) 57 Club Room3 48 Phaser 1 MIDI-RECEIVE/TRANSMIT ICON TwiceSaw 46 BigBrass 64 Vocal 49 Phaser 2 CPandPad 47 Runaway The track can be played on the keyboard The track receive (IN) and transmit 65 Metal Vocal 56 can Flanger 1 StartTrack 48 Mozart 40 in Real Time. 72 Plate 1 (OUT). 57 Flanger 2 Group 7 73 Plate 2 36 Chorus Delay 1 StayWithMe MUTE ICON 48 49 Saxy Samba MIDI-RECEIVE ICON 80 Church 37 Chorus Delay 2 Ensemble 50 Strings1 88 Mountains 60 Flanger Delay 1 The track is temporarily deactivated, even TrumpetEns 51 Strings2 The track receives MIDI messages (IN), 89 Falling 61 Flanger Delay 2 if it is connected Titanic 52 Strings3to the keyboard. The but does transmit them (OUT). 104 Early 1 28not Dubbing track does receive or transmit MIDI. Iceberg 53 not Choir 105 Early 2 MIDI-TRANSMIT ICON 64 Distortion Hurts 2 be 54 Vocal SEQ-PLAY ICON (SEQUENCER-PLAY) 106 Early 3 65 Distortion Delay WK Time 55 SynthPad1 112 Stereo 80 does Pitch Shifter The track not 1receive MIDI mesDolce Vita 56 SynthPad2 The Group track8contains notes i.e. it is engaged P.Model 81 Pitch Shifter 2 sages (IN), but transmits them (OUT). 82 Shift Delay by a Song or Style accompaniment track. Buonasera1 48 57 Ham n'Bass 96 Rotary 1 In either case, this type of track cannot play Buonasera2 58 Swingin' The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually com97 Rotary 2 in real time keyboard, unless it is FallinLove 59 on Softthe Organ bined together to allow you to control the overall 104 EQ Jazz NoM'orGuns 60 PercusOrgan set to key-play. This track cannot receive track status, both for playing, muting, recording 105 EQ Pops Europa 61 PrettySplt data at MIDI IN. in real time and 106 in MIDI setups. EQ Rock San Tana 62 BluesSplit 107 EQ Classic MUTE ICON (TRACK NOTE) Don't Shoot 63WITH Jazz Split 38 MezzoPiano 8 Warm Hall 9 Stereo Delay 2

oup 2

THE TRACK ICONS

oup 3

oup 4

Ghostrider

64 HrmoncSplt The track is temporarily deactivated.

RECORD ICON

The track is in a recording status. The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified by a status icon.

On MIDI Common channel only

22 Appendix

Display 17

DIALOG WINDOWS
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.

Select one of the options with the cursor buttons. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications. ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.

Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor. Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad. Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.

Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.

WARNINGS
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).

Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.

18 User Guide

OM-Styles
Bank 1
8Beat 1 8Beat 2 8Beat 3 8Beat 4 8Beat 5 8Beat 6 8Beat 7 8Beat 8

Getting to know your instrument

CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style

00 PC Style 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

BEAT

ROCK
32 40 41 42 44

Bank 2
Rock 3 Rock 4 Shuffle SlowRock 4

POP Bank 1
32 80 81 82 83 84 70' Disco Disco 01 Disco 02

COUNTRY Bank 2
32 120 TheatreOrg 121 Org.March 122 Welkish 123 Organsel 124 Hawaiian

POWER UP

SlowRock 3 1. Connect the 43 audio cables

1 Disco 04
Disco 03

BEAT

Bank 2
8Beat 9 8Beat 10 8Beat 11 8Beat 12 2. 8Beat 13 SlowBeat SlowBallad 6_8Ballad

Connect the stereo audio outputs (Left, Right) 45 Rock 5 85 Latin D.1 125 KidsMarch to your amp. 46 system (mixer, powered speakBlues 86 Latin D.2 126 Mod.Evngls 47 audio SlowBlues 87 1/ Rap 127 Praise ers, etc.) using cables with standard N.B. Remember that the SK760/880SE does not have FUNK Bank 1 POP to Bank 2 WORLD Bank 1you must either connect to 4 jacks. Use RCA jacks to connect dointernal speakers, therefore 32 48 Funk 1 32 88 BakerPop 33 00 Slow Waltz or use a set of stereo an external amplification system, mestic stereo units. For mono reproduction, headphones. 49 Funk 2 01 Waltz 1 connect to either the Left or Right jack. 89 Harpy

50

Funk 3

90

PartyPop

02 03 04 05 06 07

Waltz 2 Romagna Mazurka RealVienna Orch.Waltz ItalyMarch

51 Funk 4 91 a EuroPop Insert the instruments power cord into 2 52 Funk 5 92 SynthDance suitable grounded wall outlet and press the 53 Funk 6 93 SoulB.B. power switch54to Funk turn7 on SK760/880SE. 94 80' Disco

BEAT

Bank 1
16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 16Beat 5 3. 16Beat 6 16Beat 7 16Beat 8

After a few seconds the instrument will set to FUNK Bank 2 SWING Bank 1 the default situation.
32 56 Funk 9 32 96 Swing

55

Funk 8

95

Open Disco 33

WORLD
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Bank 2
Cnt.Gospel G.de.Oory CountryBop Cajun Cnt.Rock SteamTrain Cowboy Cnt.Waltz

57 Funkmain 10 97will Mid Swing The initial (default) display screen 58 Funk 11 98 show a single sound (GrandPiano1) active.Slow Swing Funk 13 the display contrast 100 Big Band 2 3 If necessary,60regulate 61 Funk 14 101 Dixieland with the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on 62 NewAge 102 Broadway the left of the display. 63 Fusion1 103 Foxtrot 59 Funk 12 99 Big Band 1

BEAT

Bank 2
16Beat 9 16Beat 10 16Beat 11

DANCE1 1 SWING Bank 2 Different viewingBank angles may require an ad32 64 TMerengue 32 104 SwingBand justment of the display contrast.
65 66 PianoDance FunkDance 106 EasySwing

ETHNIC
33 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 33 24 25 26 27 28 29

Bank 1
Twist 1 HullyGully Reggae 1 Reggae 2 PasoDoble Polka Tarantella Pop '60 Bajon Mex. 3_4 Charleston

105 BourBonStr

4. Play on the keyboard and you will hear a 16Beat 12 67 DiscoHit 107 LatinBand piano sound (GrandPiano 1) play across the 16Beat 13 68 FastDance 108 QuickStep4 full keyboard. 16Beat 14 69 Pulsing 109 BBandXmas
16Beat 15 16BtBallad 70 71 SambaDance House 110 Foxtrot 2 111 Shuffle

CK

Bank 1
Rock 1 Rock 2 R. and B. SlowRock 1 SlowRock5. 2 Rock'nRoll Boogie LovelyRock

DANCE1
32 72 73 74 75

Bank 2
DigitHall Rap'nShift DownBeat DiscoFun

COUNTRY Bank 1
32 112 Gospel 1 113 Sacred 114 Gospel 2 115 Western

ETHNIC FULL Bank 2 <---------------------------keyboard ------------------------->

ADJUST THE GENERAL VOLUME

Germ.Polka If you are using external

76 HeavyDance 116 Bluegrass1 Adjust the general volume with the MASTER 77 Techno 117 Bluegrass2 VOLUME slider. 78 DancePop 118 Country 79 level DiscoPop 119 of March USA A comfortable is around two thirds the sliders travel distance.

results are obtained by adjusting the volume 30 Folk 2_4 with mixer or amplifier 31 Polka 6_8controls rather than lowering the volume of the instrument.
Twist 2

amplification, better Boehmisch

20 Appendix

Quick Guide 19

PLAY WITH HEADPHONES

6. Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
The headphones jack panel is located on the left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal speakers to allow you to play in total silence without disturbing others in the same room. Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not exclude the internal speakers. Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the headphones volume.

PLAY WITH THE PEDALS

The rear connections panel includes four jacks for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper. The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions. The default configuration of the pedals is as follows: Ped1 Ped2 Damper Volume = = = = Vocal On/Off Sostenuto Damper (sustain) Volume

DAMPER SOSTENUTO

VOLUME

VOCAL ON/OFF

The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function assignable and can be independently enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance. All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume type).

Footswitch (on/off)

Volume Pedal (continuous)

110 Quick Guide

Modulation

C5 72 73 75 76 74

78 80 82

Pitch Bend

77

81 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of adding extra sounds to your playing. You can program each pad to produce an instrumental sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the rotary slow/fast switching function.

The on-board controlling devices include two wheels on the left key block, both preset for Performance functions.

Wheel 1 is spring loaded to return to the central position.

Wheel 2 is centre-dented in order to be able to take it exactly at the central position.

91

92

93

94

The Wheels can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.

The default configuration of the wheels is as follows:

The configuration of the Programmable Pads can be stored in the Programmable Performances.

While you play, add additional sounds from the pads in real time.

Pitch Bend Modulation

95

C7 96

97

< < < <

99

PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS

98

100

PLAY WITH THE WHEELS

102

Strike the Pads freely.

101

= =

103

Wheel 1 (left) Wheel 2 (right)

105

106

107

C8 108

104

79

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

WHEEL 1

rumkits

18 Appendix

Quick Guide 111

WHEEL 2

Select sounds
SK760/880SE has a vast selection of instrument Sounds, including orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instruments, organized in 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 16 Banks of up to 16 Sounds in every bank.

1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button (PIANO GROUP button in the example).

The Sound Groups display will activate showing 8 Sounds to choose from.

2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).

If the Display Hold (D. HOLD) button is on (LED on), the Sound Group selection display will remain locked, allowing you to select another sound from the same bank. (The D. HOLD button is on by default). If you press ENTER after making the selection, the display will show the newly selected sound without turning off the D. HOLD button. If D. HOLD is off, the display will return to the previous situation showing the newly selected Sound.

SELECTION DISPLAYS LOCKED

SELECTION DISPLAYS NOT LOCKED

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.

The Sound will play across the full keyboard

< ----------------------- FULL keyboard ----------------------- >

112 Quick Guide

SPLIT Keyboard <--------Lower 1 -------- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >

C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86

88 89 90

The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.

Each Sound Group button consists of up to 16 Sound Banks, each containing up to 8 Sounds.

Pressing Upp/Low will activate the Lower 1 section for Play. You will hear a different Sound with respect to that assigned to Upper 1. The keyboard will be divided at note B3. The Lower 1 section will play across the extension C2-B3 and the Upper 1 section will play across the extension C4 - C7).

This time, after pressing a SOUND GROUPS button, select the Bank containing the desired sound using the +/ (Page/Bank) buttons in the top right hand corner of the display area.

91 92 93 94 95 97

C7 96 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107

5. Press the F3/F4 paired Soft buttons to select the UPP/LOW keyboard mode and press a key below note F#3.

4. Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.

Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied the empty slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or disk based RAM-sounds.

An active section shows a keyboard icon while a mute section shows the mute icon.

If you want the Sound Group selection display to close after making your selection, turn the D. HOLD button off (LED off).

PLAY ON A SPLIT KEYBOARD

CHANGE SOUND BANK

C8 108

87

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

ACTIVE

rumkits

16 Appendix

Quick Guide 113

MUTE

6. Press Upper 2 (E/F) TWICE to select and activate the Upper 2 section and play a key above note F#3.
You will hear two sounds for each single note played on the right hand. Activating Upper 2 introduces a second Sound (SlowString) layered with the first.

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

7. Press the Lower 2 soft button (A/B) twice to select the corresponding Sound and play a key below note F#3.
If you play with both hands, you will hear two sounds on the right hand and two on the left.

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

RETURN TO FULL KEYBOARD PLAYING

8. Press the F1/F2 Soft buttons to select the FULL keyboard mode and press a key anywhere along the keyboard.
You will hear the sounds of both Upper sections (Upper 1 and Upper 2) play layered across the full keyboard.

FULL keyboard <------------------------ Upper 1 + Upper 2 ------------------------->

114 Quick Guide

rumkits

PLAY UP TO 8 SOUNDS AT THE SAME TIME (MULTI)

C7 96 C6 84 C5 72

9. Press the soft buttons F5/F6 on the right of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
98 100 95 93 91 107 105 103 101 97 94 92 106 104 102 99

All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections will no longer be displayed. The Multi situation will show 8 of the 16 Tracks of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).

10. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed tracks using the relative soft buttons A F on the left of the display.
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.

11. Play on the keyboard with both hands.

You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right hand, depending on the active/mute status of each track. At this point, you can practice changing the overall sound combination by activating and/ or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.

C8 108

9
87

88

86

83

81

79

77

76

74

89

85

82

80

78

75

73

90

10
CONGAHIGH 109-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANLONG 111-15 NOISEPERC 116-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 DOOR 113-13 NOISEPERC 116-9 SDSTD2 101-9 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDSTD3 101-10

11

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

BreathNois 122-1 VIBRASLAP 108-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9

Multi (split) Keyboard < --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< GUIRLONG 111-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1-9 BARCHIMES 16-2-1 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-13 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLACKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPY RIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY

14 Appendix

Quick Guide 115

USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT SOUNDS

The SK760/880SE Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00 [CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on the numeric keypad. In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the SK760/880SE MIDI OUT.

Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you will select Sound 96-2-1.

1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you wish to reassign and press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric keypad.
An insertion window activates showing the number of Sound currently assigned to the track.

2. Specify the ProgramChange of the required Sound.

A: In the example, specify 4 then 9.

2A

B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash () which acts as a separator then specify the corresponding Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify then 2. If necessary, add a second separator () and the third part of the message (BankSelect LSB).

2B

3. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
The KEY PAD LED turns off.

3
Or

116 Quick Guide

rumkits

ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)

The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or Multi setups) can be independently regulated with the corresponding sliders of the group to the left of the display.
C7 96 C8 108 98 100 95 93 107 105 103 101 97 94 92 106 104 102 99 C6 84 C5 72 88 86 83 81 79 77 76 74 91 90 89

87

85

82

80

78

75

73

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

The Performances memorize the track volumes. After mixing, you can save the changes to the current Performance using the STORE PERF button. The correspondence between the sliders and the tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can affect:

Full keyboard mode Upper/Lower mode

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < Applause 127-1

A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings above the sliders, or B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened markings AH below the sliders.
In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard modes (situation A), refer to the markings above the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 & 2) control the corresponding tracks. In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22), refer to the markings AH. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to track 1, slider B to track 2, . slider H to track 8.

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Multi mode

BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGASLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 GUIROLONG 111-9 QUICALOW 111-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 AGOGO 110-11 TRIANLONG 111-15 WHISTLE 110-15 BDHOUSE1 97-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 HOUSSD1 101-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES 3 114-11 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTAP 114-13 CLAKSON 113-16 DOLLYVOX 114-15 TAMBSLP 108-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDORCH 100-13 HHCLO1S 105-10 CLAVES 111-11 CONGALOW 109-15 QUICAHIGH 111-13 AGOGO 110-11 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12

12 Appendix

Quick Guide 117

THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE SOUND FROM THE REST

If you are playing in a situation where two or more sounds are displayed, before activating a muted sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest using the SOLO button in the following manner:

1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.

The LED of the SOLO button turns on and the sound currently shown highlighted will play while all other sounds are automatically muted (if active).

2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
In this example, the sound SlowStrings is automatically activated while the previous one (Piano1) is automatically muted. Observe that the sound plays across the full keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left split in Upp/ Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected. In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they are Solod. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point. In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solod sound plays across the currently assigned keyboard extension. In this case, the SOLO button recognises the current Split Point. The SOLO button finds its principal use in Multi track situations.

< ------------------------- SlowStrings ------------------------------- >

3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal operation.

The SOLO LED turns off.

118 Quick Guide

rumkits

Listen to the Demo Songs

C4 60 C3 48 C2 36

You can listen to the automatic playback of your SK760/880SE to get an idea of what the instrument is capable of doing.

1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open the Demo window.
The Select Demo dialog window appears.

2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .

3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo Song or Demo Style).
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names.

An animated string of text starts to scroll across the top of the display under the title, showing basic technical specifications of the instrument. If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song automatically and stops when it reaches the end of the last Demo Style in memory. If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or Styles, press ESCAPE.

4. Select one of the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The selected single demo playback starts and shows up in negative highlight. When the end is reached, the demo stops.

71

69

67

65

64

62

59

57

55

53

52

50

47

45

43

41

40

38

35

33

31

29

28

26

70

68

66

63

61

58

56

54

51

49

46

44

42

39

37

34

32

30

27

25

WHISTLE 110-15 GUIROSHORT 111-10 GUIROLONG 111-9 CLAVES 111-11 WOODBLOCK 111-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 QUICAHIGH 111-13 QUICALOW 111-14 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TRIANLONG 111-15 SHAKER 112-9 JINGLEBELL 112-10 WINDCHIMES 112-11 CASTANETS 112-12 MTSURDO 112-13 OPSURDO 112-14 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

10 Appendix

Quick Guide 119

5. Select the ALL DEMO option shown in the current selection window to chain all demos displayed (Song or Style).
Playback starts automatically from the first demo. Demos not yet played are shown in negative highlight while those played return positive. While a demo plays, all the buttons on the control panel (except DEMO, the Function buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled.

6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft button, or press ESCAPE.

If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO dialogue window closes and the display returns to the last operating mode selected.

IMPORTANT: Remember to escape DEMO mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or Song, or enter one of the Edit modes.

120 Quick Guide

OM-Sounds
Bank 97 98 99 1

Multimedia
2 3 4 5 6 Mech-Lp1 Mech-Wv1 SeqCook1 BounSync Atomic2 SawModula Synthex62 HiJoe2
2 2

7 Yowww3 Stars2 Babbling1 Synkro

2

8 HitThePipe2 StabSynth2 MetalWork2 DigiDrops2 WoodCutter2 SnapOff2 SilicaPick2 Yourimba2

1

N SFX group

100

101

SK760/880SE can display Lyrics when Impact playing 1 Noiseres2 BigRoom2 Submarin2 WK (or PS) Series Disks. There are a wide variSoundtrack2 MoonWind2 Slope2 Ekoendls2 SynRain2 ety of disks that display lyrics when played. No 1 Crystal2 Wind2 SynLead22 Jets2 SeqSnap 2 2 2 2your music like other keyboard brings vision to Atmosphere Arp26000 GlockAthm Smak ColorBlast2 3 2 2 Gem WK Series Brightnessthe WithGas PopUpdoes! OnOff2 Spect11
IceRain3
1 EchoDrops1.

JimisDream2 TunedNoise BlasteRel2 StarTheme43

102

Goblin

103

Press the SONG button. Synthex4 Synthex1 Synthex2

2 2 2 2

Resonance

NoGravity

Synthex3

2 2 2

Spect2

Synthex52
1

104

StarTheme2 Sitar1 Banjo2 Shamisen1 Koto1 Kalimba Fiddle1 Shanai1 TinkleBell2 Agogo1 SteelDrums 3.
2 1

HNIC group

105

106

StarTheme2 StarTheme3 Spect3 You will see PowerBad up to sixteen Song choices in the display (autoload the four song demo disk SitarDet2 SynSitar2 Kalimba21 provided with the instrument if necessary). BanjoOct2 EthnicGtr2 KalimShot1 ShamSitar2
2

107

108 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

109

2. Select the desired SONG with the correspondKanoun TrpClarin ing Soft button. ShrtKalimb SaxTrumpt Kalimba3
1 2 1 1

SynSham2

Bagpipe1

BagpipeEns2 Hukin2 BacktoWS2 DK_STAND.1 DK_ROOM

1

BrassEns2 FiddleBell2 VoiceSpect2 DK_STAND.2 DK_WS DK_DANCE DK_TECHNO DK_JAZZ2 DK_STAND.3 DK_ROOM1WX DK_ELECT1WX DK_HOUSE1WX DK_JAZZ_WX DK_STD.2WX DK_STAND.5 DK_HYBRID1 DK_HOUSE2 DK_HIPHOP DK_DANCE2 DK_TEK'90A DK_ELECT.2 DK_DNC1999 DK_POLY Vang. Kit DK_ROCK DK_STAND.9 DK_STAND10 DK_TUNED DK_HYBRID2 BD_ONLY_KT

RCUSSIVE group DK_ROOM2WX DK_STD'70

DK_POWER DK_STD.1WX DK_POWER1WX DKPOWER2WX Press PLAY to start the SONG playback. DK_ELECT DK_HOUSE DK_JAZZ1

3 4

Woodblock Taiko2

DKELECT2WX DK_FUSION DKHOUSE2WX DK_STAND.6 DK_STAND.4 DK_STAND.7 DK_STAND.8 DK_JAZZ3

DK_TEKBRSH DK_TEK'90B

Melo.Tom11 SynthDrum
1

120

ReverseCym1 GtFretNois1 BreathNois1 Seashore2 Bird2 Telephone11 Helicopter Applause2 GunShot1

2

X group

DK_BRUSH DK_M1 DK_BRUSH2 4. Press the SCORE buttonDK_BRUSHWX and the score will DK_ORCH DK_SY77 DK_ORCH_WX SD_ONLY_KT appear in the display. Gtr.WhaWha|'|'|1 GtrNoise1 Zapp1 TickTack1 Scratch11 Telephone21 SynPerc3
2

121

Rideit

122

KeyClick1 Drop1 Water1 Door1 Clackson2 PickScrape1 Bomb2

123

124

125

126

127

HeartBeat2 Explosion2

128

5. Press the F8 button to activate the SCORE CONTROLS.

8 Appendix

Quick Guide 121

6. Use the corresponding Soft buttons to highlight the desired viewing choices.
The viewing choices are: All: The Score shows notes, chords and lyrics on the staff; Lyrics only are shown in various different sizes (Lyrics 1 is the default setting); Chord symbols are shown on the staff.

Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4:

Chord:

7. Press the ENTER button to view the results.

AUTOMATIC LOADING OF SONGS AT POWER UP If your SK760/880SE doesnt have any Songs with lyrics in memory, it is possible to load a diskbased Block of data (including Song data) automatically at power up. If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file which contains Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). With the instrument off, insert the disk into the drive and turn the instrument on. The AUTOLOAD.BLK file will be loaded to the RAM memory automatically.

WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK loading procedure replaces all the data conserved in System RAM.

122 Quick Guide

OM-Sounds TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL MONITOR

Bank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

You can project the lyrics any Song onto your TV ED group screen, or computer monitor,AltoSax (or any other video 1 65 Soprano1 Soprano22 SoprFilter1 Safe Sax Your SK760/880SE leaves the factory 2 1 66 SoftSax1 device). SaxNoise SoftFilt1 LiscioSax 2 to instantly 2 default song lyrics onto 67 TenorSax1 set by OctaveSax TenFilter1 project TouchSax 1 1 external device. 68 BaritonSaxan BaritDet2 video BariFilter BaritnSax21
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 95
2 EnglisHorn1.

Oboe1

Bassoon1 Clarinet
1

Connect of the video outputs (RGB, SEngHorn2 oneHornFilter TenSaxSolo VHS) to a domestic to a monitor by Bassoon2 BassoonFlt TV or BreathSopr ClarSolo of the ClarFilter LiscioClar means supplied video cable.
2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1

OboeChiff2

OboeFilter1

SaxQuartet1

1/2

UTE group Piccolo1 Flute

1

Recorder2 PanFlute1 BottleBlow2.

2

The supplied 2 RGB/Scart 2 video1 cable is suitHardFlute1 HardFlute2 PanFilter 2 2 able to connect your SK760/880SE to a doDyn.Flute1 DynHiFlute ColorWind2 2 1 mestic TV orBubbler computer monitor. Recorder2

Shakuhachi Whistle1 Ocarina

2

If you are connecting to the TV, tune it to the BottleNois Tube Shakupad AV channel. ShakuVoice
2 1 2 2

PanFlute22

Dyn.Pan1

Panfluit

NTH LEAD group SquareWave2

2

To select the AV channel, consult the ownOcarinaPan2 OcarinaSyn2 ers manual of the television set.
Pulse12
2

Whistle1WX1

Whistle3WX2

3. Select a Song with Lyrics. SawWave ObxFilter Lyle TrianWave

2 2

Pulse22

ProphSaw1
1 1

SnapSynth1 SeqTone
1 1

BirAttak1 Boink Thin1 Buzz

1

3
1

RdPhas1 StrnNoise
1

Boss1 PannedSeq2 Joe4lead2 OlFaithful3 Saw-Me3 Saw-You3 PowerPop2 TooAnalog3 RichForm2 BellPad012 BellPad022
2

SynCalliop2 ChiffLead3 Charang

2

Azimut ClavWave The externalSynLead1 video device will show SeqWoody the LyrChopper2 Digital2 PulseWave1 SeqStick1 ics of the Song. Jump
2

Gring1

SevenSynth1 SynthLead1 MKSynth StlSynth1 FmIsh1 BtSynth

1 1

SoundTrk

MiniSaw

Inharm1

SoloVox2 5thSawWave4 BassLead Fantasia3 WarmPad2 Polysynth2 4. SpaceVoice MetalPad2 HaloPad

3 2 3

2 1 will also be If you 2press FiltRes2 SCORE the lyrics FiltRes1 MiniPulse Inharm21 2 1 shown Decay12 on the Decay2 instruments DigiWave1 display. Inharm31

LfxSynth1 Sharp1 Shape

1

Obx2

Obx3

DigiWave2 Fantasy13

Inharm4 Form11 Form21

1 1 1 1 1

NTH PAD group NewAge2 Obx12

2

PPG2 AnlgPad2
2 2

LogStr1 MarimVox2 Pad4U1 MyVox

1

PrettyPad12 PrettyPad23 Fantasy43 StereoFrm1 FizzyPad2 BandSweep2 EpicPan

2

BowedGlass2

If the Lyrics Fantasy3 do not appear Fantasy2 Awalaon the external Form3 VocBells pressAngels OcBreath Form4 device, F8 to open the Score controls Prophet1 andProphet2 window adjust the Panch parametersForm5 of the Bright2 Analogic Bright3 Form6 video controls accordingly.
1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3

Waveaura2

StereoFrm32 BellPad032 BellPad042 BellPad052 StereoFrm42

PadZone11 PadZone21 PluckPad Tibet2

1

Slave

Atmosphere

Ppg

Form7

SweepPad2

2 2 2 Machiner Decay32 arrow Waiting Budweis Use the directional buttons to select the parameters.

StereoFrm22

Refer to the section entitled SCORE & EDIT SCORE in the Edit Song chapter of the Reference Guide for instructions regarding how to set the parameters.

6 Appendix

Quick Guide 123

Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles

SK760/880SE has 192 auto accompaniment Styles with four Variations four Intros, four Fills and four Endings for each Style. You can also load up to 32 disk based User Styles of your choice into the 4 User Style banks available.

1. Press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY (LED turns on).

Pressing this button activates the ARRANGE ON/OFF and MEMORY buttons (if not already on). The ARRANGE ON/OFF button enables the Style auto-accompaniment patterns. If this button is off, only the Style Drum accompaniment will play when you start the Style.

2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat, 16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
JAZZ in this example. The display will show a selection of Styles from the first bank of the selected Group.

3. Select a Style from the current Bank (1).

You can also switch to Style Bank 2 with the +/ (Page/Bank) buttons for an additional choice of 8 ROM Styles. Use the Soft buttons near the Style name in the display to select the desired Style (SWING in Bank 1 in this example). If the Display Hold button (D.HOLD) is off, the display will show the sounds recalled for the keyboard sections and the keyboard mode will be shown as Upp/Low. If D.HOLD is on, press ESCAPE to view the current situation.

124 Quick Guide

OM-Sounds 4. Press the right Track Scroll button to check

Bank 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1

SS group AcoustcBs11 FingeredBs1 PickBass1 Fretless

2

the sounds recalled for the 4 accompaniment 2 3 5 tracks.

AcoustcBs2 AcousticBs3 Dyn.AcoBs HarmAcBs Note that in this example, the tracks Acc 4/5/ 2 1 1 Dyn.Fingrd Dyn.Bass1 Dyn.Baxx HarmAcBs21 6 are all1 muted. 2 1 1 Dyn.Bass2 PckBass2
1 1 2 1 1

4
6 FingerdBs21 Fretless31 WedgeBass1 SynBass5 BassMik
1 1

7 DanceBass2 FingerdBs32 SubBass2 WowBass

1

8 TheChopper2 LowPassed2 SerialBass2 ContraSynB2 DigiBass2

2

PkBsMute
1

HarmElBs

SlapBass11 SlapBass2 SynBass11 SynBass22 Violin1 Viola1 Cello

1 2

AcidBass1 Flanged Fretless2 RezoBass Press the left Track Scroll button to return to 1 2 1 Dyn.Bass3 SlapSynBs ClickBass1 the keyboard sounds. PckBass3
2 1

ToneBass1 SpaceBass12 SpaceBass22

FingAndSlp2 DubbedRezo Popcorn2 NylonBass2

WXBass

StopBass

ThumBass

BleapBass HitBass2

PriorBass2 SynBass62 RazorBass2

SynBass31 SynBass42 SlowViolin1 BowedViola2 SlowCello

1

TecknoBass2 RaveBass2 ViolinOrch2 ViolaPad2 CelloEns2 Staccato1 Plectra1 EchoPizz1 Spacehar2

2 2

AcoustcBs41 SynthBass2

SynSlapBs1

RINGS group)

Quartet1

Contrabass1 TremoloStr1 Pizzicato Harp1 Timpani1 Strings1

1 SlwStrings6. 1

BowedBass2 OctTremolo2 OctPizz

2

SEMBLE group)

5. Press the INTRO button if you want to TimpaniEFX Dyn.Orch I'I'I preselect the Style introduction.
StereoStrg2
2 2 2

HarpDelay2

5/6

StrgGlock2
2 2

DualStrgs2
1 1

StereoOctv3
1 2

SynStrg1 Choir1

StrgOrch St.SlwStrg button Strings2 Press the START/STOP to start SlwString2 the auto SynStrg3 SynStrg5 OrchHits2 SawStrings accompaniments. SynStrg42 Strings32 StrEthnic2 NoiseUuh2

SynStrg22 VoiceOohs SynVox2 OrchHits2 Trumpet1 Tuba2

2

2 1 to play. If4 You will2 hearSlowUuh the Drum track start VoiceUuh BackVocals PannedVox 2 2 2 you pressedSlowAah INTRO in SimStrings point 5 above, the 2 VoiceAah WideEnsemb 1 SkatVoices Vocoder SympMemory2 StereoSlow2 Style will start with2 an introduction.

Rave2
1

Dyn.St.Hit3
1

HitsRev2
2

OctSlowStr2
3

ASS group FlugelAttk FlugelHorn NoiseTrp 7. Play a chord of at leastDynSection three notes below Trombone Trombone3 WowTromb2 TrombSwell TrombSlop the split point (B3) to start Style play.
1 1 1 1 2

TrombSwel2

ShortTuba1

WowTuba1

ClassicBrs1

OctBrass13

MutedTrp11 FrenchHorn2 Brass

2

1 1 MutedTrp2 Dyn.MtTrp2 auto ModernBrs OctBrass23 A fully orchestrated accompaniment 3 2 Dyn.FrHorn TotoHorns FrHrnSwell2 FrenchFlut3 pattern will start to play.

ColorBrass2 StereoBrs2

SynBrass12 SynBrass22

In default conditions, the keyboards chord3 2 2 SynBras2 SyntHorn2 SynBrass3 PercSynBrs 2 set to Fingered 2 recognition mode is 1 which SlowHorn2 AttkHorn SynBrass42 SynBrass5 allows you to play Styles using fingered chords anywhere along the keyboard, regardless of the split point. You can change the chord recognition mode from Free to Fingered 2, One Finger or Free, by entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See the ARRANGE MODE function in the Styles chapter of the Reference Guide.

Brass2

BrassRips

BrassFall

BrassTrp

4 Appendix

Quick Guide 125

8. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.

Note how the accompaniment pattern changes to a different Variation. The VAR buttons control the Style Variations. Each button recalls a different version of the same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro, Fill and Ending sections.

9. Press one of the FILL buttons.

FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into the previous Variation. FILL plays the fill cycle then continues with the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, FILL can be preselected to play as an intro. FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into the next Variation (this button also incorporates the Tap Tempo function - see over). Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat the Fill cycle continually until release.

10. Play a different chord and start to play the melody with the right hand.
Note how the accompaniment pattern is transposed. The combination of sounds that play and the current keyboard mode will depend on the Style selected.

10

11. Stop the Style by pressing the START/STOP button or the ENDING button.
START/STOP stops the Style instantly. ENDING stops the Style with an ending phrase.

11

126 Quick Guide

OM-Sounds START A STYLE WITH KEY START

Bank 1 6 Grand Piano E. Grand 1 E.PianoX2 DynE.P.1 7 8

The Key2 Start function the start 3 synchronizes 4 5 of the automatic accompaniment with a note ANO group 2 2 2 2 1 Piano1 pressed PianoMk1 PianoStage InharPiano on2 the PickPiano keyboard below the split point 2 3 2 2 Piano22 without PianoW2 PianoTine3 KEYTonePiano having toPianoctave use START/STOP. START 2 2 3 3 Piano32 can be E.G.Piano1 E.G.Piano2 AtkPiano1 ArcoPiano used 2in various situations. The most com2 2 2 2 4 HonkyTonkmon DetPiano Western AtkPiano2 use is as follows:
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 E.Piano11 E.Piano2 Clavinet
1 2

ThinRhodx2 E.Piano3the 12. When

2

E.Piano42 E.Piano5 Style is WowClav

2

RhodxFilt2

E.PianoMk2
2

not

E.PianoSft playing, LogPiano2 PercPiano

2

DetuneE.P. press KEY

12

FM Pro MezzoPiano

Rhodex 1 FM E. Piano

Harpsichor1

START.
SynClav

Harpsich22
1

Harpsich31
2

ElPianoSeq1

ALLET. group Celesta2 Glockenspl2 MusicBox Marimba1 Xylophone Santur2 Organ12 Organ21 Organ3
2 2 1 2

The KEY START LED turns on.

CelestaPlk2 GlockVibes2 WineGls1
2

ToyPiano2 GlockChoir2 MusicBell

2 2

Balarimba1 ToyOrgan2 GlockSeq1

1 1 chord (at least 13. Play Vibraphone Vibes2a SynVibes2 3 notes) Vibes with your left

13

Marimba2 Malletsplit point Marimba3 hand below the (B3).

2 1

TubularBel2

GAN group

The accompaniment starts immediately SoftBell2 Oohlalaa2 VibeSeq1 Quasimodo (eventually preceded by the introductory pat1 2 BarChimes Climbing tern if selected). If you release the keys, the 2 1 accompaniment continues to play. 16'1'Draw1 Organ1WX OrgTheatre 16'1'Vib32

Xylophone2

XyloTribal

SynthMarim1

8'1 4'1 2'2/3

1 2

2'1 OctaDrawbr3 FiltDrawbr

3 3

RockOrgSeq1 TheatreSus RotaryPress

ChurchOrg1 Musette
1 1

ReedOrgan1 Harmonica

Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER MEMORY SwOrgan2 SynOrg12 OrganC32 5'1/31 are off, the accompaniment plays while your notes 1 2 2 Church2 PipeOrg32 are pressed onOrgan3WX the keyboard Organ1W and stops instantly 2 2 when the 2notesOrgan4 are released. If, instead, one of 1 PipeOrgan PipeChiff HamDrw these two functions are 1 2 active, the accompaniment 1 Accord1 Accord2 Accord3 Accord42 or the drum track only will continue playing after 1 Blusette1 the keys WestHarmon Farfis1 Hamperc1 releasing .

16'8'5'Drw1

JazzOrgan32

Organ3W1

16'1

Hamclick Accord5
1

SixtDrawbr Trekzak
2

EvocativOr2 PercOrgan

Bandoneon31 Fuzztain
3

DirtyOrgan

The Strat

Bandoneon1 NylonGtr1 SteelGtr1 JazzGtr1

1 1

Cassotto1

OrganLfo2

Bandoneon22

Diatonic2

AccordEnv1 NylonGtr23 Mandolin21

1

OctAccordn2

ITAR group)

1 1 14. Press to2 stop the acSoloGtrSTART/STOP VocalGtr2or ENDING PedalSteel CrunchGt

companiment. 12StrGtr SteelGtr1

2

14

SteelGtr21 JazzGtr2
1

Mandolin1 MutedClean

SteelGtr31 ElGuitar42

CleanGtr

With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active. ElGuitar11 ChorusGtr2 ElGuitar22 Dyn.Clean2
1

OctJzGtr

Hawaiian

JazzStrato ElGuitar32

MutedGtr1 Overdrive DistGtr

1

2 1 Muted2 Dyn.Muted MutedWha With Ending, KEY START turns1 off. MutedFunk1

MandolinSeq1 LeadDist33

WhaGtr1

5thOverdr

CrunchStb

5thDistort

HarmonxGtr1

IfFuzzGtr you 2use Start/Stop the 3 accompaniHeavyGt2 to stop LeadDist LeadDist23 2 2 1 ment, press KEY START to turn it off. SlowHarmx HarmGtr3 StratoGt JazzPick2

e suffix = 3 oscillators per voice;

= 2 oscillatore per voice;

= 1 oscillators per voice;

DK

= DrumKit

2 Appendix

Quick Guide 127

START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO

15. With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on the TAP TEMPO button.
The tempo is set according to the timing of the last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically. The tempo adjusts itself automatically according to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.). START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE IN/OUT

15

16

16. Press the FADE IN/OUT button before starting the accompaniment with START/STOP.
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure (bar) cycle.

17

17. Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment is playing.

All the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle. During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes. SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS If you want to change Style while playing without changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY off. When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.

LED OFF

128 Quick Guide

ANIC

SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY USER STYLES

IDI communications can sometimes lock the with a selection of User Styles stored in the User Style flash memory SK760/880SE leaves the factory strument duebanks, to the transmission of an excesreserved for factory use where the contents may vary from to market. From time to time, This function is active (LEDmarket on) by default. When ve quantity ofGeneralmusic data, or an incorrect MIDI mesmay offer operating systems which contain of the User flash banks. on, you can select upgrades items from the current selecage. tion display closing it.Style, If off, every The selection procedure is identical to the one used without to select a ROM with thetime difference that you he PANIC function sends the All notes off and you select an item from a selection window, the select the flash User Style from bank 2 of the User 1 and User 2 locations Reset all Controllers messages to all external display will return to the main display relating to IDI devices connected to the SK760/880SE the current mode. IDI OUT port. If D. Hold is off, press the button to activate the 1 1. Press the USER 1 button in the STYLE function. OW TO ACTIVATE PANIC GROUPS section If your machine locks up while working with Select 2 (with the +/ Page/Bank MIDI, press2. both PageBank buttons ) at the ) buttons. 2 same time. ( The display will show the names of 8 flash D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the butStyles to choose from.. ton is pressed again. IMPORTANT : The SK760/880SE Flash Use ESCAPE to close the current selection winStylesrequire sounds that reside in the instrudow without deactivating D. HOLD. ments RAM memory. For this purpose, SK760/880SE leaves the factory Use withDisplay the Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles, Performances and Songs sounds of Block A_1RSND (in the Hard SK760/880SE Disk) sendsalready the allloaded notes off into and the RAM memory. reset all controllers to all connectBear messages in mind, therefore, that if you modify the ed MIDI devices. contents of the SK760/880SE RAM memory, the Flash Styles might not play correctly due to the absence of the correct sounds. In such a case, you will have to reload the Sound Block A_1RSND from the Hard Disk. Refer to the Disk and Hard Disk chapter for information regarding how to load Hard Disk data.

Display Hold

3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding soft buttons.

To play with the flash Style, proceed as already described on page 1.24.

Note. The recalled Flash User Style Performance can be modified and memorized to the same Flash User Bank, or to any other User location. Refer to the Store Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performances. The Flash User Styles cannot be erased.

2 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 129

SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE

When Single Touch Play is on, each SK760/ 880SE Style is associated to 8 Style Performances which you can assign at any time before or during play. The Style Performances are permanent and cannot be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore command. A Style Performance be programmed to change the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns of the current Style remain unchanged.

1. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group using the procedure already described on the previous pages.

2. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the Style Performances.

8 Style Performance names associated to the current Style are displayed.

3. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.

Buttons A/B in this example. If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on). Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the selection display.

130 Quick Guide

Select the Performances

SK760/880SE has 64 user programmable Performances, organized in eight different banks in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section. These Performances feature single and layered sounds, custom effect settings, split keyboard combinations and a special Drawbar Performance bank. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk. A Performance can also memorize a Style, Variation and Style Tempo, giving you the possibility of saving your user-programmed Style Performances to the Performance Group locations. When you select the Performances, you can then choose to recall the memorized Style or not by means of the Style Lock button.

1. Press the Bank 1 button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS section.

The display will show 8 Performances to choose from, each with a different name. If the STYLE LOCK button is off, (default setting) selecting Performances will recall live keyboard and also accompaniment Sounds (Style Perfs). The relative Style, Variation and Tempo are selected. If the STYLE LOCK button is on (LED on), selecting Performances recalls live keyboard sounds only.

PERFORMANCES RECALL STYLES

PERFORMANCES RECALL KEYBOARD SOUNDS ONLY

2. Select a Performance use the Soft buttons nearest to the name (Church in the example).
If Display Hold (D. HOLD) is off, the display will return to the previous situation showing the newly selected sound combination. If D. HOLD is on (LED on), the Performance Group selection display will remain active, allowing you to select another Performance from the same Group. Press ENTER if you want to see the recalled sound combination.

10 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 131

3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound combination.

Depending on the Performance recalled, you will be able to play with a combination of up to 16 Sounds, either layered together or split across the keyboard in any configuration. You can modify the Sound configuration to suit your needs then store the modified Performance with the Store Perf button (explained further ahead).

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional selections. This time, press the Performance button N.8.
The display will show 8 Drawbar Performances to choose from

4/5

5. Select one of the 8 Drawbar Performances and play on the keyboard.

In the example, we select the Jazz Split Performance.

6. While you play, change the colour of the organ sounds using the 8 panel sliders.
The eight sliders operate as eight of the drawbars of an organ. You can change the pitch of each drawbar to make any footage you like. Once you have made a drawbar setting that you like, you can memorize it to the current Performance using the Store Performance operation explained on the next page.

132 Quick Guide

The Edit General Main Menu Options Store Performance

Performance or a Song Performance. his option shows the date and time of the latest This option displays information regarding the The changes made to the the charge Performances and Style are interchangeable, lease of the operating system and presence orPerformances absence of the various accessoriesthat is, you can save a modified Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song Performance vel of the rechargeable backing battery. that can be installed in the instrument.. can be saved only to the and Song Performances. In all cases, you can create a completely new Performess F1 once to show the release date batance and change its name. ry charge level:

Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to INFO save any ATTERY & RE.... (F1) SYSTEM (F2)changes you make to a Performance, a Style

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window.

If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested will be a Performance locaess F1 once again to(Performance). show the date and time tion the release: If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the destinaRESTORE tion suggested will be a Style-Performance The Edit General main menu offers several dedilocation (Style). cated Restore functions, useful to reset part of all the instruments RAM. All user-programmed data (Performances, User 2. Press save to instruthe current Performthe battery charge levelENTER is low, to leave the Styles, Songs,2 Performance-Sounds, Sounds) ent turned on for ance, at least 15 hours to recharge can be cancelled, either as an individual block OR e battery completely. (Performances, Style-Performances, User Styles, Songs,to Sounds) or entirely (All) by means of a Select a different Performance location save to before pressing ENTER. single command. Cancelling user programmed data from memory restores the instruments origiSAVING TO THE SAME PERFORMANCE nal default parameter status. For example, if you use the Restore Performance With ENTER, the changes are memorized to command, the current Performance and the display re- you will cancel all user-programmed and restore the original factory turns to the modified PerformancePerformances display. settings. Each time this Performance is recalled, it will configure the SK760/880SE with precisely WARNING: use the RESTORE commands with cauthe same settings are those memorized. If you press ESCAPE, you will to cancel Store lost. Make sure that you have saved any data you operation, but the temporary status of theso new not wish to cancel to disk or Hard disk before proceeding Performance will be retained, until you se- with a restore operation. lect another Performance.
tion because user-programmed data is irremediably

tions column of the main Edit General page

8 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 133

SAVING TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE

3. If you want to save to a different Performance, use the Cursor Left/Right ( / ) buttons and the Dial to configure the Performance Store display accordingly.
The Cursor Left/Right arrows switch from the Performances (Performance) to the Style Performances (Style) and vice versa. Rotating the Dial scrolls through the Groups in the Store to zone. If you are saving to the Performances, select a Group in the Store to zone and a Performance in the Performance zone. If you are saving to the Style Performances, select a Style Group in the Store to zone, move down to the Style zone to select a Style, then move down again to the Perf zone to select a Style Performance.

4. Press ENTER.
If the destination is a Performance, the display returns to the modified version of the original Performance. If the destination is a Style Performance, pressing ENTER opens a dialog window requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same name or change it.

5 Press ENTER again to confirm the new or old Style Performance name.
If you dont want to save your modifications, press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

134 Quick Guide

Display controls Transposition

Mic/Line Input

ewing controls for the display. The settings are TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR DOWN This is where you can regulate your input signal onserved to memory after power down. They when using the Audio Vocal Processor. This page annot be saved to disk. If you would like to play a song in a different key, bar graphs to monitor the level of sigcontains or a song is too high or too low for a singer orinto the Mic/Line inputs 1 and 2. nals fed another instrument, you can transpose the instruThe input signal is directed to the internal sound HORD LANGUAGE ment to play the song in an easier key. generator and effects processor before being dietermines the viewing language (English/Italrected to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons n/French/German) of the chord notation in theallow real time speaker semitone adjustments (transpositions) of thesystem. core. overall pitch (range 24 semitones = 2 octaves). You can regulate the signal gain with the GAIN knobs located next to the Mic/Line jacks. An op1 1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch. ELP LANGUAGE timum signal level can be obtained when the input signal, at maximum volume, almost touches elects the language the Help file. shows the current An for insertion screen Transpose valuea(0 = standard pitch). the extreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipour model may not contain file in a different ping zone). nguage. Press the Transpose # button as many times as necessary until you reach theRegulate desired the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum ISPLAY MODE pitch. of the internal sound generator output level ffers the choice of viewing black text on a white (SK760/880SE sounds and signal of the MIC/ 2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch. 2 ackground (Positive) or white texts on a black LINE IN inputs). An insertion screen shows the current Transackground (Negative). pose value. INPUT VU Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b but- the level of the input signal. Controls Monitors AST SELECTION MEMORY ton until the dialog window shows a the negative signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/ enabled (ON), the last selected carried out in reading. Line IN1 and IN2 jacks with the knobs 1 and 2 ther Style, Performance or Sound mode is next to the inputs. The LED on one of the buttons be on to emorised. If disabled (off), the selection win- will located indicate the instrument is currently in a ow of these modes to not that show the last selecTransposed status (sharp or flat ). on made. TO CLEAR THE KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE SETTING

3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.

The LED on the active button goes off and the instruments normal pitch is restored. The display shows the 0 setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.

t General - Display controls

Edit General - Mic/Line In

6 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 135

TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed in octave steps, within the range 5 octaves.

1. Select the track you wish to transpose.

2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting.

An insertion screen shows the current Octave setting. Press the OCTAVE + button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired setting. The value is expressed in semitones: 12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/ 3 seconds.

3. Press OCTAVE button to lower the octave setting.

The current Octave setting is shown. Continue pressing the OCTAVE button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired setting. An eventual positive Octave status will be cancelled. TO CLEAR THE TRACK OCTAVE SETTING

4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.

The insertion screen shows the value of 0 and the tracks normal pitch is restored.

136 Quick Guide

Note Function Play with Effects or bypass them Pedalboard/Computer C2

Note C#2 D#2 F2 G2 A2 B2

Function Tempo Tempo + Var 1 Var 2 Var 3 Var 4

Start/Stop

D2 Intro he PEDALBOARD and COMPUTER connecYou can temporarily modify the way in which a E2 efEnding rs cannot operate at the same time. Selecting Performance is processed by the on-board ne renders the other inoperative. fect processor by changing the On/Off setting F#2 of Fill < Effects Off button. select the o activate onethe of the two connectors, G#2 Fill = orresponding option (Pedalboard or ComA#2 Fill > uter) with the cursor buttons. BYPASS THE EFFECTS C3

Key Start

1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS OFF button. EDALBOARD

BASS SUSTAIN (F1) you have purchased optional The Generalmusics LED of the button turns on, indicating 3-note pedalboard, connect it to the Performance Pedalboard is no Sustain that the current longerfor the notes of the pedalboard. onnector and program the unit how it will be processed byfor the Effects. sed by pressing F8 (Mode).

COMPUTER TO ACTIVATE THE EFFECTS ODE (F8) FOR PEDALBOARD OPTIONS Instead of using the MIDI interface, you can con2. Press the active EFFECTS OFF button. nect via a single serial cable to a computer. Proptions for the pedalboard. the connector 2 for the type of computer used The LED of the button goes off togram indicate by pressing that the current Performance is processed by F8 (Mode). the Effects.

You can find out more about the Effects and how ff - Pedalboard to deactivated. assign them to the Performances, Style and Song Performances the Edit Effects section of edalbass - The automatic bass of in the auto-acthe Performance Chapter in the Reference Guide. ompaniments is deactivated and the BASS track assigned to the Pedalboard, allowing you to ay the bass with the pedalboard. edalchord - Chord recognition on the keyboard disabled and passed over to the pedalboard. o play minor and sevenths, play two bass notes the same time. Alternatively, you can program e Pedals 1, 2, or 3 to select minor and sevnths. ultifunction - Each note of the pedalboard realls a function associated to the Styles:

Edit General: PedalBoard/Computer

4 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 137

Using the Midi File Player

The MIDI FILE PLAYER plays MIDI files directly from floppy disk or Hard Disk without loading data into RAM memory. If a Floppy disk containing MIDI Files is already inserted in the drive, the MIDI File player engages the floppy, otherwise the Hard Disk (if present) is engaged automatically. The following example shows how to use the MIDI File player utilizing a floppy disk containing MIDI files. If you have saved some MIDI Files to your Hard Disk, follow the example without inserting a disk into the drive.

1. Insert a disk containing MIDI Files into the drive and press the SONG button.
The display shows the SONG BANKS selection window (with or without a selection of Songs). The example shows 8 Songs present in RAM memory.

2. Press either of the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to activate the MIDI File player.
The MIDI File player selects the MIDI File folder contained in the disk.

138 Quick Guide

General Controls

3. Press ENTER to access the SMF folder.

A list of MIDI Files is shown.

3/4 Tuning/Scale

MASTER 4. Use the directional arrows to select a MIDIPITCH EYBOARD SENSITIVITY

Fine tunes the instrument as a whole in fractions of 1/64 of a semitone. Assignable values: -63...+63.

File that want to listen to. etermines the response ofyou the keyboard to vecity changes. ssignable values: Soft, Medium soft, Medium, edium hard, Hard.

KEYBOARD SCALE

OOTSWITCH POLARITY

Provides a selection of Temperaments (Scales). Options: Equal, Inverse, Meantone, Werkmeister OTSWITCH 1, 2, 3 III, Arabian 1, Arabian 2, User1 ... User8. 5. Press PLAY to start the MIDI File playback. 5 ets the polarity of the programmable pedals 1, 3. Generalmusic pedals are of the NC type. During the playback, you can deactivate the melody by pressing the MELODY USER ON soft ptions: NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally PROGRAMMABLE SCALES button (F3) i order to play the melody yourpen). You can program your own scale using the keyself. board map shown at the bottom of the display. The option changes to MELODY OFF. This graphical representation shows the current pitch of the notes of an octave. The octave curPress the same soft button (F3) to restore rently in edit is shown in the title bar directly above the melody (MELODY ON). the keyboard (e.g. Octave C-1/B-1). Each note When the end of the MIDI File is reached, shows the coarse tune and fine tune status. The playback stops. programming tasks allow you to alter the pitch of one or more notes by modifying the coarse and Repeat the selection procedure and press PLAY to listen to other MIDI Files. fine tuning parameters of the current scale.

6. Press EXIT (F8) to escape from the Midi File Player.

Reference Guide for information regarding all the MIDI FILE PLAYER options.

6
Octave (select F5 for Octave Up or F6 for Octave Down).

Actual note tuning You can refer to the SONG chapter Coarse in the

Fine tuning in 64ths of a semitone Edit General: Master pitch & Keyboard Scale

t General: General controls

2 Reference Guide

Quick Guide 139

Loading data into RAM memory

If you have some disk-based Songs, or Styles or Performances that you wish to load into the instruments RAM memory, or you wish to load data from the SK760/880SE Hard Disk, heres how to do it. The example shows how to load a Song from Floppy disk (or Hard Disk). All other data, such as User Styles, Programmable Performances, etc., are loaded using similar procedures adapted for the type of data being loaded.

1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive and press the DISK button to open the main Disk Load page. If a disk is inserted in the drive but you want to work with the Hard Disk, select the HARD DISK option with soft button F2 to open the Hard Disk Load page.
If a disk is not inserted in the drive, the Load page configures automatically for Hard Disk operations. The example refers to a loading operation from Hard Disk.

2. Specify the load operation required (for example, Load Single Song).
Use the navigational arrows to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Load Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The File selector shows one or more Blocks in the Hard Disk directory, and the directory of the destination representing the section of RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example Songs).

140 Quick Guide

4. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER to gain access to the files contained in the Block.
Now the display shows a list of files of the same type selected in step 2 (in this case Songs).

5. Select the Song that you want to load using the Up/Down directional arrows.
A destination in RAM will already be selected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame). Move over to the right of the display (RAM) if you want to select a different destination.

6. With a RAM destination selected, press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure. After a short period, the Demo Song will be in memory.

7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK mode.

DISK leaves Disk mode directly. When you return to Disk the last page selected will be shown. ESCAPE allows you to exit from the various levels of the Disk operations: (1) exit the Block, (2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.

7
Or

8 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 141

Record a Song (Quick rec.)

SK760/880SE allows you to record a simple multi-track Song using the QUICK REC recording method when using existing Styles. In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from 1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of up to 16 tracks. You can also play along with the song during playback.

QUICK REC RECORDING

1. Press the SONG button.

The Song Banks display shows empty songs as User locations. If not, you can use the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.

1/2

2. Select an empty location (User) with the corresponding Soft button or Function button. 3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
The RECORD ST/SONG button turns on (LED on). A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The display appears in negative highlight with the selected track in positive.

4. If necessary, select a preferred Style to use as the provider of the backings for the Song.
If you want the Style to govern the PERFORMANCE sounds, press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/ Off and Lower Memory activate automatically if off). To maintain the same Performance, select the Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY Off then turn on the accompaniment controls (ARRANGE ON/OFF and MEMORY) if necessary.

142 Quick Guide

In Edit General, the Mic/Line editor includes an Equalizer PLAY the starts the recording for the real time which prompts the following window addition to the above, following additional Or when activated: tracks only. by START/STOP starts the recordodifications are implemented the Vocal Procing and also engages the Style accompanissor: High gain ments tracks. Middle Freq If you selected a Style in step 4 with SINGLE Middle gain EDALS TOUCH PLAY active and you also activate KEY START, you will be able to start re-gain the Low Edit Controllers/Pads. cording (Style and real time tracks) by playhe following additional assignable functions are ing on the keyboard. You can also start with The Equalizer parameters exclusively affect the mplemented for the pedals and Pads: an Intro by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or Microphone signals at input 1 of the Mic/Line inVocal On/Off (Pedals) ENDING button before record start.terface. Vocal Volume (Pedals Assign.) The Vocal On/Off option enables/disables the As the recording proceeds, you can select Vocal Custom 1-16 (Pedals) Vocal Processor. other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real Vocal Mute (Pedals) The Mic/Line On/Off option enables/disables the time tracks, etc.. MIC/LINE interface. Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison (Pedals)

5. Press either PLAY or START/STOP to VOCAL start the ON/OFF5 AND EQUALIZER Additional changes recording and start to play.

6 6. When you have finished, stop the recording NB. These parameters are memorized in Edit B. All the parameters described above can be either with STOP or START/STOP.
Or

General. emorized to the Performances. STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to the starting position [1 1 1]. START/STOP stops the accompaniment tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the recording completely, press STOP. The RECORD ST/SONG button LED will turn off.

7. Press PLAY or START/STOP to listen to the song playback.

In playback, you can stop the song with STOP or START/STOP and start the song again from the stop point with PLAY. If you press STOP or START/STOP twice during playback, the song returns to the starting point (locator 1 1 1).

7
Or

In EDIT SONG, you can enter for the - Equalizer t Controller - Vocal Volume and Vocal On/Off assigned to a name Edit General Song. pedals

6 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 143

PLAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED SONG

In Song playback mode, you can play along with your recorded Song by activating one or more tracks not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the sequencer and use it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not wish to hear. The operations can be carried out before or after start, but remember, if you start after modifying the track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store the Performance. In the example below, the changes are carried out during playback.

1. Start the playback of the selected Song with PLAY or START/STOP. 2. During playback, press the soft button of the track you wish to play along with as many times as necessary until it is shown set for key-play then start to play.
If the track contains recorded notes (shown with the seq.-play icon ): press the relative soft button once to select the track; once again to mute the track and; once again to set it to key-play. The graphic example opposite illustrates how to disengage a recorded track and activate it for real time playing. If the track was not used for the recording, it will be shown either as a muted track ( ) ). In this case: or in key-play status ( press the relative soft button repeatedly to toggle from muted to key-play and vice versa.

1
Or

3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.

3
Or

144 Quick Guide

NISON (F7)

NISON mode operates both in Style mode as ell as Song mode. In this mode, the Vocal ProcThe SK760/880SE RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when ssor automatically produces the same note as the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, it is best to store your data to floppy disk or Hard Disk e input note, doubling up to 4 Voices. for future use. The RAM memory should be considered as a work area which can be continually upach voice is doubled with aa slight effect dated, not as datadetune storage device. bove and below the input note according to the Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be SK760/880SE format disks (or standard llowing scale. MS-DOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to SK760/880SE format Voice 1 = +12 cents disks. How to save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide. Voice 2 = + 7 cents Vocal the Processor - Unison mode, Volume option The following example shows how to save Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec method to Voice 3 = 7 cents Disk or Hard Disk. Voice 4 = 12 cents 1. the If you are saving to floppy, ou can regulate Volume and Pan param- insert the disk 1 into the drive and press DISK to open the ers of each single voice (F1/F2). first Disk page. ou can mute or activate the mode various voices with e function buttons If A-F. the main Save page is not selected, use UNISON mode, the Main and Bass voices +/ Page/Bank ( ) are buttons to pass to ot present. the page required.

Save your programmed data to disk or Hard Disk

If you want to save to Hard Disk, select the Hard Disk option with the corresponding soft DIT (F3) button F2. he Edit page allows you to apply a Low Freuency Oscillator (LFO) to the voices produced y the Vocal Processor. The modifications affect e voices globally, not individually. he parameters of the Edit page are common to l three operating modes.

OUT THE LFO

FO is a periodic (repeating) control source which Use the frequency) navigational arrows ( / and / ) to oduces a low speed (low waveform navigate within the columns of the dishich is applied to the voice Pitch to two obtain a Vocal Processor - Edit yclic modulation. play area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. ecause of its periodic nature, the LFO applied

2. Specify the Save operation required (example, Save Single Song).

the pitch createsFor the example, Vibrato effect to simulate combine Single from the left e natural vibrations of the human voice. column with Song from the right to specify Save Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.

4 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 145

3. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The display shows the directories of the RAM memory and the floppy disk, or Hard Disk. In the example, the instruments RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic names). If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. If the disk is used, one or more Block files may be present. If you are working on the Hard Disk, several Block files will be shown.

4. If necessary, select the Song that you want to save and its destination, using the directional arrows.
A selected file is shown in negative highlight. An empty destination is shown as a broken line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame. You can choose to select an existing Block as the destination, or create a new one by selecting an empty one (broken line).

5. Press ENTER.
If you chose an empty destination in step 5 above, youll be prompted to create a new Block. The name MAIN will suggested automatically. Use the keyboard to enter a name for the block.

6. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.

A new Block directory will show the first 8 empty locations (within the new block). Up to 16 locations are available by scrolling with the cursor arrow.

146 Quick Guide

ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song he Vocal Processor operates only if both the Select the Vocal Processor editor from the main command. ic/Line On/Off and Vocal Processor On/Off opEdit Effects menu and press ENTER to gain acons in Edit General are enabled. These cess the relative functions. Pressing ENTER the first are time prompts ato renabled by default, but should theythe have been It is also quest to confirm command. Press EN- possible to enter the editor directly ussabled, heres how to activate the functions. ing the Page scroll buttons ( ). TER a second time to complete the proceess the GENERAL under the Edit/Numbers sedure. The parameter configuration displayed depends ction, select the Mic/Line function and, if necon saved the mode selected. After a short period, the Song will be ssary, enable the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/ Three operating modes are available: Chord / to disk or Hard Disk. ff options with the corresponding Soft buttons. Vocoder / Unison. Remember that if you save to an existing file, it will be overwritten by the incoming one.

7. If necessary, select a destination and press WITH THE VOCAL PROCESSOR CTIVATE THE VOCAL PROCESSOR WORKING 7

CHORD (F5) Whenever possible, try to save to an empty location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard N.B. THIS MODE IS OPERATIVE IN STYLE existing data on the storage device.MODE ONLY
CHORD recognizes the chords you play 8. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit mode 8 and determines the most appropriate harmony DISK mode.

intervals for your singing. This modeOr produces up to four voices according to the recognized chord and chord type (Close or Smart - see VoIMPORTANT - Do not save to the original disk(s) cal Processor Edit). The harmonic voices are supplied with the instrument. Make sure that original disks are always protected. generated within the octaves above and below ess ESCAPE or EDIT to exit Edit General and the input note with two different intervals: one turn to the Edit Effects section. interval near the input note (Close) and another he instrument will memorize the status of the further away (Extreme). The interval extensions elected parameters even after power down. vary according to the chord played .

t Effect- Main Menu

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option

2 Vocal Processor

Quick Guide 147

148 Quick Guide

< 1/16 (H) ee above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixenth

or by playing a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point.

Reference Guide
Sounds, Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch

T SCORE... (F4) reates a score from the selected track from hich the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open e dialog window:

END PHRASE (F)

Specify the track with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

the track contains chords, the analyser withaws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate otes not related to the melody. A score is obined with excellent results from a track containg a melody line only.

EditEnd Sound This command inserts an phrase symbol (I) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes SampleTranslator Lyrics 1 Lyrics 4, when the verses that end Performances, Edit Performance with the End phrasesymbol are reached, the next verse starts on a new Edit line. Midi, Edit Mixer, Edit Effects, We recommend that you write lines using not Edit Controllers/Pads, Edit Tracks/Split, more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying in Disk-Hard Disk-SCSI correctly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used. Styles, User Styles (programmable), This symbol can be cancelled as any other charEdit Style acter by selecting the syllable with D (Next event) or E (Previous event). SelectMidi the sym Songs, Preload, File Player, bol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note Song Recording F2 (DELETE). Edit Song Score, Edit Score Vocal Processor Edit General Utility functions (Help, Display Hold)

TENSION (F) his command allows you to add an alternative ass extension to the chord. Select a chord and ess soft button F, then play a complete chord hich contains the alternative bass root required insert.

ou can modify the extension with the DIAL, or ay a different chord. ay the chords below the Split Point.

OOT (F7) his command allows you to modify the root note a chord and its related abbreviation separately. elect a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place e chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abeviation, then to return to the edit of the entire hord symbol.

ou can modify the selected part with the DIAL,

38 Reference Guide

Reference Guide

and F8 (>>1/16). INSERTING LYRICS To escape and return to the note, press the Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This soft button E (Previous event). To escape type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files. and pass to the next note press the soft butLyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the ton D (Next event). following manner: Play the chord below the Split Point. The 1. Press the Lyrics button (F6) to take the curchord symbol appears, in the following form: sor to the lyrics line (below the staff). CMaj, Dmin, E7th... If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a pedal note, press the function button F (Extension) and play the alternative chord. The Because the SK760/880SE has well over 1000 BANKS 4 - 16 bass extension will appear in the following factory sounds as standard, these sounds have These are the core sounds of the SK760/880SE, form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G... been divided into 16 families, making it easier to where you will find a wide selection of typical synPress the soft Dtype (Next event quickly or E and easily. findbuttons the right of sounds thesizer sounds, authentic reproductions of tra(Previous event) to pass to another event. The families are organized into 16 Instrument ditional orchestral instruments and more. Many 2. Press soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a You can modify the of selected symbol by play- section Groups the SOUND GROUPS (Piano, of these sounds are further enhanced by approspecific measure (bar): ing a different chord. Chrom, Organ, etc.) and each Group is further priate effects, typical of the instruments playing You can modify a chord by transforming subdivided into 16 Banks, eachit, capable of constyle, being assigned to either velocity or for example, from up a major to minor chord to per family). taining to 8 sounds (128 Sounds aftertouch. seventh. Press F7 (Root) repeatedly to All the Sounds can be freely edited and stored alternate between the bass of the chord (the GMX BANKS 1, 2 AND 3 new sounds. The then 16 Banks Specify the as measure with the DIAL press of each family root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of provides ample room for all your programmed GMX is a standard set of sounds which are in- confirm ENTER or ESCAPE to cancel. the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...). work. cluded in every Generalmusic product. 3. TheMove first the insertion point to the previous note GMX bank, (Bank 1) of the Sound Groups or secthe next note with the soft buttons D (Next The entire symbol iscontains selected. Press (Root). tion the F7 industry standard General MIDI DRUM KITS ANDevent). DRUM SOUNDS event) and E (Previous sound library. This family is designed to be used The Drum Kits family, called PERCUSSIVE, in4. GenEach note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. when the SK760/880SE is required to play cludes just about type of of the drum kit you could In addition to syllables at the every beginning eral MIDI song disks or when the instrument is The root note is selected. Press F7 (Root). imagine - from tosyllables rock, orchestra to techno note (first 1/16th), you can jazz insert in being controlled by a computer program or some and beyond. one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to other device which requires a General MIDI sound Just like the sounds, open the syllable insertion zone.the individual drum sounds library. is selected. Press F7 (Root). The chord abbreviation can be freely edited and stored to the empty loThe second and third GMX banks, (Bank 2 & 3) cations of the 16 Banks of the Percussive family. Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th contain 256 sounds taken from Generalmusics They can then be stored as new sounds, either own extensive sound library. These sounds, The entire symbol is selected again. for individual use or for incorporating into the drum along with the 128 sounds in Bank 1, ensure comInsertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th kits. patibility with Generalmusics own song library, Rotate theand DIAL or play chord to also with another song disks created on other Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th modify the Generalmusic selected element (the root or abinstruments. breviation). The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16).

Sounds

36 Reference Guide

Sounds 21

Selecting Sounds
Individual Sounds are recalled using the buttons of the SOUND GROUPS section. The sounds recalled are assigned to the selected track of the current Performance. A selected track is shown highlighted on the display. If the Display Hold (D.HOLD) function is on (LED on), the SOUND GROUPS selection window will remain active, allowing you to select another sound either from the same Group, or from another Group. To do this, simply select a different SOUND GROUP button to open the corresponding selection window. To see your selection, press ESCAPE to close the current selection window and return to the Performance display without turning D. HOLD off. If D. HOLD is off (LED off), every time you select a Sound from the SOUND GROUP selection, the display will return to the Performance display. You can also select Sounds directly by entering a number on the Number keypad (with the KEYPAD LED on); this is the quickest way to go directly to the sound you need (see page 1.16 of the Quick Guide for details of this method). Another way of selecting Sounds is by recalling Performances (Real or Style Performances). Performances offer the possibility of selecting Sound combinations which you can program as preferred. Refer to the next chapter, Performances, for all relevant information.

1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons to open a Sound Group selection window showing 8 Sounds to choose from.

2. Scroll through the Banks with the +/ Page/ Bank buttons [ ].

The current Bank number is shown in the top right hand corner of the selection window. As you scroll through the Banks, youll see that most of them will contain only one or two Sounds to choose from, others will be empty. Empty locations are shown by a string of dashes (------). These locations represent the locations where you can store your edited sounds or disk-based sounds.

3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft button.

MOVING BETWEEN FAMILIES

Sometimes you might want to jump directly from one sound family to another when looking for a particular sound. This is best done with DISPLAY HOLD on (LED on). Pressing any SOUND GROUP button will open the corresponding SOUND GROUP window, showing the same Bank as the previous selection.

22 Reference Guide

The current family is shown at the top of the topSYMBOLS DEO CONTROLS SPECIAL EDITING AND CHANGING SOUNDS

of the display and you can select any other famewing options for an external monitor. At times, the music Any score soundwill on show the SK760/880SE special sym- can be edited ily by pressing the SOUND GROUP buttons acbols. to your taste. This editing can consist of anycordingly. thing from the simplest The octave lower adjustment symbol. of the sounds HO LCD tone ordisplayed volume level, complete reconstrucThe note to or a notes N: the external monitor displays exactly what is tion of in the sound, are reality oneresulting octave in a totally original hown on the SK760/880SE display. and personal sound. lower. FF: the monitor displays only the Score parts Editing The note always too begins high symbol. by selecting one of the music, lyrics, chords). The note at thein position sounds currently the instruments memory as ptions: On, Off. corresponding the dis- youre going to crea starting point forto the sound played symbol is too high to ate. When you edit a sound, you can decide, at appear staff. any point, in to the either save the new sound youve made to just quit editing and go back to using Theor note too low symbol. theThe instrument as before. note at the position This procedure is explained in detail under STORING SOUNDS. corresponding to the displayed is too ways low to There are symbol two different to edit a sound. appear the staff. This PERFORMANCE The first in method is EDIT symbol rarely appears with a the sound indiSOUND which lets you modify standard music staff (Score rectly by programming the parameters that are split option in the Score exclusive to the tracks of the current Performcontrols window setyou to ON). ance. Any sound that assign to the edited track, therefore, will inherit the modifications applied. This is a quick and easy method, using a set of Performance parameters under EDIT SOUND/SOUND PATCH of the Edit Performance section. The second method is ADVANCED EDIT SOUND which allows you to intervene on the Sounds parameters, going deep into the sounds structure and changing its characteristics. The result is a new RAM-Sound that you can store to any empty slot of the Banks within the SOUND GROUP families. You will then be able to assign your new RAM-Sound to any track of any Performance.

EW MODE elects a color for the lyrics and for the backound. This option is valid for the external monir only. ptions: 116.

DEO MODE GB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Compose Video signals. THE SOUNDComposite GROUP FAMILIES V: the RGB port transmits Video sigals. For a correct Composite Video image, this ption is recommended. Sound Group ProgramChange ptions: RGB, CV.Piano 1 ... 8
Chromatic Guitar 9 ... 16 17 ... 24 25 ... 32

SHIFT Organ ontrols the vertical alignment.

Bass 33 ... 40 ORE SPLIT Strings on a staff. 41 ... 48 N: the notes are displayed Ensemble 49clef ... 56 FF: the notes are displayed on the treble nly. Notes that normally Brass occupy the bass 57clef ... 64 e shown with the Reed symbol (bass 65 8ve). ... 72 Pipe 73 ... 80

HORDS ON LYRICS Synth Lead 81 ... 88 ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show Synth Pad 89 ... 96 hord symbols together with lyrics on the exterSynth SFX 97 ... 104 al monitor.
Ethnic Percussive SFX 105 ... 112 113 ... 120 121 ... 128

34 Reference Guide

Sounds 23

Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch

The term Sound refers to all the SK760/880SE Sounds that are not Drumkits, nor contain a dynamic switch. Sound Patch is a generic term used to describe a Drumkit or a Sound containing a dynamic switch. Edit Performance Sound and Edit Sound Patch are both edit facilities which permit the rapid modification of a Sound or a Sound Patch by means of macro edit parameters. The modifications are associated to the tracks of the current Performance, not to the Sound or Sound Patch. This means that any Sound you assign to the edited track of a Performance will inherit the same modifications. If the same Sound/Sound Patch is recalled by a different track or Performance, it will not play with the same modifications. Modified Performance Sounds are identified by the symbol . In Performances and Style-Performances, the Drumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accompaniment tracks. When you change Style or Performance and cause a change in the accompaniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also changes. Performances which contain a modified Drumkit/Sound Patch are identified by the symbol .

If you enter the edit with a track containing a ROM Sound Patch, you will gain access to the Edit Sound Patch parameters.

THE GENERAL SOUND/S.PATCH EDIT PROCEDURE:

1. Select the Performance track containing the Sound you wish to modify. 2. Press the SOUND button (in the EDIT/NUMBER section) to enter the MENU.

3. Modify the parameters according to your requirements. 4. Press EDIT or ESCAPE to exit the editor. 5. If you want to store the Performance containing the modified Sound/S.Patch parameters for future use, save the modifications by pressing STORE PERF then ENTER. If you dont want to save the Performance, simply select a different one and all your modifications will be lost.

If you enter the edit with a track containing a ROM Sound, you will gain access to the principal Edit Performance Sound parameters.

24 Reference Guide

he events are inserted with the following deOSCILLATORS AND LAYERS INS TYPE... (F4) EDIT PERFORMANCE SOUND ult parameterItvalues: is useful to know something about the strucRecalls a dialog window from which you can seEdit Sound, you can program ture of the SK760/880SE Rom Sounds lect and the how type of In event toPerformance insert manually with the a set of principal Performance parameters that they are affected by the modifications you make function. Ins(x) atus Value will affect any sound you decide to assign to a under the Edit Sound/S. Patch editor. mpo 120 track of the current Performance. The SK760/880SE Sounds can comprise 1, 2 or erformance 1 3 layers. The layers are sound generating units olume 64 consisting of 1 or 2 oscillators. Each oscillator f. Dv. Sel 0 elaborates a Wave sample, or waveform. Consequently, each polyphonic voice can be generf. Type 0 ated by 6 simultaneous oscillators. f. Vol 0 The structure of the Sounds is represented in the otaryA Slw/Fst Press the cursor arrow to bring other events diagram below. The Edit Performance Sound into view. otaryB Slw/Fst tasks modify all layers and all oscillators simultacale 1 neously. This allows all the parameters of a PerTHE PERFORMANCE SOUND PARAMETERS formance Sound to be edited by means of a few, ey Sign C ATTACK: This parameter adjusts the time taken simple operations. for a sound to reach its maximum volume level ter inserting the desired event, modify its paafter a key has been pressed. Setting a very fast meters accordingly. attack time will make a sound more percussive. Setting a slower attack time will cause the sound Select the type of event and press ENTER. to fade in slowly when a key is pressed. The modifications are expressed as relative valDELETE (F6) ues, subtracting them from or adding them to the normal attack of the Sound. Cancels the selected event. Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (minimum rate). DECAY: This parameter will only affect those Selects the event currently playing (when the sounds which feature decay. Decay is the efSong is in playback mode), or the event immedifect of something fading away as you hold a key ately after the current Song position. on the keyboard. A piano sound is a good examSOUND ple of a sound which has decay. As you hold Layer 3 down the key, the sounds fades away or decays. GO TO LOC... (F8) Layer 2 Eventually you will hear no sound at all. An orLayer 1 Takes the cursor directly to the first event of has the no decay. The gan sound, on the other hand, selected measure. The number can be specified level of the sound remains the same as long as Oscillator 2 with the DIAL. Oscillator 1 you hold down a key. The decay parameter is used to adjust the amount of time it takes a sound to decay, (in the case of our piano sound that Filter Wave Envelope would be the amount of time it took between when the sound is at maximum level and the point at Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER. which we no longer hear anything). Sound structure. The number of layers and oscillators can change from a Sound to another. The modifications are expressed as relative val

CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

32 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 25

ues, subtracting them from or adding them to the normal decay of the Sound. Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (minimum rate). RELEASE: This parameter is used to adjust the amount of time a sound continues to play after the key has been released. This release time increases as the parameter value decreases (negative). Maximum release times can last for more than twenty thirty seconds after a key has been released. The modifications are expressed as relative values, subtracting them from or adding them to the normal release of the Sound. Assignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (minimum rate). FILTER CUTOFF: In its simplest form, this is the sounds most important tone control. Cut-Off is one half of the main filter controls, (the other being Resonance). Usually these two are used in combination for powerful manipulation of a sounds tonal character. As the parameter value is decreased (negative) the filter closes allowing less of the original sound to pass through. This generally has the effect of making the sound warmer and less fizzy. Increasing the parameter value (positive) opens the filter, increasing the brilliance of the sound. The action of the filter varies according to the type of filter contained in the Sound. Low-pass - Cuts into the higher frequencies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a low harmonic content, the notes at the higher end will be cut. This parameter regulates the brilliance of the Sound. Lowering the cutoff frequency produces a mellow sound while an increase produces a bright sound. High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies, making the sound brighter. The higher the value, the lighter the sound.

Band-pass - Allows the entire band to pass. Modifies the phase of the Sound and is useful when two oscillators that read the same Wave are used. Parametric boost - Enhances the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a sound brighter and stronger at the higher end. Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies around the cutoff frequency. Higher values renders the sound weaker at the high end. Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase of the cutoff frequency). RESONANCE: This parameter, the second essential element of filter control, introduces complex harmonic overtones which are added to the final sound. Sometimes these overtones can only be produced when the Filter Cut-Off setting is low enough. Try setting the Resonance parameter fairly high and then modifying the Cut-Off parameter while you play. The distinctive sound of a resonating filter is one of the key elements in many classic synthesizer sounds. Assignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (highest intensity).
Note: The higher values of resonance causes the filter to enter into auto-oscillation. If used wisely, the auto-oscillation can create very suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase the output level excessively, causing disturbing distortion.

LFO RATE: This parameter can be used to adjust the speed of the vibrato or modulation in a sound. It is designed to be used in conjunction with the LFO DEPTH parameter. Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum rate). LFO DEPTH: This parameter is used to set the amount of vibrato or modulation applied to a sound. If the current sound includes some type of modulation or vibrato, you can use this param

26 Reference Guide

to either increase, decrease or completely Master eter Track remove the effect.

Initial parameters Event List THE PERFORMANCE SOUND OPTIONS

Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unhe Master Track editor allows to modify the changed) ... +63you (maximum rate). vents recorded in the Master track which conins events pertaining to the general controls of LFO DELAY: This parameter determines the dee Song. This Track records changes in Performlay of the entry of the LFO. In acoustic instrunce, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect ments, vibrato generally enters after the attack hanges, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes, phase, and mainly forms part of the sustain phase itial Time Signature and the Score Key. of the sound. he structure of the page is analogous to the MiAssignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (unoscope. The events are shown in the Event List changed) ... +63 (maximum rate).. the center of the display.
bar

COPY TO... (F6)

Copies the modifications applied to the current Performance track to a different track of the same Performance. The parameter values are copied, NOT the Sound, therefore, if a Piano sound is at the source and a Bass is at the destination, the Bass sound will inherit the parameter modifications and play with the same characteristics as those applied to the Piano sound.

CESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE Use the cursor buttons / the events.

beat

value

to scroll through

resolution

Track - Select the track with the DIAL. In

Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / . Use the DIAL.

event type Style/RealTime mode, the maximum number (Status) of tracks is 16, in Song mode, 32.

RESTORE TRACK (F7)

Cancels the modifications of the selected track. Note: When 1. loading a MIDI PerPress F7file, to normally cancel. the You are prompted to formance settings are ignored, due to the fact that reconfirm the operation.

NITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG

he events that define the Song at the start point an be modified but not deleted. To access and odify the events press F1 (Start param).

commercially available MIDI files contain initializing events at the start of each track

ERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial vales of some of the track parameters (Program hange, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same pameters are also found at the beginning of each ack, the sound, volume and pan settings are elected and controlled by the events contained the tracks and not by the initial Performance. ssignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Perrmances.

VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the Damper pedal set for continuous control and as2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE signed the Volume function. cancel. KEY - Key for theto correct visualization of the score. Alters the score according to the speciRESTORE ALLaccidentals), TRACKS (F8) renderfied key (inserts the correct ing the score easier to read. For example, if the to all the tracks Cancels the modifications applied score was captured inPerformance. the key of C, you can disof the play the score in key ofF8 F# to with all the correct 1.the Press cancel. You are prompted to accidentals shown reconfirm in the initial key signature the operation. by setting the Key parameter to F#. TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on Sound View or Time/Tempo pages.

2. Press ENTER again to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.

30 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 27

EDIT SOUND PATCH

In Edit Performance S Patch, you can program a set of Performance parameters exclusive to these type of sounds.

SELECTING/MUTING THE DYNAMIC LAYER

Drumkits and Sound Patches have two dynamic Layers. Normally, Sound Patches exploit both Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to Layer 1. The soft buttons A and B select and mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound on the other layer. Once you enter into Edit Sound Patch to select the Layers, it is not possible to select the tracks of the current Performance.

Any Drum Sound or Drum Kit that you assign to a the modified track will inherit the modifications applied. Although structurally identical, Drumkits and Sound Patches have the following difference: In a Drumkit, a percussive instrument is assigned to each note of the keyboard. This allows a Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI channel. In a Sound Patch, two different sounds are separated by a dynamic threshold in order that playing harder recalls the sound at the higher dynamic level. Try playing, for example, the sound DYN ORCH (48-3); play softly first, then harder and listen to the change in timbre. These Sound are also called Switch sounds. Sound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the timbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike velocity.

Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M.

28 Reference Guide

THE EDIT SOUND PATCH PARAMETERS VENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS

TATUS

ote

rogram hange

and shown in the use numbers 1 16 the SKSE sounds Microscope has [1 128] [1 128] EFF. 1 (REVERB): Effects send for the reverbs. VOLUME: Determines the volume of the note in priority over the PC The maximum value corresponds to a perfect edit. This can be useful to balance recorded in parameter the balance between the original sound and the procPerformance [1-128] Sounds which differ greatly in volume. Type of Control Control Assignable values: 0 ... 127. Change Change (or MIDI Value controller). PAN: Determines the position of the note in the Example: CC00 = stereo panorama. BankSelect MSB, In Drumkits, it is important to pan single percussive instrument correctly. For CC32 = BankSelect example, the LSB, CC01 = toms are normally positioned in order that a snare drifts Modulation, CC07 = from one stereo channel to Volume the other. [1 128]

EXCLUDE: A linking number between two notes that exclude each other. Playing a note will inEDIT NOTE: Determines the note to edit. VALUE 3 terrupt another VALUE 1 VALUE 2 GATE note with the same exclude number. For example, if a Closed Hi-Hat and an Note name values: A0 ... Key Velocity the lowKey Off Velocity Note Length Assignable C8On (respectively Open Hi-Hat have the same [C1 G9] [1an 88 127] [1 127] expressed as theexclude number, they est and highest note in note master keyinterrupt each other, exactly as occurs in reality. Sequencer resolution board). (q=192) [0 linked 63323]percussive instruYou can create as many ment Program change Bank Select MSB to Bank LSBgroups as there are Exclude numbers asSOUND: Determines the Sound assigned the Select message. The PC message. To select message. signable. Not note. It is possible to select any sound from the contained in the tracks the SKSE banks, necessary to select Assignable values: Off, 1, 2, 3. ROM-Sounds, RAM-Sounds or RAM -Sounds.

ontrol hange

essed one. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFF 2 (DELAY/CHORUS/FLANGER/MODULATION): Effect sends for the modulation effects. The maximum value corresponds to a perfect balance between the original sound and the processed one. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. AUDIO OUT: Allows you to direct the sound assigned to the note in edit to a preferred output. Assignable values: Main, Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2. DYNAMIC SWITCH: Threshold level that divides Layer 1 from Layer 2. When you play with a low velocity, the Sound assigned to Layer 1 is triggered. By playing harder, the Sound assigned to Layer 2 is triggered. The value 0 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 2 while the value 127 causes the Sound assigned to Layer 1. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

itch end

Assignable values: -32 (all left) ... 0 (balanced) Value LSB (Least Value of MSB ... +32of (all right).
(Most Significant Byte). Effective value the of bending. TRANSPOSE: Transposes Sound assigned [063 = down to the note. At the zero value, a percussive in64 = neutral strument can be distant from the sampled note, 65127 = up]If the note in which is normally around note C4. Significant Byte). [0= Off, 1127 = On]

Mono ouch

oly ouch

Channel edit is below C4, the Sound will require transAftertouch intensity posing upwards (positive), while if above will re[0 127] quire transposing down (negative). Note to which Note Aftertouch Assignable values -64 ... +63. Aftertouch is applied. intensity. [C1 G9] [0 127]

TUNING: Fine tune control, in steps of 1/64 of a semitone. Assignable values: -64 ... +63. FILTER: Regulates the cutoff frequency of the filter. Assignable values: -64 (maximum decrease) ... 0 (unchanged) ... +63 (maximum increase).

28 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 29

THE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS

CATCH NOTE... (F1)
Selects the note to place in edit by playing it on the keyboard.

EXPAND... (F3)
Extends the programmed parameters of the note in edit to a specified keyboard zone.

1. Select the note whose parameters require copying. 2. Press F3 (Expand...).

The Expand dialog window opens:

1. Press F1 (Catch note...).

The following message appears.

2. Play the note to place in edit.

The dialog window closes and the Edit note parameter is modified.

3. With the From parameter selected, rotate the DIAL, or play a note to specify the lowest note of the required keyboard zone. 4. Pass to the To parameter with the cursor button . Rotate the DIAL, or play a note to specify the highest note of the required keyboard zone.

COPY TO LAYER... (F2)

Copies an entire Layer to the other.

1. Select the Layer to copy with the soft buttons A and B. 2. Press F2 (Copy to Layer...). You are prompted to reconfirm the operation.

5. Press ENTER to confirm the Expand command, or ESCAPE to cancel. 3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
WARNING - The copy will cancel the programmed data in the destination Layer.

Confirming extends the programmed parameters of the original note to the specified keyboard zone.

210 Reference Guide

1. Press F6 to open the following dialog winHORDS TRK (F7) dow:

ON/OFF switch. When active, the original parameter values of the Drumkit/Sound Patch in edit ansposition of a recorded track by semitones. are temporarily recalled in order to compare them so availablewith arethe options toedited transpose current ones. the hords and Music tracks of the Score of a song. his allows you to see the score in the correctly RESTORE (F6) ansposed status after a transpose operation. This option restores the original Sound Patch or cancels the last modifications applied after savACK (F6) ing to the Performance. ansposition of a Song track by semitones.

COMPARE... (F4) Transpose

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS AS A NEW DRUMKIT/ SOUND PATCH FILE 1. Press F8 (Store...).
The Store dialog window opens:

2. The File option is shown selected. Press ENTER to confirm.

An insertion zone appears:

ansposition of the Chords track of the Score y semitones.

USIC TRK (F8) ansposition of the Music track of the Score by emitones.

TRANSPOSE VALUE Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones).

The insertion zone shows the ProgramNOTE RANGE FROM... TO... and BankSelect MSB (CC00) to Assigns and lower limits of the notes 2. Select the function required with the direc-the upper Change which theanew Drumkit/SoundPatch will be to be affected. To transpose single percussive tional arrows and press ENTER to confirm or saved. instrument of the Drum track, assign the same ESCAPE to cancel to abort. note to the highest and lowest limit. For exam3. Press ENTER to confirm the current location, S.P. Performance - Restores the ple, Drumkit/ to change the snare (D2) set the parameter or use the DIAL if you wish to select a differSound Patch in edit to its original status (can- range from D2 to D2. to Note ent location. cels all editing operations applied to all notes). Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. Current edit - Cancels the current modifica4. If you want to change the name of the file, tions and recalls the last saved parameter press the soft button F7 or F8. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... settings of the Drumkit memorized in the Determines the start and end point of the part to Performance. be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick. STORE... (F8) Assignable values: within the actual limits of the This option allows you to save the modifications Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond to a Performance or creates a new Drumkit/ the end of the Song. Sound Patch file that can be used by any Performance. 5. Insert a name using the method described To conserve the modifications, save them before selecting a Performance. Selecting a Performin the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on ance before saving cancels all modifications appage 1.4 of the Quick Guide. Press ENTER plied. to confirm the name and return to the Store

window.

26 Reference Guide

Edit Perf Sound /Sound Sounds Patch 211

6. Press ENTER to save the new file to the selected location.

The new Drumkit/SoundPatch is now available as a RAM-Sound. As any new RAM-Sound, the new Drumkit/ SoundPatch will remain in memory after power down. To conserve it and safeguard it against future cancellation, save it to disk using the Save Single Sound, Save All Sound or Save All procedures.

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS TO A PERFORMANCE 1. Press F8 (Store...). The Store dialog window appears:

2. Select the Performance option with the cursor button and press ENTER to confirm.
The Drumkit store dialog window opens:

3. Select the Performance or Style-Performance option with the / cursor arrows. 4. Rotate the DIAL to select the Performance or Style Performance Group to store to. 5. Move down to the Performance option with the cursor button and select the Performance to save to with the DIAL. 6. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

212 Reference Guide

Delete measures Advanced Edit Sound

PROCEDURE
1. From the main Style/Performance display, select the track containing the Sound you wish to edit. If necessary, press the SOLO button to isolate the Sound from the rest. 2. Press the SYNTH button in the EDIT NUMBER section You are prompted to confirm the request to enter EDIT SOUND.

ancels a specified number of measures. The and editing If youre serious about creating easures directly afterthen the it point ofbe cancellation sounds wont too long before you yearn hift towards the of the Song and join forbeginning a little more flexibility than is offered by the th the measures preceding the cancellation Performance Edit Sound/Sound Patch paramoint. eters.

In the advanced editing controls you will find the real key to the sound synthesizing Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those af- power of the ter the deletion point, use the Erase events function. SK760/880SE . The results of your Sound editing tasks is a RAM-Sound that you can store to the SK760/880SE sound library, assign to any ARAMETERS track of any Performance and save to Disk.

ENTERING EDIT SOUND EASURES TO DELETE When you enter EDIT pecifies the number of measures to SOUND, delete. it is best to prepare yourself by that checking the current sound, ssignable values: any number does that not exthat is, the one shown selected eed the total number of measures in the Song.in the Performance display, is the one you want to edit. 1 For 2 3. 3Press ENTER 4 5 or example, if the Song is 50 measures long, to enter 6 EDIT SOUND. example, if you want to tweak some of the pae maximum value that can be assigned is 50. Press ESCAPE to cancel the request. rameters of a Piano sound to create a variation, its best to start with a sound similar the one you With ENTER, you gain access to the Edit ELETE FROM LOCATOR want to modify. If, instead, you want to create a2 menu consisting of several Editors. 1 3Sound4 his parameter indicates the first measure of (1) (5) (6) completely new and original Sound, you can start (2) The configuration of the Editors depends on ose to be deleted. with practically any one you wish, because in the the starting Sound. ssignable values: within the actual limits the editing menus, youll find allof the tools you need. ong. The parameter linkedtoto the EDIT previous Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled. You can is choose enter SOUND either with Allor thewith measures after the delete point shift towards the ne, which canabe modified if the measures besolod Sound (SOLO button LED on), beginning ween the deletion point and the of the Performanceof the song. two start or more tracks of end the current ong are less than those shown in Measures. active. This second option allows you to listen to the Sound currently in edit together with other active tracks of the Performance to give you an idea of what your edited Sound is like when combined with other Sounds. Once you enter EDIT SOUND, you cannot activate or deactivate the SOLO button; you must set the SOLO button according to your requirements before entering Edit Sound.

Edit Sound - main menu

24 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 213

TEMPORARY ESCAPE FROM EDIT SOUND

Thanks to multitasking, you can temporarily escape Edit Sound by pressing the SYNTH button or ESCAPE. The Sound remains in edit and the selected track of the current Performance plays the Sound in its modified status. To return to the sound in edit press SYNTH again. If you attempt to select a Song, Style, Performance or Sound while the sound is still in edit, the display will show the following message:

THE EDIT SOUND MAIN MENU

The configuration of the Editors changes according to the Algorithm selected, but the basic functions remain the same.
Waveform Volume Amplitude envelope Selects the Wave sample (the fundamental waveform). Volume of the Sound. Some situations also include a Balance editor. Varies the sounds volume over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Envelopes, a Tracking curve and some situations include an Env. Balance editor. Modifies the Sounds timbre, attenuating or enhancing certain frequencies, such as in an equalizer. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, Filter CutOff tracking and Filter Envelope tracking curves.

Filter

Press either ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window, press SYNTH to return to the Edit, then press EXIT or SAVE to escape permanently.

PERMANENT ESCAPE WITHOUT SAVING

To escape EDIT SOUND permanently, use the EXIT option, (F6), in the main Edit Sound menu. An Are you sure dialog appears requesting confirmation of the Exit command. Further confirmation of the Exit command with Enter escapes EDIT SOUND permanently and cancels all modifications made to the Sound prior to escaping the Edit. To escape permanently without losing the modifications, use the SAVE option (F8) explained under the section entitled Storing Sounds towards the end of this chapter.

Pitch envelope Variation of the Sounds Pitch over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Pitch envelopes and a Tracking curve. LFO Low Frequency Oscillator to provide Modulation. Generates cyclic variations in the amplitude or in the cutoff frequency of the filters. Position of the Sound within the Stereophonic panorama. It is possible to program the Key On and Key Off Pan envelope and the Tracking curve.

Pan

214 Reference Guide

NOTE OFF QUANTIZATION LAYERS The main Menu offers several options which can theThe Determines Note Off quantize value. Samewhen you enter first thing you need to know, be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons as Note On. the EDIT SOUND menu to edit a sound, is that OTE ON QUANTIZATION See alsovalues. page 2.38 for further explaall SK760/880SE sounds are created using eietermines the(F1F8). Note On quantize nations. NOTE RANGE FROM... therTO... 1, 2 or 3 LAYERS. After entering EDIT look at the extreme Determines theSOUND, highest and lowest note rangeleft to column of the alue Quantization Activates the program which is able Sample Edit Sound menu showing instruthree Soft options. quantize. To quantize a single percussive Translator to read samples from previous 4 ment of the Drum track, assign the same note to Generalmusic Series instruments (S, 8 the highest and lowest limit. For example, to WX, SX) and disk-based samples of quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to 12 triplet various formats. Also permits the reNote range from D2 to D2. ception and transmission of samples 16 via Midi and the creation of new values: C-1 ... G9. Assignable
triplet Waveforms. Sample Translator is discussed separately on page 2.44.

UANTIZE PARAMETERS THE MAIN MENU OPTIONS

24

32 Algorithm triplet (1/64) Layer Utility (1/64 triplet)

48

tion. Either 1, 2 or all 3 ofcan these that requires quantizing. Only measures be options will be selected. This tells you how many layers the 96 current sound made Assignable values: within the is limits of from. the Song. ee no quantization Layer Range Sets the velocity and key ranges for Layer can be activated It is not possible to specify a point after (L) the and end muted (M) by 8 B...F* (swing) each layer allowing you to create of the Song. toggling between the L and M status with the corsplits and velocity switching between 16 B...F* (swing) responding Soft button (A1, B2, C3). Muting a layers. ee no quantization layer can be useful when you want to hear only Exit Escapes definitely from the Edit of the layer which youre currently editing without the Sound. listening to the others. B F indicate an adjustmentAllows of the swing Save you tofeel. save your modified If an option shows the letters XX, this simply Sound to the SK760/880SE Sound means that the Sound in edit does not comprise Library (RAM) and escapes from Edit that particular layer. Sound definitely. So what actually is a layer ? In simple terms, a Compare Available in all Edit pages, Compare layer is a sound. In fact, many of the SK760/ temporarily assigns the original parameter status of the current edit 880SE sounds are created using only one layer. page to the Sound in edit to compare When more complex sounds are needed, up to the Sound before and after the modithree layers can be combined together to form a fications. Pressing Compare actisingle sound. Since the process required to edit vates two new commands: one layer is exactly the same as for another, the Copy (F7) Copies the recalled paexplanations in this section concentrate only on rameter status to the Sound in edit, editing a single layer. Creating multi-layer sounds cancelling all the modifications made is a relatively simple process once you know how in the current edit page and escapes to edit a single layer. from Compare mode.
Allows you to Create, Import or Deselected. lete layers as required. Compare exit (F8) Escapes from Compare and retains the modifications made to the sound in the current edit page.

64

Allows you to choose one of the 5 which selected inthe any Edit Sound situaDetermines the start can and be end point of part Algorithms available.

FROM LOCATOR... These TO LOCATOR... are the layer select options (L1, L2, L3)

22 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 215

THE ALGORITHMS
Layers can also be of different types - single waveform or dual waveform. Each layer is elaborated by an associated Algorithm of synthesis. An Algorithm is the signal path of a sample to the audio outputs, through a series of processing functions that you select during the course of the editing tasks. The processing functions which you assign during the various editing stages are the synthesis tools (oscillators, filters, amplitude envelopes, etc.). While you cannot change the path of an Algorithm, you can choose from a selection of 5 different Algorithms, each representing a fixed signal path, and assign a wide variety of processing functions to the individual stages of the algorithms path. The following graphical representations illustrate the signal path of the Algorithms.

SINGLE

A Volume, Amplitude envelope, Filter and Pitch envelope for one waveform only.

DUAL 1

Separate Volume, Amp Envelope, Filter and Pitch Envelope for each waveform.

DUAL 2

As above but the two filters are in series and common to both waveforms.

DUAL 3

Volume and Amp. Envelopes are common while Filters are separater for each waveform.

DUAL 4

Everything is common to both waveforms.

216 Reference Guide

FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start measure and end measure of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot OPY MODE specified. WAVE VECTOR: Allows you to choose a wave all Algorithms. Singlethe activatesbe a single etermines theValid copyfor mode. Merge unites Assignable within the limits of the Song. Waveform editor whileat all Dual Algorithms acti- values: vector: opied events to those already present the desIt is not possible to specify a measure after the vate Waveform 1 andthe Waveform nation. Replace substitutes events 2. Forward : reads the wave from the start point to end of the Song. esent at the destination with editor those gains copied. The Waveform access to the fundathe end; mental control parameters of the Waveform which ptions: Merge, Replace. Reverse: reads the wave from end to start point; is the basic waveform of the sound. START LOCATOR Alternate 1: reads the wave from start point to Determines thethe new position theto copied part. and repeats end, loops of back the beginning OM TRACK... TO TRACK... continually; Assignable values: any point, even after the end pecifies the source and destination track of the point of the Song. Alternate 2: a variation of Alternate 1. opy. The From track... part is selected with e Soft buttons A ... H. The To track... part is TUNING MODE: Assigns the Waveform to a odified with the DIAL. COPY TIMES specific note of the keyboard. Assignable valssignable values: any track (1...32). Specifies the number of consecutive copies. ues: Normal, A0C8. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one Normal transposes the wave according to the ends. SONG... note 1...998. played. Assignable values: etermines the destination Song for the copy. If Assigning a note (A0C8) fixes the Wave to the THE is WAVEFORM PARAMETERS e selected Song non existent, it will be cresame note across the entire keyboard. ed by the act WAVEFORM: of confirming the copy you command. Here can select the basic waveform of the Sound, choosing from the Rom ssignable values: any Song (1...16). TRANSPOSE: Transposes the Waveform in Waveform library, from the Waveforms loaded to semitones. Assignable values: 64 ... +64. 0 memory OTE RANGE FROM... TO... with a disk-based Ram -Sounds, or corresponds to standard pitch. one created with the Sample Translator (see page etermines the2.44). highest and lowest limits of the ote range to copy. To copy a single percussive FINE PITCH: Fine tunes the Waves pitch in steps Select the waveforms sequentially strument from the Drum track, assign the same with the DIAL, of 1/64th of a semitone. Assignable values: 64 referring to the ROM Wave table in the Appendix alue to the from and to parameters. ... +64. 0 corresponds to standard pitch. at first if necessary. or example, to copy the snare (D2), set the paYou can also use Search facilities to look for meter as Note range from D2the to D2. PITCH TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Pitch to a specific waveform. Aftertouch variations. The Pitch of the Sound can ssignable values: C-1 ... G9. be varied by applying pressure on the notes of the keyboard after key on. Assignable values: 7 (lowest sensitivity = 2 semitones) ... +7 (highest sensitivity = +2 semitones). Positive values increase the Pitch while negative ones have the inverse effect.

OPY PARAMETERS

Waveform

Edit Sound - Waveform

WAVESTART: Represents the actual (default) starting point of the wave sample in the instruments memory. Use this parameter to determine the point at which the sample will start its playback.

20 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 217

Depending on the waveform, values above the default starting point may cause the sample to start at a later point, removing some or all of its attack. Values below the default value may cause the sample to start before its normal start point, adding part or all of the samples stored at lower memory addresses. WV. START DYN MODE: Selects the mode in which the Wavestart parameter is linked to key velocity. Disable: not linked to key velocity. Switch: either the entire Wave, or the part of the Wave following the programmed Wave Start is read above or below a certain key velocity setting. Floating: fluctuates the Wave Start according to the key velocity. WV. START DYN SNS: With the Switch mode setting, the value (0127) represents the dynamic switch. Above the dynamic switch setting, the entire Wave is read while below, only the part of the Wave that follows immediately after the programmed Wave Start is considered. Switch assignable values: 0127 If the mode is Floating, the value determines the distance from the point at which the Wave is read at the programmed Wave Start, or towards the end of the Wave. (The Wave is always read from the Wave start setting, not before). With positive values, the higher the key velocity, the nearer the Wave is read at the Wave start setting. Floating assignable values: 7+7.

SCALE MODE: Selects a scale (temperament). Assignable values: 0, 1, 2. Value 0 corresponds to Equal temperament; Value 1 corresponds to 1/4 tone difference between each note; Value 2 corresponds to a 1/16 tone difference between each note.

218 Reference Guide

Move

Volume e Balance
DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the Volume response to velocity variations. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased key velocity, while negative values create the inverse effect. 0 = no response. VOLUME TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links Volume response to Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. Positive values increase the Volume with increased aftertouch pressure, while negative values create the inverse effect with increased aftertouch. 0 = no response.

hifts events from one point of the selected track VOLUME another. Valid for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 activate Volume 1 and Volume 2, Dual 3 and Dual 4 ARAMETERS share a single Volume editor with a Balance control. Volume editor controls the volume of a sinOM LOCATOR... The TO LOCATOR... gle waveform, or the volume of two waveforms etermines thewith start end point of the part aand Balance control (Dual 3 to & 4). This funcove. It is possible to specify the measure, beat tion corresponds to the maximum volume level nd resolution (tick). available of the Sound in any situation. ssignable values: within the limits of the Song. s not possible to specify a point before the start after the end of the Song.

ART LOCATOR etermines the new position of the part that is to e moved. ssignable values: any point of the song.

THE VOLUME PARAMETERS

VOLUME: Sets the Volume of waveform 1 or 2. If the Algorithm comprises the Balance editor, this controls the general volume of the layer. Assignable values: 0 127.

Edit Sound - Volume

Edit Sound - Balance

18 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 219

VOLUME TRACKING (F2)

Valid for all Algorithms. Tracking allows you to determine how the volume varies across the keyboard. Here you can enhance the presence of a sound more or less across the keyboard in order to simulate to a greater degree that which occurs in reality. For example, an acoustic piano can reach a higher sound level in the bass region, while the higher notes are less intensive.

POINT, KEY, LEVEL

The Tracking curve can be defined using the 3 display parameters, Point, Key and Level. Point: Corresponds to one of the extreme ends of a segment. Point 1 represents the lowest note of the keyboard. The highest note of the keyboard is represented by the last Point (depending on the number of segments inserted). Key: Defines the note at the selected Point. The extreme points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. Level: The value of this parameter is a relative value which represents the change in volume with respect to the actual setting of the Volume function. Assignable values: 0 127 A level of 0 corresponds to the maximum setting of the Volume function and all other values are negative. A value of 127 corresponds to 0 volume at the note defined by the selected Point. A straight line running from point 1 to point 2 corresponds to the lowest possible resolution. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

SEGMENT (F6)
Using the SEGMENT option, you can divide the Tracking curve into several different segments, in order to obtain a more refined Tracking across the keyboard.

1 Segm: The Tracking curve is essential, representing a constant Volume offset across the keyboard. The parameter Key cannot be modified.. 3 Segm: The Tracking curve consists of 3 segments which allow the construction of a situation offering different variations across the keyboard. 6 Segm: The Tracking curve is divided into many parts (maximum resolution); allowing a more complex programming of the Volume offsets across the keyboard.

220 Reference Guide

Erase

BALANCE
Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms onlY.

BALANCE TRACKING (F2)

Balance Tracking allows you to program a Balance offset, or the variation of the Balance (programmed in the Balance page) across the keyboard.

ancels the events from a single track or from all acks.

OFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8

se the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track om which events will be cancelled. Depending n the type of track selected, the following pameters may or may not appear.

THE BALANCE PARAMETERS

Balances the Volume Track (F3) BALANCE: - Single track. Select the track of the two oscillators ofA...H. the current layer. Assignable values: with the Soft buttons 127 ... +127. Master track (F4) - The Master Track records Positive values render controls the first Waveform louder, events pertaining to the general of negative values enhanceselected the second Waveform. the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, Performance, selected effects). BALANCE DYN. Chords track (F5) - Track forSENSITIVITY: the chord sym- Links the Balance response bols inserted in the score. to key velocity variations. Value range: 7 ... +7. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the Positive values enhance the presence of the first score (standard notation). Waveform with increased key velocity while negaLyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the tive values enhance the presence of the second score. Waveform with increased key velocity. 0 = no All tracks (F8) . response. BALANCE TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the

The option and parameters used to shape the Balance tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those explained for the Volume Tracking on page 2.20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

RASE PARAMETERS Balance response to aftertouch variations. Value

range: 7 ... +7. ENT TYPE Positive values enhance the presence of the first elects the type of event to cancel (only for the Waveform with increased Aftertouch pressure acks containing recorded events). while negative values enhance the presence of the second Waveform with increased Aftertouch UPLICATE NOTE pressure. 0 = no response.

iminates the note with the lowest velocity value hen two notes of the same pitch start at the ame position. ptions: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, ono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, rogramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ontrolChange 64...127.

16 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 221

PROGRAMMING A TRACKING ENVELOPE

1. Press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window, select 3 or 6 segments with the down ( ) cursor arrow and press ENTER to confirm. 3. Select the KEY parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.

Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the Key parameter Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: add 3 segments

2. Rotate the DIAL to select the Point that you wish to modify.

4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the required value.

Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the Point parameter

Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the Level parameter

222 Reference Guide

EDIT SONG OPTIONS Edit Song Amplitude Envelope & THE Balance Envelope

UNDO (F2) for all Algorithms. Dual 1 and Dual 2 actiWhenis this parameter is in not set to Off, the last When this parameter selected (shown negater recording Valid a Song using either the RECORD the REC Amp. method, Envel. 1 it and Amp. 2 highlight), edisegment of the Key On Envelope sets to 0 autotive the UNDO function is enabled. ethod or the vate QUICK can be Envel. Dual 3 and 4 share an Amp. Envelope matically and cannot be modified; Undo cancels the last operation or series of op- this is to preodified using tors; the functions of Dual the EDIT SONG with a Balance control. vent the sound from playing continually after reerations carried out. This function consumes ENU. The Amplitude Envelope represents the volume lease due to deactivated exactly the same amount ofthe RAM memory Key as Off Envelope. displacement of the Sound over time. the Song. If there Assignable values:of Off, A0 C8. is a shortage memory in NTERING EDITThis SONG editor allows you to program the RAM, Key On it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. elect the Song you wish the to modify. Envelope, Key Off Envelope and the EnveSEGMENT 1 RATE SENS.: Segment Press the UNDO panel button to DYNAMIC execute the lope Tracking. In practice, the Key On desired and Key 1 corresponds to the Attack phase. This paramess the ST/SONG button (in the Edit/Numbers Undo operation. Off Envelopes correspond to the traditional ADSR eter ties the Attack rate of the Sound to key veection) to gain access to the EDIT SONG paparameters (Attack, Decay, Sustain, Release). locity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. meters. Positive values increase the Attack rate with increased key velocity while negative values produce the inverse effectto with increased key velocYou will be prompted with a request confirm ity. 0 = no response. the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

KEY OFF RATE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links the response of the Key Off Envelope rate to the release velocity. The Key Off Envelope corresponds to the Release phase. Assignable valntering this section the first time opens the main THE AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE PARAMETERS ues: 7 ... +7. enu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, e last page selected is recalled. ENVELOPE FINISH: Determines the note from is disabled, Positive values increase the completion speed If UNDO pressing the UNDO button which the Key Off envelope cannot interrupt the of the ENTER Key Off activates Envelope the with increased key reand confirming with folAmp. envelope on its natural course tolowing complelease velocity, while negative values slow down E EDIT SONG MENU user message: indispensable simulate, for example, the the completion speed with increased key release he Edit Song tion, menu contains 10 to Song Editing acoustic piano where no dampers are applied velocity. 0 = no response. nctions: from the note A6 onwards; the sound continues ase, Move, Copy, Quantize, Insert Measure, indefinitely after release. SUSTAIN (F5) elete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, MicroThis parameter fixes a sustain level independent ope, Master Track. of the release envelope. Activation of this pahree options are also available: Undo, Edit rameter on and the repeat status of the Sustain Press ESCAPE to closedepends the window core and Song name. function. the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled. Press soft button F5 to activate Sustain (shown CAPE FROM EDIT SONG in negative highlight). Press again to deactivate o escape from EDIT SONG press ESCAPE EDIT SCORE (F6) Sustain. nce or twice, depending on the currently seOpens the Score Edit function. page Assignable values:Turn 0 to 127. cted level). 6.33 Score and Edit Score for explanations reo escape without closing the edit page, press garding this function. e EDIT button. To pass to another edit envinment, use the +/ PAGE buttons ( ).
Edit Sound - Amplitude Envelope (single)

14 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 223

AMPLITUDE KEY ON AND KEY OFF ENVELOPES

The Key On Envelope is a 10 segment curve (maximum) that represents the variation of the sounds volume for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed. The Amplitude Key Off Envelope is a 10 segment curve (maximum) that represents the variation of the sound after the notes have been released. This envelope phase is often called Release. Examples of a Key On and a Key Off Amplitude Envelope are shown below.

Add Segm: Inserts a new segment immediately after the currently selected segment. A maximum of up to 10 segments is permitted. Del Segm: Cancels the current segment. IMPORTANT: The Key On Envelope must have at least one segment, (the Attack phase), which cannot be cancelled. Loop Segm: Loops the current segment (envelope repetition), provided that the Envelope Finish parameter in the Envelope control page is set to OFF. When it reaches the terminal point, it loops back to the beginning. The cycle repeats continually until key release. The initial Loop point is represented by an arrow [ ] To eliminate the loop, select the segment and select Del Segm..

ZOOM (F7)
Using the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field of vision of the envelope up to 4 times at a selected Point. Pressing the soft button repeatedly selects the Zoom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 0 corresponds to actual size.

SEGMENT (F6)
The SEGMENT option, common to both Key On and Key Off Balance Envelopes, allows you to divide the Envelope into several different segments to create some interesting Key On and Key Off effects. A Loop feature is also available.

SEGMENT, TIME, LEVEL

The Envelope Key On and Key Off Envelopes can be defined using the 3 display parameters, Segment, Time and Level. Segment: Allows you to select the segments with the Dial. The one selected corresponds to the flashing terminal point. Time: Determines the duration of the Segment.

Edit Sound - Ampl. Envelope mostrando segmento 4 impostato con un Loop. In pratica, il Volume inizia a 0, ascende alla prima vetta di segmento 1 (fase di attacco), scende al segmento 2, ascende alla vetta di segmento 3, scende di nuovo a segmento 4 poi ritorna alla vetta di segmento 3 e ripete di continuo fino al rilascio di tasto.

Edit Sound - Amp. Key Off Envelope

224 Reference Guide

fect - To record The the maximum changes segment of the effects time isasapproximately PLAY/REC 21 MODE IMPORTANT gned to the Performance seconds. Assignable and respective values: effect 0 ... 127. Recording and playback The initial level ofthe the first Key On segment options for Song. olume levels. These events are captured as the starting point always zero (it cannot Linear causes the at Song to play or be is recorded C16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see Appendix). Level: Sets the Sound level of the segment at from the beginning be modified). once only, to the point at which its terminal point. The maximum level correettings: On, Off. you press STOP. The level at the terminal point of the Key Off sponds to the volume programmed in the VolEnvelope is always cannot be modiForced Stop causes the song to play zero or be(it reume editor. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. LECT ALL TRACKS (F4) fied). start locator to the end corded from the specified ctivates all the tracks for recording and the palocator. meter changes name to DESELECT ALL Loop allows you play or example record inof a how cyclic An to illustrated to program Key RACKS. This resets all the tracks in key-play manner from the Start point the End point. On & Key Offto Envelopes is shown below. seq-play status. Note: The loop requires an additional memory buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory OUND VIEW (F5) progress bar shows an increased amount of used PROGRAMMING KEY ON AND KEY OFF ENVELOPES ecalls the SOUND VIEW page where you can memory. ee the changes that you may want to make to 3. Select the TIME parameter with the down ( ) 1. tracks. To insert a segment, press F6 to open the e Performance START

cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set the SEGMENT selection window and press ENTER Starting indicator. If Loop value. is active (Play/Rec required (shown ME/TEMPO (F6) to confirm the Add Segm optionMode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at selected). ecalls the TIME/TEMPO page where you can
which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.

ogram the record/play parameters.

ASE... (F7) ancellation of the track or Song. ack - Cancels the selected track. ong - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song) and aves an empty Song, ready to capture reorded events. The Song Performance remains Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: add 1 segment tact.

END End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the repeating song ends before looping back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec Edit Sound Key On Envelope: modify the Mode=Forced Stop, this- parameter indicates theTime parameter automatic Stop point. 4. Select the LEVEL parameter with the down The segparameter can(be) modified with the cursor arrow andDIAL. rotate the DIAL to set 2. Rotate the DIAL to select the envelope ETRONOME (F8) ment that you wish to modify. If necessary, the required value. TIME SIGNATURE ctivates/deactivates usethe themetronome. ZOOM option to zoom in on the seMetro. This parameter can be modified only belected segment. fore starting a recording. If the Song contains C recorded events, the parameter cannot be modihe Song Locator. Indicates the current position fied. the Song, expressed in measures, beats and solution (tick). TEMPO he measure can be modified with the DIAL. It Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter not possible to select the next measure after can be modified with the DIAL in the Sound e Song end point. For example, if the recorded Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: modify the Level parameter View or Time/Tempo page, or in the Master ong terminates at measure 10, the Locator canTrack. ot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1. Edit Sound - Key On Envelope: select a segment Tempo changes can be carried out during the

12 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 225

AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE TRACKING

The tracking curve represents the change in the completion velocity of the Amplitude Envelope across the keyboarD.

BALANCE ENVELOPE
Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms only. The Balance Envelope corresponds to a mixer for the two oscillators which share a single Amplitude Envelope.

The tools used to shape the Amplitude Envelope tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key, Level), are identical to the Volume Tracking tools. Note, however, that the Level option determines the Key On or Key Off envelope completion velocity offset across the keyboard. Positive values increase the completion velocity, negative values slow it down. 0 corresponds to the standard duration of the segments programmed in the previous pages. Assignable values: -63 0+63. The Key On and Key Off Envelope completion velocity can be faster or slower across the note range of acoustic instruments. For example, the bass notes of a piano or an acoustic guitar sound for a longer period than the high notes. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

BALANCE ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS

BALANCE ENVELOPE: Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the Balance envelope. Assignable values: On, Off. BALANCE ENV. AM. SENSITIVITY: Depth of the action of the Amplitude envelope on Balance. The envelope is activated by the Balance Envelope parameter above. Positive values increase the depth of the action of the envelope on Balance while negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. BALANCE ENV. DYN. SENSITIVITY: Links the

Edit Sound - Balance Envelope (Dual 3)

226 Reference Guide

Balance envelope response to key velocity variThe Record ations.method Positive values increase the response of the BalPress the SONG button to open the Song Banks ance envelope with increased key velocity while window. negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.

BALANCE ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

The Balance Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 segment curves (maximum), allowing you to enhance the presence of one Waveform with respect to the other in the key on and key release situations. The Key On Envelope represents the variation of the Balance for the entire duration that the notes are held pressed.

KEY OFF BALANCE ENV. RATE DYN. SENS.: Links the response of the key off Balance envelope completion velocity to key velocity variations. Here you can program a number of recordPositive values increase the completion velocity ing parameters before starting. Refer to the of the Key Off Balance envelope with increased section entitled Time/Tempo on page 6.12. key velocity while negative values have the inSelect an empty location (User). 5. 0A verse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. = track no will already be selected for the recordYou are prompted to select a recording mode ing shown by the record icon: effect. to create a New song.

Press Record, (F1) to enter Song Record mode. The LED of the RECORD panel button lights up and the display shows the Sound View page in negative highlight with the first track active for recording.

The Key Off Envelope represents the variation the Balance after the notes If you want of to record a different track, simplyhave been released. select it. To place all the tracks in record, press SELECT ALL TRACKS (F4). All the tracks will be activated for recording and the parameter changes to DESELECT ALL TRACKS. 6. To change sounds, select the Sound View option by pressing F5. It will not be necessary to store the changes in the Song Performance. They will be automatically stored. The options and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope (Zoom, Segment, Time and 7. To record with or without the Metronome press are (F8) identical used for the Amplithe relative Level), soft button and to setthose it accordtude Key On/Key Off Envelope explained on page ingly. 2..24. 8. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown ON, waitexample for the countdown An is illustrated of how to program a Key to finish before playing (events are re- on the page On & Key Off Envelopes not appears corded during this phase). 2.25. 9. Start to play after the countdown. Events will be recorded in the track or tracks active for recording.

Entering Song Record activates a default Song Performance. You can program your Song Performances just like the other Performances (Global and Style). Refer to the Performance chapter, page 3.1 for specific information regarding Performance programming tasks. If you want to program the recording options, press the Time/Tempo button (F6).

10 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 227

BALANCE ENVELOPE TRACKING

The Balance Tracking allows you to vary the Balance setting across the keyboard.

The option and parameters used to shape the Balance Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

228 Reference Guide

he MIDI file starts to play directly from the source SEARCH S.M.F. (F7) Filter sk. Press STOP to stop the MIDI File playback This button open a Search window where you any point. can specify the name or the first few letters of a Assignable values: Off, Low Pass, High Pass, Valid for all Algorithms. he MIDI FILE PLAYER display offers several specific MIDI File, useful for searching on the Band Pass, Parametric boost, Parametric cut. The Dual 1 and Dual 3 algorithms have two Disk. Filptions. Hard ters connected in parallel [Filter os. 1, Filter os. CUTOFF FREQUENCY: Sets a value for the TheDISK Dual 2 and Dual 4 algorithms have two OPPY DISK (F1)2]. - HARD (F2) Cutoff Frequency, or the frequency at which the Filters connected in series [Filter 1, Filter 2]. hese two buttons select the source storage defilter intervenes. The Cutoff Frequency is the Filters enhance or attenuate certain frequencies ce where MIDI Files are located. same for all the notes of a Sound, unless you of the Waveforms. The sound changes accordprogramme Filter Tracking. ing to the type of filter selected. The SK760/ ELODY ON/OFF (F3) Assignable values: 0 ... 191. 880SE filters are 2 pole filters with roll off curves elect this option to dB deactivate the melody line at 12 per octave. RESONANCE: resonance to the Cutoff the Song currently in playback. When the Insertpathe characters using the Applies keyboard and If both filters are programmed with identical press ENTER to frequency, confirm. creating a peak of emphasis at the elody is deactivated, the option changes to rameter values, they become a single 4 pole filCutoff frequency. A high value of resonance can ELODY OFF (in negative highlight) and you can ter with a roll off curve of 24 dB per octave, perplace the filter on auto-oscillation, producing a ay the melody yourself on the keyboard. EXIT (F8) fect for those classic analog synth sounds. whistling harmonics. o activate the melody line, press the MELODY EXIT to escapesound from rich thein MIDI FILE Some additional information regardingPress Filters Assignable Values: 0 ... 127. FF option (F3). PLAYER. is on page 2.43 of this chapter. CUTOFF DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the Cutoff Frequency to Key On Velocity. Positive values increase the Cutoff Frequency by playing harder (the filter opens resulting in a brighter sound), negative values produce the inverse effect (the filter closes and the sound becomes dull). Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. RESONANCE DYNAMIC SENS.: Links Resonance to Key On Velocity. Positive values enhance the Resonance with increased key velocity while negative values give the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. CUTOFF TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the Cutoff Frequency to Aftertouch. Positive values increasingly open the filters with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect.

ALANCE (F4) his option opens a KEYBOARD BALANCE winow where you can adjust the BALANCE beeen the keyboard sounds and the sequencer.

FILTER CONTROL PARAMETERS

TYPE: Selects the Filter type. Off deactivates the filter.

otate the DIAL to adjust the Balance.

OUND VIEW (F5) - PLAY VIEW (F6) hese two buttons toggle between the Sound ew and Play View displays. The PlayView disay offers the same playback parameters shown the Song PlayView display.

Edit Sound - Filter

8 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 229

RESONANCE TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the Resonance to Aftertouch. Positive values increases the amount of Resonance applied with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values have the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... 0 +7. 0 = no effect. FILTER ENVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the envelope for the Filter in edit and sets the depth of action of the Filter envelope. The envelope consists of two parts: Filter Key On Envelope and the Filter Key Off Envelope. Negative values invert the Filter Envelope. Assignable values: 10 ... +10. FILT. ENV AMOUNT DYN. SENS.: Links the depth of action of the Filter envelope to changes in key velocity. Positive values enhance the depth of action of the Filter envelope with increased key velocity, negative values produce the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. 0 = no effect. FILT. ENV AMNT. TOUCH. SENS.: Links the depth of action of the Filter envelope to changes in Aftertouch pressure. Positive values enhance the depth of action of the Filter envelope with increased Aftertouch pressure, negative values produce the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. 0 = no effect.

FILTER CUTOFF TRACKING

Valid for All Algorithms. The Filter Cutoff Tracking curve allows you to vary the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard, in order that it does not remain fixed for all the notes of a Sound, but moves according to the note played.

The options and parameters used to shape the Filter Cutoff Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Key and Level), are identical to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

230 Reference Guide

You can fill FILTER the listENVELOPE in a singleKEY stepON using the OFF THE PRELOAD FUNCTIONS & KEY FILTER ENVELOPE TRACKING Select All function (F7). Valid for all Algorithms. Starting with the Valid Time/Tempo for all Algorithms. display, press To replace a file inserted into the list by misPRELOAD to all the options availTheaccess Filter Envelope Tracking curve, valid both The Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes are 10 to gain take, select the name to replace, then select able which you can select with the soft buttons for the Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, insegment curves (maximum). the file that you want to insert and press ENF1F8. creases or reduces the speed of action of the The Key On envelope represents the variation of TER. Filter envelope across the keyboard. the Filter cutoff frequency for the entire duration Press F8 (Play) to start the playback of the FLOPPY DISK (F1) that the notes are held pressed. Songs in the list. Selects the floppy disk. After short disk scanning period, the first Song (or Midi file) on the disk starts to play. If HARD DISK (F2) Preload engages the Hard Disk, the first song Selects the Hard disk (if installed). of the first Block found containing Songs will start to play. During playback, the backAUTO PRELOAD (F3) ground loading procedure for the second When this option is selected (negative highlight), song begins (the message Preloading Song Theinto options and together parameters Songs are loaded memory withused all to shape the appears for an instant). The Key Off envelope controls Filter variations Balance Envelope curve, (Segment, associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Tracking Sounds. If after releasing the notes. Point, Key and Level), are there is not sufficient memory in RAM to identical accept to those used for the Volume Tracking curve explained on page the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used 20. may playback incorrectly. instead and the2. Song If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the During playback, press PRELOAD to open Songs associated An illustrated RAM-Sounds example of and how RAM to program a Trackthe TIME/TEMPO display where you can seSounds will not ing be curve loaded. is on page 2. 22. lect a track and set it to key-play in order to play along with the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will. RESET LIST (F4) Cancels the current list and stops the playback The options and parameters used to shape instantly. the Filter Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Segment, Time and Level), are identical to those PLAYused ALL SONGS (F5) for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope exSelect this option to automatically play all the plained on page 2..24. Songs or Midi files contained in a disk without first loading the data into RAM memory. After pressing An illustrated example of how to program Key Preload with a disk inserted in the drive, Playback continues non-stop until all the select PLAY ALL SONGS (F5) and press On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25. Songs or MIDI Files on disk, or in the enPRELOAD twice. After a short scanning period, gaged Hard disk Block, have been played. the first available Song (or MidiFile) will start to Press STOP only if you want to stop playplay. Playback will continue non-stop until all the back, otherwise you will cancel the Preload Songs (or Midi files) on disk have been played. operation. SONG/SMF (F6) Use this option to select the type of file to insert in the list. The current type being handled is shown in capital letters. If, for example, the type

6 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 231

Pitch Envelope
Valid for all Algorithms. The Dual options activate separate Pitch Envelopes for the two waveforms of each layer (Pitch Envelope Os. 1 and Pitch Envelope Os. 2). The tuning (pitch) of the waveforms can vary over time, thanks to Pitch Envelope which is divided into two parts: the Pitch Key On Envelope and the Pitch Key Off Envelope. DYNAMIC RATE: Sensitivity of the Pitch Envelope to key velocity variations. With positive values, increasing the key velocity (playing harder) speeds up the Envelope development (the completion velocity). Negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Value range: -7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action. ENV. AMOUNT TOUCH SENS.: Links the depth of action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Env. Amount setting) to variations of Aftertouch pressure. Positive settings increase the velocity of the action with increased aftertouch pressure. Negative settings create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of aftertouch. ENV. AMOUNT DYN. SENS.: Links the depth of action of the Pitch Envelope (defined in the Env. Amount setting) to variations of key velocity. Positive settings increase the velocity of action with increased key velocity. Negative settings create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action.

PITCH ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS

ENVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the Pitch envelope and sets the depth of the Pitch to apply to the oscillator. The maximum value corresponds to a Pitch excursion of 2 semitones. Negative values invert the Pitch Envelope. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of the envelope.

Edit Sound - Pitch Envelope

232 Reference Guide

ART PITCH ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF JUKEBOX PITCH ENVELOPE TRACKING his parameterThe sets the start measure and can Pitch Key On and Key Off Envelopes The are Jukebox 10 function The Pitch chains Envelope the songs Tracking of your curve, valid both nly be modified when the Play mode is set to segment maximum) curves. choice and plays forthem the Key back On as and a medley Key Off envelopes, with a increases OOP. With LOOP selected, the START paramsingle command. or reduces the speed of action of the Pitch enveThe Key On envelope regulates the Pitch for the er shows the starting point of the Loop. Prolope across the(F1) keyboard. entire duration that the notes are held pressed. Select the JUKEBOX button in the Time/ ammable in Song playback mode and Record Tempo page. The display shows two columns: ode. on the left appears a list of Songs in memory while on the right is the Jukebox list. D his parameter sets the end measure and can nly be modified when the Play mode is set to ORCED STOP or LOOP. With LOOP selected, TART shows the point at which the sequence nds before looping to the Start locator. With The back Key Off envelope controls Pitch variations ORCED STOP selected, START indicates the after releasing the notes. The options and parameters used to shape the utomatic Stop point. Programmable in Song Pitch Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, ayback mode and Record mode. The negative highlight cursor shows which song Key and Level), are identical to those used for is selected in the Song list. The frame on the the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. ME SIGNATURE (PROGRAMMABLE WITH AN EMPTY right shows the20. destination in the Jukebox list. ONG) Select a Song from the left part to include in the his parameter can only be modified before reJukebox list and press the INSERT button, (F5) An illustrated example of how to program a Trackording the Song. or ENTER, to insert the Song in the list. ing curve is on page 2. 22.

ART TEMPO (PROGRAMMABLE WHEN THE SONG IS OFF) The options and parameters used to shape the his sets the starting tempo of a Song and can Pitch Key Off Envelopes, nly be modified when theOn/Key Song is off. The value (Zoom, SegTime and identical the setting isment, recorded in theLevel), Masterare Track, as to those used for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope exe Start Parameter. plained on page 2..24.

ONG MEMORY (NOT PROGRAMMABLE) Repeat the selection procedure for other Songs Andimensions illustrated example of in how to program Pitch hows the Song expressed Kilopress INSERT (or ENTER) each time to comKeyis On & Key Off Envelopes appears on and the page ytes. Each Song limited to 400 kb of memory, pile the list. dependent of 2.25. the memory remaining in the SysIf you want to substitute one of the names in the m RAM. Jukebox list, move to the right part of the display, select the name to change, move back to the left, select another Song and press INSERT (or ENTER). Now return to the right and select a new location for the next Song. When you have compiled the list, press EX-

4 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 233

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

A single Low Frequency Oscillator generator for all Algorithms. The LFOs depth of action on the Pitch, Amplitude and Filter is independently programmable for each oscillator. LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source. It produces a low speed waveform (low frequency) that can be applied to various aspects of the sound to cause patterns of cyclic change. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO can be used to create effects like Tremolo (cyclic amplitude modulation), Vibrato (cyclic pitch modulation) or, for example, Wah-wah (applied to the filter cutoff-frequency). You can choose from the following waves: Sinus, Triangle; Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold.

RATE: Determines the velocity of the LFO. Assignable values: 1 ... 200. DELAY: Determines the delay before the entry of the LFO. Entry of the LFO is gradual. Value range: 0 ... 64. SYNC: When set to ON, the LFO is Synchronized for all the notes played. When set to MIDI, the LFO is tied to the MIDI Clock. Assignable values: Off, On, MIDI. PITCH S.O.1 & S.O.2: Applies LFO to the Pitch to produce a Vibrato effect on the selected oscillator. This parameter determines the modulation depth of LFO on Pitch. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. TOUCH PITCH S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth of the Pitch modulation to Aftertouch pressure. By applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts immediately. Positive and negative values indicate an opposed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.

LFO PARAMETERS
WAVE: Selects the waveform of the low frequency oscillation. Given the low frequency of the oscillation, the waveform is clearly perceptible.

Edit Sound - LFO

234 Reference Guide

Start the playback AMPLITUDE with the S.O.1 PLAY & S.O.2: buttonApplies in Lfo JUKEBOX... to the (F1) TOUCH FILT S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth of the SEQUENCER. Amplitude to produce Tremolo effects. Recalls This pa-the Jukebox the Filter modulation to Aftertouch function (explained after- pressure. By determines thethe modulation of the applying aftertouch pressure to the keys, the DeDuring the rameter playback, the LED on PLAY depth wards). LFO the Amplitude (the output lay parameter is ignored and the oscillation starts button will be onon and the song location point- level). er (LOC) inThe the positive top right and hand negative cornervalues of the indicate an op-(F2) immediately (toggles between open and closed OPTION... filter). display monitors posed the sense position of increase/decrease of the Song. You of theThis Tremolo parameter allows you to set the Metronome can also start output the level SONG (the with choice the between START/ positiveoptions. or negaThe positive and negative values indicate an opSTOP button. tive values give perfectly equivalent results). posed sense of opening and closing, otherCountdown - activates a one measure lead into wise, the choice between a positive or negative Using the PLAY, Higher STOP, positive >> (FORWARD) or negative values and increase the the recording of a sequence during which events value give perfectly equivalent results. Higher << (REWIND) modulation buttons in depth. conjunction with the cannot be captured. Options: On, Off. positive or negative values increase the Filter song position locator, you should be+7. able0 to Assignable values: 7 ... = no effect. Metr. volume modulation - Sets the depth. metronome volume. easily move around from the beginning of Options: Off, 10...127. your song TOUCH to the end and S.O.1 all points in be-Links the depth Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. AMPL. & S.O.2: tween. At any time while a song is playing, of the Amplitude modulation to Aftertouch presSONG P (F4) you can jump forwards or backwards by sure, permitting you to control of the amount of Press this button to select a Song Performance. pressing the >> FORWARD or << (REWIND) Tremolo by varying the aftertouch pressure apbuttons. For a to longer song, holding down plied the keys. these buttons will move rapidly in either diThe Delay parameter is ignored when pressure rection. is applied to the keys and the oscillation starts If you press STOP once, it will pause your immediately. song at the current position. The positive and negative values indicate an opThe LED on the STOP button will flash to in- of the Tremolo posed sense of increase/decrease dicate that output the Song paused. While the levelis (the choice between positive or negasong is paused, you can cue it to any meastive values give perfectly equivalent results). Use the soft buttons to select the required Song ure using the forward (>>) and rewind (<<) Higher positive or negative values increase the Performance. If you select it during the recordbuttons. modulation depth. ing, the event is stored in the Master Track as a When you press PLAY, the song will resume Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. ProgramChange. See Song Performance on from where you are currently paused. page 6.4. If you wantFILTER to take S.O.1 the song back to the be& S.O.2: Applies Lfo to the Cutoff ginning, press the START/STOP button, Frequency of the Filter (1 or 2) toor produceSOUND a WhaVIEW (F5) press STOP again while the STOP LED is Wha effect, caused by the opening and closRecalls the Sound View page, where you can see still flashing. ing of the Filter. This parameter determines the and change the sounds of the current PerformWhen the Song is not playing at its initial modulation depth and of the Lfo on the Cutoff Freance. starting position, the LED on the STOP butquency. ton remains on.positive and negative values indicate an opThe To change posed the Tempo, rotate the DIAL.and closing, othersense of opening the in choice positive or negative This controlwise, is active Songbetween playbackamode value perfectly for changes in thegive playing speedequivalent (tempo). results. Higher positive or negative values increase the Filter modulation depth. ets now examine the options available in the Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. ain Song playback display.

2 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 235

Pan
Valid for all Algorithms. In Dual situations, regardless of whether the Filters are connected in series or in parallel, there is only one pan envelope for both waveforms (oscillators). The position of the sound in the stereo panorama can be controlled dynamically by means of the Pan envelope divided in two parts: the Pan Key On Envelope and the Pan Key Off Envelope. ENV AMOUNT DYN SENSITIVITY: Links the envelope amount to key velocity variations. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. ENV. AMOUNT TOUCH SENS.: Links the envelope amount to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. PAN DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to key velocity variations. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the key velocity while negative values act inversely with increased key velocity. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. PAN TOUCH SENSITIVITY: Links the sensitivity of the Pan envelope to variations in the Aftertouch pressure. Positive values move the sound further right by increasing the Aftertouch pressure, while negative values act inversely with increased Aftertouch. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response.

PAN ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS

ENVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the Pan Envelope and determines its depth of action. Assignable values: 0 7. 0 = no envelope.

Edit Sound - Pan

236 Reference Guide

A1...A6 of Variation 2 and you want to mask A4, PAN ENVELOPE TRACKING A5 and A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation The Pan Key On and Key Off Envelopes are 10 The Pan Envelope Tracking curve, valid both for 2, program the first two lines as follows: segment maximum) curves. the Key On and Key Off envelopes, modifies the he Mask function allows you to program the Barelative position of the sound across the keyboard The Key On envelope regulates the Pan for the V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6 c elements of two Variations (Var 2 and 4) in extension with respect to the central point. For entire duration that the notes are held pressed. der to automatically obtain the Basic elements V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off example, the sound in the bass section may be the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3). further to the left while in the treble section, it he Basic Variation 2 generates the Basics of may be further to the right. DRUM MASK (F7/F8) ariations 1 and 2. The Basic Variation 4 generOpens the Drum mask dialog window. es the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain As in the Mask function for the Arrangement e best results, program your Variations with all tracks, the Drum Mask excludes individual peraccompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well cussive sounds from the Drum tracks of the Varis Drums and Bass. ations. he idea is to reduce your Style recording times Pan variations The Key Off envelope controls Four keyboards (or drumkits) appear in the diay recording 2 after Variations andthe exploit the autoreleasing notes. log window, each representing the Drum track atic features to create a Style with 4 Variations. (DR) of the four different variations. hen, using the Arranger Tracks function, mask The options parameters Select the variation with theand cursor buttons used / . to shape the ne or two accompaniment sections in one or Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, Point, Play the notes Pitch corresponding to the percussion o Variation to reduce the instrumental content and them Level), are the identical to those used for instruments to Key exclude from selected the respective accompaniments. the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. variation. he Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be 20. The excluded notes are denoted by a small black tered. line on white notes and a white line on the black ogram the Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Varianotes. An illustrated example of how to program a Trackons to create a complete Style. ing curve is onthe page 22.to play Play the to cancel line2. and The options and parameters used to shape thesame note the sound Pan Key On/Key Off Envelopes, (Zoom, Seg- in the selected variation. ment, Time and Level), are identical to those used Press ENTER to confirm the programming, or for the Amplitude Key On/Key Off Envelope exESCAPE to cancel. plained on page 2..24. An illustrated example of how to program Key On & Key Off Envelope is on page 2. 25.

Mask

PAN ENVELOPE KEY ON & KEY OFF

RAMETERS

ask: Activates the Mask function. When the ask parameter is enabled (ON), the Basic Variion 2 automatically generates Basic Variation while Basic Variation 4 generates the Basic ariation 3. ptions: On, Off. rranger tracks: Deactivates the individual Arngement parts (A1...A6) of each Variation.
Drum track of Variation 1 showing masked Percussive instruments

or example, if you have programmed tracks

24 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 237

The Main Menu options

SAMPLE TRANSLATOR (F1)
This gains access to the Sample Translator, explained separately in detail from page 2.40 onwards. Import: opens a second level dialog window where you can select the source and destination layer.

ALGORITHM (F2)
This option allows you to choose the Algorithms. Pressing F2 activates a dialog box showing the current Algorithm.

Delete: cancels the currently selected Layer. This option limits itself to cancelling one or two layers. It is not possible to cancel all layers - at least one must be present. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE.

Rotate the Dial to select a different Algorithm and confirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE. Algorithms available: Single, Dual 1, Dual 2, Dual 3, Dual 4.

LAYER RNG. (F5)

This option allows you to assign a Key range and a Dynamic range for the current layer. Pressing F5 activates a dialog box where you can select the option required with the Up/Down cursor buttons.

LAYER UT. (F4)

The Layer Utility option allows you to create a new Layer for the current Sound in edit, to import a Layer from another Sound, or delete a Layer. Pressing F4 activates a dialog box where you can select the option required with the Up/Down cursor buttons.

Key Range: assigns the lowest and highest keyboard limits for the current Layer. Dynamic Range: assigns the lowest and highest key velocity limits for the current Layer. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER. Press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

Create: adds a second or third layer to the current sound in edit.

238 Reference Guide

S: (X) (F3) EXIT (F6)

Event List

track in edit

serts the event specified the INS. TYPE Press this softin button to escape permanently from nction at the the current cursor environment position. To without posi- saving evenEdit Sound on the insertedtual event precisely, modify its locator modifications. he parameters to Escape the left of the Edit Status colSee from Sound on page 2.14 of mn). this chapter. he events are inserted with the following deult parameter values:

SAVE (F8)
this soft to save your programmed 1V Press 2V 3Vbutton Gate SK760/880SE Sound Library and C4 sound 64 to the64 128
1

atus

ote:

Ch

ontr.

Bend

Tch

Tch

escape from Edit Sound permanently. 1 1 Refer to the section entitled Storing Sounds measure Value 1 1 0 ---which follows on the next page (2.40). beat Value 2 0 64 ---On page 2. 42, you will find some useful suggesresolution Value 3 0 tions---and tips to obtain the best results from event type Gate C4 Sound 0 Editing ----tasks.
(Status)

ter inserting the desired event, modify its pameters accordingly.

CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing, or the event immediately after the current riff position.

S TYPE... (F4)

pens a dialog window where you can select the pe of event to insert manually with the Ins: ) function.

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event in the specified measure. The number can be entered using the DIAL.

Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm. Select the type of event and press ENTER.

ELETE (F6)

eletes the selected event.

22 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 239

Storing Sounds
Whenever you edit a sound you will, at some point, decide that you either want to save your new sound or simply forget it and return to using the instrument as before. A modified Sound that has not been stored to memory shows a small mark at the top left hand corner before the name. To cancel an edit, simply press the EXIT button and confirm with ENTER to return the main Edit menu This will cancel your edit and return the sound to its starting status. If you decide you want to store your sound into the instruments memory, the next step will be to press the SAVE button (F8). Any sound that you create yourself can be stored in Sound Group families, (or Banks). During the storing process, you will first be asked to select a destination for your new sound and then given the opportunity to name it. 1. Press the soft button F8 to select Save from the main Edit Sound menu. The Bank Prog. Change window opens where you can select the destination of the new Sound in the SK760/880SE Sound library. new name. RAM-Sounds based on ROM-Wavesamples are saved with an asterisk (*) attached after the name to identify the Sound from the original. New sounds based on new Wavesamples loaded from disk or created with the Sample Translator are called RAMSounds, identified by the small graphical representation of a wave ( ). 2. Use the directional arrows to select the Bank and Prog. Change entry zones and rotate the Dial to select the numbers corresponding to an empty location (shown as No Sound). 3. To change the Sounds name, press the Soft button F7/F8 .

Use the standard name entry procedure (see Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide). Press ENTER to confirm the new name. 4. Press ENTER again to memorize the Sound to the selected location.

The SK760/880SE Sounds are stored in the order of Bank Select and Program Change numbers. You can choose to store the modified sound with its original name, or with a

240 Reference Guide

From locator... To locator...: Determines the SOUNDS Velocity IMPORTANT REMINDERS WHEN STORING NEW start and end point of the part to be affected. It is

possible to specify measure, beat and resolution. 1. You cannot overwrite a Rom-Sound. odifies the key Velocity value. This parameter A modified ROM-Sound generatesAssignable a RAM- values: within the actual limits of the presents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity. Sound which can be stored to eitherRiff. an empenerally, the greater the velocity the higher the ty location, or to an existing RAM-Sound. If olume. Velocity also affects the filter of many you attempt to store a RAM-Sound to a ROMounds, making them brighter with increased Sound destination, the display will show the elocity. following message:

RAMETERS

Repeat the operation and select an empty location.

ariation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only 2. If you save the new RAM-Sound to an existxisting Variations can be selected (those with at ing RAM-Sound, the existing file will be irreast one recorded Riff). mediably lost without warning. ff: Selects one ofBe theabsolutely riffs from the chosen Vari- that you have sure, therefore, ion. Only existing riffs can selected. If the stored thebe existing RAM-Sound to disk or yle is empty, the Hard phrase No Riff appears. disk before confirming the save procedure. two velocity modes to elocity mode: Provides hoose from which affect the way the Change elocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the Veocity values of the notes. Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the value specified in Velocity change hange Velocity: Specifies the amount by which e velocity values can be changed. This deends on the option selected in Velocity Mode.

ote range from... to...: Sets the upper and wer limits of the notes. To modify the velocity a single percussive instrument of the Drum ack, assign the same note to the highest and west limit. For example, to change the snare D2) set Note range from D2 to D2. ssignable values: C-1 ... G9.

20 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 241

Some Sound editing suggestions

WAVEFORM
Not all Waveforms cover the entire extension of the keyboard. This becomes particularly evident when you use an 88 note keyboard. The problem is caused by a lack of samples at the extremes of the keyboard. During the creating phase of a Waveform, considerations are made for the quality of the sound and the amount of memory necessary to store all the samples which constitute the Waveform; if some high or low end samples are lacking in musical quality (e.g., the lower notes of a violin Waveform, or the higher notes of a double bass Waveform), it is preferable to eliminate them to avoid using up precious memory.

KEY OFF ENVELOPE

Thanks to the articulated Key Off Envelopes (Release phase) of the SK760/880SE Series, you can create some very interesting effects. In practice, you can render a Sound live after releasing the keys. For example, try programming an Amplitude Key Off Envelope of the following kind with a Sound such as 12StrGtr (26-2):

VOLUME, VELOCITY & AFTERTOUCH

The Volume of a Sound can be controlled in live situations by velocity and aftertouch variations (the relative parameters are found in the Volume editor). If you set very sensitive values for both controls (e.g. +7 assigned to both dynamics and aftertouch), the Sound will be very difficult to control and easily susceptible to sudden volume variations. When you release the key the sound begins to fade and then reappears, it is held for an instant and then fades away gradually.

LFO
Lfo can be applied to several different sound parameters. The effect produced depends on the parameter affected: Amplitude > Vibrato Pitch > Tremolo Cutoff Freq. > Wha-wha

LOOP AND LFO

By programming a loop on two segments of a Key On Envelope which create an ascending and descending ramp (/\) you can simulate a Tremolo effect, without using the Lfo editor. A loop of this kind on a Pitch Key On Envelope will simulate a more realistic Vibrato effect than the effect obtained with the LFO.

242 Reference Guide

Note range from... to... : Sets the highest and RESONANCE note range to quantize. To quantize a sinThe action of the filters on the sound lowest is repreResonance enhances the frequencies in close gle percussive instrument of the Drum track, assented by curves: proximity of the Cutoff Frequency, rendering the n auto-corrector of timing errors. sign the same note the highest lowest limit. filterto curves moreand complex: For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the dB Low Pass (attenuates OTE ON QUANTIZE (F1) parameter to Note dB range from D2 to D2. the high end frequenResonance ost-Quantization of the Note On event. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. cies). Hz From locator... To locator...: Hz Determines the dB start and end point of the part that requires High Pass (attenuates Resonance abe very typical feature of classic quantizing. measureswas can selected. the low end frequencies ). Only analog synthesizers. Hz Assignable values: within the actual limits of the As an example, listen to the Sound Resonance Riff. dB Band Pass (attenuates (102-2). the frequencies above and below the C.F.). NOTE OFF QUANTIZE (F2)
Hz

QuantizeFILTERS

Post-Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Parametric dB one of the 4 Variations. Note(enOn quantization, a Note Off quantization ariation: Selects Only Boost hances the frequencies affects the duration of the notes, adapting them xisting Variations can be selected (those with at around the Cutoff to a Frequantization grid. ast one riff recorded). Hz quency). ff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variion. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Cut (attenuParametric dB yle is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. ates the frequencies

RAMETERS:

the Cutoff Freote On Quantize: Specifies the around Note On Hz quency). uantize values.
Quantization The slope of these curves is determined by the attraction capacity of the poles. ThePARAMETERS: SK760/ 880SE Series can have two 2-pole filters conNote Off Quantize: Specifies the Note Off nected in parallel (Dual 1, Dual 3 Algorithms), or quantize values. triplet one 4-pole filter, corresponding to two 2-pole filters connected in series (Dual 2, DualAll 4 other Algo-parameters same as Note On Quantize. rithms). triplet A 4-pole filter creates a clearer slope and consequently a fuller and more aggressive sound. triplet (1/64) TO OBTAIN A 4-POLE FILTER: (1/64 triplet) identical parameter values for the Programme no quantization Filter 1 and Filter 2 editors of the Dual 2 or Dual(swing) 4 Algorithms. (swing) no quantization

alue

12

16

24

32

48

64

96

ee

8 B...F*

16 B...F*

ee

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

18 Reference Guide

Edit Sound 243

Samples and the Sample Translator

The SK760/880SE can load new sound samples into memory which can then be edited and saved as new SK760/880SE sounds. SK760/880SE instruments are equipped with 8 Mbytes of Sample RAM memory, sufficient to accommodate the samples you wish to load. You can increase the amount of memory by installing additional RAM in the form volatile S-RAM kits supplied by Generalmusic, or SIMMs chips which can be obtained from most computer suppliers. You can check the amount of sample memory that has been installed by looking under EDIT GENERAL/ SYSTEM INFO, (F1 button).

SAMPLE LOADING METHODS

Samples can be loaded from disk, via MIDI from computers, samplers, etc., from external SCSI devices (only if your instrument is fitted with the optional SCSI kit), or dumped from external devices. Samples can also be loaded directly from RAM -Sounds, provided that you enter EDIT SOUND with the same sound assigned to the selected track of the current Performance.

ENTERING SAMPLE TRANSLATOR

Access to the Sample Translator is always via the Edit Sound environment (press SYNTH in the EDIT section; see also page 2.13). You can enter the Sample Translator in two ways: 1. With a RAM -Sound. This allows you select Sample Translator and load the Waveform associated to the selected RAM Sound. 2. With a Rom-Sound (for example, select the default Grand Piano Performance). This allows you to enter Sample Translator and load a sample from floppy disk or SCSI device (optional), or receive them via a MIDI Dump from an external device.

SAMPLE TRANSLATOR
The SK760/880SE is capable of loading many different samples types from a number of different companies formats. Because the list of compatible sample types is constantly being updated, check with your Generalmusic dealer or distributor to see which formats are compatible with the operating system version you are currently using. Some of the most common formats currently in use are; Wave, Stereo Wave, Sample Vision, Sound Designer 1, Akai, Aiff, Kurzweil and many others. The new RAM Waveforms that you can create using the Sample Translator can be stored to the SK760/880SE Wave Library. Using the new Waveforms, you will then be able to create new RAM -Sounds, increasing SK760/880SEs sonic potential. To start SAMPLE TRANSLATOR, press the SAMPLE TXL button (F1) in the main EDIT SOUND display.

Edit Sound - Sample Translator display, no samples loaded

244 Reference Guide

The main Sample Translator display consists of Load: Loads a sample into the selected lo16 slots, each able to house a sample that can cation, directly from the selected hifts events from one point to another A within the may Copies events from a track or from all the tracks. compose a Waveform. Waveform consist Ram -Sound, from floppy disk or elected track. of one or more samples covering different keyvia MIDI from an external source board ranges. COPY TRACK (F5) (computer, sampler, etc.). The display example below shows the sample Save: Saves a sample to the instruments configuration of a Waveform originating from a Wave Library. Only samples which previous series instrument. have been assigned a keyboard extension are saved. Saving also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can create a new Sound with the new Waveform.

Move

THE MAIN SAMPLE TRANSLATOR DISPLAY

Copy

THE SAMPLE TRANSLATOR OPTIONS

RAMETERS: PARAMETERS:
Delete:

Copy to Style.. .: Selects the Assigns destination Style sample to a Assign : the selected to copy the current Style (part or whole) range. to. keyboard This assigned Assignable values: any USER sample Style. plays together with the other iff: Selects one of the riffs of the current VariaHere, the original RAM If -Sound a assigned samples on. Only existing riffs can be selected. the contains From var... to var...: Selects the source and des- that make up the Waveform consisting of 6 samples, each asWaveform. Sample keyboard range yle is empty the phrase No Riff appears. tination Variations for the part to be copied. signed to a specific range of the keyboard: overlaps are not permitted. Assignable values: 1 ... 4. rom locator... To locator...: Sets the start and Deassign: Cancels the extension limits of the From riff... to riff...: Selects the source and desnd points of the part to be moved. The measselected sample. tination riffs for the part to be copied. For exame, beat and resolution can be specified. Edit: Opens a showing information Locations without samples are numbered and ple, it is possible to copy the patterns ofpage a Basic ssignable values: within the actual limits of the shown with three dashes ( ). Major riff to a minor Fill riff. regarding the Waveform (Sample f. It is not possible to specify a point beyond name and type, properties, size, Assignable values: any riff. pitch, Sample rate, Loop Start, Loop e end of the riff. SELECTING SAMPLES FROM THE WAVEFORM Track... to track...: Specifies the source and desEnd points and the Loop status). tart Locator: Sets the new position of the secDISPLAY Several parameters can be edited in tination tracks for the copied elements. From on being moved. this page and track shows the track selected using soft other but- options are actiSelect the Samples with the Up/Down cursor ssignable values: any point within the riff. vated (Tuning, Normalize, Gain, Cut, tons A...H. To track... can be modified using buttons. Export). the DIAL. Next to each sample, three notes are usually Send Sample : Activates a sample Assignable values: any accompaniment trackDump process to shown, representing the lower limit of the keytransfer (via MIDI) the sample to an (9...16). board range to which the sample has been asexternal device (for example, another From locator... To locator...: Sets the start and signed, the original sample pitch, and the upper SK760/880SE keyboard). end point of the part to be copied. Only the measkeyboard limit: Exit: Escapes the Sample Translator, ure (bar) can be specified. erasing all the samples present, and Assignable values: within the actual limits ofSound. the returns to Edit riff.. Start locator: Sets the new position of the copied part. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the destination riff.

ariation: Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. nly Variations that contain at least one recorded f can be selected.

Cancels the selected Sample from the main Sample Translator display.

16 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 245

Loading samples
LOAD (F1)
The Load option allows you to load Samples into the Sample Translator directly from a RAM Sound, or from disk or SCSI device (optional).

The time taken depends on the size of the sample. When loading has finished, the display shows a situation similar to the example below, with one or more samples which constitute the Waveform.

1. LOADING A SAMPLE FROM A RAM -SOUND

This operation should be carried out with RAM Sounds originating from previous Series instruments (WK6/8, S, SX, PS/GPS) or from Ram Sounds containing a Waveform created by Sample Translator. Set the instrument in Style/ RealTime mode with a single track active in Full mode. 1. With a RAM -Sound assigned to a track of a Performance, enter Sample Translator via SYNTH/EDIT SOUND/SAMPLE TXL.

2. LOADING SAMPLES FROM DISK OR SCSI DEVICE

To load samples from disk, in practice you can enter with any sound, including a RAM -Sound, because once you enter the Sample Translator, you can override the sound assigned to the track and listen to a sample loaded from disk. If, instead, other tracks are active, you will hear these as well. 1. Insert the sample disk into the drive. 2 Enter Sample Translator via SYNTH/EDIT SOUND/SAMPLE TXL. A. If you enter with a RAM -Sound, you are prompted to load the associated Waveform. Press ESCAPE to ignore the prompt and pass to the load phase (point 3). B. If you enter with a Rom-Sound, the dialog window does not appear and you pass directly to the load phase. 3. Press LOAD (F1).

A dialog window is displayed informing that a Ram-Sound has been found and the associated Waveform is ready to be loaded.

2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or escape to cancel. A dialog window showing an animated clock keeps you informed of the samples being loaded:

4. From the selection window, select the device from which the sample will be loaded and press ENTER. The sample data contained in the storage

246 Reference Guide

disk, is YLE NAME (F8) device, in this example, a floppyEDIT LOADING OTHER SAMPLES PROCEDURE

the This selection window, to the hanges the nameshown of a Style. function only similar You can other samples the Sample Trans1. Press ST./SONG toload enter Edit Style.toThe example below: pplies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM provided that you select an empty location main menulator, appears. yles are permanent and cannot be modified. in the sample 2. Select the editor that youlist. wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. If you another sample to an existing sample 3. Press ENTER to load enter the editor. location, a cancellation request will appear. 4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons. The various sample formats are identified by he method used to insert characters is described 5. Select the parameters with the cursor butappropriate extensions. the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric Entry, tons and modify their value with the DIAL or 5. Select the sample you wish to load with the n page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can move the numeric keypad. buttons ) and Inpress ENTER to e cursor with the cursor soft buttons or ( the/ DIAL. 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. startthe loading Sample. ert the characters with keys the of the keyboard. 7. Pass to another editor with the +/ Page Some sample formats allow you to load indican use the Sample Overwrite method to ). Otherwise, buttons ( You return to the main vidual samples or Programs. (See Sample MPTY TRACK INDICATION cancel an unwanted Sample. Up to 16 Samples menu with ESCAPE and select another ediand Programs afterwards). can be loaded to the Samples List. he presence of notes in a track is indicated by tor. e seq-play icon: A dialog window showing an animated metronome keeps you informed of the samples LOADING SAMPLES AND PROGRAMS being loaded. A bar graph also appears at Some sample formats, such as Akai and play mode, this status icon indicates the the top of the display topresmonitor the loading Kurzweil, allow you to load individual Samples nce of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff phase. (equivalent to the SK760/880SE Series samples) the track does not contain notes, the empty When the sample has been loaded, the disand Programs (similar to the SK760/880SE Seack message is displayed at the bottom of the play will show something similar to the exries Waveforms). dit Style page: ample below. In such cases, when you select a file type from the File Open window, a second selection winrecord mode, tasks are performed directly on dow appears: riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes the track and in the riff being recorded.

This example shows a single unassigned Flute Wave sample. Select an individual sample, or select All samples and press ENTER. A Program organizes the Samples by defining the keyboard ranges to which they are assigned. Unlike the Waveform of the SK760/880SE Series, a Program can distribute the Samples over

14 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 247

several different Levels (dynamic levels). Sample Translator can load single Samples, or it can convert, in a single operation, an entire level of the Program into a SK760/880SE Series Waveform. If a Program contains more than one level, it can be converted entirely in successive phases, using (a) a Sound Patch, (b) a multi track configuration, c) a Sound containing a key-dynamic assignment (executed in Edit Sound).
CONVERSION LIMITATIONS

Assigning samples
ASSIGN (F4)
Once youve loaded in the samples that you need, the only essential step you need to take before you can save them is to ASSIGN, (or map), your samples to a specific range of keys. Only assigned samples become a part of a Waveform which you can then save to the SK760/880SE Wave Library. When you load a new Waveform into Sample Translator, the samples that constitute the Waveform are shown assigned to specific key ranges. In such cases, three values are shown, the lowest note, the sample pitch and the highest note:
Highest note Lowest note

A SK760/880SE Waveform can contain only 16 samples. For example, an Akai S1000 level can contain up to 99 Samples, therefore, when a conversion is carried out, only the 16 Samples from the lowest register are loaded. These kind of Samples can overlap even inside a dynamic Level. Sample Translator eliminates this overlap, using the lowest limit-note of the highest pitched sample as the limit between samples.

Sample pitch

RECEIVING SAMPLES VIA A DUMP

You can also Dump samples into Sample Translator via the Sample Request option (F7). This is discussed in detail on page 2.53.

If you load new Samples from disk or a SCSI device, or receive them via MIDI, they will normally be shown without an assignment, but with the sample pitch. In such cases, Sample Translator allows you to listen to the sample across the entire keyboard, to help you decide the in which note range you can obtain the best results. Once you have decided the best note range, press the ASSIGN button (F4) to open the ASSIGN MENU.

The selected Sample is shown with a temporary key range, represented by the black line. The notch shown in the line represents the Sample Pitch.

248 Reference Guide

Ifactive: the selected Sample shown cale Converter C Major riff > is C not minor riff with a black
C D E F G

OVERLAPPING SAMPLES

line, simply strike the left Cursor button ( ). C# D# F# G# 1. Rotate the Dial to assign the lowest key limit:
1 1 1

If A# you overlap the key range of two samples, pressing ENTER will prompt a message indicatA ing the B presence of an overlap.

in 1 accomp.

in 1 bass

in 2 accomp.

in 2 bass

2. Strike the right cursor button ( ) and assign the upper key limit 1 with the Dial.
1 1 1 1 +1 +1

1 1

in 3 accomp.

in 3 bass

Press Escape to cancel the message and assign the correct key range before confirming with 3. Press ENTER to confirm. in 4 bass 1 1 ENTER. 4. Select the next Sample to assign with the up/ in 5 accomp. 1 1 1assignment consisting of several samA typical down cursor buttons ( / ) then strike the in 5 bass 1 1 1 constitute a SK760/880SE Waveform ples that left cursor button ( ) to activate the lowest in 6 accomp. 1selected 1 sample (A0). +1 may look like this: key limit of the
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 +1 1 1

in 4 accomp.

in 6 bass

in 7 accomp.

in 7 bass

Repeat the assignment procedure for all the samples that are to be part of the new Waveform, and avoid overlapping.

OMPLEX CHORDS

Each sample covers a specified key range and he logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the the notch at the beginning of each range correandard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale sponds to the Root Key Number, also called the onverter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed. Sample Pitch. Once you have completed the sample key range assignments, press ESCAPE to close the ASSIGN display and return to the Sample Translator. At this point, unless you want to start editing your sample, you can press SAVE, (F2) to store your sample to the SK760/880SE wave library. Follow the section entitled, Storing the sample on page 2.55 at the end of this chapter.

12 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 249

Cancelling assignments
DEASSIGN (F5)
The Deassign command cancels a sample assignment. 1. Select the Sample to deassign.

Cancelling samples
DELETE (F3)
The Delete option allows you to cancel the selected Sample from the Sample Translator. After listening to your Samples and assigning them, you may want to eliminate the no longer required. Simply select the sample you wish to cancel and press the soft button F3. You are prompted with a message to reconfirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with Escape.

2. Press the soft button F5 to deassign the sample.

After deassigning, the sample will play across the entire keyboard range, but only if it is selected. If you wish to save the sample as part of the final Waveform, you must reassign a note range before proceeding.

Press ENTER to delete the Sample.

250 Reference Guide

REE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)

Sample Editing he amount of memory remaining to record the

f. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30 EDIT (F6) obytes). the RAM contains a large amount a showing nonThe Edit option opensof a data, display alog window may appear showing the message programmable information relating to the origiMemory full! nal indicating that the recording cansample, and gives access to some programot proceed further. The recording is instantly in-you to change mable parameters which allow rrupted. some characteristics of each individual sample. ou can increase the amount of space in RAM y deactivating the Undo function.

pitch at which it was sampled). To help you with this operation, use the Tuning function, activated with the F1 soft button, which plays the original sample pitch with a sinusoidal that is superimposed on the sample. You can also use this parameter to make the sample play its normal pitch on a different key from the one to which it was assign when it was recorded. This, however, will pitch shift the sample and change its playback rate, which can affect the timbre of the sample. SAMPLE RATE: This parameter defines the frequency with which the Sample is read. If the Sampling Rate is modified, the sample pitch is also proportionally modified. For example, if the Sample Rate is raised in value, the sample pitch will also become higher. Basically, this function provides a fine tuning for the sample, avoiding dissonance between the samples that make up the Waveform. LOOP START: This parameter causes samples to replay indefinitely until you release the note, or they decay to silence. Each sample, when triggered, begins at the Loop Start point and plays through to the Loop End, then loops to the Loop start point and plays again. This cycle will continue until the note is released. If the Loop Switch is set to Off (see below), when the sample plays to the Loop End on its first cycle, it stops when it reaches the Loop End. Changing the Loop Start (and Loop End) points can have a small or great effect on the sample timbre, depending on the nature of the sound at the Loop Start point. You may hear a click as the sample loops back from the Loop End to Sample Start. In such cases, vary the Loop Start value until you reduce the click to an acceptable value. LOOP END: This parameter represents the end of the current sample and the point where the sample, once played, loops back to the Loop Start point. If the Loop Switch is set to Off, the Loop End parameter changes to Sample End.

The first four items of the display correspond to the sample information: SAMPLE NAME: Shows the original name of the wave sample. SAMPLE TYPE: Identifies the sample format. PROPERTIES: Shows the technical characteristics of the sample. SAMPLE SIZE: Shows the size of the sample expressed as the total number of samples. The remaining items of the display correspond to settings for the sample assigned to the currently selected key range. All these parameters are programmable. SAMPLE PITCH: Indicates the pitch at which the sample was originally recorded. This parameter also defines the Root Key number, or the key where the sample root for the current key range is assigned. If the SK760/880SE does not recognize the Sample Pitch of a sample youve loaded from disk, you can use this parameter to specify the key which will play the sample at its normal pitch (the

10 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 251

LOOP SWITCH: This parameter toggles between the On and Off status of the Loop. If set to ON, the sample loops continually from Loop Start to Loop End until the keys are released. If OFF, the sample plays from Loop Start to Sample End and stops.

NORMALIZE (2)
If the volume of the selected sample seems to be too low, it is quite probable that the original sample Gain (Volume) has a setting that needs to be adjusted. Normalize takes the sample gain to its maximum setting in a single step. 1. Press F2 to select NORMALIZE. The display shows the current status of the sample Gain. In the example, we are working on a stereo sample (Left and Right parts).

GENERAL NOTES ON SAMPLE EDITING

When you trim samples by changing the values of Loop Start and Loop End, youll hear the effect with the next note you play. However, the Sample is not actually changed in the SK760/880SE memory until you save it.

THE SAMPLE EDIT OPTIONS

Entering the Sample Edit page activates several options. In this display situation, the Gain setting is not programmable. 2. Press ENTER to set the sample Gain to its maximum setting (100%).

TUNING (F1)
The Tuning option provides a reference for the sample pitch, producing the exact note with a sinusoidal, superimposed on the sample. This is useful in situations where the original sample pitch is required when assigning a sample to a key range. Press the soft button F1 to activate the Tuning function (shown in negative highlight) and play a note on the keyboard. Press F1 to deactivate Tuning.

Repeat the operations for the other section of the sample, (RIGHT), by selecting the Left parameter with the cursor and rotating the Dial.

GAIN (F3)
This option allows you to modify the volume of the sample with respect to the other samples of the Waveform. One of the primary uses of Gain is to equalize the volume levels between different key ranges.

252 Reference Guide

The RecordThe View page display will show the current GAIN staOpens the SELECT Use the RIFF Export dialog option window to save where the Sample cur-

1. Press F3 to select GAIN.

REC RIFF... (F2) EXPORT (F7)

tus (in the example, we are working oncan theselect rently you a riff to inrecord. edit to disk or SCSI device (if installed). RIGHT section of parameters a stereo sample). he Record View page shows several 1. Premete EXPORT to open a selection winhich you can set for your User Style before startdow where you can select the periferal deg your recording or playback. vice to export toper aprire una finestra di dialogo dove potete segliere lunit esterna dove esportare il sample. Select the Variation, section and chord with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. 2. Rotate the Dial to set the Gain to a suitable SOUND VIEW (F5) level, playing the sample as you regulate the Recalls the Sound View page where you can see setting. and change the2. sounds assigned the PerformPress ENTERto to open a dialog where you ance. can specify a name for the sample and select the format.

ODE... (F1)

pens the Record Mode dialog window where ou can select various recording options. 3. Press ENTER to confirm the setting. After a short period, the sample Gain setting is memorized.

You can chose to save in two of the most commonly recognized formats: Sound DeCUT (F5) REC VIEW (F6) signer 1 or Windows RIFF Wave. This option you to trim the Sample at a EPLACE - The new notes allows substitute old notes Recalls the Record View page it is pos- and rotate the 3. Select the File where Type parameter specified Loop End recorded. in order to cut offsible the last ready present in the tracks being to control the Dial record/play parameters. to select the other format. portion of the Sample. VERDUBB - New notes are merged with those Ifon you vary thebeing current setting of the Loop End(F7) ready present the tracks recorded. ERASE... and wish to eliminate the portion of the sample UNCH IN/OUT - A means of inserting a correcCancels that follows, press F5 to trigger the CUT option. a track, riff, variation or the entire Style. on without repeating a recording. Punch recordusing CUT, youll find thatprothe Loop End point g is activated After by pressing an appropriately cannot taken to a higher value. ammed pedal (underbe EDIT CONTROLS). ctivate the recording with PLAY. When the song 4. Press ENTER to start the export procedure. aches the point at which the correction must If you export to disk, insert the disk into the e inserted, press the pedal. At this point, the drive before pressing Enter. cording proceeds in replace mode. When the Shortly after,track. the Sample is saved. orrection is complete, release the pedal to stop TRACK - Cancels the selected e recording. ESCAPE RIFF - Cancels thePress selected riff. to exit the Sample Edit display. VARIATION - Cancels the selected variation. STYLE - Cancels the entire Style.

8 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 253

Sample MIDI Dump

SEND SAMPLE / SAMPLE REQUEST (F7)
Samples can be transferred between SK760/ 880SE and most other samplers and computer sampling programs using the Send Sample/Sample Request option which operates according to the MIDI Sample Dump Standard. This feature works on the handshake principal and requires only that the transmitter and receiver conform to the standard. Both units must be connected via a closed MIDI loop The operation proceeds smoothly and at high speed without freezing either the external device or the SK760/880SE. It is not necessary to set MIDI channels. If the external device does not conform to the Sample MIDI Dump Standard, this operation cannot be performed. The Send Sample option is shown when a Sample is selected in the main Sample Translator display. 4. Specify a sample number (by rotating the Dial) and press ENTER. Shortly after, the sample transfer process begins. During the transfer, the process is monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Translator display. If the sending device is another SK760/ 880SE, you can specify the numbers from 0 to 15 which correspond to the 16 locations of the Sample Translator. If youre requesting a sample from an external computer or sampler, you can specify a number from 0 to 255, depending on the sample numbers stored in the external unit. While the transfer is taking place, the Sample Req option changes to Dump Stop. Use Dump Stop to stop the sample transfer from the external device.

TO SAVE A SAMPLE USING THE SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD (SEND SAMPLE)

The option changes from Send Sample to Sample Request when an empty location is selected. Press SEND SAMPLE (F7). Shortly after, the sample transfer process begins. During the transfer, the process is monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Translator display. While the transfer is taking place, the Send Sample option changes to Dump Stop. Use Dump Stop to stop the sample transfer to the external device.

TO LOAD SAMPLES USING THE SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD (SAMPLE REQUEST)

1. Connect two MIDI cables between the sending device and the SK760/880SE (MIDI IN to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN). 2. Select an empty location in the Sample List. 3. Press SAMPLE REQ (F7). A selection window opens where you can select the sample number.

254 Reference Guide

ECORDING

ecording a User Style is easy.

Exit (F8)

Storing Samples
SAVE (F2)

Press on ofUse the the USER Style buttons se- from Sample EXIT option to and escape lect a free Translator location (User) tosaving createyour a new without samples. Style. Pressing EXIT activates a prompt to confirm the

The SAVE operation is used to save assigned Samples to the SK760/880SE Wave Library. A abort process with ENTER and cancel all samWaveform can contain one or more assigned ples. samples, provided that each is assigned to a spe5. Select the track, usually the Drum track first, cific keyboard range. that you want to your record. Once samples have been assigned, press the SAVE button, toto Save the Waveform to Press the corresponding Soft(F2), button place SK760/880SE Wave Library. the track in the Record mode (Record icon showing). Only The tracks showing the Record icon is shown: Save Sample dialog window will capture events during the recording. You are prompted to create cancels a new style. Pressing ENTER all samples and returns to the Sound Edit environment. Press ESCAPE to cancel the display and 6. retain Press START/STOP to start the recording. the samples. Save the samples with SAVE to A one-measure countdown will start (shown escape the Sample Translator. on the measure counter in the top right hand corner of the display) and a metronome tic Press OK, (F1). will help you withyou yourcan timing. Here write a name for the waveform The Style Record View page activates with If you dont(Wave want the metronome, turnfor if off name) and a name the new RAM a superimposed Select Riff dialog window: with the soft button F8. name) based on the Waveform. Sound (Sound The name given to the Waveform is automati7. Start playing after the lead-in. cally assigned to the sound once you select the The recording proceeds in a cyclic Sound Name entry zone.manner: You are free, however, once the end of the riff is reached, the reto write a different name for the Sound. cording starts again from The empty location Also shown isthe thebeginning. first available number of bars recorded will depend on the in RAM for the new RAM -Sound, defined by setting in the initial RecView display, in the the Bank and Program numbers. Measures parameter (in this case 2). Whatever Bank and Program number you select Select the Variation, (VAR. 1, VAR. 2, VAR. with the Dial, it will always the correspond 8. When you have finished recording first to an empty 3, VAR. 4), section, (BASIC, FILL, INTRO, in RAM. SK760/880SE track, stop location the recording with START/STOP. does not allow ENDING) and chord, (MAJOR, MINOR, 7TH) you to overwrite existing Ram-Sounds or RAM The Track will still be in record mode, allowwith the cursor buttons and press ENTER to Sounds. ing you to add new events by starting again confirm. If you attempt to save the Waveform with a name with Start/Stop. The default setting of the that already exists, an message appears saying The LED on the RECORD button lights up Record mode will be Overdubb. Other record that the Wave Name already exists. and the Record View page is shown in mode settings can be selected (explained Press or Escape to cancel the message negative highlight. afterwards). StopEnter the recording of additional and return to the Save Sample window and write note with Start/Stop. a different name for the Wave. Confirm with ENTER to save the Waveform to

6 Reference Guide

Sample Translator 255

the SK760/880SE Wave Library. The new Ram -Sound is simultaneously saved to the SK760/880SE Sound Library at the selected location. Pressing Enter also escapes the Sample Translator and returns to Edit Sound where you can start to edit the new Ram -Sound using all the methods already described. Youll find the new Ram -Sound assigned to the currently selected track, and the new Waveform selected in the Waveform editor.

UN-ASSIGNED SAMPLES
If, among the assigned samples of the Sample Translator, one or more unassigned samples are present, pressing SAVE prompts a message requesting the cancellation of unassigned samples before proceeding with the Save operation.

Press ENTER to confirm and proceed with the saving of the Waveform as described above. If, instead, you want to assign the un-assigned samples, press Escape to cancel the message, assign the samples, then press Save again to proceed with the save operation.

256 Reference Guide

hord is not recognized, the chord symbol is hown as the lowest note played followed by seval asterisks. For example: C***** . ote: In order for the chord to be recognized (and e relative symbol to be shown on the display) range On/Off must be on.

The Split Point is: (a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and Multi keyboard modes and, memory. There are 64 Performances from the (b) the point below which the recognizfactory and allkeyboard are user-programmable. That is, es chords which trigger the Style automatic you can save your modifications to any of the YNAMIC ARRANGE accompaniments (in Fingered and One FinPerformances without losing them. At any time, hen DYNAMIC ARRANGE is active, the volger chord recognition modes ). original Performances with you can restore the me of the Style Auto accompaniments can be the RESTORE function. The current Split Point setting appears in the main ontrolled according to the velocity applied to the page as an option that can be selected with the A PERFORMANCE isvelocity a combination of up to 16 hord notes. Increased chord note inpaired soft buttons REALF7/F8. TIME PANEL OPERATIONS sounds layered together or split across the eases the volume of either the accompaniments. The setting canSeveral be modified as required. can be carried out to keyboard in any volumes configuration. panel operations hen Off, the accompaniment remainWhatever playWith the main Style/RealTime display showing mode you are using, time, Style1. or Song, change the status of the Performances while you nchanged with changes in chord noteReal velocity. ing, press play. Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the it will always be governed by a Performance dialog window. which determines how you play in real time,Split how Point For example, if you recall a single Performance, UTOBACKING you play the Style or the Song. (one with only one sound active to play on the hen AUTOBACKING is on, a quick change of Pressing one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS keyboard), you can activate one or more tracks hord updatesbuttons the Style auto accompaniment and selecting a PERFORMANCE will put to play with a combination of sounds. The Perattern instantly without breaks in the pattern. the SK760/880SE in Performance play mode. formance will still be the same one recalled, but hen off, a change of chord does not update You would use the Performances to play real the modified that more tracks are active to play. 2. inRotate DIAL, or so play a note on the keystantly but waits for the next note of the actime with up to 8 sounds simultaneously. board (corresponding Some examples givennote in the to theare highest ofQuick Guide on ompaniment before revising the pattern. pages 1.18-1.20. Lower split zone) to modify the setting. Other Performances which you can select the from the panel are the Style Performances, available You the can wrong also change Performance paramIf you entered note, other simply play in Style mode when the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY another. eters, such as the track Volumes using the 8 panel button is on. Also available are the Song Persliders, or the keyboard mode, from Full to Upformances when you are in Song mode. per/Lower, (split keyboard), to Multi using the corresponding Soft buttons. You can assign a Lets take a closer look at the Performances and different split point to the keyboard in Upper/lower all the things you can do with them mode, you can even different Sounds to 3. Press ENTER to confirm the newassign Split Point, the or ESCAPE to tracks. cancel the operation. SELECTING THE PERFORMANCES If you dont want to will save the changes you make With ENTER, the main page show the To select them, simply press one of the Performto your Performance, simply select new Split Point setting. With ESCAPE the another one ance Group buttons and select a Performance and all the changes to the previous Performance with the corresponding soft button. In thisoriginal way Split Point will be restored. will be lost. If, instead, you want to save the Peryou can select all Performances which already formance, press the STORE PERFORMANCE Note: The Split Point is a general parameter (not exist in memory. button followed by ENTER to save the changes. linked Performance) which is conIn the Quick Guide, on page 1.31, youll find to il- a particular The STORE PERFORMANCE operation is exservedof in memory when the instrument is turned lustrated explanations relating to the selection plained in greater detail on page. 3. 24. off. The new setting is lost when the Reset All the Performances. operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM Each Performance Group button recalls 8 Perloses its data due to the total discharge of the formances to choose from. In this way you can battery. select all Performances which already exist in

Performances

CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT

4 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 31

ARRANGE ON/OFF
When you turn the instrument on for the first time, or every time you select the GRAND PIANO Performance from Group 1, the panel will default to the power up situation with several buttons on, among them the ARRANGE ON/OFF button (LED on).

STYLE LOCK
Thanks to the STYLE LOCK function, you can decide to select Performances and change Style every time, or simply recall keyboard sounds without changing the Style accompaniment. When STYLE LOCK is on, (LED on), selecting Performances recalls keyboard sounds only.

This button enables the auto-accompaniments of the Style. In fact, if you press the START/STOP button and play a chord on the keyboard, an autoStyle accompaniment pattern will start to play. If the ARRANGE ON/OFF button is off, (LED off), only the drum pattern of the Style will play when you press START/STOP. This is useful to play your Performances live with drum accompaniment. Since the Performances can memorize any panel situation, they can be programmed to recall a Style comprising the sounds for the automatic accompaniments, a Variation and, if Tempo Lock is off, a Tempo setting. In fact, the Performances are an alternative way of recalling user-programmed Style Performances, as you will discover further ahead.

When STYLE LOCK is off, (LED off), selecting Performances recalls sounds for the keyboard as well as a Style. In Real Time mode, when the ARRANGE ON/ OFF button is off (LED off), changing Performances with STYLE LOCK on would be useful to play live with the Drum Track of the memorized Style. Simply press START/STOP to start the Drum pattern. When you select other Performances, you could change the real time keyboard sounds without changing the Drum pattern. With STYLE LOCK off, you could select Performances and recall the Drum track of a different Style every time.

32 Reference Guide

the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the funcSTYLE LOCK (PERFORMANCE GROUPS SECTION) Programming the Performances on is used to keep the Drum part playing even If STYLE LOCK is on, selecting PERFORMhen you have taken your hand off the keys. ANCES recalls the sounds for the keyboard sec-

while thethe sounds of therefore, the accompaniment display, the activation of the Track By selecting a Performance, all the tions settings sections current unchanged.Soft button (Amemorized to the Performance are recalled in a of the is madeStyle with remain the corresponding If this button is off, you can recall memorized single step. In addition to a the panel changes, a H) and other tracks can be brought into view with TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or PerStyles by selecting the Performances. Performance can changes also memorize the Track Scroll buttons.This Thewill active tracks are rmance is selected the tempo too. If other paramallow you to change the entire sound configuraeters, aswill effect settings, the status of the shown by the track status icon in the left display e function is on, thesuch tempo not change. tion of both keyboard sections as well as accomcontrollers, (pedals, Pitch/Mod Trackball, etc.), the column. If all the tracks are set to MUTE, you paniment tracks. will hear no sound. IXER LOCK MIDI channel configuration and many others. Lets all the The 8 panel sliders, (marked A-H underneath) Performance alsoexamine memorizes the Performance track vol- parameters that can is beoff, modified and saved adjust the volumes of the tracks shown in the dismes. If MIXER LOCK when a Style or ato the PerformSINGLE TOUCH PLAY play. erformance ances. is selected the track volumes When you activate the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY construct a Performance, you start by selectSound assignments are made using the SOUND hange too. If it To is on, all the volumes of the tracks button, all the sounds memorized in the ROM ing a number ofchange sounds, or Tracks. GROUPS buttons and +/ Page/Bank buttons to ssigned to the keyboard will while the A PerformStyle Performance are assigned all the assignments tracks. ance can contain as not. little as only one Track or as scroll the banks. to Sound are best ccompaniment track volumes will Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the acmany as 16 Tracks layered together. Regardmade with the DISPLAY HOLD function off, so companiment tracks well as the keyboard less of how many Tracks you actually decide to that theas display returns to the Performance you ASS TO LOWEST tracks. use, you will always be able to view 16 Tracks are programming every time you select a Sound. BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the Pressing within your Performance. How many of the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY automatically uto accompaniment of the current Style plays sounds you actually decide to activate activates and use the ARRANGE ON/OFF button, the ound the lowest note of the current chord. If MEMORY the KEY START button. is entirely your choice. If you only decide, for function EDITand MENU ou play a different inversion of the same chord, example, that you want to layer three sounds When toSINGLEEvery TOUCH PLAY is current off, selecting track of the Performance can be e lowest note also changes resulting in a difgether, then you only need to be concerned with Styles recalls only the Style accompaniment secindependently programmed in the Performance rent bass note being played. the first three Tracks in the Multi Track List tions without changing the keyboard sounds. Edit Menus which are accessed with the buttons off, the bass will follow the original programmed of the EDIT/NUMBER section. attern of the Style. MULTI TRACK LIST changes to the ass To Lowest permits real time STYLE PERFORMANCE herwise fixedThe bass pattern ofcan a Style, by playTrack List be viewed by pressing the are rendered more versatile by their The Styles g different chord inversions. MULTI button (F7/F8). If you are not currently in Performances, 8 for each Style. Once you seone of the default displays, press the lect Group 1 you can assign up to 8 different Pera Style, ARMONY ON/OFF button of the Performances and select the Grand to the Style while you play. Simply formances Piano Performance. press the STYLE P button to open the Style Perhis button enables (LED on) or disables (LED formance selection window related to the current f) the current Harmony Type selected in the Style. ARMONY function of the Edit Tracks enviThe buttons gain access nment. When Single Touch Play iswhich on, each SK760/to the PerformEdit Menus 880SE Style isance associated to 8 are Style Performarmony can orchestrate your Style playing, Effects , Midi, Mixer ances which you can assign at any, Control/Pads time before , Tracks and aking simple one-note melodies sound as if they . Performances are peror during play. Sound The Style e being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is manent and cannot beone destroyed. They are, howssociated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit Press of the Edit buttons to gain access to ever, rewritable (keyboard and of accompaniment is function. For more information on the Harthe parameters the section. For example, if You can move from one Track to another with sounds). Theiryou default settings can be restored ony types available, see Edit Tracks/Split in press the MIDI button, you will gain access the Cursor up/down keys . The part shown sewith the Restore command. e Performance chapter of the Reference Guide. to all the MIDI parameters: lected (negative highlight) is the active zone of

MPO LOCK

2 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 33

TRACKS/SPLIT: Here you can program the parameters exclusive to the tracks, such as Section Transpose, Detune, Polyphony priority, Velocity. These parameters would affect any sound you decide to assign to the tracks being programmed. An Edit Menu contains several parameters and options to choose from, most of which affect the tracks of the Performance you are programming. Those not examined in this chapter are, General, Style/Song e Sound/S.Patch.. The tracks of the Performance in edit are shown in the left track column at all times, therefore you can select your tracks without returning to the Multi Track list. The Edit sections that you would use to construct your Performance are: MIDI: Here you can assign MIDI channels, select the MIDI configuration, set the MIDI Filters, and a host of other settings to set your Performance correctly for MIDI setups. MIXER: The mixer controls the final output of the sounds in your Performance. Essentially it lets you select volume, pan position and output jack selection for each Track. Also available is a 3D effect feature. EFFECTS: Here you can assign the effects that you would like to use, then, for each track, you can assign the amount of SEND to each effect. CONTROL/PADS: Here you can program the onboard controllers: the pedals, the pitch/modulation trackball, the Pads (1, 2, 3 and 4), and you can decide which tracks of your Performance will be affected by them and which one will not. SOUND/S.PATCH: Here you can program a set of sound edit parameters that would affect any sound you decide to assign to the tracks you are programming. This editor is explained in detail in the Sound chapter of the Reference Guide, starting from page 2.4. All pages relating to the Performances show the letter P, ( ) in the top left hand corner, indicating that the parameters of the current page are memorized to the Performances. Lets examine each Performance editor in detail, starting with MIDI.

34 Reference Guide

ACKUP COPIES

the end of a work session, always remember copy all elaborated data present on RAM or In name write situations, SK760/880SE allows Under MIDI, youll find all the elements you need of up to 10 characters, except Blocks ard disk to Floppy Disks. Should you accidenfile names to files program Performances kind accept of lly erase some from your RAM, or should thefor any which 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS and MIDI setup. ard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will Windows 3.1 Operating Systems. Block files also ways be able to recuperate the data from your include the extension .BLK. If your files are to sks. It is advisable to keep backup copies of all be used in MS-DOS devices (IBM PCs and MIDI MENU our disk data.THE Backup is technical jargon for compatibles), bear in mind the 8 character limit second copy. Backup copies stored in a safe Use this naming option to setfiles. the track configuration of of these systems when your ace are extremely important. Disks can become each ofand the Windows 16 available tracks of your PerformIn the Macintosh, OS/2 95 systems, amaged or lost, so please backup your work. You canthat choose which tracks respond to file names canance. include more 8 characters. MIDI In messages, which ones react with the inWhen a name is modified on a computer, the folstruments internal generator, which direct their lowing rules should be remembered: SK DRIVE HEAD CLEANING messages to MIDI OUT and which ones do not do not change the Block file extension. ter a prolonged period of use, disk save and respond to any information. ad errors may become frequent due mainly to avoid Block names longer that 8 characters. Just like the MIDI channel parameter, the Conrty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive the maximum number of files in a Block canfiguration parameter is divided into four parts and ead may need cleaning. This can be done usnot exceed the limit imposed by the SK760/ MIDI CHANNELS (F1) the selected one is shown highlighted. Rotate g a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for 880SE RAM. the dial to change the setting and move to the This option to set the 5 inch (double-sided) diskallows drives.you Do not use a MIDI channel do not change names of right the permanent nextthe part with the cursor arrow and so on.. configuration for eachdisk of the 16 available tracks eaning kit intended for single-sided drives. files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM assigns the MIDI IN port, (A or B), and MIDI When an icon is shown, the parameter is on; Moisten theand cleaning disk with cleaning fluid. Style Group names). SK760/880SE requires OUT port, (A or B), for each track. Each track Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive. standard names to recognize the structure can have separate assignments for MIDI IN and the data. Execute a MIDI load function. An Performance error message OUT. Each can have itsof own will appear.MIDI Thischannel is normal. Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSconfiguration. Windows 3.1 it is essential tosound MIDIand Atari, keyboard/ internal MIDI After approx. 10parameter seconds, eject the disk. The is divided into four partsDOS, and the IN Common Channel generator OUT bear in mind the following advice: one is shown highlighted. Rotate the o not use the selected disk drive for about 5 minutes. not insert spaces within a file name dial to change the setting and move to the do next FILE.BLK). To separate a name part with the right cursor arrow and so on.. (e.g.: MY when OFF appears in place of the icon, the painto two parts, you can either: rameter is deactivated. The first part represents the MIDI IN port, the secseparate two parts by the underscore symond represents the MIDI IN channel, the third the MIDI IN ICON: When on (icon showing), the track bol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK); MIDI OUT port and the fourth the MIDI OUT chanresponds to MIDI data received at the MIDI IN nel. Use Uppercase letters the firstnot receive export. (capital) When OFF, the for track does letters of both parts of data. the name, lowercase ternal MIDI for the others (e.g.: MyFile.BLK). KEYBOARD/COMMON CHANNEL do not assign two files the same name using ICON: The responds letters to the (e.g. SK760/880SE keyboard, uppercase track and lowercase MYMIDI IN port MIDI OUT or to an external controlling device (master key(A or B) channel FILE and myfile). board) transmitting to the(MacinSK760/880SE via the (1...16) The aspect of the Blocks are as folders Common Channel. The common channel allows MIDI IN MIDI OUT tosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Wina remote controller or keyboard to emulate the inchannel port (A or B)dows, OS/2). Other sub-directories folders can ternal (1...16) be found in a Block . keyboard of the SK760/880SE.

MIDI

PRECAUTIONS TO CONFIGURATION OBSERVE WHEN (F2) USING SK760/ 880SE DISKS WITH A COMPUTER

32 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 35

When OFF, the track does not respond to the keyboard, but responds to MIDI IN messages, or it can be used by a Song or Style. INTERNAL SOUND GENERATOR ICON: The events generated by the track are directed to the internal sound engine. When OFF, the track is not connected to the internal sound engine, but can send data to an external MIDI device via the SK760/880SE MIDI OUT port. MIDI OUT ICON: The events generated by the track are sent to an external MIDI device via the SK760/880SE MIDI OUT port. When OFF, the track does not transmit MIDI via MIDI OUT.

GENERAL SETTINGS (F4)

This option provides settings that influence the instrument as a whole and are saved to the General Setup. MIDI CLOCK: This allows you to select whether the sequencer will synchronize to the SK760/ 880SE Internal clock or to an External clock. Note: SK760/880SE receives or transmits MIDI Clock on the same MIDI port (A or B) as the Common Channel. CLOCK SEND: Selects whether or not the SK760/880SEs internal MIDI CLOCK information will be sent via MIDI OUT. Options: On, Off. MIDI MERGE: Allows the data received at both MIDI IN 1 and MIDI IN 2 to be passed to MIDI OUT A and MIDI OUT B after having been processed by the Performance settings. This means that the MIDI IN data can be processed by the volume, transpose, MIDI filters etc. before being sent to MIDI OUT. Options: On, Off. On is the default setting.
Note: The parameter cannot be programmed when the COMPUTER port is in use. See Computer.

MIDI FILTERS (F3)

Each Track has 14 filters available; 7 filters for MIDI IN and 7 filters for MIDI OUT. These filters allow you to specify up to 7 events which you do not want the selected Track to either send or receive. Options: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono touch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.

MIDI IN TRANSPOSE: This allows the simple pitch shifting, (in half step increments), of all data received at MIDI IN. Deactivating this parameter can be useful to avoid unwanted transpositions when you program Songs with a computer. A computer operates as a THRU device. After receiving data by a track

36 Reference Guide

which has been transposed, the computer can SMF SAVE FORMAT: Allows you to set the MIDI EARCH RESOURCE (F4) SOUND SEARCH... (F7)

return the notes to the same track which will transFile conversion format to 0 or 1 when saving his option appears on all second level pages of The Sound Search function appears in the third pose them further. This will not occur if MIDI IN Songs as MIDI files. Single File operations. The second level pages level directory displays for the following operaTranspose is deactivated. Options: 0, 1. e those that appear after confirming a File Setions: Options: On, Off. ctor selection. Load Single Sound; SMF LOAD MODE: provides two loading options he Search Resource function is particularly use Save Single Sound; MIDI IN FIX VELOCITY: This in- Single for Midi Files. Copy 1st bar optimizes the data, l for search operations carried on the Hard Diskfunction will Erase Sound; crease the velocity MIDI converting ontaining a large number of files. of all notes received at Copy Single Sound;:all Program Change data and storing IN by the specified amount. to the Song Performance. Normal ignores the Move Single Sound. or example, if you do not remember in which optimization process and loads the SMF File withIf this parameter is seta touser-proOFF, notes are The received ock of the Hard disk you stored function recalls the nearest Sound having out Program Change conversion. via MIDI IN with the correct velocity value. ammed Sound, or you want to go directly to a the string of characters specified in the active Options: Normal, Copy 1st bar. Options: Off, 1 through ... 127. the entire ock name without scrolling zone. ard Disk contents, press the Sound Search Hint: Some accordions transmit velocity at a fixed 1. Press Soft button F7. MIDI: The G.M function allows optiGENERAL ption to openlevel, an insertion window where you not able to be regulated. With this parammum compatibility with the General MIDI standan specify a name. The following dialog window appears: eter, it is possible to modify the velocity value ard. Before loading a G.M file from disk, set this received by the accordion. function to ON. The table shown below lists the drumkit Program SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE: Setting this function to Changes according to the status of the paramON allows the reception and transmission of eter. SK760/880SE system exclusive data via MIDI. he name can be of the particular file you are Options: On, Off. Options: On, Off. oking for, or part of the entire name. For exame, if your Sound name includes the word or2. InInsert of characters relating(On) to the BANKSELECT: Enables, or disables, (Off) SYSTEM EXC DEVICE ID: Sets the MIDI and the string an or a Block contains a particular sequence and transmission of the BankSelect Sound you the arereception looking for. Out port and MIDI channel for system exclusive letters, you can search for all files which inMSB (CC00) and BankSelect LSB (CC32) mestransmissions. 2 or 3 letters are sufficient. ude the inserted name. sage. The default settings are MIDI port A, channel 1. ess ENTER to start the search and the first 3. Press ENTER. Options: On, Off. ound which includes the written name will apThe cursor goes directly to the first Sound ear, showing its location: found containing the specified characters.
MIDI channel 10, General MIDI On - conversion table (automatic) SEARCH NEXT (F8) PC-GM 18 9 16 PC-BS SKSE Drumkit GM Drumkit This option recalls the next Sound on the searchSKSE 113-2 114-2

list containing the string of characters specified Standard DK-STAND1 in the Sound Search option. Room DK-ROOM
Power Electronic TR-808 Jazz Brush Orchestra DK-POWER DK-ELECT DK-HOUSE DK-JAZZ1 DK-BRUSH DK-ORCH

115-2 the displayed17 file is24 not the one you are looking r, use the F725 to Previous and F8 to Next op116-2 ons are required. 26 32 117-2 hen you find the file you are looking for, press 33 40 118-2 NTER to pass directly to the file location or 41 48 SCAPE to abort the search operation. 119-2 49 128 120-2 ound Search will also inform you of the absence a specified name by showing Not Found.

30 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 37

COMMON CHANNEL/ARRANGEMENT (F5)

Here you can program parameters that are common to all Performances. COMMON CHANNEL: This channel, independent from the settings defined under the Channel and Configurations pages, allows a remote controller keyboard to emulate the internal keyboard of the SK760/880SE. The COMMON CHANNEL should be used when you wish to play a GLOBAL PERFORMANCE or a STYLE from an external controller. Program change messages received on the Common channel are interpreted as PERFORMANCE CHANGE messages. The parameter is divided into three parts: the first part selects the MIDI channel to assign to the Common Channel (IN and OUT), the second the MIDI IN port used by the Common Channel, (A or B) and the third the MIDI OUT port used by the Common Channel, (A or B).
MIDI IN port (A or B)

nel that the controller keyboard was sending on. If, instead, you set the controller keyboard to the COMMON CHANNEL, it would play the complete Performance exactly as though you were playing the internal keyboard of the SK760/880SE itself. The Common Channel is reserved to special tracks dedicated to the control of effects and other parameters. ProgramChange and ControlChange data received on the Common Channel select Style, Song, Performance, Effects and other parameters listed in the Appendix. Options: Off, 1 ... 16. CHORD CH.1 / CHORD CH..2: Here you can assign the Chord channels in order that a MIDI accordion can communicate with the SK760/ 880SE Styles and auto accompaniments. The parameter is divided into two parts. The first part selects the MIDI channel (Off, 1 - 16). The second part selects the MIDI IN port (A or B). Chord to Arr.1: is dedicated to the auto chords. Chord to Arr.2: is dedicated to the auto Bass. A MIDI controlling accordion can send notes for the automatic accompaniment from the chord section, from the bass section, or from both sections. The Common Channel unites to these two channels and their notes contribute to the formation of the chord for the automatic accompaniment. Options: Off, 1 ... 16.

MIDI IN/OUT channel (1...16)

MIDI OUT port (A or B)

For example, if you selected a multi-track Performance on the SK760/880SE and then tried to play this Performance from an external controller keyboard connected to either of the SK760/ 880SEs MIDI IN ports, you would normally only be able to play one of the constituent parts of that Performance depending on the midi chan

38 Reference Guide

CSI UTILITY MIDI DUMP... (F6)

The menu allows you to transfer the conhis page offers aDUMP configuration of formatting tentsSCSI of the SK760/880SE s internal ptions for periferal devices, depending on memory to externalsystem storagerunning devices, (such e current operating on your as Home P.Cs MIDI Data Filers or another SK760/880SE), K760/880SE.orThe following example shows via MIDI. ne of the possible configurations. Selecting the MIDI DUMP option, (F6) opens a file type selection window where you can select the type of data to send to the external storage device or sequencer.

user-programmed file. User Style: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single userprogrammed file. Song: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single Song (including relative Song-Performance).

ST ZIP 100/250 FORMAT

his operation formats a 100 or 250 Megabyte p disk using a high speed method without Select the desired file type then press ENTER to hecking the medium for possible bad blocks. access the second level file selector.

Note: SK760/880SE receives and transmits the Dump on the same MIDI ports (A or B) as the Common Channel. The System Exclusive parameter in the General Set option of Edit MIDI must be set to ON (ON by default). The MIDI DUMP operation must be carried out while SK760/880SE is in Style/RealTime mode Style not playing.

TRANSMISSION OF DATA TO A SEQUENCER

Check that the external sequencer is able to record System Exclusive data. 1. Connect the MIDI OUT of the SK760/880SE to the MIDI IN of the sequencer. Use the MIDI port (A or B) assigned the SK760/880SE Common Channel. 2. Open the MIDI DUMP file selector and select the data that you want to transmit. 3. In the external sequencer, dedicate a track for the reception of the system exclusive data by assigning a generic MIDI channel (Any, All, or similar) and activate the recording in the sequencer. 4. Press ENTER on the SK760/880SE to start transmitting. A bar graph shows the progression of the transmission. Wait until the data transfer operation is complete. If the MIDI Dump aborted! - Check connections message appears, the transfer was unsuccessful. Check the cable connection and try again.

P 100/250 FORMAT

his operation formats a 100 or 250 Megabyte p disk using a slower but optimised method, hecking the medium for possible bad blocks. ny bad blocks found will be masked with the sulting reduction of the overall capacity of the sk. Use the direction arrows to select the desired file

ST JAZ 1G/2Gand FORMAT press ENTER again to send the Dump.

his operation The formats a 1 are: or 2 Gigabyte Jaz options sk using a high speed method without check: the current general settings of the instrug the mediumSetup for possible bad blocks. ment. Sound: opens a selection window where you can Z 1G/2G FORMAT select either All files (including RAM-Waves, his operation RAM-Sounds formats a 1 orand 2 Gigabyte RAM Jaz -Sounds) or a single sk using a slower but optimised method, checkfile from the SK760/880SE Sound Library. g the medium for possible bad blocks. Any bad Real Performance: opens a selection window ocks found will be masked with the resulting where you can select either All files or a single duction of the overall capacity of the disk. Performance. Style Performance: opens a selection window where you can select either All files or a single

28 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 39

RECEPTION OF DUMP DATA FROM A SEQUENCER

It is not necessary to prepare the SK760/880SE to receive a dump. Dumps can be received at any time and the data will immediately be available for use.
WARNING - Sending system exclusive data to SK760/880SE cancels all data of the same type currently residing in memory. Save the data you wish to conserve before receiving the system exclusive data from an external unit.

Mixer
The MIXER controls the final output of the sounds in the current Performance.

THE MIXER MENU

VOLUME (F1)

LOCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7)

With Local On (default setting) the SK760/880SE keyboard is connected to the internal sound engine. When set to OFF, the built in keyboard of the SK760/880SE will be disconnected from the internal sounds. Activate Local Off to program Songs on an external sequencer using the SK760/880SE as the controlling device. The SK760/880SE keyboard transmits data to the external sequencer, and the sequencer returns the data to the SK760/880SE internal sound engine.

Here you can set the volume of each track. Use either the DIAL or the sliders AH. In Performance edit, each slider corresponds to a track (track A = slider A and so on...). Value range: 0 ... 127.

PAN (F2) MIDI LOCK (F8)

Normally, your MIDI settings are saved as a part of the current Performance, (when you press the Store Performance button), and each Performance can have its own distinct MIDI settings. If, however, you want the current MIDI settings to remain in effect, regardless of which Performance you select, turn on the LOCK function.

This function lets you select the pan position within the stereo panorama. Moving the Pan all to the left or all to the right, you can direct the sound to one output instead of both. Value range: -31 (all to the left) ... 0 (center) ...+31 (all to the right).

310 Reference Guide

Press EXECUTE toPAN start the hard disk reRANDOM (F3) store process. When the Hard Disk Restore has finished, a message is displayed saying: Operation completed. If the Hard Disk Restore operation requires more than one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on.

3D EFFECT (F5) MULTICOPY H.DISK TO SCSI

This option allows you to copy more than one Block file at a time (a batch) from Hard Disk to a SCSI device of your choice. 1. With the Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI option selected, press ENTER to open the SCSI Drive selection window. The 3D effect is a spatializer which adds dimension to the SK760/880SE Sounds.

sition of the current track by a random amount whenever a new note is played. The amount of LETE (F5) shift limited by the value youthe select. At maxiBASS: A Bass equalizer which adds or removes elect DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from mum level, (7), the pan position may shift comthe bass frequencies. t. 2. Select the drive press ENTER to enter pletely to the left or right channel Valueand range: 12dB +12dB he Delete option does not cancel a Block from file selector. Value range: 0 (no effects) ... 7 (maximumthe rane Restore directory. domness). 3D: A spatializer which affects the stereo outSET (F6) puts of the instrument. The effect is not heard if elect RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two the instrument is connected to a mono amplificaAUDIO OUT (F4) more Blocks in a single step. tion system. Value range: 3dB ... 12dB.

This OPTIONS function will automatically shift the pan poARD DISK RESTORE

LECT ALL (F7)

se Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks conined in the Restore directory.

3. Prepare a list of Block files to copy. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it ess EXECUTE (F8) to start the restore procinto the list. The cursor moves down to the ss. next empty location automatically. Routing of the tracks to the audio outputs.Repeat The the operation for other Blocks. parameter is important only when the tracks are EXECUTE to start the copy process. 4. Press connected to the internal sound generation. Normally the SK760/880SE sends sounds to both LEFT and RIGHT outputs, but it is possible to send some tracks to the auxiliary 1 and 2 outputs, for an external mixing operation and a wider sound opening. The outputs selection also affects the internal amplification. Options: Left+Right, Out1+Out2, Out1, Out2.

ECUTE (F8)

26 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 311

Effects
When you select the EFFECTS Edit button, the display will show a sub-menu with two editors: EFFECT and VOCAL PROCESSOR.

EFFECTS TYPE (F1)

Here we explain the EFFECT editor. Although the Vocal Processor feature contains some Performance parameters, the nature of this function requires a separate explanation which youll find in a separate chapter on page 7.1 of the Reference Guide. To gain access to the Edit Effect parameters, select the Effect editor and press ENTER. The EDIT EFFECT menu contains general parameters that affect the instrument as a whole (amount of general reverb), parameters that affect all the tracks of the Performance in edit (effects assigned to the DSPs), and track parameters (amount of effects sends). The DSP consists of four real time controlled units which process the Performances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb channels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & B) are available. In Style/Performance mode, channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B for the accompaniment tracks. Each track can be processed by two effects. When a Style is selected with the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects assigned to the accompaniment tracks will change (Group B). When a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the keyboard will change (Group A). In Song mode, each track can be independently processed by either A or B channel effects.

Here you can set up the actual effects that you would like your Performance to use from each DSP. If you are working on the keyboard tracks only, youd select the effects from Group A. If you are programming the accompaniment tracks of a Style Performance, youd select your effects from Group B. This means that your Performance can be processed by two sets of DSPs. A Style Performance, therefore, can play with a completely independent set of effects with respect the to the keyboard tracks.

GROUP A
EFF. 1: The Reverb selector of Group A. Assignable reverb types: refer to the lists in the Appendix. VOL. General Reverb level of Group A. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFF. 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, etc) selector of Group A. Assignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in the Appendix. VOL. General Modulation level of Group A. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. EFFECT 2 TO EFFECT 1: Sets the quantity of feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maximum feedback of the signal).

312 Reference Guide

ARD DISK SLEEP GROUP TIME B

HOW TO BACK UP GENERAL YOUR HARD EFF1 BALANCE DISK DATA (F3)

o avoid hearing EFF. the 1:noise The Reverb causedselector by the rotaof Group B. 1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready. on of the hardAssignable disk, you can set this parameter As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data reverb types: refer to the lists in the turn the hardAppendix. disk off after an operation. are compressed to approx. 50% of the origiptions: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec. VOL. General Reverb level of Group B. nal value in the case of Songs, and 30% in the case of Sounds. Use this conversion Assignable values: 0 ... 127. scale to calculate approximately how many ARD DISK PROTECTION EFF. 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, disks you will require to backup your data. s a safety measure to prevent etc) selector of unwanted Group B. file loss, The size of each selected Block file is shown se the Hard Disk Protection function to protect Assignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in bottom of the directory. at the our hard disk. Here you can adjust the overall Reverb level, rethe Appendix. 2. Select the Hard Disk Backup option and press gardless of the current Performance. This paNote: All SK760/880SE instruments leave level the facVOL. General Modulation of Group B.ENTER to activate the function. rameter allows you to adapt the reverberation of tory with the Hard Disk Protection active. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. thefunction SK760/880SE the natural reverb of the surSelecting this opens to a second level order to use EFFECT the Save,2Erase or Move1: operaTO EFFECT Sets the quantity of roundings. display showing the Hard disk directory on ons on the Hard Disk, the protection must be feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. the left andAssignable a column on the right you values: 0%where (all dry) ... 100% (all wet). moved. Assignable values: 0 (no feedback) ... 127 (maxican prepare a list of data to backup and comThe value of 70% corresponds to the factory set elect the Hard Disk Protection function mum feedback of the signal).and press. value. ess ENTER to activate the protection function. The reverb duration varies according to the dise the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between mensions and absorption characteristics of the e two optionsSEND (Unprotect/Protect). LEVEL (F2) surroundings in which you play. You can program the SK760/880SE reverb in order to obtain the best results over headphones, or for home listening, and then regulate this parameter to adapt the reverb to the surroundings in which you play in public. ress ENTER to save the selected status to The backup list can consist of Block filesin only, emory. The setting is not retained memory at power not individual files normally found in a block. down. 3. Prepare a list of the block(s) to backup. ARD DISK BACKUP Select a Block and PROGRAMMING press ENTER to insert it EFFECTS (F4) his option allows you backup part all the Here youto can control the or amount of effect (SEND) into the list. The cursor moves down to the ard disk dataassigned to floppy to disk in compressed or each track. In Style/Performance next empty location automatically. Repeat ecompressed mode, form. By default, Compress you cannot the switch Groups for the keyboard the operation for other blocks. ption is selected. tracks and accompaniment tracks, therefore the If you attempt to insert a Block that has alA and B always parameters cannot be selected. the end of a Group work session, remember ready been inserted, an appropriate warning copy all newly elaborated data presentinto on Hard The parameter is divided three parts, the first, is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the sk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer (Group A or B), remains fixed, the second, (E1), warning and select a different Block. amage and data loss, you will always to and the third, (E2), relatebe to able the Reverb and Moducuperate the lation data from disks. effect send levels for each track. 4. Press EXECUTE (F1) to start the backup process. In Song mode, the Group parameter can be Here you can program the effects currently asAfter a short period, the unit is ready to backswitched from A to B and vice versa. signed to your Performance. up the data and a dialog appears requesting Assignable values: 0 (dry) ... 127 (wet). A zero The top of the display (6 lines) relate to you to insert Disk n.section 1: send level corresponds to no effect for the track. the Group A effects, while the bottom half to the Group B effects.

24 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 313

The tables i the Appendix list the available effect types. The parameters shown in the display will depend on the type of effects selected from the Eff.1 and Eff.2 DSPs. Below follows a brief explanation of all the parameters that you would encounter when programming your Performance effects. REV.TIME (REVERB TIME): Decay time of the reverb. DELAY (REVERBS): Initial delay between the emission of the original sound (dry signal) and the reverb (wet signal). H.F.DECAY (HIGH FREQUENCY DECAY): Decay of the high frequencies. The parameter indicates the final frequency of the filter. The decay of the high frequencies has a longer duration than that of the low frequencies. ROOM SIZE: Dimensions of the simulated room. The time lapse between the first reflection and the remainder of the reverb. DIFFUSION: Duration of the reverb (Early type reverbs). L.P. FILTER (LOW PASS FILTER): Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. DELAY (DELAYS): Velocity of the delay repetition. FEEDBACK (DELAYS): Interaction of the delay with itself. Determines the number of repetitions of the delay. FEEDBACK (PHASERS AND FLANGERS): Interaction of the phaser or flanger with itself. Determines the harmonic amount of the effect. FREQ.MODUL. (FREQUENCY MODULATION): Modulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects. DEPTH: Depth of the action of the effect. FEEDBACK (DISTORTION): Saturation of the distortion.

SPEED (ROTARY EFFECTS): Time required to pass from slow to fast or vice versa. ROTARY: Slow/fast velocity. SEMITONE: Transposition in semitone steps. DETUNE: Detuning over a range of 100 Cents. LOW GAIN: Enhancement of the low frequencies. MEDIUM GAIN: Enhancement of the mid frequencies. HIGH GAIN: Enhancement of the high frequencies.

314 Reference Guide

Utility

Controllers/Pads

PEDALS PROGRAMMING (F2)

ter pressing DISK, use the Page scroll button FORMAT Here you can set up the Wheels, the pedals andMS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB) pass to the last two, or three, Disk pages which This operation formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk in the Pads, the on-board physical controllers for ovide useful functions for disk, Hard Disk and MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). the Performance in edit. CSI formatting and servicing: This format permits file exchange with computFloppy Disk Utility; ers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, MacinWHEELS (F1) Hard Disk Utility; tosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of Here you can assign a function to the pedals 1, 2 reading MS-DOS format disks. SCSI Utility. 3. All three Pedals can befor set to operate as The procedureand is identical to that described either Switch Continuous controls. the Format work disk (1.62 or Mb) operation. OPPY DISK UTILITY Switch action pedals control on/off functions such as Soft, DISK Sostenuto, Damper, Start/Stop, Fill, RoFORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI (720 KB) tary Slow/Fast, etc. This operation formats a 3.5 DD floppy disk in Continuous pedals control MS-DOS / Atari ST formatcontrol (capacity: 720 kilo- functions such Expression, Activates the action of the Wheels for single bytes), suitableas forVolume, MIDI file exchanges.Pitch and Modulation. tracks. The procedure is identical to that described for SWITCH functions: Off, Damper, Sostenuto, Soft, Each track can be independently programmed the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation. Start/Stop, Key Start, Intro, Fill <, Fill =, Fill >, for the action of the Pitchbend Wheel (1) and/or WARNING : Disk initializing cancel the4, Var >, Var <, Ending, Var 1,procedures Var 2, Var 3, Var the Modulation Wheel (2). entire contents of a - be absolutely sure Perf >,used Perfdisk <, Harmony, Bass to Low., Arrange that you are not about to cancel important data. ORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB) On/Off, Fade In/Out, Tempo >, Tempo <, Punch, PITCHBEND his operation force-formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk Rotary Slow/Fast, Minor, 7th, Dim, Min 7th, Maj Pitch Bend is applied by vertical movements of r SK760/880SE use. CHANGE DISK NAME 7th, Vocal On/Off, Vocal Custom 1-16, Vocal Wheel 1 (the left wheel). The PitchBend wheel Mute, Chord, Vocal Vocoder, his extended format procedure this operation toVocal assign a name to a floppy Vocal Unison, is spring loaded prepares to return the thedisk control to Use the cenFreeze Chord. th a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows tral position (corresponding to standard pitch). e standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format pitch excursion quick recognition of the contents during a search The parameter offers a maximum CONTINUOUS functions: Off, PitchBend, Pitch+, annot be readof by computers. through disks without labels. If you write the disks 12 semitones and Off. Pitch, Filter Cutoff on the index label, you can Frequency reduce the(CC74), ResoInsert a new floppy disk into the The same control candrive. be assigned to aname continunance (CC71), Modulation (CC01), Breath consearch times even further. ous control pedal. disk, See Pedals Programming You can also use a formatted provided troller (CC02), Volume (CC07), Pan (CC10), ExSK760/880SE assigns a generic code name to (F2) that you are not. interested in conserving its pression (CC11), Vocal Volume. disks formatted with the Utility formatting procecontents. dures - the name depending on the size. MODULATION Select Format work disk (1.62 Mb). Refer to work the Pedal function tables on pages 3.16 For example, a 1.62 Mb disk will be assigned Modulation is applied by vertical movements of The following dialog window appears: and as 3.17 for brief explanations a code name such the one shown below: of each function. Wheel 2 (the right wheel). The Modulation Wheel is centre-dented for easy positioning at the central position. The parameter can be set to either On of Off. The same control can be assigned to a switch action pedal. See Pedals Programming (F2). Press ENTER to start the formatting proceUse the standard name entry procedure to give Options: Pitch Bend: Off, 1...12. dure. your disks a name. Confirm the entry with ENModulation: Off, On. TER or cancel with Escape.

22 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 315

PEDALS ASSIGNMENT

THE CONTINUOUS PEDAL FUNCTIONS

Off Pitch Bend No effect Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The Pitch Bend sweeps from the maximum negative to maximum positive setting of the Pitch setting in the Performance Controls menu. The central position of the continuous pedal corresponds to 0 pitch. Increases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Decreases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff parameter in Edit Sound/S.Patch. Affects the Resonance parameter. Generates Breath controller (CC02) data (useful for external MIDI devices capable of recognizing this controller). Controls the general volume (CC07). Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to right. Controls the volume from 0 level to the maximum settings of the mixer levels. Controls the volume of the Vocal harmony track when using the Vocal Processor.

Here you can assign the pedals to the tracks of your Performance. The pedal settings you choose can be stored to the current Performance with Store Performance.

Pitch + Pitch Filter Resonance Breath Cnt.

Volume Pan Expression

Vocal Volume

316 Reference Guide

THE SWITCH PEDAL FUNCTIONS Move operations

Off No effect

Fade In/Out Tempo >

Activates/deactivates the Fade In/ Out function. Increases the Tempo setting by one unit at a time.

Applies sustain released se the Move Damper command to shift a filethe from oneeffect to3. Select the source and destination devices with notes. Tempo < Decreases the Tempo setting by one cation to another within the same device, or from soft buttons F1, F2, F3 or F4. unit at a time. e Hard Disk to Sostenuto floppy (bypassing Sustains the RAM) only the and notes played at the time pressing the pedal; notes In this case,Punch select RAM as the Activates/deactivates device to work the Punch rece versa, or from a SCSI device to of Hard Disk or played after pressing the pedal are cording function during recording in. oppy and vice versa. This option cancels the not affected. operations. e at the source. Soft Attenuates the sound. WARNING - Start/Stop Use the Move function only the in cases Simulates Start/Stop button. where the original file needs to be cancelled. Key Start Activates/deactivates the Key Start function. Rotary s/f Minor Changes the speed of the Rotary effect from Slow to Fast or vice versa. Converts the currently held chord to the minor chord.

o move a file from one floppy disk to another, Selecting Floppy disk or Converts RAM automatDim the currently held chord to Intro Activates the other Intro. st load the file to RAM, then save it to the ically assigns the same device to source and the diminished chord. Fill < Activates the Fill< function. destination. oppy. Min 7th Converts the currently held chord to Fill are = executed Activates thesame Fill function. the minor 7th chord. ove operations using the 4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector, select ocedures areFill those for the Load and > described Activates the Fill> function. Maj 7th the desired Converts the currently a Block containing file then press held chord to the Major 7th chord. ave commands. This section provides general Ending Activates the Ending function. ENTER to access the Block. formation relating to the Move operation. The Hardcopy Captures a Bitmap image of the curVariation 1 Switches to Variation 1. ser is encouraged to apply the same logic to rent Display. Variation 2 Switches to Variation ove operations as those used for Load and 2. Vocal On/Off Activates/deactivates the Vocal ProcVariation 3 Switches to Variation 3. ave operations. essor for Vocal harmonies. Variation 4 Switches to to Variation he example which follows shows how use 4. Vocal Custom 1-16 Recalls custom Vocal Processor Voice settings. e Move operation Move Var > within RAM: Switches to Single the next Variation. ound. Vocal Mute Mutes the Vocal Track when using Var < Switches to the previous Variation.
Perf >

the Vocal harmonies. Advances to the next Performance. Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison Switches from one VoN.B. To select Performances OVE SINGLE SOUND cal Processor operating 5. Select the source di- mode to the sequentially in increasing order, all the File to Move from other. those you want to recall should be rectory. Press DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the programmed for the action of the Freeze Chord Locks the current chord (pedal +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the Perf> function. held), allowing you to play freely with both hands across the entire keymain MOVE page. Perf < Returns to the previous Performboard without triggering changes in ance. the Style auto-accompaniment. The Select the MOVE command required from Performances the N.B. To select function deactivates at pedal release. sequentially in decreasing order, all main MOVE page. those you want to recall must be programmed for the action of the Perf< function. Harmony Bass to Low. Activates/deactivates the Harmony On/Off button. Activates/deactivate the Bass to Lowest function.

Arrange On/Off Activates/deactivates the Arrange On/Off button.

20 Reference Guide

Performances - Edit Performance 317

PADS (F4)
The four PAD buttons are independently programmable. Each button can be configured to react according to the settings of various parameters.

Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison - Switches from one Vocal Processor operating mode to the other. Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of the current display (.BMP) into RAM. The images can be saved to an MSDOS disk and elaborated by a graphic program running on a personal computer.

PAD #
Determines the Function to assign to the pad. Functions assignable: Off, KeybAssign, Rotary slow/fast, Vocal On/Off, Vocal Custom 1-16, Vocal Mute, Vocal Chord, Vocal Vocoder, Vocal Unison, Hardcopy. Off - pad deactivated. KeyAssign - The pad plays the assigned note. The Volume, Pan, Transposition and MIDI OUT channel settings correspond to those of track 6. The Note and ProgramChange are defined by the following parameters which appear only when this option is selected PC - Program Change. Range 1128. C#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank Select MSB). Range 1128. C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank Select LSB). This parameter does not require a setting to play an internal SK760/ 880SE sound. Range 1128. Note - Determines the note played. Range: C-1 to G9 Dynamic Note velocity. Range 0127 Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary velocity from slow to fast or vice versa. Vocal On/Off - Activates/deactivates the Vocal Processor for Vocal harmonies. Vocal Custom 1-16 - Recalls custom Vocal Processor Voice settings. Vocal Mute - Mutes the Vocal Track when using the Vocal harmonies.

Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display. Save (F2) - saves the captured image to an MS-DOS disk. Reset (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the RAM. Each image uses approx. 6 KBytes of RAM. Ignore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing the image.

PED./PAD LOCK

(F8)

When selected ( ), the Pedals/Pads Lock conserves the current pedal and pad programmed status for all Performance and Style selections. To enable the recall of the Pedal/Pads parameters, make sure the Padlock is open (unlocked). The Pedals/Pads Lock remains in memory after power down. It is saved to the Setup.

318 Reference Guide

Copy operations Tracks/Split

DETUNE (F3)

Here you can program parameters exclusive se the Copy command to copy a filethe from one In this case, pass to the source directory and, to the tracks, suchdevice, as Section Transpose, Mascation to another within the same or from if necessary, select Floppy Disk (F1). ter transpose enable/disable, Detune, Random e Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and Pitch, Touch Sensitivity, Polyphony ce versa, or from a SCSI device to Hard Disk or priority, VeThese would affect any sound oppy and vicelocity. versa. The parameters source file remains you decide to assign to the tracks being protact. grammed. o copy a file from one floppy disk to another, This allows you to adjust the fine pitch of the Then pass to the destination directory and st load the file to RAM, then save it to the other sound in steps of 1/64th of a semitone. select the Hard disk (F2) as the destination. TRANSPOSE (F1) oppy. Assignable values: - 630+63 Entering the Hard disk for the first time takes . opy operations are executed using the same some time, depending on the number of files ocedures are those described for the Load and already present. RANDOM PITCH (F4) ave commands. This section provides general A Please Wait message appears during the formation relating to the Copy operation. The scanning period. ser is encouraged to apply the same logic to opy operations as those used for Load and Save Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatperations. ically assigns the same device to source and destination. he following example shows how to copy a sine Sound file from disk to Hard Disk. 4. Press HereFloppy you can change the pitch of the sound in ENTER to enter the file selector, select

half tone steps, within a maximum range of 60source Block containing the desired file the steps up or down. and press ENTER to gain access. OPY SINGLE SOUND This function automatically applies a little detuning Assignable values: 600+60. to the sound each time a new note is played. The Press DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the amount by which it detunes the note is limited by +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the the value you select. At maximum value, (7), this main COPYMASTER page. TRANSPOSE ENABLE/DISABLE (F2) automatic detuning may be as much as a half step sharp or flat. Select the COPY command required from the Assignable values: 0 (no effect) ... 7 (maximum main page. randomness).

5. Select the File to Copy from (F5) the source diTOUCH SENSITIVITY rectory.
Usually you will want to leave this set to ON. It confirms that this sound will be affected by the TRANSPOSE buttons on the front panel. In some situations, fordevices example, when using drum Select the source and destination with kits, the track to be shifted. In soft buttons F1,you F2, may F3 ornot F4 want and directional arrows. this case, set this function to OFF (default setting).

This function enables or disables the tracks of

18 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 319

the current Performance for the action of the touch sensitive keyboard. Tracks set to Off will not react to velocity changes. Assignable values: 0n, Off.

VELOCITY CURVE (F7)

MODE/PRIORITY (F6)

Selects the polyphonic/monophonic mode for the tracks and activates/deactivates the Priority option (guaranteed minimum polyphony for the track). MODE: Sets the track to play monophonically (one note at a time) or polyphonically (two or more simultaneous notes). Mono R gives priority to the right note, Mono L to the left note, Mono T to the last note played. Options: Poly, Mono L, Mono R, Mono T. PRIORITY: Setting this function to On gives the current sound priority of polyphony. This signifies that this particular sound will never have notes stolen by other Performance tracks or tracks of the sequencer. If you subsequently try to play this sound while all of the available polyphony is being used, it will steal the notes it needs from other tracks.
Note: Avoid assigning Priority=On to too many tracks, as this will cancel the function due to conflicts between the assigned tracks.

Provides a selection of Velocity response curves. As well as modifying the velocity data, velocity curves allow the creation of crossfade effects between two tracks. For example, it is possible to assign two tracks with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two opposing linear curves [ex. 1 & 4], or two opposing exponential curves [ex. 2 & 5]. The resulting effect is one of hearing the sound of the second track fade in by gradually increasing the keystrike velocity while the sound of the fist track fades out. Playing softly triggers one sound and playing hard triggers the second. Playing with in between values creates a blend of both sounds.

VELOCITY RANGE (F8)

The Velocity Range parameter is used to specify, for each track, exactly how and when it will be activated from the keyboard. The limits applied allow the creation of cross-switching effects by assigning tracks different velocity ranges. For example, to make a three part velocity switch, activate Tracks 1, 2 and 3 (using the corresponding soft buttons).

320 Reference Guide

he Save All procedure Then assign offers the the VELOCITY following posrange as follows; bilities: Track 1 : 0 to 40 ave All Song: saves up 16 -Songs; Track 2to : 40 80 ave All Sound: saves Trackan 3 :unspecified 80 - 127 number Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16 This will give you one sound across the whole roups); keyboard. Depending on how hard you play, you ave All Real will Perf : saves up to three 8 Groups of sounds. switch between different erformances; Assignable values: Low range 0127 - High ave All Stylerange: Perf: 1270. saves up to 12 Groups of om Style Performance banks, each containing p to 8 Style Performances; Press the Page ( ) button to pass to Page 2. ave All User Style: saves up to 4 Groups of ser Styles (including all (F1) associated User Style HARMONY erformances).

Duet: similar to Smart, but limited to two notes. Block: based on the harmonizing tables. Octave 1: doubles the note of the right hand by playing an octave higher. No left hand chord required. Octave 2: doubles the note of the right hand, one octave above as well as one octave below. No left hand chord required. Peterson: doubles the note of the right hand with a note two octaves below. No left hand chord required. Jazz: adds two notes above the note played by the right hand, at intervals of a fourth and a minor seventh. No left hand chord required. Rock: adds three notes of the perfect chord below the note played with the right hand. No left hand chord required.

TRACK
Allows you to choose from a selection of harmony types. The Harmony function is enabled and disabled by pressing the HARMONY button on the control panel. Harmony is a function that affects the instrument set to Styles/Performance mode when the keyboard is split (Upper/Lower and Multi modes). Songs are not affected. Selects the track to which the harmony type is assigned. Options: tracks 38

HARMONY TYPE STRUCTURES

HARMONY TYPE
Provides a selection of harmony types (defined by the structure chart shown below). Close: the notes of a chord played below the Split Point harmonize the melody of the right hand. The harmonizing chord is a closed (or tight) position and the notes of the left hand are copied to the right hand (see table). Open 1: an open chord (see table). Open 2: similar to Open 1 (see table). Smart: similar to Close, but based on the harmonizing tables.

Harmony example. The left hand plays a chord in C Major. The black notes represent the melody, the white note the harmony added by the Harmony option.

16 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 321

DELAY (F2)

Track 2: C3 to B3 Track 3: C4 to B4 Track 4: C5 to B5 Track 5: C6 to A8 This will give you a five part split where you have a different sound in each octave. Assignable values: A0) C8.

Selecting a value here will cause the sound to be delayed for a brief period of time after a key is pressed. This allows you to create a number of special effects using real time delays. The delay time value is shown in Ticks. These ticks are subdivisions of the beat based on the current Clock Speed, (the tempo of the internal sequencer). Each tick represents 1/192nd of a beat. Therefore if you set a delay time of 192, you will hear a delay of exactly one beat between when you press the key and when the sound is heard. Assignable values: 0 (off)192 (1 ) 384 (2 ) 576 (3 ) 768 (4 ).

CREATE TRACK (F6)

This function, available only if you are working with a Song Performance in Song mode, allows you to create multi-track Performances of more than 16 tracks. Each track you create has the same default settings. Press the Soft button F6 to open the Create Track dialogue window:

KEY RANGE (F3)

Specify the Track number with the DIAL. If the specified track number already exists, default values are automatically assigned. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

COPY TRACK (F7)

This function, available only if you are working with a Song Performance in Song mode, assigns a keyboard extension (highest and lowest notes) to each track, allowing you to program a multisplit Performance. For example, to make a five part split, activate Tracks 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (using the corresponding soft buttons). Then assign the Key ranges as follows, Track 1: A0 to B2

This function allows you to copy the settings of one track to another, saving time. The destination track assumes all the programmed settings of the source track. Select the source track and press the soft button F6 to open the Copy track dialogue window.

Specify the number of the track to copy to with the DIAL.

322 Reference Guide

your error with Press the following ENTER to message: confirm or ESCAPE to cancel SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE) Store Performance the operation.

Note: This operation does not copy the notes capmain Save Whenever page. you edit a Performance, you will, at tured by the sequence. To copy the notes, use the some point, decide that you either want to save Copy events function (in Edit Style or Edit Song). your new sound combination, or simply forget it

1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the

ess ESCAPE to close the user message and y again, this time selecting the correct destinaon. ERASE TRACK (F8)

and return to using the instrument as before. A modified Performance that has not been stored to memory shows a small mark at the top left hand corner before the name in the Performance seThis function, available only if you are working lection window. with a Song Performance in Song mode, allows If you want to cancel all your modifications, eiyou to cancel tracks of the current Performance. ther select the same Performance again, or seIn Style/Performance mode, it is not possible to ENTER 2. Press to enter the FILE SELECTOR and lect another one. erase any tracks. select the destination device (Floppy, Hard If you decide you want to store your Performance Select the track you wish to cancel. A track en-o SCSI). disk into the instruments memory, the next step will gaged by the sequencer cannot be erased. be to press the STORE PERFORMANCE butPress the soft button F8. You are prompted to ton. Any Performance that you create yourself confirm with Are you sure?: can be stored in the Global Performances or the Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. Style Performances banks. During the storing process, you will first be asked to select a destiHint: Cancel Song tracks that are not used. The resulting Song file will occupy less memory disk. the destination nation for your new Performance 3.onSelect Block then press EN- and then given opportunity to name it. TER to gainthe access.

SAVING TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the Store Performance dialog window:

If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47. 2. Press ENTER to save. To change the name of the Performance, press the soft button F7 or F8 and change the name using the keys of the keyboard. You can refer to the method described in the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. Press ENTER to confirm the name and return to the Store window.

14 Reference Guide

Performances- Edit Performance 323

3. Press ENTER again to save the Performance with the new name.

5. Move down to the Perf option with the cursor button [ ] and select the destination Performance or Style Performance with the DIAL.

TO SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE

1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE.

2. Select the Performance or Style-Performance option with the / cursor arrows.

6. If you want to give the Performance a new name, press the function buttons F7/F8 and insert a name using the text insertion method already described in the Quick Guide.

3. Select the Store To Group option with the cursor button [ ] and rotate the DIAL to select the destination Performance or Style Performance Group. 7. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. You can also refer to another example of this procedure on page 1.33 of the Quick Guide.

4. If you are saving a Style Performance, select the Style option with the cursor button [ ] and rotate the DIAL to select the destination Style.

324 Reference Guide

AVE SINGLE USER STYLE

sion. In some cases, other names appear which represent sub-directories containing other MIDI aves a single User Style and associated User Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken yle Performances to any location in the USER line with the .MID extension. The .MID extenyle Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk. sion is attached to the original SK760/880SE The DISK section of the SK760/880SE allows SCSI: With the option, it is possible to connect Songyou name automatically. AVE SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE to work with a number of different types of storto periferal SCSI devices. Both SK760/880SE Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk age devices. models are fitted with a SCSI interface. aves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed ready. Use the Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb) yle Performances. These Performances canPress the DISK button to enter the DISK mode. Any connected SCSI devices, (CD-ROM, Zip, and Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB) functions ot be loaded to locations other than the original Jaz, or media), can be in the Utility Disk page toother format removable your new disks. ource Style Performance bank. For example, accessed with this button. e Style Performances of Style 59 cannot be After selecting the device that you want to work SAVE SINGLE SOUND aved to any other location of the ROM Styles. with, you next choose which type of operation Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM you attempt to save to a destination other than you want to perform, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, Sounds to disk or Hard disk to build a library of e correct one, a user message will inform you COPY, MOVE, UTILITY (Floppy, Hard Disk, Sounds for future use. The Save Single Sound your error with the following message: SCSI). procedure is characterized by an increased number of steps, owing to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of CHOOSE THE DESIRED DISK COMMAND 16 slots. SELECTING THE STORAGE DEVICE Press the +/ PAGE/BANK buttons to select the Yoube can to save your Ram-Sounds anyThe first step of any disk operation should tochoose type of operation you want to work with. For the you want, but it is recommended that you ess ESCAPE to close user and select thethe type of message device you want towhere access. LOAD, SAVE, ERASE and MOVE operations, the save to the same location as the original RAM y again, this time selecting thechoices correct available: destinaThere are three main display divides into two parts: on the left, position to facilitate future selection. on. three options which determine how many files will Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take be handled, on the right, the the type of file being ProgramChange number of the chosen destinaNGLE MIDI FILE handled. tion, therefore, if you save 19-2 SwOrgan to, say, aves a SK760/880SE Song to disk (MS-Dos forSpecify your requirement by combining the File destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with at) as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song Quantity in the left column with the File Type in the new ProgramChange number on a future load th other instruments or computers. SK760/ the other: operation, not with the old. 80SE saves Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format Floppy disk: The SK760/880SE can work with For example: To load a single Song, specify IDI files. SetMS-DOS the SMF formatted Save Format paramNote: You can also use the Sound Search function disks, either HD, (1.44 SINGLE and SONG in the main LOAD page. to pass directly to a particular Sound and sound Bank. er in the General Set function of Edit MIDI. Mbytes) or DD, (720 Kbytes). Alternatively, the The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail you want to save GM compatible files, set format, (1.62 instrument can use MIDI its own special on pages 4.28. e General MIDI parameter ON in the GenMbytes) which,to while being less interchangeable al set function of Edit MIDI. than the MS-DOS format, allows you to use more space on a standard floppy disk. erformances are converted into track data (Bank elect MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume, disk: This option gains access to the Blocks an, CC91 andHard CC93 for the depth of the effects). of the internal Hard disk drive, (2.5 a Score is present, the text is converted into inch IDE type). The Hard Disk is standard for both models of the yric events and the chord symbols into Text SKSE series and contains a vast selection of vents. Songs, Styles and Sounds. he save procedure is almost identical to Save ngle Song. In this case youll see a list of files the destination directory with the .MID exten-

Disk - Hard disk - SCSI

12 Reference Guide

Disk

41

LIMITATIONS
Some file types cannot be handled more than one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE operation. Other files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while some are limited to Single and All operations only. The table below shows the valid commands for each file type:
File Type Block Setup Sound Real Performance Style Performance User Styles Song MIDIFile Command Single Single Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single, Group, All Single

THE FILE SELECTOR

Once specified, press ENTER to confirm your selection in the main DISK page and enter the file Selector. The File selector is where you can select the source files and respective destinations.

Again, the display divides into two parts. On the left is the directory of the file origin (floppy, hard disk, etc.) and on the right side is the main directory of something called RAMFILE (Random Access Memory). This is the name given to the SK760/880SEs internal memory. Everything currently stored in memory, Sounds, Performances, Styles, Songs, etc., are contained in the RAMFILE. Depending on the type of file selected in the main page, the RAM directory lists the files currently residing in the instruments memory. For example, if you selected Save Single Song in the main page, entering the File Selector will show the RAM directory listing all the Songs present in the SK760/880SE RAM memory. Empty locations are represented by a broken line. If you select a destination already occupied by a file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming one.

42 Reference Guide

oad All UserTHE Style : loads DISK up to PROCEDURE 4 Groups of GENERAL ser Styles (including all associated User Style erformances).Use the following procedure as a reference for all the Disk operations. Some specific examples are also explained in this chapter.

OAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES 1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert
The disk name is shown at the top of the left column. If the disk has no name, the name UNTITLED or other will be shown.

diskSongs into the drive andfrom press DISK. K760/880SE can a load and Styles e following previous format disks: If you are working with the Hard Disk simply WX2, WX400, WX Expander, press DISK. SX2, SX3 he loading procedures are identical to those 2. Use the +/ Page/Bank button to choose sed for SK760/880SE Songs and Styles. which type of operation you want to perhe Blocks however show the .WXS extenform, LOAD, SAVE, ERASE, COPY, MOVE, on instead of .BLK. UTILITY. urthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block nly. 3. If necessary, select the storage device that X Songs disks contain Song consistyou want to Groups work with using the soft butg of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the tons F1, F2, F3. K760/880SE Disk environment contains two Load operations show the Floppy rtual Songs Groups (1 and andSave 2) specific for the Disk, Hard and SCSI options. X Series disks. Refer to theDisk Load Group proErase, edure explained on pageCopy 4.8. and Move operations show the options Floppy Disk (F1), Hard Disk (F2), RAM (F3) and SCSI (F4).. Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards. 4. Specify the desired command with the directional arrows (for example, Load Single Song). 5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The Wait Please message appears for an instant before opening the File Selector. The File selector now shows the source directory which may consist of one or more BLOCKS to choose from in the left column. In the right column is the destination directory representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case the empty Song memory).

6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.

The contents of the opened Block reveals the file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).

At the bottom of both columns, information regarding the selected file will appear. In this case, the left column shows the date that the file was created and its dimensions expressed in Kb. The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.

7. If necessary, select the source file and its destination.

Empty locations are identified by a broken line. If you select an existing file, it will be erased by the incoming file.

10 Reference Guide

Disk

43

8. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.

You will be prompted with Are you sure?.

9. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
With ENTER, the command is executed and a dialog window opens showing a message relating to the current operation. For example, if you are loading a single Song, the message will say: Loading Single Song.... When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed.

10. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8 and 9 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
To select another file from a different block, return to the source column, press Escape to escape the current Block, press Escape again to exit the File Selector, select another Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.

11. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit Disk.

Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations and remembers the last page selected. Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the current Block, (2) close the file selector and (3) escape from Disk.

44 Reference Guide

or example, Group 8 cannot be loaded to any LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE (EXAMOperations her location in Load RAM other than Group 8. PLE) you attempt to load to a destination other than Use a disk known to contain User Style Groups The load operations operate in the direction e correct one, a user message will inform you LOAD MIDIthe FILE to load to memory, orSINGLE load from Hard Disk. Source > RAM message: where the source can be Floppy your error with the following Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time 1. Insert the disk in the drive, press DISK and disk, Hard disk or SCSI. Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically con-

LOAD SINGLE

select GROUP USER STYLE the main format Songs. verts the files intofrom SK760/880SE Load page.The Load MIDI File procedure is almost iden-

The Load Single command offers the following ress ESCAPE to close the user message and possibilities: y again, this time selecting the correct destinaon.

LOAD SINGLE BLOCK

Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances). 2. Press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SE-

tical to Load Single Song. In this case instead of Song names, youll see a list of files in the source directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which represent sub-directories containing other MIDI Files. Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17 is created automatically in order to be able to play along with the Song in playback.

LOAD SINGLE SETUP

LECTOR. LOAD SINGLE SOUND

Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain as RAM-Sounds. information relating to the status of the instruments general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio The Load Single Sound procedure is characMic/Line settings, MIDI Lock status, MIDI chanterized by an increased number of steps, owing nel configurations, Pedals Lock status and the to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each Pedals configuration). Load a disk-based Setup consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose file when you want to change the general status to load your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, of the instrument in a single step instead ofThe pro-floppy disk but itdirectory is recommended that load to the origimay show the you presgramming the individual parameters that constinal Sound Group facilitate future ence of several blocks, one to containing the selection. tute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into RAM Load Single Sound also Sample, another User Styles, etc.. features a Sound Search does not affect other data. Only one Setup file function. Owing to the large SK760/880SE 3. Select the Styles and to resides in each Block. SoundBlock library, youpress mightENTER find it easier to pass digain access. rectly to a Sound bank by specifying the name of LOAD SINGLE SONG a Sound that occupies a particular bank. From there, you can then easily select a destination Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operafor the Sound being loaded. The Sound Search tion allows you to choose single Song files from procedure is explained in detail on pages 4.28. various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. SK760/880SE can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000 format. In this example, the disk directory shows the presence of two User Style Groups (User 3 and User 4).

8 Reference Guide

Disk

45

LOAD SINGLE REAL PERFORMANCE

Loads a single Performance to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8). The incoming Performances overwrite those in RAM. The original factory-set Performances can be restored at any time with the Restore Performance operation.

LOAD SINGLE SOUND (EXAMPLE)

Use a disk known to contain a Sample to load to memory, or load from Hard Disk. For this procedure, your instrument is equipped with additional Sample RAM.

LOAD SINGLE USER STYLE

Loads a single User Style and associated User Style Performances to any location in the USER Style Groups (1-4).

1. Insert the disk in the drive, press DISK and select SINGLE SOUND from the main Load page.

LOAD SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE

Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances to the original ROM Style Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM Styles. If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:

2. Press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector.

Press ESCAPE to close the message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.

The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The instruments RAM directory shows the ROM sounds of the first Group (Piano).

3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and press ENTER to gain access.

46 Reference Guide

In the display example of the previous page, OAD SINGLE REAL PERFORMANCE LOAD SINGLE SOUND LOAD GROUP (EXAMPLE)

the disk directory shows the presence of one oads a single Performance to any of the 64 loUse a disk known The to Load contain Group a Sample command to load offers to a quick way of Percussive Sample (GRV.bpm 106) with Pr. ations of the Performance Groups (1-8). The memory, or load loading from Hard a Groups Disk. of For 8 elements this proceat a time. Change and Bank Select number 114-6. coming Performances overwrite those in RAM. dure, your instrument is equipped with additional Warning: The Group currently in memory is he original factory-set Performances can be re4. Select (if necessary) the Sample Sample and itsRAM. overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, ored at any time with the Restore Performance the User Style Group you are loading contains only corresponding destination in RAM (114-6). 1. Insert the disk one in the drive, press DISK and peration. User Style, all User Styles of the destination select fromin the main Load Use the +/ Page/Bank buttons to scroll the SINGLE SOUND Group currently RAM will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your Group data are Sound Groups (1, 2, 15, 16). In this case, page. OAD SINGLE USER STYLE safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk before proceeding. scroll to Group 15 (Percussive - example A). oads a single User Style and associated User yle Performances to any location in the USER Load Group offers the following possibilities: yle Groups (1-4).

OAD SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE

LOAD GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of up to 8 user-programmed Peroads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed formances to any Performance Group destinayle Performances to the original ROM Style tion (1 - 8). erformance bank. These Performances can2. Press ENTER to gain access to the File Selecot be loaded to locations other than the original Use the directional arrows to scroll to the LOAD GROUP USER STYLE tor. ource Style Performance bank.(in For desired Bank thisexample, case, bank 6) and desLoads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corree Style Performances of(Program Style 59Change cannot 114 be - example B). tination sponding Performances) to any User Group desaded to any other location of the ROM Styles. tination. you attempt to load to a destination other than

e correct one, a user message will inform you your error with the following message:

Loads Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or directory second 8may locations the Song memory. In The floppy disk show of the presfact, in normal conditions when ence of several blocks, one containing the you press the 5.toPress twice to load ess ESCAPE closeENTER the message and the try Sample file to Song button to select a Song, Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The the in- song selection gain, this time selecting the correct destination. memory. shows two columns, left and right. The struments display RAM directory shows the ROM left first column corresponds sounds of the Group (Piano). to the virtual SongsNote: It is recommended to load Sounds and SamGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This ples to their original locations to facilitate the on-board 3. Select (if necessary) Sample useful Block and file search facilities, but you are free to load them to feature is the particularly for the WX Series press ENTER to gain access. any Group. Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.

LOAD GROUP SONG

LOAD GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE

Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be loaded to their original locations in memory.

6 Reference Guide

Disk

47

For example, Group 8 cannot be loaded to any other location in RAM other than Group 8. If you attempt to load to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:

LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)

Use a disk known to contain User Style Groups to load to memory, or load from the Hard Disk.

1. Insert the disk in the drive, press DISK and select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load page.

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.

2. Press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.

The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the Sample, another User Styles, etc..

3. Select the Styles Block and press ENTER to gain access.

In this example, the disk directory shows the presence of two User Style Groups (User 3 and User 4).

48 Reference Guide

Press ENTER 4.toSelect confirm the your Userchoice. Group that you wish to load and itswith corresponding destination in RAM (1, You will be prompted Are you sure?. 2, 3 or 4).

LOAD ALL
Use Load All to load an entire set of file types in a single step.

1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page.

Press ENTER again to execute the command, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
With ENTER, the command is executed and a dialog window opens showing a message 5. current Press ENTER twiceFor to examload the User Style relating to the operation. file memory. ple, if you are Group loading a to single Song, the message will say: Loading Single Song.... User Style Groups can be interchanged. For When the dialog window closes, the operaexample, User Group 3 on floppy disk can tion has been executed. be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.

2. Press ENTER to enter to the File Selector

0. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8 and 9 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
To select another file from a different block, return to the source column, press Escape to escape the current Block, press Escape again to exit the File Selector, select another Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.

3. Select the Block containing the Songs required from the source directory then press ENTER twice to start the loading procedure.
Warning: Use Load ALL with care. If, for example, the disk-based All User Style data contains only one User Style, all your User Styles currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles and Performances are safely stored to Disk or Hard Disk before using the Load ALL procedures.

1. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit Disk.

Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations and remembers the last page selected. Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the current Block, (2) close the file selector and (3) escape from Disk.

Load All offers the following possibilities: Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs; Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds; Load All Real Perf: loads up to 8 Groups of Performances; Load All Style Perf: loads up to 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances;

4 Reference Guide

Disk

49

Load All User Style: loads up to 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).

LOAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES

SK760/880SE can load Songs and Styles from the following previous format disks: WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3 The loading procedures are identical to those used for SK760/880SE Songs and Styles. The Blocks however show the .WXS extension instead of .BLK. Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block only. WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the SK760/880SE Disk environment contains two virtual Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks. Refer to the Load Group procedure explained on page 4.8.

410 Reference Guide

MITATIONS

ome file types cannot be handled more than Once specified, press ENTER to confirm your ne at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only selection in the main DISK page and enter the Note : If youisassign new block the name e handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE operaThe Save procedures operate in the file direction Selector. The File selector where a you can AUTOLOAD.BLK, you can load the Block into RAM on. Other files can> be Destination handled as where Single the ele-destination RAM select can the source files and respective destinaautomatically on a future occasion by turning the inents, Groups be and All sets, while some limFloppy disk, Hard diskare or SCSI. tions. strument on with the floppy disk inserted in the drive. ed to Single and All operations only. Naturally, only one Block with the name AUTOLOAD The SK760/880SE RAM is backed by a rechargecan exist in a disk. he table below shows the to valid commands for when the inable battery safeguard the data ach file type: strument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy SAVE SINGLE SETUP disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The le Type Command Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or RAM should be considered as a work area which ock Single Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the concan be continually updated, not as a data storfiguration of the instruments global parameters etup age device. Single (Edit General status) that determine how the ound Group, All the display divides into two regardless parts. On the Have a new Single, or used disk ready to saveAgain, data to. machine operates, of the contents of is the of the file origin (floppy, hard eal Performance Single, Group, All format left These can be SK760/880SE disks or directory RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites disk, etc.) and on the right side is file thewithout main direcstandard MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storthe existing Setup affecting other data. yle Performance Single, Group, All tory of something called RAMFILE (Random Ac- in each Block. age of MIDI files. You can also save MIDI Files Only one Setup file can be saved ser Styles Single, Group, All cess Memory). This is the name given to the to SK760/880SE format disks. You can create different Setup files for particular ong Single, Group, All SK760/880SE s internal memory. Everything curCheck that the floppy disk is not write protected occasions. For example, one for home sessions, rently stored in memory, Sounds, Performances, DIFile Single if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc. Styles, forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you Songs, etc., are contained in the with an appropriate message when youRAMFILE. attempt Depending on the type of file selected SAVE SONG lists the files in the main page, theSINGLE RAM directory to save to the disk. currently residing in the instruments memory. Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have Save operations are characterized by an addiloadedSave someSingle MIDI Files to RAM, use this For ifalready you selected Song tional option: the creation of a new Block if example, necprocedure tothe convert the fileswill to SK760/880SE in the main page, entering File Selector essary. format songs. show the RAM directory listing all the Songs WARNING - Do not save data to the original disks present in the SK760/880SE RAM memory. Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided into supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary virtual groups. Ifbroken no empty locations are shown, locations aretwo represented by a line. measure against data loss, always checkEmpty that your it means that the block is fully occupied. In this case, If you select a destination already occupied by a original disks are write protected. either overwrite an existing Song that you dont mind file, the existing filelosing, is replaced by the incoming or close the Block with ESCAPE, then select one. an empty location and press ENTER to create a new

Save operations

THE FILE SELECTOR

SAVE SINGLE

Block.

The Save Single command offers the following possibilities:

SAVE SINGLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a single user-programmed Performances (Real) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The incoming Performances overwrite those present on the storage device.

SAVE SINGLE BLOCK

Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances) and Songs (and relative Performances), all housed in their respective Groups.

2 Reference Guide

Disk

411

SAVE SINGLE USER STYLE

Saves a single User Style and associated User Style Performances to any location in the USER Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.

SAVE SINGLE STYLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original source Style Performance bank. For example, the Style Performances of Style 59 cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM Styles. If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you of your error with the following message:

sion. In some cases, other names appear which represent sub-directories containing other MIDI Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken line with the .MID extension. The .MID extension is attached to the original SK760/880SE Song name automatically. Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk ready. Use the Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb) and Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB) functions in the Utility Disk page to format your new disks.

SAVE SINGLE SOUND

Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM Sounds to disk or Hard disk to build a library of Sounds for future use. The Save Single Sound procedure is characterized by an increased number of steps, owing to the fact that there are 16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of 16 slots. You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you save to the same location as the original RAM position to facilitate future selection. Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the ProgramChange number of the chosen destination, therefore, if you save 19-2 SwOrgan to, say, destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with the new ProgramChange number on a future load operation, not with the old.
Note: You can also use the Sound Search function to pass directly to a particular Sound and sound Bank. The Sound Search procedure is explained in detail on pages 4.28.

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.

SINGLE MIDI FILE

Saves a SK760/880SE Song to disk (MS-Dos format) as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with other instruments or computers. SK760/ 880SE saves Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set the SMF Save Format parameter in the General Set function of Edit MIDI. If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set the General MIDI parameter to ON in the General set function of Edit MIDI. Performances are converted into track data (Bank Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume, Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects). If a Score is present, the text is converted into Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text events. The save procedure is almost identical to Save Single Song. In this case youll see a list of files in the destination directory with the .MID exten

412 Reference Guide

O SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE

Press STORE PERFORMANCE.

Press ENTER again to FILE savePROCEDURE the Performance 5. Move downSAVE to the Perf option with the curSAVE MIDI (EXAMPLE) GROUP with the new name. sor button [ ] and select the destination PerThe Save Group command offers a quick way of 1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save formance or Style Performance with the DIAL. saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step. page.
Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example, the User Style Group you are saving contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the contents of the Group data being overwritten before proceed6. If you want to give ing. the Performance a new

name, press the function buttons F7/F8 and using the text insertion meth2. Press ENTER to enter the FILE SELECTORinsert and a name Save Group offers the following possibilities: Select the Performance or Style-Performance od already described in the Quick Guide. the destination option with the select / cursor arrows. device (Floppy, Hard

disk or SCSI).
Select the Store To Group option with the cursor button [ ] and rotate the DIAL to select the destination Performance or Style Performance Group.

SAVE GROUP REAL PERFORMANCE

Saves a Group of user-programmed Performances to any Performance Group destination on disk or hard disk.

SAVE GROUP USER STYLE 3. Select the Song to save as a MIDI file from 7. Press ENTER to confirm orof ESCAPE to canSaves a Group up to 8 User Styles (and correthe RAM directory and select a .MID cel. dessponding Performances) to any User Group destination in disk. tination on disk or example hard disk. You can also refer to another of this
procedure on page 1.33 of the Quick Guide.

SAVE GROUP SONG

If you are saving a Style Performance, select the Style option with the cursor button [ ] and rotate the DIAL to select the destination Style. If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations. If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47. Saves Songs as virtual Groups (Song Group 1 and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first 8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2.

SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE

Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be switched - they must be saved to their original locations. For example, Group 8 cannot be saved to any other location on disk other than Group 8. If you attempt to save to a destination other than the correct one, a user message will inform you

4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.

24 Reference Guide

Disk

413

of your error with the following message:

SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)

1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the main Save page.

Press ESCAPE to close the user message and try again, this time selecting the correct destination.

2. Press ENTER to enter the FILE SELECTOR and select the destination device (Floppy, Hard disk o SCSI).

3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to gain access.

If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47.

414 Reference Guide

ELAY (F2)

Track 2: C3 to B3 4. Select the Group file from the RAM directoSAVE ALL ry and its destination. Track 3: C4 to B4 Use Save All to save an entire set of file types contained Track 4: C5 to B5 in RAM in a single step. Track 5: C6 to A8 This will give you a five part split where you have SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE) a different sound in each octave. 1. Select ALL from the main Save page. Assignable values: A0) C8SONG .

electing a value here will cause the sound to be elayed for a brief period of time after a key is CREATE TRACK (F6) 5. Press ENTER twice execute essed. This allows you to create a to number of the command. This function, available only if you are working pecial effects using real time delays. The delay with a Song Performance in Song mode, allows me value is shown in Ticks. These ticks are you to create multi-track Performances of more ubdivisions of the beat based on the current than 16 tracks. Each track you create has the Clock Speed, (the tempo of the internal same default settings. equencer). Each tick represents 1/192nd of a Press ENTER to enter FILE SELECTOR, then Press the Soft2. button F6 to open the the Create eat. Therefore if you set a delay time of 192, select the destination device (Floppy, Hard Track dialogue window: ou will hear a delay of exactly one beat between disk o SCSI). hen you press the key and when the sound is eard. ssignable values: 0 (off)192 (1 ) 384 (2 ) 576 (3 ) 768 (4 ). Specify the Track number with the DIAL. If the specified track number already exists, default EY RANGE (F3) 3. Select assigned. the destination Block in the disk divalues are automatically rectory, press ENTER twice to start the Press ENTER to confirm orthen ESCAPE to cancel saving procedure the operation.

COPY TRACK (F7)

This function allows you to copy the settings of one track to another, saving time. The destination track assumes all the programmed settings of the source track. Select the source track and press the soft button If necessary, select an empty location to creF6 to open the Copy track dialogue window. ate a new Block using the method described in the Quick Guide, page 1.47.
Warning: Use Save ALL with care as this procedure overwrites all data at the destination. B e absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in disk beSpecify the number of the track to copy to with fore using the Save ALL procedures.

his function, available only if you are working th a Song Performance in Song mode, assigns keyboard extension (highest and lowest notes) each track, allowing you to program a multiplit Performance. or example, to make a five part split, activate acks 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (using the corresponding oft buttons). hen assign the Key ranges as follows, Track 1: A0 to B2

the DIAL.

22 Reference Guide

Disk

415

The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities: Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs; Save All Sound: saves an unspecified number of Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16 Groups); Save All Real Perf: saves up to 8 Groups of Performances; Save All Style Perf: saves up to 12 Groups of Rom Style Performance banks, each containing up to 8 Style Performances; Save All User Style: saves up to 4 Groups of User Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).

416 Reference Guide

e current Performance for the action of the touch VELOCITY CURVE (F7) Erase operations ensitive keyboard. Tracks set to Off will not act to velocity changes. ssignable values: 0n, Off. Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer needed from a data storing device; Disk, Hard ODE/PRIORITYDisk (F6) or SCSI, or from RAM, to make room for other files. The Erase File Selector does not operate beIf you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert tween source and destination directories (as in the disk into the drive and check that the of Velocity response curves. the Load and Save File selector), but onProvides a single a selection Floppy Disk option selected (soft button As well as modifying the velocity data, is velocity directory contained in the device you are cancelF1. curves allow the creation of crossfade effects ling files from. If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select between Erase operations are executed using the same two tracks. the Hard option soft button F2. For example, it is possible toDisk assign two with tracks procedures are those described for the Load and If you are erasing from a SCSI with opposing dynamic curves (for example, two device, select Save commands. This section provides general elects the polyphonic/monophonic mode for the the SCSI withoppossoft button F4. opposing [ex. 1 &option 4], or two information relating to the Erase operation. The linear curves acks and activates/deactivates the Priority opexponential curves [ex. 2 & 5]. user is encouraged to apply the sameing logic to 4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector. on (guaranteed minimum polyphony for the Erase operations as those used for Load and The resulting effect is one of hearing the sound ack). Save operations. of the second track fade in by gradually increasODE: Sets the track to play monophonically ing a the keystrike velocity while the sound of the The following example shows how to Erase sinne note at a time) or polyphonically (two or more fist track fades out. Playing softly triggers one gle Song from RAM memory. multaneous notes). Mono R gives priority to sound and playing hard triggers the second. Playe right note, Mono L to the left note, Mono T to ing with in between values creates a blend of e last note played. both sounds. ERASE SINGLE SONG ptions: Poly, Mono L, Mono R, Mono T.

1. Press DISK to to enter Disk Mode RIORITY: Setting this function On gives the and use the ) buttons to open the +/ ( This signiurrent sound priority ofPage/Bank polyphony. main ERASE page.have notes es that this particular sound will never tolen by other Performance tracks or tracks of the desired ERASE command. e sequencer.2.If Select you subsequently try to play is sound while all of the available polyphony is eing used, it will steal the notes it needs from her tracks.
Note: Avoid assigning Priority=On to too many tracks, as this will cancel the function due to conflicts between the assigned tracks.

VELOCITY RANGE (F8) 5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file to erase then press ENTER to access the Block. 6. Select the file to erase.

The Velocity Range parameter is used to specify, for each track, exactly how and when it will be activated from the keyboard. The limits applied allow the creation of cross-switching effects by 3. Select the source device to erase from. assigning tracks different velocity ranges. 7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the For example, to make a three part velocity switch, In this case, select the RAM option with soft directory. activate Tracks 1, 2 and 3 (using the correspondbutton F3. ing soft buttons).

20 Reference Guide

Disk

417

Copy operations
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa, or from a SCSI device to Hard Disk or floppy and vice versa. The source file remains intact. To copy a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy. Copy operations are executed using the same procedures are those described for the Load and Save commands. This section provides general information relating to the Copy operation. The user is encouraged to apply the same logic to Copy operations as those used for Load and Save operations. The following example shows how to copy a single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk. In this case, pass to the source directory and, if necessary, select Floppy Disk (F1).

Then pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2) as the destination. Entering the Hard disk for the first time takes some time, depending on the number of files already present. A Please Wait message appears during the scanning period. Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.

COPY SINGLE SOUND

1. Press DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the main COPY page. 2. Select the COPY command required from the main page.

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector, select the source Block containing the desired file and press ENTER to gain access.

5. Select the File to Copy from the source directory.

3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2, F3 or F4 and directional arrows.

418 Reference Guide

ADS (F4)

Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison - Switches 6. Pass into the destination directory to select from one Vocal Processor operating the destination. he four PAD buttons are independently program-

able. Each button can be configured to react ccording to the settings of various parameters.

mode to the other. Hardcopy - Captures a bitmap image of the current display (.BMP) into RAM. The images can be saved to an MSDOS disk and elaborated by a graphic program running on a personal computer.

AD #

etermines the Function to assign to the pad. in the Hard disk If necessary, select a Block unctions assignable: KeybAssign, and Off, press ENTER to Rotary access then select a ow/fast, Vocal On/Off, Vocal Custom 1-16, destination. ocal Mute, Vocal Chord, Vocal Vocoder, Vocal 7. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the desnison, Hardcopy. tination. Off - pad deactivated. Confirm (F1) - confirms the captured display. Save (F2) - saves the captured image to an MS-DOS disk. Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself. AtKeyAssign - The pad plays the assigned Reset to Pan, do so prompts the following message: (F3) - cancels all captured images and liberates the note. The tempting Volume, Transposition RAM. Each image uses approx. 6 KBytes of RAM. and MIDI OUT channel settings correIgnore (F5) - closes the dialog window without capturing spond to those of track 6. The Note and the image. ProgramChange are defined by the following parameters which appear only when this option is selected PED./PAD LOCK (F8) Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the winPC - Program Change. Range 1128. When selected ( ), the Pedals/Pads Lock condow and repeat the operation by copying to C#0 - CC00: Control Change 00 (Bank serves the current pedal and pad programmed a different destination. Select MSB). Range 1128. status for all Performance and Style selections. C#32 - CC32: Control Change 32 (Bank To enable the recall of the Pedal/Pads paramSelect LSB). This parameter does not reeters, make sure the Padlock is open (unlocked). quire a setting to play an internal SK760/ The Pedals/Pads Lock remains in memory after 880SE sound. Range 1128. power down. It is saved to the Setup. Note - Determines the note played. Range: C-1 to G9 Dynamic Note velocity. Range 0127 Rotary slow/fast - Switches the Rotary velocity from slow to fast or vice versa. Vocal On/Off - Activates/deactivates the Vocal Processor for Vocal harmonies. Vocal Custom 1-16 - Recalls custom Vocal Processor Voice settings. Vocal Mute - Mutes the Vocal Track when using the Vocal harmonies.

18 Reference Guide

Disk

419

Move operations
Use the Move command to shift a file from one location to another within the same device, or from the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and vice versa, or from a SCSI device to Hard Disk or floppy and vice versa. This option cancels the file at the source.
WARNING - Use the Move function only in cases where the original file needs to be cancelled.

3. Select the source and destination devices with soft buttons F1, F2, F3 or F4.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work in.

To move a file from one floppy disk to another, first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other floppy. Move operations are executed using the same procedures are those described for the Load and Save commands. This section provides general information relating to the Move operation. The user is encouraged to apply the same logic to Move operations as those used for Load and Save operations. The example which follows shows how to use the Move operation within RAM: Move Single Sound.

Selecting Floppy disk or RAM automatically assigns the same device to source and destination.

4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector, select a Block containing the desired file then press ENTER to access the Block.

MOVE SINGLE SOUND

1. Press DISK to enter Disk Mode and use the +/ Page/Bank ( ) buttons to open the main MOVE page. 2. Select the MOVE command required from the main MOVE page.

5. Select the File to Move from the source directory.

420 Reference Guide

DALS ASSIGNMENT 6. Pass into the destination directoryTHE andCONTINUOUS sePEDAL FUNCTIONS lect the destination.
Off Pitch Bend No effect Applies Pitch Bend to the notes. The Pitch Bend sweeps from the maximum negative to maximum positive setting of the Pitch setting in the Performance Controls menu. The central position of the continuous pedal corresponds to 0 pitch. Increases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Decreases the Pitch by the value set in the Pitch Controls menu. Opens/closes the Filter Cutoff parameter in Edit Sound/S.Patch. Affects the Resonance parameter. Generates Breath controller (CC02) data (useful for external MIDI devices capable of recognizing this controller). Controls the general volume (CC07). Controls the Pan (CC10) from left to right. Controls the volume from 0 level to the maximum settings of the mixer levels. Controls the volume of the Vocal harmony track when using the Vocal Processor.

ere you can assign the pedals to the tracks of Pitch + our Performance. In this case, use the Page scroll buttons to he pedal settings scroll you choose can stored to and through thebe Sound Groups the Up/ Pitch e current Performance with Store Performance. Down directional arrows to scroll through the individual Sound Group locations. Filter

7. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to Resonance the selected destination.
Breath Cnt.

The file at the original location (in this case, 19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).
Volume
Note: It is not possible to move a file to Pan itself. Attempting to do so prompts the following message:

Expression

Vocal Volume

Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a different destination.

16 Reference Guide

Disk

421

Utility
After pressing DISK, use the Page scroll button to pass to the last two, or three, Disk pages which provide useful functions for disk, Hard Disk and SCSI formatting and servicing: Floppy Disk Utility; Hard Disk Utility; SCSI Utility.

FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)

This operation formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk in MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes). This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of reading MS-DOS format disks. The procedure is identical to that described for the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation.

FLOPPY DISK UTILITY

FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)

This operation formats a 3.5 DD floppy disk in MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilobytes), suitable for MIDI file exchanges. The procedure is identical to that described for the Format work disk (1.62 Mb) operation.
WARNING: Disk initializing procedures cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be absolutely sure that you are not about to cancel important data.

FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)

This operation force-formats a 3.5 HD floppy disk for SK760/880SE use. This extended format procedure prepares the disk with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format cannot be read by computers. 1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive. You can also use a formatted disk, provided that you are not interested in conserving its contents. 2. Select Format work disk (1.62 Mb). The following dialog window appears:

CHANGE DISK NAME

Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows quick recognition of the contents during a search through disks without labels. If you write the disks name on the index label, you can reduce the search times even further. SK760/880SE assigns a generic code name to disks formatted with the Utility formatting procedures - the name depending on the size. For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned a code name such as the one shown below:

3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.

Use the standard name entry procedure to give your disks a name. Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with Escape.

422 Reference Guide

he tables i theHARD Appendix the available effect DISKlist UTILITY pes. he parameters shown in the display will depend n the type of effects selected from the Eff.1 and f.2 DSPs. elow follows a brief explanation of all the pameters that you would encounter when proamming your Performance effects.

SPEED (ROTARY EFFECTS): Time required to HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY pass from slowThis to fast or vice versa. procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk to its original ROTARY: Slow/fast velocity.status. Damage to the Hard Disk can be caused by: SEMITONE: Transposition in semitone steps. a power failure during a Save operation; 100 DETUNE: Detuning over a range of of physical defects theCents. disk. LOW GAIN: Enhancement of is the low frequenIf the Hard disk damaged, an access attempt cies. prompts a message similar to the following:

MEDIUM GAIN: Enhancement of the mid freEV.TIME (REVERB TIME): Decay time of the quencies. FORMAT HARD DISK verb. This operation formats the Hard disk and is used HIGH GAIN: Enhancement of the high frequenELAY (REVERBS): Initial delay between the a original when rapid cancellation of and the HD contents cies. is mission of the sound (dry signal) e reverb (wetrequired. signal). Use the following recovery procedure as soon USEFREQUENCY THIS OPERATION WITH EXTREME CAUF.DECAY (HIGH DECAY): Deas possible. TION ! ay of the high frequencies. The parameter indi1. Go to the Hard Disk Utility page and se1. Go to the Hard Disk Utility page and select (if ates the final frequency of the filter. The decay lect Hard disk check/recovery . necessary) the Format the high frequencies has a longer durationHard than Disk function. The Are you sure? dialog window appears: at of the low frequencies. The following dialog window appears:

OOM SIZE: Dimensions of the simulated room. he time lapse between the first reflection and e remainder of the reverb. 2. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data. Shortly after, another dialog window appears similar to the one below:

FFUSION: Duration of the reverb (Early type verbs). 2. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to canP. FILTER (LOW cel. PASS FILTER): Determines e cutoff frequency ofathe filter. measure, a second confirmaAs security request ELAY (DELAYS):tion Velocity of appears: the delay repetion.

EEDBACK (DELAYS): Interaction of the delay th itself. Determines the number of repetitions the delay.

EEDBACK (PHASERS AND FLANGERS): In3. Press the Soft button F1 (NOT ENTER) to raction of the phaser or flanger with itself. Destart the Hard Disk format procedure, or ESrmines the harmonic amount of the effect. CAPE to cancel. REQ.MODUL. (FREQUENCY MODULATION): odulation velocity of chorus and flanger effects.

EPTH: Depth of the action of the effect.

Such a message shows no errors. In cases of errors, make a note of the numbers shown as they are useful to provide information for technical assistance. Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery. Error found - Code relating to the error found. None appears in cases where no errors are encountered.
WARNING - NEVER turn off the instrument while the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save, Copy, Move, Erase operations).

EEDBACK (DISTORTION): Saturation of the stortion.

14 Reference Guide

Disk

423

HARD DISK SLEEP TIME

To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter to turn the hard disk off after an operation. Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.

HOW TO BACK UP YOUR HARD DISK DATA

1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready. As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in the case of Sounds. Use this conversion scale to calculate approximately how many disks you will require to backup your data. The size of each selected Block file is shown at the bottom of the directory. 2. Select the Hard Disk Backup option and press ENTER to activate the function. Selecting this function opens a second level display showing the Hard disk directory on the left and a column on the right where you can prepare a list of data to backup and compress.

HARD DISK PROTECTION

As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss, use the Hard Disk Protection function to protect your hard disk.
Note: All SK760/880SE instruments leave the factory with the Hard Disk Protection active.

In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operations on the Hard Disk, the protection must be removed. Select the Hard Disk Protection function and press ENTER to activate the protection function. Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between the two options (Unprotect/Protect).

Press ENTER to save the selected status to memory.

HARD DISK BACKUP

This option allows you to backup part or all the Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or decompressed form. By default, the Compress option is selected. At the end of a work session, always remember to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will always be able to recuperate the data from disks.

The backup list can consist of Block files only, not individual files normally found in a block. 3. Prepare a list of the block(s) to backup. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically. Repeat the operation for other blocks. If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the warning and select a different Block. 4. Press EXECUTE (F1) to start the backup process. After a short period, the unit is ready to backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:

424 Reference Guide

Effects

EFFECTS TYPE (F1) HARD DISK RESTORE

Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard Disk.

hen you select the EFFECTS Edit button, the splay will show a sub-menu with two editors: Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER FFECT and VOCAL PROCESSOR. RESTORING BACKUP DATA TO THE HARD DISK to start saving to the disk. 1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup When the Backup has finished, a message file or files into the drive. is displayed saying: Operation completed. 2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER If the Backup procedure requires more than to activate the function. Here the you can set up the actual effects that you one disk, a dialogue appears requesting use from each more than one insertion of disk n. 2 and so on. would like your Performance The floppy to disk may contain DSP. If you are working on the keyboard backup file (shown with tracks the .AR extension), only, youd select the effects from Group A. If THE BACKUP OPTIONS you are programming the accompaniment tracks ere we explain the EFFECT editor. Although of a Style Performance, youd select your effects OVERWRITE (F1) e Vocal Processor feature contains some Perfrom Group B. This means that your PerformSelect OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite rmance parameters, the nature of this function ance can be processed by two sets of DSPs. A data on disks previously used for other backups. quires a separate explanation which youll find Style Performance, therefore, can play with a Hard disk and 3. Select the file to restore to the This option is selected by default. a separate chapter on page 7.1 of the Refercompletely independent set of effects with respect press ENTER to confirm. nce Guide. Deselect this function if you want thethe backup to the keyboardConfirming tracks. the backup file selection opens a floppies to retain any data currently stored in o gain access to the Edit Effect parameters, second level display showing the Floppy disk them. elect the Effect editor and press ENTER. The GROUP A directory on the left and a column on the right DIT EFFECT menu contains general paramCOMPRESS (F2) where youof can prepare EFF. 1: The Reverb selector Group A. a list of backup data ers that affect the instrument as a whole decompress. Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of reverb to Assignable types: refer to the lists in the mount of general reverb), parameters that afthe backup list. Appendix. ct all the tracks of the Performance in edit (effunction is and selected default. VOL. General Reverb level of Group A. cts assigned This to the DSPs), trackby paramers (amount of effects sends). Assignable values: 0 ... 127. DELETE (F5) he DSP consists of four real time controlled units 2: The Modulation, (delay/chorus/flanger, Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block EFF. from the hich process the Performances with Reverbs etc) selector of Group A. list. nd Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb chanAssignable delay/mod types: refer to the lists in The Delete option channels does not cancel els (A & B) and two Modulation (A & a Block from the Appendix. the In Hard Disk directory. mode, ) are available. Style/Performance 4. Prepare a list VOL. General Modulation level ofcontaining Group A. the block(s) to rehannel A effects are reserved for the keyboard RESET (F6) Assignable values:store. 0 ... 127. acks and channel B for the accompaniment Select RESET (F6) to cancel in a single step a 2 TO EFFECT Select1: a Block and press ENTER to insert it EFFECT Sets the quantity of acks. Each track can be processed by two eflist containing two or the more Blocks. into the list. The cursor moves down to the feedback of Eff2 into Eff1. cts. When a Style is selected with SINGLE location automatically. Assignable values:next 0 (noempty feedback) ... 127 (maxiOUCH PLAY SELECT button off, only the effects asALL (F7) mum feedback of the Repeat signal). the operation for other blocks. gned to the accompaniment tracks will change Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks conGroup B). When a Performance is selected with If you attempt to insert a Block that has altained in the Hard disk. TYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to ready been inserted, an appropriate warning e keyboard will change (Group A). is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the EXECUTE (F8) warning and select a different Block. Song mode, Use each track can be independently EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process. ocessed by either A or B channel effects.

12 Reference Guide

Disk

425

5. Press EXECUTE to start the hard disk restore process. When the Hard Disk Restore has finished, a message is displayed saying: Operation completed. If the Hard Disk Restore operation requires more than one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on.

MULTICOPY H.DISK TO SCSI

This option allows you to copy more than one Block file at a time (a batch) from Hard Disk to a SCSI device of your choice. 1. With the Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI option selected, press ENTER to open the SCSI Drive selection window.

HARD DISK RESTORE OPTIONS

DELETE (F5)

Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the list. The Delete option does not cancel a Block from the Restore directory.
RESET (F6)

2. Select the drive and press ENTER to enter the file selector.

Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two or more Blocks in a single step.
SELECT ALL (F7)

Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Restore directory.
EXECUTE (F8)

Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the restore process.

3. Prepare a list of Block files to copy. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to the next empty location automatically. Repeat the operation for other Blocks. 4. Press EXECUTE to start the copy process.

426 Reference Guide

ECEPTION OF DUMP DATA FROM SEQUENCER MULTICOPY SCSI A TO H.DISK

Press EXECUTE (F5) to start the multicopy procis not necessary prepare the SK760/880SE Thistooption allows you to copy more than one ess. receive a dump. received at a SCSI device Block Dumps file at a can timebe (a batch) from ny time and the data choice will immediately beDisk. availThe MIXER controls the final output of the sounds of your to the Hard LIST SIZE (F7) ble for use. 1. With the Multicopy SCSI to Hard Disk in the current Performance. option This option allows you to calculate the overall selected, press ENTER toto open the SCSI WARNING - Sending system exclusive data dimension of the current list and shows the free SK760/880SE cancels all data of thewindow. same type curDrive selection space available at the destination.
rently residing in memory. Save the data you wish to conserve before receiving the system exclusive data from an external unit.

Mixer

EXECUTE (F5)

THE MIXER MENU

BLOCK SIZE (F8)

VOLUME (F1) Use this option to calculate the dimension of the

current Block.

OCAL ON, LOCAL OFF (F7)

2. Select the drive and press ENTER to enter ith Local On (default setting) the SK760/880SE the file selector. eyboard is connected to the internal sound enne. hen set to OFF, the built in keyboard of the K760/880SE will be disconnected from the inHere you can set the volume of each track. rnal sounds. Use either the DIAL or the sliders AH. In Perctivate Local Off to program Songs on an exformance edit, each slider corresponds to a track rnal sequencer using the SK760/880SE as the (track A = slider A and so on...). ontrolling device. The SK760/880SE keyboard Value range: 0 ... 127. ansmits data to the external sequencer, and the 3. the Prepare a list Block files to copy. equencer returns data to theof SK760/880SE ternal sound engine. Select a Block and press ENTER to insert it into the list. The cursor moves down to(F2) the PAN next empty location automatically. IDI LOCK (F8) Repeat the operation for other Blocks. 4. Press EXECUTE to as start the copy process. ormally, your MIDI settings are saved a part the current Performance, (when you press the ore Performance MULTICOPY button), OPTIONS and each Performnce can have its own distinct MIDI settings. If, DELETE (F1) owever, you want the current MIDI settings to Select DELETE (F1) to cancel a Block from the main in effect, regardless of which Performance This function lets you select the pan position ou select, turnlist. on the LOCK function. within the stereo panorama. Moving the Pan all RESET (F2) to the left or all to the right, you can direct the sound to one output instead of both. Select RESET (F2) to cancel a list containing more than one Block in a single step. Value range: -31 (all to the left) ... 0 (center) ...+31 (all to the right).
SELECT ALL (F3)

Use Select All (F3) to select all the Blocks contained in the directory (SCSI or HD).

10 Reference Guide

Disk

427

SCSI UTILITY
This page offers a configuration of formatting options for periferal SCSI devices, depending on the current operating system running on your SK760/880SE. The following example shows one of the possible configurations.

FAST ZIP 100/250 FORMAT

This operation formats a 100 or 250 Megabyte Zip disk using a high speed method without checking the medium for possible bad blocks.

ZIP 100/250 FORMAT

This operation formats a 100 or 250 Megabyte Zip disk using a slower but optimised method, checking the medium for possible bad blocks. Any bad blocks found will be masked with the resulting reduction of the overall capacity of the disk.

FAST JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT

This operation formats a 1 or 2 Gigabyte Jaz disk using a high speed method without checking the medium for possible bad blocks.

JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT

This operation formats a 1 or 2 Gigabyte Jaz disk using a slower but optimised method, checking the medium for possible bad blocks. Any bad blocks found will be masked with the resulting reduction of the overall capacity of the disk.

428 Reference Guide

OMMON CHANNEL/ARRANGEMENT (F5)

Additional Disk functions If, instead, you set the controller keyboard to the

nel that the controller keyboard was sending on.

COMMON CHANNEL, it would play the complete This section explains the various options found Performance exactly as though you were playin the main Disk pages and in the File Selector, ing the internal keyboard of the SK760/880SE some of which are permanent, others specific itself. to a particular command or disk page. The Common Channel is reserved to special

tracks dedicated to the the control ofof effects and otherwith the cursor Select type Sample-RAM NEW FL. DISK (F5) parameters. buttons and press ENTER to confirm. ere you can program parameters that are comUpdates the current directory after changing a ProgramChange and re- into memory, a Once a ControlChange RAM -Sound isdata loaded on to all Performances. disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument ceived on the flag Common Channel Style,which Sampleis applied to itselect to indicate to recognize the disk change. Pressing the F5 Song, Performance, and other parameters RAMEffects contains the sounds associated sample. Soft button opens the following dialog window: listed in the Appendix. OMMON CHANNEL: This channel, independWhen you save the RAM -Sound, the flag is nt from the settings defined under the Channel Options: Off, 1 retained ... 16. in the disk. nd Configurations pages, allows a remote conWhen you load the Sounds again, the RAM oller keyboard to emulate the internal keyboard CHORD CH.1 Sounds / CHORD CH..2: Here can are directed to you the Sample-RAM indithe SK760/880SE. assign the Chord channels in order that a MIDI cated by the flag. he COMMONYou CHANNEL should benew useddirectory when by escaping can also see the accordion can communicate with the SK760/ Note accompaniments. - If the Samples that you save with repeated ou wish to play a GLOBAL PERFORMANCE Disk mode the re-entering. or 880SE Styles and auto Save Single operations become too large for the availSTYLE from an external controller. Program The parameter is divided into two parts. The able backed Sample RAM, the first instrument will attempt hange messages received on the Common FREE MEMORY (F6) part selects the MIDI channel (Off, 1 16). The to save to the Volatile S-RAM (if present). If there is hannel are interpreted as PERFORMANCE not enough space for the or the Volatile second part selects the MIDI IN port (A oroperation, B). This option displays the amount of memory reHANGE messages. S-RAM is not present, the save operation will be into Arr.1: is dedicated to the auto chords. maining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, Chord Systemterrupted. he parameter RAM, is divided into three parts: the first Backed Sample-RAM, volatile Chord Sampleto Arr.2: is dedicated to the auto Bass. art selects the MIDI channel to assign to the RAM and any connected SCSI device (optional). A MIDI controlling accordion send notes for ommon Channel (IN and OUT), the second the BLOCK RENAMEcan (F7) the automatic accompaniment from the chord IDI IN port used by the Common Channel, (A This option, which appears all File Selectors, section, from the bass section, or from bothin secB) and the third the MIDI OUT port used by allows you to modify the name of the selected tions. e Common Channel, (A or B). Block. Use the standard method of name entry The Common Channel unites these two chanas described in to the Alphanumeric Entry paragraph MIDI IN port (A or B) nels and their notes contribute to the formation on page 1.10 of the Quick Guide. of the chord for the automatic accompaniment. Options: Off, 1 BLOCK ... 16. SIZE (F8)

SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)

strument has been upgraded with additional Sample-RAM (optional kit), you will be able to choose or example, if you selected a multi-track Peraccording to your needs. rmance on the SK760/880SE and then tried to Selecting the option openscontrolthe window where you ay this Performance from an external can choose both types. r keyboard connected to between either of the SK760/ 80SEs MIDI IN ports, you would normally only e able to play one of the constituent parts of at Performance depending on the midi chan

MIDI OUT MIDI IN/OUT channel that is going to store your Samples. If your inport (A or B) (1...16)

This option allows you to select the Sample-RAM

This option, which appears in all File selectors, determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the directory of the active File Selector. The dimensions of the same Block residing in RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes, due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is not saved to disk.

8 Reference Guide

Disk

429

SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)

This option appears on all second level pages of all Single File operations. The second level pages are those that appear after confirming a File Selector selection. The Search Resource function is particularly useful for search operations carried on the Hard Disk containing a large number of files. For example, if you do not remember in which Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-programmed Sound, or you want to go directly to a Block name without scrolling through the entire Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search option to open an insertion window where you can specify a name.

SOUND SEARCH... (F7)

The Sound Search function appears in the third level directory displays for the following operations: Load Single Sound; Save Single Sound; Erase Single Sound; Copy Single Sound;: Move Single Sound. The function recalls the nearest Sound having the string of characters specified in the active zone.

1. Press Soft button F7.

The following dialog window appears:

The name can be of the particular file you are looking for, or part of the entire name. For example, if your Sound name includes the word organ or a Block contains a particular sequence of letters, you can search for all files which include the inserted name. Press ENTER to start the search and the first Sound which includes the written name will appear, showing its location:

2. Insert the string of characters relating to the Sound you are looking for.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.

3. Press ENTER.
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound found containing the specified characters.

SEARCH NEXT (F8)

This option recalls the next Sound on the search list containing the string of characters specified in the Sound Search option. If the displayed file is not the one you are looking for, use the F7 to Previous and F8 to Next options are required. When you find the file you are looking for, press ENTER to pass directly to the file location or ESCAPE to abort the search operation. Sound Search will also inform you of the absence of a specified name by showing Not Found.

430 Reference Guide

hen OFF, the track does not respond to the GENERAL SETTINGS (F4) Disk to handling information eyboard, but responds MIDI IN messages, or can be used by a Song or Style. If youre new to working with floppy disks and are not sure as to how you should TERNAL SOUND GENERATOR ICON: The handle these delicate accessories, please read vents generated by the track are directed to the this section for useful information. ternal sound some engine. When OFF, the track is Disk not protected Disk protected ot connected to the internal sound engine, but Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab an send data to an external MIDI device the INSERTING A DISK INTO THE via DISK DRIVE as shown. K760/880SE Floppy MIDI OUT port. disks must be inserted into the disk Thisdrive option provides settings that influence the

label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly as aHANDLING instrument whole andFLOPPY are saved to the GenDISKS IDI OUT ICON: The events generated by the into the drive until it clicks into place. eral Setup. When handling floppy disks, certain precautions ack are sent to an external MIDI device via the should be taken to avoid damage or data loss. K760/880SE MIDI OUT port. When OFF, the MIDI CLOCK: This allows you to select whether not open the metal protection shutter or ack does not transmit MIDI via MIDI OUT. the sequencer willDo synchronize to the SK760/ DRIVE touch the ofclock. a disk OPERATING 880SE Internal clock or to ansurface External LED If your SK760/880SE has to be transported, Note: SK760/880SE receives or transmits MIDI make sure aas floppy disk is not inserted IDI FILTERS (F3) Clock on the same MIDI port (Athat or B) the Comin the disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and mon hold Channel. the drive head to scratch the disk, rendering it disk straight while inserting it. unusable. CLOCK SEND: Selects whether or not the internal Do not store or place floppy disks in close SK760/880SEs MIDI CLOCK informaEJECTING A FLOPPY DISK of television sets, computer monition will be sent viaproximity MIDI OUT. tors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk Options: On, Off. potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing drive operating led is off and that the SK760/ so may render the disk unusable. 880SE display is not currently showing a LoadMIDI MERGE: Allows the data received at both ing Saving message. Do store or place ach Track has 14or filters available; 7 filters for MIDI IN 1 and MIDI INnot 2 to be passed tofloppy MIDI disks in locations to extremes of temperature and To extract the OUT. disk, These press the eject button IDI IN and 7 filters for MIDI filters OUT and A and MIDI OUT B subject after having been prochumidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust remove the ow you to specify up to 7disk. events which you do essed by the Performance settings. This means andcan dirt.be processed by the ot want the selected Track to either send or rethat the MIDI IN data eive. Do notfilters place objects onbeing top of a floppy disk. volume, transpose, MIDI etc. before sent to MIDI OUT. ptions: Off, Program Change, Pitchbend, Mono EJECT BUTTON Return disks to their protective cases after uch, Poly touch, ControlChange 00...31, use. Options: On, Off. On is the default setting. ontrolChange 64...127.

THE WRITE PROTECT TAB

Note: The parameter cannot be programmed when the COMPUTER port is in use. See Computer.

Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which allows you to protect valuable data from being MIDI IN TRANSPOSE: This allows the simple accidentally overwritten. pitch shifting, (in half step increments), of all data received To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid acci- at MIDI IN. dental erasure, slide the tab fully down to open this parameter can be useful to avoid Deactivating the window. To permit writing data to disk, slide transpositions when you program unwanted the tab fully up to close the window. Songs with a computer. A computer operates as a THRU device. After receiving data by a track

6 Reference Guide

Disk

431

BACKUP COPIES
At the end of a work session, always remember to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or Hard disk to Floppy Disks. Should you accidentally erase some files from RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and data loss, you will always be able to recuperate the data from your disks. It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your disk data. Backup is technical jargon for a second copy. Backup copies stored in a safe place are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.

PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE WHEN USING SK760/ 880SE DISKS WITH A COMPUTER

In name write situations, SK760/880SE allows file names of up to 10 characters, except Blocks which accept 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS and Windows 3.1 Operating Systems. Block files also include the extension .BLK. If your files are to be used in MS-DOS devices (IBM PCs and compatibles), bear in mind the 8 character limit of these systems when naming your files. In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems, file names can include more that 8 characters. When a name is modified on a computer, the following rules should be remembered: do not change the Block file extension. avoid Block names longer that 8 characters. the maximum number of files in a Block cannot exceed the limit imposed by the SK760/ 880SE RAM. do not change the names of the permanent files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM Style Group names). SK760/880SE requires standard names to recognize the structure of the data. Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSDOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to bear in mind the following advice: do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.: MY FILE.BLK). To separate a name into two parts, you can either: separate two parts by the underscore symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK); Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first letters of both parts of the name, lowercase for the others (e.g.: MyFile.BLK). do not assign two files the same name using uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g. MYFILE and myfile). The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macintosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can be found in a Block .

DISK DRIVE HEAD CLEANING

After a prolonged period of use, disk save and load errors may become frequent due mainly to dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for 3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives. 1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid. 2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive. 3. Execute a load function. An error message will appear. This is normal. 4. After approx. 10 seconds, eject the disk. Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.

432 Reference Guide

TRACKS/SPLIT: Here you can program the parameters exclusive to the tracks, such as Section Transpose, Detune, Polyphony priority, Velocity. These parameters would affect any sound you decide to assign to the tracks being proStyles are a collection of musical patterns repreTHE FUNCTIONS WHICH CONTROL THE STYLES grammed. senting many types of music, ranging from rock The Styles are controlled by a set of functions and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music which determine how they play. SOUND/S.PATCH : Here you can program a set The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are n Edit Menu contains several parameters and of sound triggered by the information from edit parameters that would affect any ptions to choose from, most ofchord which affect the received sound you decide to assign to the tracks you are the SK760/880SE the accompaniment acks of the Performance you arekeyboard; programming. programming. patterns change to suit current chord. hose not examined in this chapter are,the General, This editor is explained in detail in the Sound yle/Song e Sound/S.Patch.. ABOUT THE SK760/880SE ROM STYLES chapter of the Reference Guide, starting from he tracks of the Performance in edit are shown page 2.4. the left track column at all times,has therefore you The SK760/880SE 192 auto accompaniment

Styles

an select your tracks without returning toStyle the Groups, each ROM Styles arranged in 12 ulti Track list.containing 2 banks of 8 Styles each. All pages relating to the Performances show the the top left hand corner, indicatP, ( ) inARRANGE he Edit sections you would usepress to construct Tothat select a Style, one of theletter STYLE ON/OFF ing that ofbutton the current are our Performance are: buttons, (8 Beat, 16 Beat, etc) GROUPS and se-the parameters When this is on,page all the accompaniment Performances. lect a Style from the Bank 1 selectionmemorized window to the parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you with corresponding soft buttons. To select IDI: Here you canthe assign MIDI channels, seLets examine each Performance detail, will only hear the editor Drum in track when you press Bank 2 Styles, press the Page/Bank button ct the MIDI configuration, set the MIDI Filters, starting with MIDI. Start/Stop to start the Style. ( settings ). nd a host of other to set your Performnce correctly for MIDI setups.

FLASH STYLES

ARRANGE MODE

Your instrument mayoutput also contain IXER: The mixer controls the final of the a set of Flash Styles. Essentially it lets ounds in yourUser Performance. ou select volume, pan position and output jack election for each Track. Also available is a 3D fect feature.

Pressing this button gains access to the chord recognition modes for the accompaniments. Refer to the Arrange mode paragraph on page 5.3 for more information.

SELECTING AND PLAYING THE STYLES

MEMORY
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand causes the accompaniment to stop.

Refer to pages 1.24-1.29 of the Quick Guide for FFECTS: Here you can examples assign theof effects that illustrated how to select the ROM ou would like Styles to use,and then, for each track, you Flash User Styles and how to use the an assign the automatic amount of SEND to each effect. functions, (START/STOP, INTRO,

ENDING, KEY START, TAP TEMPO, FILLS, FADE IN/OUT and VARIATIONS). ONTROL/PADS : Here you can program the onoard controllers: the pedals, the pitch/modulaon trackball, the Pads (1, 2, 3 and 4), and you an decide which tracks of your Performance will e affected by them and which one will not.

LOWER MEMORY
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are held even if the left hand is taken away from the keys. The Lower Memory function is useful for holding on background sounds without having to use a Damper pedal (which may be of more use with the upper sounds).

4 Reference Guide

Styles 51

In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even when you have taken your hand off the keys.

STYLE LOCK (PERFORMANCE GROUPS SECTION)

If STYLE LOCK is on, selecting PERFORMANCES recalls the sounds for the keyboard sections while the sounds of the accompaniment sections of the current Style remain unchanged. If this button is off, you can recall memorized Styles by selecting the Performances. This will allow you to change the entire sound configuration of both keyboard sections as well as accompaniment tracks.

TEMPO LOCK
If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the tempo changes too. If the function is on, the tempo will not change.

MIXER LOCK
A Performance also memorizes the track volumes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the track volumes change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks assigned to the keyboard will change while the accompaniment track volumes will not.

SINGLE TOUCH PLAY

When you activate the SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button, all the sounds memorized in the ROM Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks as well as the keyboard tracks. Pressing SINGLE TOUCH PLAY automatically activates the ARRANGE ON/OFF button, the MEMORY function and the KEY START button. When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting Styles recalls only the Style accompaniment sections without changing the keyboard sounds.

BASS TO LOWEST
If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the auto accompaniment of the current Style plays around the lowest note of the current chord. If you play a different inversion of the same chord, the lowest note also changes resulting in a different bass note being played. If off, the bass will follow the original programmed pattern of the Style. Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playing different chord inversions.

STYLE PERFORMANCE
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their Performances, 8 for each Style. Once you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play. Simply press the STYLE P button to open the Style Performance selection window related to the current Style. When Single Touch Play is on, each SK760/ 880SE Style is associated to 8 Style Performances which you can assign at any time before or during play. The Style Performances are permanent and cannot be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore command.

HARMONY ON/OFF
This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED off) the current Harmony Type selected in the HARMONY function of the Edit Tracks environment. Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing, making simple one-note melodies sound as if they are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit this function. For more information on the Harmony types available, see Edit Tracks/Split in the Performance chapter of the Reference Guide.

52 Reference Guide

A Style Performance be programmed to change RRANGE ON/OFF STYLE LOCK CHORD RECOGNITION MODES

the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniThe Chord Recognition modes generate the auhen you turn the instrument for the first time, Thanks STYLE LOCK function, you can ment sounds, on but the accompaniment patternsto the tomatic accompaniments of the Styles in various every time you the GRAND PIANO Perdecide to select Performances and change Style of select the current Style remain unchanged. different ways according to how many notes are rmance from Group 1, the panel will default to every time, or simply recall keyboard sounds withpressed and where on the keyboard (above or e power up situation with several buttons on, out changing the Style accompaniment. below the split point). The programmed accommong them the ARRANGE ON/OFF button (LED ARRANGE MODE When STYLE LOCK is on, (LEDare on), selecting paniment patterns always fully generated with n). Performances recalls keyboard sounds The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to a fully recognised chord. only. Major, minor and sevseveral options associated to the Styles: the Auto enth chords each can generate completely difand Fixed Chord modes, the Style Chord Recferent accompaniment patterns. The chord recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and ognition modes available are: When STYLE LOCK is off, (LED off), selecting Autobacking and the Mixer Lock and Bass FolPerformances ONE recalls sounds for the keyboard his button enables the auto-accompaniments of low functions. FINGER: A single note played below the as well as a Style. e Style. In fact, if you press the START/STOP Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major utton and play a chord on the keyboard, an autoIn Real Time mode, thechord ARRANGE ON/ chord. when A minor requires the root note and yle accompaniment pattern will start to play. OFF button is off Performthe (LED minoroff), thirdchanging (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord ances with STYLE LOCK on would be useful to C with a Bb the ARRANGE ON/OFF button is off, (LED off), requires the root and seventh (e.g. play live with the Drum Track the memorized nly the drum pattern of the Style will play when either above orof below C). Style. Simply press START/STOP to start the ou press START/STOP. This is useful to play Drum pattern. FINGERED When you select other our Performances live with drum accompani1: Needs atPerformleast three notes for full ances, you could change the real time keyboard ent. chord recognition. With less than three notes, sounds without changing the Drum pattern. - the notes played the chord is not recognized nce the Performances can memorize any panel are considered stray. With STYLE LOCK off, you could select Performuation, they AUTO can be programmed toCHORD recall MODES a CHORD AND FIXED ances and recall the Drum track of a different Style yle comprising the sounds for the automatic acChord recognition can be set to remain fixed reevery time. FINGERED 2: At least three notes must be ompaniments, a Variation and, if Tempo Lock is gardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to f, a Tempo setting. In fact, the Performances played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If change automatically according to the change in e an alternative way of recalling user-proless than three notes are played, the arranger the keyboard mode. ammed Style Performances, as you will disrecognizes the chord but triggers a partial acover further ahead. companiment. AUTO CHORD MODE: active by default, allows changes of the chord recognition mode accordFREE 1: A three note chord is recognized anying to the selected keyboard mode (Full Keywhere along the keyboard, overriding the Split board, Upper&Lower or Multi). Point. Less then three notes does not affect the Given that the keyboard mode is memorized in a chord recognition mechanism. Up to 4 chord Performance, the chord recognition can change notes are recognized by Free 1. along with the Performance. FIXED CHORD MODE: allows you to set a chord recognition mode which does change with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes). The option selected remains memorized after power down. FREE 2: As above, but up to 6 notes are recognized. The option selected can be stored to the Performances.

Note: The symbols of the recognized chord appear on the main Style display screen. If the

2 Reference Guide

Styles 53

chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is shown as the lowest note played followed by several asterisks. For example: C***** . Note: In order for the chord to be recognized (and the relative symbol to be shown on the display) Arrange On/Off must be on.

CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT

The Split Point is: (a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and Multi keyboard modes and, (b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes). The current Split Point setting appears in the main page as an option that can be selected with the paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be modified as required. 1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing, press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the Split Point dialog window.

DYNAMIC ARRANGE
When DYNAMIC ARRANGE is active, the volume of the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord notes. Increased chord note velocity increases the volume of the accompaniments. When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain unchanged with changes in chord note velocity.

AUTOBACKING
When AUTOBACKING is on, a quick change of chord updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern instantly without breaks in the pattern. When off, a change of chord does not update instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.

2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard (corresponding to the highest note of the Lower split zone) to modify the setting. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.

3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or ESCAPE to cancel the operation. With ENTER, the main page will show the new Split Point setting. With ESCAPE the original Split Point will be restored.

Note: The Split Point is a general parameter (not linked to a particular Performance) which is conserved in memory when the instrument is turned off. The new setting is lost when the Reset All operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM loses its data due to the total discharge of the battery.

54 Reference Guide

e SK760/880SE Wave Library. The new User Stylessaved to the am -Sound is simultaneously K760/880SE Sound Library at the selected loation. Pressing Enter also escapes the Sample The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the anslator and returns to Edit Sound where you STYLE GROUPS section recall User-programan start to edit the new Ram -Sound using all mable Styles, in other words, free locations that e methods already described. allow you to record your own auto accompanioull find the new Ram assigned to can reside in ments. Up -Sound to 32 User Styles e currently selected track, the new Wavememory, 8 in and each User Group. rm selected in the Waveform editor. A new Style can be created by recording every part yourself. You can also modify an existing N-ASSIGNED SAMPLES Style. This second option is explained in the Edit Style section on page 5.13. among the assigned samples of the Sample anslator, oneDisk or more unassigned samples are based User Styles can be loaded into esent, pressing SAVE(to prompts a message rememory the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 locations) and uesting the cancellation of unassigned samples user-programmed Styles can be saved to disk, efore proceeding with Save operation. using thethe methods described in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide, page 4.6.

WHAT IS A RIFF?
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a phrase or lick, but it is important to understand that the Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences. The table shown on this page lists all the Riffs that make up a Style. The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style which repeats continually until stopped, or until it is broken by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern. The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING buttons. A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long. Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum, Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.

THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE

Styles provide automatic accompaniments based on the system of chords. In particular, the Major, Minor and Seventh chords trigger three comdifferent arrangement ess ENTER pletely to confirm and proceed with patterns. the aving of the Waveform as There are 4 described Variationsabove. of the Major, minor and chords and each Variation breaks down into instead, you7th want to assign the un-assigned different sections: basic, Intro, Fill, Endamples, pressseveral Escape to cancel the message, ing. These sections the ssign the samples, then four press Save form again tobasis of a structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or Riffs, oceed with the save operation. for each Style.

Var1

Var2

Var3

Var4

Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th Basic 7th Fill Major Fill Minor Fill 7th Intro Major Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

Intro Major Intro Major Intro Minor Intro Minor Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th Riffs of a Style

Intro 7th End Major End Minor End 7th

56 Reference Guide

User Styles 55

RECORDING
Recording a User Style is easy.

1. Press on of the USER Style buttons and select a free location (User) to create a new Style. 5. Select the track, usually the Drum track first, that you want to record.
Press the corresponding Soft button to place the track in Record mode (Record icon showing). Only tracks showing the Record icon will capture events during the recording.

2. You are prompted to create a new style. 6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.
A one-measure countdown will start (shown on the measure counter in the top right hand corner of the display) and a metronome tic will help you with your timing. If you dont want the metronome, turn if off with the soft button F8.

3. Press OK, (F1).

The Style Record View page activates with a superimposed Select Riff dialog window:

7. Start playing after the lead-in.

The recording proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of the riff is reached, the recording starts again from the beginning. The number of bars recorded will depend on the setting in the initial RecView display, in the Measures parameter (in this case 2).

4. Select the Variation, (VAR. 1, VAR. 2, VAR. 3, VAR. 4), section, (BASIC, FILL, INTRO, ENDING) and chord, (MAJOR, MINOR, 7TH) with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
The LED on the RECORD button lights up and the Record View page is shown in negative highlight.

8. When you have finished recording the first track, stop the recording with START/STOP.
The Track will still be in record mode, allowing you to add new events by starting again with Start/Stop. The default setting of the Record mode will be Overdubb. Other record mode settings can be selected (explained afterwards). Stop the recording of additional note with Start/Stop.

56 Reference Guide

If you have loaded disk-based User Styles, or have recorded User Styles using up all the The Record icon will change to the Seq-play memory dedicated to the storage of Styles, a icon. REQUEST (F7) END SAMPLE / SAMPLE 4. Specify a sample number (by rotating the quick and easy way of clearing User Style Dial) and press ENTER. amples can be transferred between SK760/ memory and making room for other Styles is to 80SE and most other samplers and computer Shortly after, transfer usethe thesample Restore Styles process operation. For details 10. Select another track to record and repeat ampling programs using the Send Sample/Sambegins. During the transfer, the process is available, reregarding the RESTORE functions procedure foraccording other tracks e Request optionthe which operates to until you have monitored on of the main Samferthe to bar the graph GENERAL chapter, page 8.8, in the recorded all the riffs you want for your Style. e MIDI Sample Dump Standard. This feature ple Translator display. Reference Guide. orks on the handshake principal and requires If the sending device ismust another SK760/ Remember to confirm each track you record Naturally, you remember to save the User nly that the transmitter and receiver conform to 880SE , you can specify the numbers from 0 to disk before before selecting another one, otherwise you Styles that you dont want to lose e standard. Bothwill units must be connected via to 15 whichproceeding correspondwith to the 16 locations of record your new track and add the same the restore procedure. closed MIDI loop The operation proceeds events to the track already recorded. the Sample Translator. moothly and at high speed without freezing eiIf youre requesting a sample from an exter11. When you finished, press er the external device or thehave SK760/880SE . It the RECORD nal computer or sampler, you can specify a tochannels. escape Record not necessary to button set MIDI If themode. exnumber from 0 to 255, depending on the samrnal device does not conform to the Sample The LED on the RECORD button goes off ple numbers stored in the external unit. IDI Dump Standard, this operation cannot be and the display shows the new Style window. While the transfer is taking place, the Samerformed. ple Req option changes to Dump Stop. Use he Send Sample option is shown when a SamDump Stop to stop the sample transfer from e is selected in the main Sample Translator disthe external device. ay.

9. Confirm the recorded track with the correSample MIDI Dump sponding soft button.

RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY

TO SAVE A SAMPLE USING THE SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD (SEND SAMPLE)

Press SEND SAMPLE (F7). Shortly after, the sample transfer process begins. During the transfer, the process is monitored on the bar graph of the main Sample Translator display. While the transfer is taking place, the Send Sample option changes to Dump Stop. Use Dump Stop to stop the sample transfer to the external device.

he option changes from Send Sample to Same Request when an empty location is selected.

O LOAD SAMPLES USING THE SAMPLE DUMP ANDARD (SAMPLE REQUEST)

Connect two MIDI cables between the sending device and the SK760/880SE (MIDI IN to MIDI OUT and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN). Select an empty location in the Sample List. Press SAMPLE REQ (F7). A selection window opens where you can select the sample number.

54 Reference Guide

User Styles 57

The Record View page

The Record View page shows several parameters which you can set for your User Style before starting your recording or playback.

REC RIFF... (F2)

Opens the SELECT RIFF dialog window where you can select a riff to record.

Select the Variation, section and chord with the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.

SOUND VIEW (F5)

Recalls the Sound View page where you can see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance.

MODE... (F1)
Opens the Record Mode dialog window where you can select various recording options.

REC VIEW (F6)

REPLACE - The new notes substitute old notes already present in the tracks being recorded. OVERDUBB - New notes are merged with those already present on the tracks being recorded. PUNCH IN/OUT - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (under EDIT CONTROLS). Activate the recording with PLAY. When the song reaches the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At this point, the recording proceeds in replace mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the recording. Recalls the Record View page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.

ERASE... (F7)
Cancels a track, riff, variation or the entire Style.

TRACK - Cancels the selected track. RIFF - Cancels the selected riff. VARIATION - Cancels the selected variation. STYLE - Cancels the entire Style.

58 Reference Guide

OOP SWITCH: This parameter METRONOME (F8) toggles between NORMALIZE (2) the scale converter for the other two chords (mie On and OffActivates/deactivates status of the Loop. Ifthe setmetronome. to ON, nor and/or 7th). sample If, on a future occasion, you wish If the volume of the selected seems to e sample loops continually from Loop Start to toquite program also the riffs, the relative be too low, it is probable thatrespective the original oop End until the keys are released. If OFF, the Scale conversion will be ignored. sample Gain (Volume) has a setting that needs The parameter TIME SIGNATURE ample plays from Loop Start to Sample End and of takes two variable parts, corresponding to to be adjusted. consists Normalize the sample gain Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be ops. two complementary chords with respect to the to its maximumthe setting in a single step. modified only before starting a recording. If the one being recorded. 1. Press F2 to select NORMALIZE. Style contains recorded events, this parameter If the Off setting is selected, the arranger carENERAL NOTES ON SAMPLE EDITING The display shows the current status of the cannot be modified. ries out the simplified conversion referred to. The hen you trim samples by changing the values sample Gain. In the example, we are worktables at the end of this chapter show how the Loop Start and Loop End, youll hear the effect ing on a stereo sample (Left and Right parts). MEASURES Scale Converter operates, both in the off status, th the next note you play. However, the Samas well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several Determines length of a riff expressed in mease is not actually changed the in the SK760/880SE different solutions for each chord are provided ures (max emory until you save it. 16). for. On pages 5.12 and 5.13 you find Scale ConverTEMPO sion tables for reference. HE SAMPLE EDIT OPTIONS Sets the playing speed (metronomic Tempo).

In this display situation, the Gain setting is QUANTIZE not programmable. An auto-corrector of timing KEY NOTE 2. Press ENTER to set the sample Gain during to its the recording phase.(100%). The selection values are normal, triplets UNING (F1) Sets the reference key for the recording. maximum setting KEY or swing. he Tuning option provides a reference the the original riff NOTE indicates the key infor which ample pitch, producing the When exact note with the a siis recorded. you play indicated chord, usoidal, superimposed on the sample. This is the riff will play back in exactly the same manner Value Quantization seful in situations where the original sample pitch as recorded. If other chords are played, the riff 1/4 required when a sample to a key will assigning be transposed accordingly. 1/8 nge. triplet Repeat the1/12 operations for the other section ess the soft SCALE buttonCONVERSION F1 to activate the Tuning 1/16 of on the sample, (RIGHT), by selecting the Left nction (shown negative highlight) and play a If in you program a Style accompaniment based parameter with rotating the ote on the keyboard. 1/24 the cursor and triplet the Major scale, the SK760/880SE arranger will Dial. ess F1 to deactivate Tuning. automatically convert a minor or 7th chord ac1/32

ntering the Sample Edit page activates Valid for the entire Style. several ptions.

cordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style 1/48 triplet recording times by, for example, recording only 1/64 (1/64) the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when 1/96 (1/64 triplet) you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th chord will be automatically adjusted for the free no quantization change. However, in harmonic terms, this type 1/8 B...F* (swing) of over-simplification creates errors when using 1/16 B...F* (swing) GAIN (F3) the more complex chord structures. To overcome free you to modify no the quantization this problem, the SK760/880SE Scale Converter This option allows volume of provides a selection of chord inversion systems, the sample with respect to the other samples of based on algorithms in order to render the the Waveform. conthe primary uses of Gain *One B of F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel. version more musical. is to equalize the volume levels between differkey ranges. You can program the Major chord onlyent and set

52 Reference Guide

User Styles 59

FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)

The amount of memory remaining to record the riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30 kilobytes). If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a dialog window may appear showing the message Memory full! indicating that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted. You can increase the amount of space in RAM by deactivating the Undo function.

510 Reference Guide

These Scale Conversion tables refer to chord and bass patterns played in the key of C and show which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C shows a converdown EASSIGN (F5)sion of 2, the note is converted 2 semitones DELETE (F3) (Bb). Notes not converted are shown blank.

SCALE CONVERSION TABLES Cancelling assignments

Cancelling samples

he Deassign command cancels a sample asThe Delete option allows you to cancel the segnment. lected Sample Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C 7th rifffrom the Sample Translator. Select the Sample to deassign. C# After listening and assigning D# F# to your G# Samples A# want to eliminate theBno longer C D E them, F you mayG A required. accomp. 2 +1 1 Simply select the sample you wish to cancel and bass +1 1 press the soft button F3. Press the soft button F5 to deassign the samYou are prompted with a message to reconfirm ple. the operation with ENTER or cancel with Escape.
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff > C minor riff C# C D D# E F F# G G# A A# B

After deassigning, the sample will play across accomp. 1 +1 1 the entire keyboard range, but only if it is sebass 1 +1Sample. 1 Press ENTER to delete the lected. If you wish to save the sample as part of the final Waveform, you must reassign a note Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C 7th riff range before proceeding.
C# C 7th 1 accomp. 7th 1 bass 7th 2 accomp. 7th 2 bass 7th 3 accomp. 7th 3 bass 7th 4 accomp. 7th 4 bass 2 2 +1 +1 2 1 1 2 D D# E F F# G G# A A# B

50 Reference Guide

User Styles 511

Scale Converter active: C Major riff > C minor riff C# C min 1 accomp. min 1 bass min 2 accomp. min 2 bass min 3 accomp. min 3 bass min 4 accomp. min 4 bass min 5 accomp. min 5 bass min 6 accomp. min 6 bass min 7 accomp. min 7 bass 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D D# E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 +1 +1 1 1 1 1 +1 +1 1 1 F F# G G# A A# B

COMPLEX CHORDS
The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed.

512 Reference Guide

everal different Levels (dynamic levels). To escape without closing the edit page, press Edit Style Assigning thesamples ST/SONG button. To pass to another edit ample Translator can load single Samples, or it ). environment, use the +/ PAGE buttons ( an convert, in a single operation, an entire level the Program into a SK760/880SE Series WaveASSIGN (F4) After recording a than Userone Style, the Style riffs can rm. If a Program contains more level, Once youve loaded in theSTYLE samples that you need, be modified the functions EDIT THE EDIT OPTIONS can be converted entirely in using successive phases, of the the STYLE MENU. you select a User Style toonly edit,essential step you need to take before sing (a) a Sound Patch, (b) aIfmulti track conyou canIf save them is to ASSIGN, (or map), your the Edit Style functions will be available. Sound containing a key-dynamic guration, c) a all UNDO (F2) samples to a specific range of keys. Only asyou select a ROM Style, only the Copy function ssignment (executed in Edit Sound). When this parameter isWaveform selected (shown in negasigned samples become a part of a will be available. highlight), theSK760/880SE UNDO function is enabled. which you can tive then save to the NVERSION LIMITATIONS Wave Library. Undo cancels the last operation or series of opSK760/880SE Waveform can contain only 16 erations out. into This Sample function consumes exWhen you load a new carried Waveform EDIT STYLE amples. For ENTERING example, an Akai S1000 level actly thethat same amountthe of WaveRAM memory as the Translator, constitute an contain up In to 99 Samples, therefore, Style/RealTime mode, when selecta the User Style the samples If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it form are shownStyle. assigned to specific key ranges. onversion is carried out, the 16 Samples you wish to only modify. a good idea to shown, deactivate In such cases, is three values are the UNDO. lowom the lowestPress register are loaded. the ST/SONG button (in the Edit Numbers Press pitch the UNDO panel button to execute the deest note, the sample and the highest note: hese kind of Samples can overlap evenEDIT inside section) to open the main STYLE menu. sired Undo operation. Highest note dynamic Level. Sample Translator eliminates Lowest note is overlap, using the lowest limit-note of the ghest pitched sample as the limit between sames.
Sample pitch

ECEIVING SAMPLES VIA A DUMP

You will be from prompted request to confirm If you load new Samples disk with or a a SCSI the them operation with ENTER cancel with ESdevice, or receive via MIDI, they will or norou can also Dump samples into Sample TransCAPE. mally be shown without an assignment, but with tor via the Sample Request option (F7). This is the sample pitch. In such cases, Sample TransEntering this section scussed in detail on page 2.53. the first time opens the main lator allows you to listen to the sample across menu page (00). On all successive occasions, the entire keyboard, to help you decide the in the last page selected is recalled. which note range you can obtain the best results. Once you have decided the best note range, THE EDIT STYLE MENU If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button press the ASSIGN button (F4) to open the ASThe Edit Style menu contains 10 Style Editing SIGN MENU. and confirming with ENTER activates the followfunctions (or Editors): ing user message: Erase, Move, Copy, Quantize, Insert Measure, Delete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, Microscope, Mask. Two options are also available: Undo and Style name. Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the UNDO operation, time with UNDO enaThe selected Sample is shown with athis temporary To escape from EDIT STYLE press ST/SONG or bled. key range, represented by the black line. The ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the curnotch shown in the line represents the Sample rently selected level). Pitch.

ESCAPE FROM EDIT STYLE

48 Reference Guide

Edit Style 513

STYLE NAME (F8)

Changes the name of a Style. This function only applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.

EDIT PROCEDURE
1. Press ST./SONG to enter Edit Style. The main menu appears. 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. 4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons. 5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or the numeric keypad. 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. 7. Pass to another editor with the +/ Page ). Otherwise, return to the main buttons ( menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.

The method used to insert characters is described in the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric Entry, on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can move the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard.

EMPTY TRACK INDICATION

The presence of notes in a track is indicated by the seq-play icon: In play mode, this status icon indicates the presence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff of the track does not contain notes, the empty track message is displayed at the bottom of the Edit Style page: In record mode, tasks are performed directly on a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes in the track and in the riff being recorded.

514 Reference Guide

Loading Erase samples

This editor cancels events.

OAD (F1)

he Load option allows you to load Samples into ERASE TRACK (F5)from a RAM e Sample Translator directly to work on(optional). a single Track of the Style. ound, or fromAllows disk oryou SCSI device

The time taken the end depends of the riff. on the size of the sample. When loading has finished, the display showsERASE a situation similar to the example RIFF (F6) below, with one or more samples which conHere you can erase all the tracks of a Riff. stitute the Waveform.

LOADING A SAMPLE FROM A RAM -SOUND

his operation should be carried out with RAM ounds originating from previous Series instruents (WK6/8, S, SX, PS/GPS) or from Ram ounds containing a Waveform created by SamPARAMETERS: e Translator. Set the instrument in Style/ 2. LOADING SAMPLES FROM DISK OR SCSI DEVICE Same as ERASE TRACK but without the Note ealTime mode with a single track active in Full To load samples from From...To... disk, in practice you can Range parameter. ode. PARAMETERS: enter with any sound, including a RAM -Sound, With a RAMVariation -Sound to a : assigned Selects one oftrack the 4of Variations. Only once you enter the Sample Translator, because ERASE VARIATION (F7) a Performance, enter Sample Translator via Variations that contain at least one recorded riffoverride you can the sound assigned to the track Here you can erase Style If, Variation. SYNTH/EDIT SOUND/SAMPLE TXL. can be selected. and listen to a sample loaded fromadisk. instead, other tracks are active, you will hear these Riff: Selects one of the riffs of the selected Varias well. ation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is displayed empty, the phrase No 1. Insert the sample disk into the drive. A dialog window informing that Riff a appears. Ram-Sound has been and the the associ2 to Enter Event typefound : Determines type of event be Sample Translator via SYNTH/EDIT ated Waveform is ready to be loaded. TXL. erased. Duplicate note eliminates the noteSOUND/SAMPLE with the lowest velocity value when two notes of Athe . If you enter with a RAM -Sound, you same pitch start at the same position. are prompted to load the associated Waveform. Press ESCAPE to ignore Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, the prompt and pass to the load phase Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ERASE STYLE (F8) (point 3). ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, Here you can cancel the entire Style. ControlChange 64...127. B. If you enter with a Rom-Sound, the dialog window does not appear and you Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and pass directly to the load phase. Press ENTER tolimits confirm thenotes operation, or To cancel a lower of the to cancel. escape to cancel. single percussive instrument of the Drum 3. track, Press LOAD (F1). assign the same to theclock highest and lowest A dialog window showing annote animated For example, to cancel the snare (D2) set keeps you limit. informed of the samples being loaded: the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. From locator... To locator...: Determines the start 4. From and end point of the part to cancel. It is possible to the selection window, select the device specify the measure, beat and resolution. from which the sample will be loaded and press ENTER. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the The sample data contained in the storage riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond

46 Reference Guide

Edit Style 515

Move
Shifts events from one point to another within the selected track.

Copy
Copies events from a track or from all the tracks.

COPY TRACK (F5)

PARAMETERS:

Variation: Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected. Riff: Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty the phrase No Riff appears. From locator... To locator...: Sets the start and end points of the part to be moved. The measure, beat and resolution can be specified. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond the end of the riff. Start Locator: Sets the new position of the section being moved. Assignable values: any point within the riff.

PARAMETERS:

Copy to Style...: Selects the destination Style to copy the current Style (part or whole) to. Assignable values: any USER Style. From var... to var...: Selects the source and destination Variations for the part to be copied. Assignable values: 1 ... 4. From riff... to riff...: Selects the source and destination riffs for the part to be copied. For example, it is possible to copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor Fill riff. Assignable values: any riff. Track... to track...: Specifies the source and destination tracks for the copied elements. From track shows the track selected using soft buttons A...H. To track... can be modified using the DIAL. Assignable values: any accompaniment track (9...16). From locator... To locator...: Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the riff.. Start locator: Sets the new position of the copied part. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the destination riff.

516 Reference Guide

times: Sets the number of consecutive copSamples Copy and the Sample Translator ies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous

one ends. Assignable values: depends of the length of the he SK760/880SE can load new sound samples COPY STYLE (F8) SAMPLE LOADING METHODS riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length. to memory which can then be edited and saved Samples can be loaded from disk, via MIDI from s new SK760/880SE sounds. Determines the copy Copy mode: mode. samplers, etc., from external SCSI computers, unites the copied events al-(only if your instrument is fitted with the K760/880SE Merge instruments are equipped with 8 to those devices ready present at the destination. Replace sub-SCSI kit), or dumped from external debytes of Sample RAM memory, sufficient to acoptional stitutes theyou events present at the with ommodate the samples wish to load. Youdestination vices. those copied. an increase the amount of memory by installing Samples can also be loaded directly from dditional RAM in the form volatile S-RAM kits Options: Merge, Replace. RAM -Sounds, provided that you enter EDIT upplied by Generalmusic, or SIMMs chips which SOUND with the same sound assigned to the an be obtained from most computer suppliers. COPY RIFF (F6) selected track of the current Performance. PARAMETER: ou can check the amount of sample memory Here you can copy all the tracks of a riff. Copy current Style to Style: Selects the USER at has been installed by looking under EDIT ENTERING SAMPLE TRANSLATOR location where the entire current Style is to be ENERAL/ SYSTEM INFO, (F1 button). Access to the copied Sampleto Translator isVars] always via (Style [all option). the Edit Sound environment (press SYNTH in the EDIT section; see also page 2.13). AMPLE TRANSLATOR You can enter the Sample Translator in two ways: he SK760/880SE is capable of loading many 1. With a RAM -Sound. This allows you sefferent samples types from a number of differlect Sample Translator and load the Wavent companies formats. form associated to the selected RAM ecause the list of compatible sample types is Sound. PARAMETERS: onstantly being updated, check with your With Same as TRACK butwhich without the 2. Track to a Rom-Sound (for example, select the eneralmusic dealer or COPY distributor to see default Grand Piano Performance). This alTrack parameter. rmats are compatible with the operating syslows you to enter Sample Translator and load m version you are currently using. Some of a sample from floppy disk or SCSI device (ope most common formats currently in use are; COPY VAR (F7) tional), or receive them via a MIDI Dump from ave, Stereo Wave, Sample Vision, Sound Dean external device. gner 1, Akai, Aiff, Kurzweil and many others. he new RAM Waveforms that you can create sing the Sample Translator can be stored to the K760/880SE Wave Library. Using the new aveforms, you will then be able to create new AM -Sounds, increasing SK760/880SE s onic potential. o start SAMPLE TRANSLATOR, press the SAMPARAMETERS: LE TXL button (F1) in the main EDIT SOUND Copy Variation... to Variation...: The source and splay. destination of the copied Variation (Var (all riffs) option). Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
Edit Sound - Sample Translator display, no samples loaded

To Style...: The destination Style of the copy. Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.

44 Reference Guide

Edit Style 517

Quantize
An auto-corrector of timing errors.

NOTE ON QUANTIZE (F1)

Post-Quantization of the Note On event.

Note range from... to... : Sets the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. From locator... To locator...: Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected.

Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Riff.

NOTE OFF QUANTIZE (F2)

PARAMETERS:

Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one riff recorded). Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Note On Quantize: Specifies the Note On quantize values.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization

Post-Quantization of the Note Off event. After a Note On quantization, a Note Off quantization affects the duration of the notes, adapting them to a quantization grid.

PARAMETERS:

Note Off Quantize: Specifies the Note Off quantize values. All other parameters same as Note On Quantize.

* B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.

518 Reference Guide

Some Sound editing suggestions Insert Measures

Delete measures

Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the selected Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Varihe Volume of Variation. a Sound can beexisting controlled incan live be selected. If Only riffs ation. Only riffs can be When you release the key existing the sound begins toselected. If the uations by velocity and aftertouch variations the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. fade and then reappears, it is held for an instant he relative parameters are found in the Volume and then away gradually. Measures to insert: Specifies the number of fadesMeasures ditor). to delete: Specifies the number of measures to insert. measures to delete. you set very sensitive values for both controls LFO Assignable values: depends on the length of the .g. +7 assigned to both dynamics and Assignable values: a number that does not ex(max 16be measures). Lfo can be applied tothe several different pa-example, if the tertouch), theriff Sound will very difficult to conceed length of the sound Riff. For rameters. ol and easily susceptible to locator sudden:volume vari-the measure Riff is 4 measures long, the maximum assignInsert from Specifies at ions. able value if 4. on the parameter which the new measures will be inserted. The effect produced depends affected: Delete from locator: This parameter indicates Assignable values: from the first measure (bar) OOP AND LFO of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measof those to be deleted. Amplitude the first measure > Vibrato ureaof the on Riff. Assignable within the actual limits of the y programming loop two segments of a Pitch > values: Tremolo riff. Dependent on the previous parameter. ey On Envelope which create an ascending and Cutoff Freq. > Wha-wha escending ramp (/\) you can a Tremolo a simulate b fect, without using the Lfo editor. loop of this kind on a Pitch Key On Envelope 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 ll simulate a more realistic Vibrato effect than e effect obtained with the LFO.
1
(1)

OLUME, VELOCITY & AFTERTOUCH

Inserts a specified number of measures. KEY TheOFF partENVELOPE Cancels a specified number of measures. The of the Riff the thatentire follows the insertion shifts measuresKey directly after the point ot all Waveforms cover extension of point Thanks to the articulated Off Envelopes (Re- of cancellation forward the same numberevident of measures lease as those shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join with e keyboard. This becomes particularly phase) of the SK760/880SE Series, you inserted. length of the Riff changes. the measures preceding cancellation point. hen you use an 88 noteThe keyboard. can create some very interesting effects.the In practice, you can render a Sound live after releashe problem is caused by a lack of samples at ing the keys. e extremes of the keyboard. During the creatg phase of a Waveform, considerations are For example, try programming an Amplitude Key ade for the quality of the sound and the amount Off Envelope of the following kind with a Sound memory necessary to store all the samples such as 12StrGtr (26-2): hich constitute the Waveform; if some high or w end samples are lacking in musical quality .g., the lower notes of a violin Waveform, or e higher notes of a double bass Waveform), it PARAMETERS PARAMETERS: preferable to eliminate them to avoid using up Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only ecious memory. existing Variations can be selected (those with at existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). least one recorded Riff).

AVEFORM

(2)

(a)

(b)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(5)

(6)

Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved forward.

Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the deletion point shift towards the beginning of the Riff.

42 Reference Guide

Edit Style 519

Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.

From locator... To locator...: Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify measure, beat and resolution. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Riff.

PARAMETERS

Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing Variations can be selected (those with at least one recorded Riff). Riff: Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is empty, the phrase No Riff appears. Velocity mode: Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates. Normal - The value indicated in Velocity change is added to or subtracted from the Velocity values of the notes. Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the value specified in Velocity change Change Velocity: Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

520 Reference Guide

Transpose Storing Sounds

Microscope

semitone henever youTransposition edit a sound in you will, at steps. some new name.The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List oint, decide that you either want to save your RAM-Sounds based shown at on theROM-Wavesamples center of the display shows all the ew sound or simply forget it and return to using are saved with an asterisk (*) attached after events recorded. e instrument as before. A modified Sound that the name to identify the Sound from the origas not been stored to memory shows a small inal. New sounds based on new Wavesamark at the top left hand corner before the name. ACCESS THE EDITwith the ples loaded from TO disk orEVENT created o cancel an edit, simply press the EXIT button 1. With the are track called in edit selected, Sample Translator RAM- use the / nd confirm with ENTER to return the main Edit cursor by buttons to scroll through the events. Sounds, identified the small graphical enu This will cancel your edit and return the representation The of a selected wave ( notes ). are played automatically. ound to its starting status. 2. Select theto parameter to be changed using PARAMETERS: 2. Use the directional arrows select the Bank you decide you want to store your sound into the /entry cursor buttons. zones and rotate Variation: Selects one of the 4 Variations. and OnlyProg. Change e instruments memory, the next step will be to theat Dial to 3. select the correspondUse thenumbers DIAL to change the selected paramexisting Variations can be selected (those with ess the SAVE button (F8). ing to an empty location (shown as No eters. least one recorded Riff). Sound). ny sound that you create yourself can be stored Riff : Selects one of the riffs from the chosen VariSound Group families, (or Banks). During 3. To change the Sounds name, press the PARAMETERS Soft PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND ation.you Only can the e storing process, willexisting first be riffs asked tobe se-selected. If button F7/F8 . Style empty, the phrase No Riff appears. The Status column shows the type of event. ct a destination foris your new sound and then One or more parameters can be changed for each ven the opportunity to name it. Transpose : Determines the value of the transevent. See the next page for a table of events position (in semitone steps). and their parameters. Press the soft button F8values: to select Save from Assignable -64 ... +64. the main Edit Sound menu. Note range from... to...: Sets the upper and SELECT RIFF... (F1) The Banklower Prog. Change window opens limits of the notes to be affected. To transSelects the Riff and Variation to edit. where you pose can select the destination of the of the Drum a single percussive instrument new Sound in the SK760/880SE track, assign the same Sound note tolithe highestUse andthe standard name entry procedure (see brary. lowest limit. For example, to change the snare Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.4 of the (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 Guide). Quick to D2. Press ENTER to confirm the new name. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9 SHOW... (F2) 4. Press ENTER again to memorize the Sound From locator... To locator...: Defines the to start the selected location. Here you can select the events that will be disand end point of the part to be affected. It is posplayed in the Event List. sible to Sounds specify the measure, beat and resoluThe SK760/880SE are stored in the tion. order of Bank Select and Program Change numbers. You can choose to store the modAssignable values: within the actual limits of the ified soundRiff. with its original name, or with a

Set the parameters and press ENTER. To mask the events, select Off

40 Reference Guide

Edit Style 521

INS: (X) (F3)

Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator (the parameters to the left of the Status column). The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Note: P. Ch Contr. P.Bend M.Tch P.Tch 1V C4 1 1 0 0 C4 2V 64 1 0 64 ---0 ---3V 64 1 ------measure beat resolution Gate 128

Event List

track in edit

Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Gate event type (Status)

After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.

CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing, or the event immediately after the current riff position.

INS TYPE... (F4)

Opens a dialog window where you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins: (x) function.

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event in the specified measure. The number can be entered using the DIAL.

Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm. Select the type of event and press ENTER.

DELETE (F6)
Deletes the selected event.

522 Reference Guide

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATVE PARAMETERS The Main Menu options

STATUS VALUE 1 Note name VALUE 2 VALUE 3 GATE

Note (F1) AMPLE TRANSLATOR

Bank Select MSB Bank Select MSB Change message. The PC message. To select message. Not contained in the tracks the SKSE banks, necessary to select LGORITHM (F2) and shown in the use numbers 1 16 the SKSE sounds Microscope has [1 128] [1 128] his option allows you to choose the Algorithms. priority over the PC essing F2 activates a dialog recorded box showing in thethe urrent Algorithm. Performance. [1 128] Delete: cancels the currently selected Layer. Control Change Control Change This option limits itself to cancelling one or two Value

his gains access to the Sample Translator, exained separately in detail from page 2.40 onards. Program Program change

Import: opens a second dialog window Key On Velocity Key Off level Velocity Note Length expressed as the where you can select the source and destination Sequencer resolution layer. (q=192) [0 63323]

Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = otate the Dial to select a different Algorithm and = Modulation, CC07 onfirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with Volume [1 128] SCAPE.

layers. It is not possible to cancel all layers - at least one must be present. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER or cancel the operation with ESCAPE.

LAYER RNG. (F5)

Value of MSB a Dynamic range for the current layer. (Most Significant Byte). Effectifve Pressing F5 activates a dialog box where you value bending. can of select the option required with the Up/Down [063 = down cursor buttons. 64 = neutral 65127 = up]

PitchSingle, Dual Value of LSB (Least gorithms available: 1, Dual 2, Dual Bend Significant Byte). Dual 4.

This option allows you to assign a Key range and

[0= Off, 1127 = On]

AYER UT. (F4)

he Layer Utility option allows you to create a ew Layer for the current Sound in edit, to imMono Channel Touch Aftertouch intensity ort a Layer from another Sound, or delete a [0 127] ayer. Poly a dialog Note which you essing F4 activates boxto where Touch Aftertouch is applied. an select the option required with the Up/Down [C1 G9] ursor buttons.

Note Aftertouch Key Range: assigns the lowest and highest keyintensity. limits for the current Layer. [0board 127]

Dynamic Range: assigns the lowest and highest key velocity limits for the current Layer. Program the options as required and confirm with ENTER. Press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

reate: adds a second or third layer to the curnt sound in edit.

38 Reference Guide

Edit Style 523

Mask
The Mask function allows you to program the Basic elements of two Variations (Var 2 and 4) in order to automatically obtain the Basic elements of the remaining two Variations (Var 1 and 3). The Basic Variation 2 generates the Basics of Variations 1 and 2. The Basic Variation 4 generates the Basics of Variations 3 and 4. To obtain the best results, program your Variations with all 6 accompaniment tracks (Acc.1,2,3,4,5,6) as well as Drums and Bass. The idea is to reduce your Style recording times by recording 2 Variations and exploit the automatic features to create a Style with 4 Variations. Then, using the Arranger Tracks function, mask one or two accompaniment sections in one or two Variation to reduce the instrumental content of the respective accompaniments. The Bass tracks rest unchanged and cannot be altered. Program the Intro, Ending and Fill of the 4 Variations to create a complete Style.

A1...A6 of Variation 2 and you want to mask A4, A5 and A6 for Variation 1, A2 and A3 for Variation 2, program the first two lines as follows:

V1 = Off/Off/Off/A4/A5/A6 V2 = Off/A2/A3/Off/Off/Off

DRUM MASK (F7/F8)

Opens the Drum mask dialog window. As in the Mask function for the Arrangement tracks, the Drum Mask excludes individual percussive sounds from the Drum tracks of the Variations. Four keyboards (or drumkits) appear in the dialog window, each representing the Drum track (DR) of the four different variations. Select the variation with the cursor buttons / . Play the notes corresponding to the percussion instruments to exclude them from the selected variation. The excluded notes are denoted by a small black line on white notes and a white line on the black notes. Play the same note to cancel the line and to play the sound in the selected variation. Press ENTER to confirm the programming, or ESCAPE to cancel.

PARAMETERS

Mask: Activates the Mask function. When the Mask parameter is enabled (ON), the Basic Variation 2 automatically generates Basic Variation 1, while Basic Variation 4 generates the Basic Variation 3. Options: On, Off. Arranger tracks: Deactivates the individual Arrangement parts (A1...A6) of each Variation. For example, if you have programmed tracks

Drum track of Variation 1 showing masked Percussive instruments

524 Reference Guide

Pan

Song

alid for all Algorithms. In Dual situations, reENV AMOUNT DYN SENSITIVITY: Links the enardless of whether the Filters are connected in to select velope amount SONG to keyPLAYBACK velocity variations. The SONG button allows you any eries or in parallel, there is only enveSONGS that you one maypan already have loaded tovalues 1. Positive increase envelope amount by Oncethe youve loaded your Song(s), press the pe for both waveforms (oscillators). memory from Disk or Hard Disk. From the same the key velocity increasing while negative values SONG button to open the SONG BANKS you can also enter panoSong Record he position ofbutton, the sound in the stereo actmode inversely with increased velocity. selection key window. by selecting an empty User Song. ma can be controlled dynamically by means Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. the Pan envelope divided in two parts: the Pan ey On Envelope and the Pan Key Off EnveSONG-PERFORMANCES ENV. AMOUNT TOUCH SENS.: Links the envepe. lope amount to variations in the Aftertouch presEach Song contains up to 8 Performances, which sure. are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song. Positive values increase the envelope amount by increasing Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and the Aftertouch pressure, while negavalues act inversely with increased rapid method of changing Sounds andtive Effects. Aftertouch. Song-Performances instantly reset the instru2. Select the Song with the corresponding Soft ment, therefore, they are very useful during a real values:button to enter Song Playback mode. Assignable 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. time Song recording. The display shows the Time/Tempo window, PAN DYNAMIC SENSITIVITY: Links the sensiwhere you can modify some playback paramPROGRAMMING SONG PERFORMANCES tivity of the Pan envelope eters. to key velocity variaAN ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS tions. Program your Song Performance using the methods described for the Performances andvalues move the sound further right by Positive NVELOPE AMOUNT: Activates the Global Pan EnveStyle Performances. Store the Song Performincreasing the key velocity while negative values pe and determines its depth of action. Assignance to the Song Performance bank with the act inversely with increased key velocity. ble values: 0 7. 0 = no envelope. STORE PERF procedure (refer to the PerformAssignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. ance chapter for instructions). A Song Performance can have a maximum ofTOUCH 32 PAN SENSITIVITY: Links the sensitivtracks. ity of the Pan envelope to variations in the If you want to see the sounds assigned to Aftertouch pressure. the tracks of the Song Performance, press Lets first examine how to select a Song Positive and playvalues move the sound further right by the SoundView button, (F5), and use the it back. In this section you will also find increasing explana- the Aftertouch pressure, while negaTrack scroll buttons to bring other tracks into tive values act inversely with increased tions regarding the various options offered in song view. Aftertouch. playback mode. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no response. LOAD SONGS TO MEMORY If you havent already loaded any Songs to RAM memory, refer to the DISK chapter for illustrated instructions of the Load file operation from Disk, Hard disk or SCSI device (optional). Return to the Time/Tempo window with button F6.

it Sound - Pan

36 Reference Guide

Song 61

3. Start the playback with the PLAY button in the SEQUENCER. During the playback, the LED on the PLAY button will be on and the song location pointer (LOC) in the top right hand corner of the display monitors the position of the Song. You can also start the SONG with the START/ STOP button. Using the PLAY, STOP, >> (FORWARD) and << (REWIND) buttons in conjunction with the song position locator, you should be able to easily move around from the beginning of your song to the end and all points in between. At any time while a song is playing, you can jump forwards or backwards by pressing the >> FORWARD or << (REWIND) buttons. For a longer song, holding down these buttons will move rapidly in either direction. 4. If you press STOP once, it will pause your song at the current position. The LED on the STOP button will flash to indicate that the Song is paused. While the song is paused, you can cue it to any measure using the forward (>>) and rewind (<<) buttons. When you press PLAY, the song will resume from where you are currently paused. If you want to take the song back to the beginning, press the START/STOP button, or press STOP again while the STOP LED is still flashing. When the Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on. 5. To change the Tempo, rotate the DIAL. This control is active in Song playback mode for changes in the playing speed (tempo). Lets now examine the options available in the main Song playback display.

JUKEBOX... (F1) Recalls the Jukebox function (explained afterwards). OPTION... (F2) This parameter allows you to set the Metronome options. Countdown - activates a one measure lead into the recording of a sequence during which events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off. Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume. Options: Off, 10...127. SONG P (F4) Press this button to select a Song Performance.

Use the soft buttons to select the required Song Performance. If you select it during the recording, the event is stored in the Master Track as a ProgramChange. See Song Performance on page 6.4. SOUND VIEW (F5) Recalls the Sound View page, where you can see and change the sounds of the current Performance.

62 Reference Guide

LOCATOR (SONG POSITION POINTER) This section, (LOC 1 1) shows the current Song control the record/playback parameters. position expressed in measures and beats. When single Low Frequency Oscillator generator for You can choose from the is following waves: the Song not playing, theSinus, Locator can be modiAlgorithms. Triangle; Saw, Square, Random, Sample/Hold. fied in the Time/Tempo page to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with he LFOs depth of action on the Pitch, Amplithe << (Rewind) and >> (Forward) buttons regardde and Filter is independently programmable less of the status of the sequencer (playing or off). r each oscillator.

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) Recalls the Time/Tempo page, where you can

TIME/TEMPO (F6)

FO is a periodic (repeating) control source. It LOCATOR (PROGRAMMABLE) oduces a low speed waveform (low frequency) at can be applied to various aspects of the This parameter (1 1 1) shows the same inforound to cause patterns of cyclic change. Bemation as the locator the status bar, but at a RATE: Determines the velocity of thein LFO. ERASE... (F7) the LFO can be used ause of its periodic nature, higher resolution, 1 (beat), 1 (measure), 1 (tick). Assignable values: 1 ... 200. create effects likeyou Tremolo (cyclic Here can cancel a amplitude Track or a Song. When the sequencer is not playing, you can seodulation), Vibrato (cyclic pitch modulation) or, lect this parameter and the modify each part of the Track- Cancels the selected track. DELAY: Determines the delay before entry r example, Wah-wah (applied to the filter cutlocator byLFO rotating the DIAL. of the an LFO. Entry of the is gradual. f-frequency). Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving empty Song, ready to start another recording.. Value range: 0 ... 64. PLAY/REC MODE The Song-Performances are not cancelled. parameter three Playback or Record SYNC: When This set to ON, the offers LFO is Synchroto choose from: METRONOME (F8) nized for all theoptions notes played. When set to MIDI, to the MIDI theClock. Song starts at the point indicated by Activates/deactivates the metronome. the LFO is tied Linear: the locator and stops at the natural Song end. Assignable values: Off, On, MIDI. Forced stop: the Song starts at the point indiTHE TIME/TEMPO PARAMETERS PITCH S.O.1 &cated S.O.2: LFO and to the Pitch byApplies the locator stops at the specified produce a Vibrato End. effect on the selected oscilThe Time/Tempo display shows several to informalator. This parameter the modulation O PARAMETERS tion boxes and offers a number of different playLoop: determines the Song starts at the point indicated by depth of LFO on Pitch. back the locator, stops at the End, then repeats from AVE: Selects theoptions. waveform of the low frePositive and negative values indicate an opposed the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously uency oscillation. Given the low frequency of sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards until stopped with the Stop button. e oscillation, TEMPO the waveform is clearly percepti( ) or downwards respectively). e. Shown in the status bar at the top of the display, Assignable this represents the current Metronome speed values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. (Tempo) expressed in beats per second. During TOUCH the playback, the Tempo can be modified withPITCH S.O.1 & S.O.2: Links the depth of the Pitch modulation to Aftertouch pressure. the DIAL. By applying The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value aftertouch pressure to the keys, the Delay parameter is ignored and the oscillation indicate the current status of the synchronizing MIDI clock: [i] = internal (SK760/880SEstarts or [e]immediately. = external (external sequencer controlling Positive theand negative values indicate an opposed sequencer). The MIDI Clock can be programmed sense of vibration at the starting phase (upwards under EDIT MIDI/GENERAL SETTINGS. or downwards respectively). Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect.
Song mode - the Time/Tempo parameters

t Sound - LFO

34 Reference Guide

Song 63

START This parameter sets the start measure and can only be modified when the Play mode is set to LOOP. With LOOP selected, the START parameter shows the starting point of the Loop. Programmable in Song playback mode and Record mode. END This parameter sets the end measure and can only be modified when the Play mode is set to FORCED STOP or LOOP. With LOOP selected, START shows the point at which the sequence ends before looping back to the Start locator. With FORCED STOP selected, START indicates the automatic Stop point. Programmable in Song playback mode and Record mode. TIME SIGNATURE (PROGRAMMABLE WITH AN EMPTY SONG) This parameter can only be modified before recording the Song. START TEMPO (PROGRAMMABLE WHEN THE SONG IS OFF) This sets the starting tempo of a Song and can only be modified when the Song is off. The value of the setting is recorded in the Master Track, as the Start Parameter. SONG MEMORY (NOT PROGRAMMABLE) Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilobytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory, independent of the memory remaining in the System RAM.

JUKEBOX
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your choice and plays them back as a medley with a single command. Select the JUKEBOX button (F1) in the Time/ Tempo page. The display shows two columns: on the left appears a list of Songs in memory while on the right is the Jukebox list.

The negative highlight cursor shows which song is selected in the Song list. The frame on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list. Select a Song from the left part to include in the Jukebox list and press the INSERT button, (F5) or ENTER, to insert the Song in the list.

Repeat the selection procedure for other Songs and press INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list. If you want to substitute one of the names in the Jukebox list, move to the right part of the display, select the name to change, move back to the left, select another Song and press INSERT (or ENTER). Now return to the right and select a new location for the next Song. When you have compiled the list, press EX-

64 Reference Guide

The Preload function is a background loading facility which allows you to playback, by means alid for all Algorithms. of a single command, a list of Songs (or MIDI DYNAMIC RATE: Sensitivity of the Pitch Envehe Dual options activate separate Pitch EnveFiles) contained in a disk or Hard disk, without lope to key velocity variations. pes for the two waveforms of each layer (Pitch having to load all the data to memory beforehand. nvelope Os. 1 and Pitch Envelope Os. 2). With positive values, increasing the key velocity (playing harder) speeds ALL up THE the SONGS Envelope develhe tuning (pitch) of the waveforms can vary over PLAYBACK OR MIDI FILES ON A DISK opment (the completion velocity). Negative valme, thanks to Pitch Envelope which is divided 1. Insert the disk containing Songs and/or Midi ues act inversely with increased key velocity. to two parts: the Pitch Key On Envelope and the disk the drive and press PRELOAD Value range: -7 ...files +7. into 0 excludes action. YouEnvelope. can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with e Pitch Key Off (in the Edit Numbers section). STOP. If a disk is notLinks inserted the drive, the Hard ENV. AMOUNT TOUCH SENS.: the in depth DiskEnvelope will be engaged automatically. of action of the Pitch (defined in the DELETE (F4) Env. Amount setting) to variations of Aftertouch Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list. pressure. Positive settings increase the velocity of the acINSERT (F5) tion with increased aftertouch pressure. NegaInserts the selected Song into the Jukebox tive list. settings create the inverse effect. Assignable values: 7 ... +7. 0 excludes the action of RESET LIST (F6) aftertouch. TCH ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS Removes Activates all the names from the NVELOPE AMOUNT: the Pitch en- Jukebox list. Select the type ofthe file depth to include ENV. AMOUNT2. DYN. SENS.: Links of in the list uselope and sets the depth of the Pitch to apply to ing the soft button in F6the (SONG/smf). action of the Pitch Envelope (defined Env. ALL SONG (F7) value corresponds e oscillator. The maximum Amount variations of key velocity. 3.to Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or a Pitch excursion of 2all semitones. Includes the Songs contained in memory tosetting) MIDI filethe to include list and press ENPositive velocity in ofthe action the Jukebox list inEnvelope. a single step. listsettings increase egative values invert the Pitch As- An existing with increased keyTER. velocity. Negative settings will be and substituted new. gnable values: 7 ... cancelled +7. 0 excludes the action with the create the inverse effect. Assignable The selected file isvalues: added 7 to the first availathe envelope. ... +7. 0 excludes the ble action. space in the list and the destination frame EXECUTE (F8) moves one step forward. Starts the playback of the Jukebox.

Pitch Envelope box list.

ECUTE, (F8) to start the playback of the Juke-

PRELOAD

t Sound - Pitch Envelope

4. Select other files and press ENTER each time to include them in the list. IMPORTANT: If you are working from Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so will provoke the cancellation of the list.

32 Reference Guide

Song 65

5. You can fill the list in a single step using the Select All function (F7). To replace a file inserted into the list by mistake, select the name to replace, then select the file that you want to insert and press ENTER. 6. Press F8 (Play) to start the playback of the Songs in the list. After short disk scanning period, the first Song (or Midi file) on the disk starts to play. If Preload engages the Hard Disk, the first song of the first Block found containing Songs will start to play. During playback, the background loading procedure for the second song begins (the message Preloading Song appears for an instant).

THE PRELOAD FUNCTIONS

Starting with the Time/Tempo display, press PRELOAD to gain access to all the options available which you can select with the soft buttons F1F8. FLOPPY DISK (F1) Selects the floppy disk. HARD DISK (F2) Selects the Hard disk (if installed). AUTO PRELOAD (F3) When this option is selected (negative highlight), Songs are loaded into memory together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used instead and the Song may playback incorrectly. If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds will not be loaded. RESET LIST (F4) Cancels the current list and stops the playback instantly. PLAY ALL SONGS (F5) Select this option to automatically play all the Songs or Midi files contained in a disk without first loading the data into RAM memory. After pressing Preload with a disk inserted in the drive, select PLAY ALL SONGS (F5) and press PRELOAD twice. After a short scanning period, the first available Song (or MidiFile) will start to play. Playback will continue non-stop until all the Songs (or Midi files) on disk have been played. SONG/SMF (F6) Use this option to select the type of file to insert in the list. The current type being handled is shown in capital letters. If, for example, the type

During playback, press PRELOAD to open the TIME/TEMPO display where you can select a track and set it to key-play in order to play along with the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.

Playback continues non-stop until all the Songs or MIDI Files on disk, or in the engaged Hard disk Block, have been played. Press STOP only if you want to stop playback, otherwise you will cancel the Preload operation.

66 Reference Guide

ESONANCE TOUCH of file being SENSITIVITY: loaded is a Links Song,the the caption SONG FILTER CUTOFF TRACKING Midi File Player esonance to Aftertouch. will appear in capital letters while the second capValid for All Algorithms. smf will in of small letters. ositive valuestion increases theappear amount ResoThe Filter Cutoff Tracking curve allows you to vary ance applied with increased Aftertouch presSK760/880SE features a MIDI File player which the Cutoff Frequency across the keyboard, in ALL (F7) the inverse effect. ure, negative SELECT values have allows you to play MIDI Files directly from a order that it does not remain fixed for all the notes ssignable values: 7 ... +7. source (Floppy disk or Hard disk) without loadSelects all0the files shown in the left part of Sound, the of a but moves according to the note ing the files to memory. list. The = no effect. display and inserts them directly into theplayed. list can contain a maximum of 16 files. Press the SONG button to access the SONG BANKS page. LTER ENVELOPE AMOUNT : is Activates the If the SMF option selected, Select All inserts nvelope for the Filter edit and sets all MIDIin files present in the depth current directory. The action of the list Filter willenvelope. show the Song names without the .MID extension. he envelope consists of two parts: Filter Key n Envelope and the Filter Key Off Envelope. egative values invert PLAY (F8)the Filter Envelope. ssignable values: 10 +10. of the Songs contained in the Starts the... playback list. The options and parameters used to shape the LT. ENV AMOUNT DYN. SENS.: Links the Note : if the Disk or Hard Disk contains more Filterthan Cutoff Tracking (Segment, Point, Keybuttons (S.M.F. Presscurve, one of the +/ Page/Bank epth of action of the Filter envelope to changes one Block, Preload will recognise only theand first block Level), are identical to toopen those used for the PLAYER. PLAYER) the MIDI FILE key velocity. while others will be ignored. Volume Tracking curve explained on page 2. 20. ositive values enhance the depth of action of Warning:: song playback using Preload will cancel e Filter envelope all with increased key velocity, songs contained in memory, except the one curAn illustrated example of how to program a Trackegative values produce the inverse effect. Asrently playing. ing curve is on page 2. 22. gnable values: 7 0 +7. = no effect.

LT. ENV AMNT. TOUCH. SENS.: Links the epth of action of the Filter envelope to changes Aftertouch pressure. ositive values enhance the depth of action of e Filter envelope with increased Aftertouch essure, negative values produce the inverse fect. Assignable values: 7 0 +7. = no effect.

If a Floppy disk containing MIDI Files is inserted in the drive, the machine starts to scan the disk and the display shows the root directory, where MIDI files are saved. If selected, press ENTER to gain access to the MIDI files.

Select a MIDI File to listen to and press PLAY. While the Midi file is playing, you can play along with the playback.

30 Reference Guide

Song 67

The MIDI file starts to play directly from the source disk. Press STOP to stop the MIDI File playback at any point. The MIDI FILE PLAYER display offers several options. FLOPPY DISK (F1) - HARD DISK (F2) These two buttons select the source storage device where MIDI Files are located. MELODY ON/OFF (F3) Select this option to deactivate the melody line of the Song currently in playback. When the melody is deactivated, the option changes to MELODY OFF (in negative highlight) and you can play the melody yourself on the keyboard. To activate the melody line, press the MELODY OFF option (F3). BALANCE (F4) This option opens a KEYBOARD BALANCE window where you can adjust the BALANCE between the keyboard sounds and the sequencer.

SEARCH S.M.F. (F7) This button open a Search window where you can specify the name or the first few letters of a specific MIDI File, useful for searching on the Hard Disk.

Insert the characters using the keyboard and press ENTER to confirm. EXIT (F8) Press EXIT to escape from the MIDI FILE PLAYER.

Rotate the DIAL to adjust the Balance. SOUND VIEW (F5) - PLAY VIEW (F6) These two buttons toggle between the Sound View and Play View displays. The PlayView display offers the same playback parameters shown in the Song PlayView display.

68 Reference Guide

ALANCE ENVELOPE TRACKING

he Balance Tracking allows you to vary the Balnce setting across the keyboard. SK760/880SE offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record.

Recording Songs

THE QUICK REC METHOD

1. 2. (N.B. See also page 1.42 of the Quick Guide). Press SONG to open the Songs dialog window and select a free location (User). Select the QuickRec option from the New Song dialog window by pressing the soft button F2. The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick Record page activates showing a negative highlight page. A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to the new Song-Performance). Select a Style and set the accompaniment controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, MEMORY, LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE options). Program the Performance as required and save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO, FILL or ENDING. Press START/STOP to start the recording. The PLAY button activates automatically. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at will. Conclude your song (use the Ending). Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to modify the song recording in Edit Song, or to record other tracks using the normal Record method described on the next page.

QUICK REC RECORDING The Quick Rec method exploits existing Styles in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick and easy way of recording which does not involve the more advanced options common to the more he option and parameters used to shape the traditional Song Record method explained afteralance Envelope Tracking curve, (Segment, wards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent oint, Key and Level), are identical to those used way of recording backing tracks for vocalists. r the Volume Tracking curve explained on page 20. RECORD METHOD The more traditional Record method allows you n illustrated example of how to program a Trackto record one track at a time and does not exploit g curve is on page 2. 22. existing structures. For example, to record a Drum track, you must build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8. 9.

28 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 69

The Record method

1. Press the SONG button to open the Song Banks window.

2. Select an empty location (User). You are prompted to select a recording mode to create a New song.

Here you can program a number of recording parameters before starting. Refer to the section entitled Time/Tempo on page 6.12. 5. A track will already be selected for the recording shown by the record icon:

3. Press Record, (F1) to enter Song Record mode. The LED of the RECORD panel button lights up and the display shows the Sound View page in negative highlight with the first track active for recording.

If you want to record a different track, simply select it. To place all the tracks in record, press SELECT ALL TRACKS (F4). All the tracks will be activated for recording and the parameter changes to DESELECT ALL TRACKS. 6. To change sounds, select the Sound View option by pressing F5. It will not be necessary to store the changes in the Song Performance. They will be automatically stored. 7. To record with or without the Metronome press the relative soft button (F8) and set it accordingly.

Entering Song Record activates a default Song Performance. You can program your Song Performances just like the other Performances (Global and Style). Refer to the Performance chapter, page 3.1 for specific information regarding Performance programming tasks. 4. If you want to program the recording options, press the Time/Tempo button (F6).

8. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON, wait for the countdown to finish before playing (events are not recorded during this phase). 9. Start to play after the countdown. Events will be recorded in the track or tracks active for recording.

610 Reference Guide

STOP. he tracking curve represents the change in the Valid for Dual 3 and Dual 4 Algorithms only. MODE... (F1) ompletion velocity of the Amplitude Envelope Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song The back Balance Envelope corresponds to a mixer Opens the Record Mode dialog window where the beginning. D. cross the keyboarto for the two oscillators which share a single Amyou can select various recording options. plitude Envelope. 11. To add additional events to the same track(s), Replace - The new notes substitute old notes press STOP again to take the song pointer to the already present in the tracks being recorded. starting point and repeat points 8 - 10. Overdubb - New notes are merged with those already present in the tracks being recorded. Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track, select the Overdubb option. To substitute existing notes in Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction a recorded track with new ones, select the Replace without repeating a recording. Punch recording option. is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in Edit Controll./Pads). 12. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm he tools used to shape the Amplitude Envelope the track or tracks by pressing the correspondActivate the recording with PLAY. When the song acking curve, (Segment, Point, Key, Level), are ing Soft buttons. BALANCE ENVELOPE CONTROL PARAMETERS reaches a position just before the point at which entical to the Volume Tracking tools. the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. BALANCE Activates (On) or deacThe will be confirmed and the tracks ENVELOPE: ote, however, that therecording Level option determines At this point, the recording proceeds in replace tivates (Off) the Balance envelope. Assignable seq-play. e Key On or Key set Off to envelope completion vemode. When the correction is complete, release values: On, Off. city offset across the keyboard. 13. Repeat the recording procedures for other tracks. the pedal to stop the replace recording. ositive values increase the completion velocity, BALANCE ENV. AM. SENSITIVITY: Depth of the egative values slow it down. 0 to corresponds to mode. 14. Press RECORD escape Record OPTION... (F2) action of the Amplitude envelope on Balance. e standard duration of the segments proThe LED of the RECORD button will turn off The envelope is activated the Balance Enveammed in the previous pages. Assignable valMetronomeby options. and the display returns to normal. lope parameterCountdown above. es: -63 0+63. - A lead into the recording during 15. Press PLAY to listen to the playback. Positive valueswhich increase the ofcan thebe action time no depth events captured he Key On and Key Off Envelope completion of the envelope on Balance while negative valSettings: On, Off. elocity can be faster or slower across the note ues have the inverse effect. Assignable values: Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metroLets examine the Time/Tempo parameters. nge of acoustic instruments. For example, the 7 ... +7. 0 = no effect. nome tick. ass notes of a piano or an acoustic guitar sound Settings Off, 10...127. Links the r a longer period than the high notes. BALANCE ENV. DYN. SENSITIVITY: CONTROLS REC... (F3) Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume, effects changes. These events are captured in the Master Track. Tempo - To record the Tempo variations. Settings: On, Off. P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of the instrument using the Damper pedal programmed to operate as a continuous control (Volume). These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Edit Sound - Balance Envelope (Dual 3)

10. When you have finished, stop the recording with ENVELOPE MPLITUDE ENVELOPE TRACKING BALANCE TIME/TEMPO PAGE

n illustrated example of how to program a Trackg curve is on page 2. 22.

26 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 611

Effect - To record the changes of the effects assigned to the Performance and respective effect volume levels. These events are captured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off. SELECT ALL TRACKS (F4) Activates all the tracks for recording and the parameter changes name to DESELECT ALL TRACKS. This resets all the tracks in key-play or seq-play status. SOUND VIEW (F5) Recalls the SOUND VIEW page where you can see the changes that you may want to make to the Performance tracks. TIME/TEMPO (F6) Recalls the TIME/TEMPO page where you can program the record/play parameters. ERASE... (F7) Cancellation of the track or Song. Track - Cancels the selected track. Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song) and leaves an empty Song, ready to capture recorded events. The Song Performance remains intact. METRONOME (F8) Activates/deactivates the metronome. LOC The Song Locator. Indicates the current position of the Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick). The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It is not possible to select the next measure after the Song end point. For example, if the recorded Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.

PLAY/REC MODE Recording and playback options for the Song. Linear causes the Song to play or be recorded once only, from the beginning to the point at which you press STOP. Forced Stop causes the song to play or be recorded from the specified start locator to the end locator. Loop allows you to play or record in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the End point. Note: The loop requires an additional memory buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory progress bar shows an increased amount of used memory. START Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL. END End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at which the repeating song ends before looping back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the automatic Stop point. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL. TIME SIGNATURE Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified. TEMPO Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter can be modified with the DIAL in the Sound View or Time/Tempo page, or in the Master Track. Tempo changes can be carried out during the

612 Reference Guide

recording using the DIAL. The events Add Segm are : Inserts new segment immediately If theaRAM already contains a large amount of MPLITUDE KEY ON AND by KEY OFF ENVELOPES

captured in the Master Track, providedafter that the thecurrently selected segment. Amay maximum data, a dialog window appear showing the he Key On Envelope is a 10 segment curve appropriate option is active (Controls rec, of updiato 10 segments is permitted. message Memory full!, which indicates that the maximum) that represents the variation of the log window F3). recording cannot proceed further. The recording ounds volume for the entire duration that the Delinitial Segm: Cancels the current segment. is instantly interrupted. Master Track always contains the otes are held The pressed. Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified You can increase the amount of space in RAM he Amplitude Key Off Envelope is a 10 segment IMPORTANT : but not cancelled. by deactivating the Undo function. urve (maximum) that represents the variation of The Key On Envelope must have at least one e sound after the notes have been released. segment, (the Attack phase), which cannot QUANTIZE RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY his envelope phase is often called Release. be cancelled. timing errors during the rexamples of a An Keyauto-corrector On and a Keyof Off Amplitude If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded cording phase. The selection values are normal, nvelope are shown below. Songs and used up all the (envememory dedicated to Loop Segm: Loops the current segment triplets or swing. the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of lope repetition), provided that the Envelope FinOOM (F7) clearing Song memory and making ish parameter in the Envelope control page is set room for other Songs is to use Restore Songs Value Quantization sing the ZOOM option, you can enlarge the field to OFF. When it reaches thethe terminal point, it operation. vision of the1/4 envelope up to 4 times at a seNaturally, you must to save the Songs loops back to the beginning. The remember cycle repeats cted Point. 1/8 you dont want toLoop lose point to disk before procontinually untilthat key release. The initial with[ the restore procedure. essing the soft button repeatedly selects the is represented ceeding by an arrow ] 1/12 triplet oom options in cyclic order (1, 2, 3, 4, 0). Zoom 1. loop, Press GENERAL in the EDIT To eliminate the select the segment and section to gain 1/16 corresponds to actual size. select Del Segm..access EDIT GENERAL. 1/24 triplet 2. Press RESTORE SONGS, (F6) to cancel all GMENT (F6) 1/32 the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) SEGMENT, TIME, LEVEL in RAM. he SEGMENT 1/48 option, common triplet to both Key On The Envelope Key On and Key Off Envelopes nd Key Off Balance allows you to You are with a request to recon1/64 Envelopes, (1/64) can be defined using the 3 prompted display parameters, vide the Envelope into several different segfirm your choice. Segment, Time and Level. 1/96 (1/64 triplet) ents to create some interesting Key On and Key 3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to canfree feature is also no quantization ff effects. A Loop available. cel. Segment: Allows you to select the segments with 1/8 B...F* . (swing) the Dial. The one With selected corresponds to are the cancelled from ENTER, the Songs 1/16 B...F* . (swing) flashing terminal point. memory. free no quantization With ESCAPE, the song data are retained. Time: Determines the duration of the Segment. * B F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel. EDITING YOUR SONGS The Edit Song functions allow you to modify the recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in event edit environments (Microscope and Master Track).

MEMORY PROGRESS BAR A bar graph which monitors the amount of memory being used up by the song as it is being recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical value and is independent of the total amount of t Sound - Ampl. Envelope mostrando segmento 4 impostato memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limn un Loop. In pratica, il Volume inizia a 0, ascende alla ited 1 to(fase 400 ma vetta di segmento dikb. attacco), scende al

gmento 2, ascende alla vetta di segmento 3, scende di ovo a segmento 4 poi ritorna alla vetta di segmento 3 e ete di continuo fino al rilascio di tasto.

Edit Sound - Amp. Key Off Envelope

24 Reference Guide

Recording a Song 613

Edit Song
After recording a Song using either the RECORD method or the QUICK REC method, it can be modified using the functions of the EDIT SONG MENU.

THE EDIT SONG OPTIONS

UNDO (F2) When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled. Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO. Press the UNDO panel button to execute the desired Undo operation.

ENTERING EDIT SONG

Select the Song you wish to modify. Press the ST/SONG button (in the Edit/Numbers section) to gain access to the EDIT SONG parameters.

You will be prompted with a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

Entering this section the first time opens the main menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions, the last page selected is recalled. THE EDIT SONG MENU The Edit Song menu contains 10 Song Editing functions: Erase, Move, Copy, Quantize, Insert Measure, Delete Measure, Velocity, Transpose, Microscope, Master Track. Three options are also available: Undo, Edit Score and Song name. ESCAPE FROM EDIT SONG To escape from EDIT SONG press ESCAPE (once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit page, press the EDIT button. To pass to another edit environment, use the +/ PAGE buttons ( ).

If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:

Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled. EDIT SCORE (F6) Opens the Score Edit function. Turn to page 6.33 Score and Edit Score for explanations regarding this function.

614 Reference Guide

SONG NAME (F8) ENVELOPE ROGRAMMING A TRACKING

EDIT PROCEDURE
1. parameter Press ST./SONG todown enter(Edit 3. Select the KEY with the ) Song. The main the menu appears. cursor arrow and rotate DIAL to set the 2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using required value.

the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad. 3. Press ENTER to enter the editor. The characters are inserted using the method described in the paragraph entitled, Alphanumeric 4. Select the desired option with the soft butEntry on page 1.4 of the Quick Guide. You can tons. move the cursor with the Soft buttons or the DIAL 5. Select the parameters with the cursor butand insert the characters with the keys of the keytons and modify their value with the DIAL or board. the numeric (with the KEYPAD LED Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify thekeypad Key parameter Name - Name of the Song which appears in the on). t Sound - Volume Tracking: add 3 segments Select SK760/880SE file selector. This name 4. does not the LEVEL parameter with the down 6. Confirm the operation with ENTER. disk is read by a computer. Rotate the appear DIAL to when select the Point that you ( ) cursor arrow and rotate the DIAL to set 7. Pass to another editor with the +/ Page Maximum character length: 10. wish to modify. the required value. ( ). buttons Title - Full name of the Song. Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESAuthor - Name of the composer. CAPE and select another editor. Pub - Song Publisher.

Press F6 to open the SEGMENT selection window, select 3 or 6 segments with the down ( ) cursor arrow and press ENTER to confirm.

Modifies the name of the Song.

t Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the Point parameter

Edit Sound - Volume Tracking: modify the Level parameter

22 Reference Guide

Edit Song 615

Erase
Cancels the events from a single track or from all tracks.

SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8

Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will be cancelled. Depending on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear. Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track with the Soft buttons A...H. Master track (F4) - The Master Track records events pertaining to the general controls of the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected Performance, selected effects). Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score. Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the score (standard notation). Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the score. All tracks (F8) .

ERASE PARAMETERS
EVENT TYPE Selects the type of event to cancel (only for the tracks containing recorded events). DUPLICATE NOTE Eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same pitch start at the same position. Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend, Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off, ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31, ControlChange 64...127.

616 Reference Guide

NOTE RANGE OLUME TRACKING (F2) FROM... TO...

POINT, KEY, LEVEL

The highest and lowest limits range alid for all Algorithms. Tracking allows you of to the note The Tracking curve can be defined using the 3 to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instruetermine how the volume varies across the keydisplay parameters, Point, Key and Level. ment from the Drum track, assign the same value oard. Here you can enhance the presence of a to the from and to parameters. ound more or less across the keyboard in order For example, Point: Corresponds to one of the extreme ends cancel the snare (D2), occurs set the parameter as simulate to ato greater degree that which of a segment. Point 1 represents the lowest note range D2 to D2.can reality. For Note example, an from acoustic piano of the keyboard. The highest note of the keyach a higherAssignable sound level in the bass region, board is represented by the last Point (dependvalues: C-1 ... G9. hile the higher notes are less intensive. ing on the number of segments inserted).

FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Key: the note at the selected Point. The Determines the start and end point of the partDefines to extreme cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify points (A#0, C8) cannot be modified. the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in othLevel: The value of this parameter is a relative ers, only the measure. value which represents the change in volume with Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. respect to the actual setting of the Volume funcIt is not possible to specify a point beforetion. the start Assignable values: 0 127 or after the end of the Song. A level of 0 corresponds to the maximum setting GMENT (F6) of the Volume function and all other values are sing the SEGMENT option, you can divide the negative. acking curve into several different segments, A value of 127 corresponds to 0 volume at the order to obtain a more refined Tracking across note defined by the selected Point. e keyboard. A straight line running from point 1 to point 2 corresponds to the lowest possible resolution. An illustrated example of how to program a Tracking curve is on page 2. 22.

Segm: The Tracking curve is essential, repreenting a constant Volume offset across the keyoard. The parameter Key cannot be modified..

Segm: The Tracking curve consists of 3 segents which allow the construction of a situation fering different variations across the keyboard.

Segm: The Tracking curve is divided into many arts (maximum resolution); allowing a more comex programming of the Volume offsets across e keyboard.

20 Reference Guide

Edit Song 617

Move
Shifts events from one point of the selected track to another.

PARAMETERS
FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat and resolution (tick). Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point before the start or after the end of the Song. START LOCATOR Determines the new position of the part that is to be moved. Assignable values: any point of the song.

618 Reference Guide

epending on the waveform, values above the SCALE MODE: Selects a scale (temperament). Copy efault starting point may cause the sample to Assignable values: 0, 1, 2. art at a later point, removing some or all of its Value 0 corresponds to Equal temperament; Copies events from a single track or from all tack. Value 1 corresponds to 1/4 tone difference betracks. alues below the default value may cause the tween each note; ample to start before its normal start point, addValue 2 corresponds to a 1/16 tone difference g part or all of the samples stored at lower between each note. SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8 emory addresses. Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track from which events will bemode copied. V. START DYN MODE: Selects the in Depending on the type of track selected, the following paramhich the Wavestart parameter is linked to key eters may or may not appear. elocity. sable: not linked to key velocity. TrackWave, (F3) -or Single track. Select the track witch: either the entire the part of the the Soft buttons ave following thewith programmed Wave A...H. Start is ad above or below a certain velocity set- Track records Master trackkey (F4) - The Master ng. events pertaining to the general controls of oating: fluctuatesthe theSong Wave(Tempo, Start according to Time Signature, selected e key velocity. Performance, selected effects). Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symV. START DYN SNS: With the in Switch mode bols inserted the score. etting, the value (0127) represents the dyMusic track (F6) - Track for the notes of the amic switch. Above the dynamic switch setting, score (standard notation). e entire Wave is read while below, only the part Lyrics track (F7) - Track the Wave that follows immediately after for thethe lyrics of the ogrammed Wavescore. Start is considered. All tracks (F8) . witch assignable values: 0127

the mode is Floating, the value determines e distance from the point at which the Wave is ad at the programmed Wave Start, or towards e end of the Wave. (The Wave is always read om the Wave start setting, not before). With ositive values, the higher the key velocity, the earer the Wave is read at the Wave start setng. oating assignable values: 7+7.

18 Reference Guide

Edit Song 619

COPY PARAMETERS
COPY MODE Determines the copy mode. Merge unites the copied events to those already present at the destination. Replace substitutes the events present at the destination with those copied. Options: Merge, Replace. FROM TRACK... TO TRACK... Specifies the source and destination track of the copy. The From track... part is selected with the Soft buttons A ... H. The To track... part is modified with the DIAL. Assignable values: any track (1...32). TO SONG... Determines the destination Song for the copy. If the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command. Assignable values: any Song (1...16). NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... Determines the highest and lowest limits of the note range to copy. To copy a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value to the from and to parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter as Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start measure and end measure of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot be specified. Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a measure after the end of the Song. START LOCATOR Determines the new position of the copied part. Assignable values: any point, even after the end point of the Song. COPY TIMES Specifies the number of consecutive copies. Each copy starts exactly where the previous one ends. Assignable values: 1...998.

620 Reference Guide

HE ALGORITHMS

ayers can also be of different types - single aveform or dual waveform. Each layer is elaboAn auto-corrector ofof timing errors. Includes trited by an associated Algorithm synthesis. A Volume, Amplitude envelope, Filter and Pitch envelope for plet and swing quantize values. one waveform only. n Algorithm is the signal path of a sample to e audio outputs, through a series of processDUAL 1 g functions that you select during the course of SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2 e editing tasks. The processing functions which These the Notestages On Quantize and Note ou assign during the select various editing are Off Quantize parameters. e synthesis tools (oscillators, filters, amplitude nvelopes, etc.). Note Onthe Quantize of the Note hile you cannot change path of- Quantization an AlgoOn event. hm, you can choose from a selection of 5 difSeparate Volume, Amp Envelope, Filter and Pitch Envelope for rent Algorithms, each a- fixed sigNoterepresenting Off Quantize Quantization ofeach the Note waveform. al path, and assign a wide variety ofaprocessing Off event. After Note On quantization, a nctions to the individual of the algo- the duration DUAL 2 of Note Off stages quantization affects hms path. the notes, adapting them to the quantization grid.representations illustrate he following graphical e signal path of the Algorithms.

Quantize

SINGLE

As above but the two filters are in series and common to both waveforms.

DUAL 3

Volume and Amp. Envelopes are common while Filters are separater for each waveform.

DUAL 4

Everything is common to both waveforms.

16 Reference Guide

Edit Song 621

QUANTIZE PARAMETERS
NOTE ON QUANTIZATION Determines the Note On quantize values.
Value 1/4 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32 1/48 1/64 1/96 free 1/8 B...F* 1/16 B...F* free triplet (1/64) (1/64 triplet) no quantization (swing) (swing) no quantization triplet triplet Quantization

NOTE OFF QUANTIZATION Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same as Note On. NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... Determines the highest and lowest note range to quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part that requires quantizing. Only measures can be selected. Assignable values: within the limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point after the end of the Song.

* B F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.

622 Reference Guide

The configuration of the Editors changes accordape Edit Sound by pressing the SYNTH button to the Algorithm selected, but the basic funcInserts a specified number of measures. ing The part ESCAPE. The Sound remains in edit and the tions remain the same. of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward elected track of the current Performance plays the same number of bars as those inserted. e Sound in its modified status. Given that the Time Signature of the Waveform inserted Selects the Wave sample (the funo return to the measures sound in edit press SYNTH again. can differ to the Time Signature of the damental waveform). you attempt to select Song, Style, PerformSong, theaInsert Measures parameter permits the Volume Volume of the Sound. Some situance or Sound creation while the sound is with still in edit, the of a Song multiple Time Signatures. tions also include a Balance editor. splay will show the following message:

Insert measures hanks to multitasking, you can temporarily es-

MPORARY ESCAPE FROM EDIT SOUND

THE EDIT SOUND MAIN MENU

PARAMETERS

Amplitude envelope

MEASURES TO INSERT Filter AsSpecifies the number of measures to insert. signable values: 1...999. ess either ENTER or ESCAPE to close the winow, press SYNTH to return to the Edit, then TIME SIGNATURE ess EXIT or SAVE to escape permanently. Determines the Time Signature of the measures to insert.

Varies the sounds volume over time. Can be defined by Key On and Key Off Envelopes, a Tracking curve and some situations include an Env. Balance editor. Modifies the Sounds timbre, attenuating or enhancing certain frequenaas in an bequalizer. Can cies, such be defined by Key On and Key Off Filter Envelopes, Filter CutOff tracking and Filter Envelope tracking curves.

Pitch envelope Variation of the Sounds Pitch over time. Can be defined by Key On and INSERT FROMpermanently, LOCATOR o escape EDIT SOUND use the Key Off Pitch envelopes and a TrackXIT option, (F6), in the main Edit Sound menu.the new measSpecifies the measure at which ing curve. Low Frequency Oscillator to provide 1 2 3 4 5 6 Modulation. Generates varia- (3) (1) (2) (a) cyclic(b) (4) tions in the amplitude or in the cutoff frequency of the filters. Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at Position the Sound the measure 3. of Measure 3 and allwithin successive measures are moved forward. Stereophonic panorama. It is possible to program the Key On and Key Off Pan envelope and the Tracking curve.

RMANENT ESCAPE WITHOUT SAVING

ures will be inserted. n Are you sure dialog appears requesting conLFO mation of the Exit command. Further Assignable values: from the confirst measure of the mation of the Exit command with Enter escapes Song, to the first measure after the end measure DIT SOUND permanently cancels all modiof the Song and (coda insertion). ations made to the Sound prior to escaping the Pan dit. o escape permanently without losing the modications, use the SAVE option (F8) explained nder the section entitled Storing Sounds toards the end of this chapter.

14 Reference Guide

Edit Song 623

Delete measures
Cancels a specified number of measures. The measures directly after the point of cancellation shift towards the beginning of the Song and join with the measures preceding the cancellation point.
Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those after the deletion point, use the Erase events function.

PARAMETERS
MEASURES TO DELETE Specifies the number of measures to delete. Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song. For example, if the Song is 50 measures long, the maximum value that can be assigned is 50. DELETE FROM LOCATOR This parameter indicates the first measure of those to be deleted. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. The parameter is linked to the previous one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the Song are less than those shown in Measures.

(1)

(2)

(5)

(6)

Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled. All the measures after the delete point shift towards the beginning of the song.

624 Reference Guide

Press ENTER to save the new file to the seVelocity lected location.

SAVE THE MODIFICATIONS TO A PERFORMANCE

1. Press F8 (Store...). The Store dialog The new Drumkit/SoundPatch is now This availawindow appears: Modifies the key Velocity. parameter repreble as a RAM-Sound. sents the speed with which a note is played, or As any new the new the Drumkit/ itsRAM-Sound, intensity. Generally, greater the velocity SoundPatch will remain in memory after powthe higher the volume. Velocity also affects the er down. To conserve it and safeguard it brighter with filter of many sounds, rendering them against future cancellation, increased velocity.save it to disk using the Save Single Sound, Save All Sound 2. Select the Performance option with the curor Save All procedures. sor button and press ENTER to confirm.

PARAMETERS

The Drumkit store dialog window opens:

VELOCITY MODE Provides two velocity modes to choose from which affect the way the Change Velocity function operates.

FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Normal - The value indicated in Velocity Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond change is added to or subtracted 3. from the the end of the Song. Select the Performance or Style-Performance key Velocity values. option with the / cursor arrows. Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the 4. Rotate value specified in the Change Velocity pa- the DIAL to select the Performance rameter. or Style Performance Group to store to.

5. Move down to the Performance option with CHANGE VELOCITY the cursor button and select the PerformSpecifies the amount by which the velocity valance to save to with the DIAL. ues can be changed. This depends on the option selected in Velocity Mode. 6. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.

12 Reference Guide

Edit Song 625

Transpose
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones. Also available are options to transpose the Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song. This allows you to see the score in the correctly transposed status after a transpose operation. TRACK (F6) Transposition of a Song track by semitones. CHORDS TRK (F7) Transposition of the Chords track of the Score by semitones. MUSIC TRK (F8) Transposition of the Music track of the Score by semitones.

TRANSPOSE VALUE Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones). NOTE RANGE FROM... TO... Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes to be affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to Note range from D2 to D2. Assignable values: C-1 ... G9. FROM LOCATOR... TO LOCATOR... Determines the start and end point of the part to be affected. It is possible to specify Measure, Beat and tick. Assignable values: within the actual limits of the Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond the end of the Song.

626 Reference Guide

HE SOUND PATCH OPTIONS Microscope

EXPAND... (F3)

Event List

track in edit

Extends the programmed parameters of the note in edit to a specified keyboard zone. ATCH NOTE... (F1) The Microscope allows you to modify every sinelects the note toevent placerecorded in edit by it on The Event 1. Select gle inplaying the tracks. List the note whose parameters require e keyboard. at the centre of the display shows all the events copying. recorded. Press F1 (Catch note...).

2. Press F3 (Expand...).

The following message appears.

ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE

The Expand dialog window opens:

1. Select the track whose events you wish to see in the Event List. 2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the measure Value 1 events. The selected notes are played autobeat Value 2 matically. Play the note to place in edit. resolution 3. selected,Value rotate 3 3. Select the parameter to modify using theWith cur- the From parameter The dialog window and the DIAL, or play a note to specify the low/ the . Edit note sor closes buttons event type Gate parameter is modified. (Status) est note of the required keyboard zone. 4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.

OPY TO LAYER... (F2)

4. Pass to the To parameter with the cursor button . Rotate the DIAL, or play a note to opies an entire Layer to the other. specify EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN BE the highest note of the required keySelect the Layer to copy with the soft butboard zone. SHOW... (F2) CHANGED tons A and B.
The Status column shows the type of event. One or more parameters can modified for each Press F2 (Copy to Layer...). Yoube are event. prompted to reconfirm the operation. Refer to the events table on the following page for an explanation of each event.

Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to select the events that will be displayed in the Event List. Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.

5. Press ENTER to confirm the Expand command, or ESCAPE to cancel. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
WARNING - The copy will cancel the programmed data in the destination Layer.

Confirming extends the programmed parameters of the original note to the specified keyboard zone.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.

10 Reference Guide

Edit Song 627

EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS

STATUS Note VALUE 1 Note name [C1 G9] VALUE 2 Key On Velocity [1 127] VALUE 3 Key Off Velocity [1 127] GATE Note Length expressed as the Sequencer resolution (q=192) [0 63323]

Program Change

Program change message. The PC contained in the tracks and shown in the Microscope has priority over the PC recorded in the Performance [1-128] Type of Control Change (or MIDI controller). Example: CC00 = BankSelect MSB, CC32 = BankSelect LSB, CC01 = Modulation, CC07 = Volume [1 128] Value of LSB (Least Significant Byte). [0= Off, 1127 = On]

Bank Select MSB message. To select the SKSE banks, use numbers 1 16 [1 128]

Bank Select LSB message. Not necessary to select the SKSE sounds [1 128]

Control Change

Control Change Value

Pitch Bend

Value of MSB (Most Significant Byte). Effective value of bending. [063 = down 64 = neutral 65127 = up]

Mono Touch Poly Touch

Channel Aftertouch intensity [0 127] Note to which Aftertouch is applied. [C1 G9] Note Aftertouch intensity. [0 127]

628 Reference Guide

DIT SOUND PATCH INS: (X) (F3)

SELECTING/MUTING THE(F6) DYNAMIC LAYER DELETE

Drumkits Patches have two dynamic Inserts the event specified in the INS. TYPE and Sound Cancels the selected event. Edit Performance S Patch, you can program function at the current cursor position. Layers. To posi- Normally, Sound Patches exploit both set of Performance parameters exclusive to Layers (1 & 2) while Drumkits limit themselves to tion the inserted event precisely, modify its locator ese type of sounds. 1. The CATCH soft buttons A and B select and accordingly (the parameters to the left ofLayer the StaLOCATOR (F7) mute the Layers. In Switch sounds, this allows tus). Selects the event currently playing (when the you to work on a Layer without hearing the sound The events are inserted with the following deSong is in playback mode), or the event immedion the other layer. Once you enter into Edit fault parameter values: ately after the current Song position. Sound Patch to select the Layers, it is not possible to select the tracks of the current PerformStatus 1V 2V 3V Gate ance.
Note: P. Ch Contr. C4 1 1 64 1 0 64 1 ---128

GO TO LOC... (F8)

Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the specified locator (measure). The number can be specified with the DIAL.

ny Drum Sound or Drum 0 Kit that you P.Bend 64 assign ---- to the modified track will inherit the ---modifications M.Tch 0 pplied. P.Tch C4 0 ---though structurally identical, Drumkits and Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm. ound Patches have the following difference: inserting the desired event, In a DrumkitAfter , a percussive instrument is as- modify its parameters accordingly. gned to each note of the keyboard. This allows Drumkit to be controlled across a single MIDI hannel. INS TYPE... (F4) In a Sound Patch, two different sounds are a threshold dialog window where eparated by aRecalls dynamic in order thatyou can select the type event to insert with the aying harder recalls theof sound at the highermanually dyIns(x) function. amic level. Try playing, for example, the sound DYN ORCH (48-3); play softly first, then harder nd listen to the change in timbre. These Sound e also called Switch sounds. Dynamic Layer options to select and mute the layers. Press the ound Patches, therefore, allow you to vary the same soft button repeatedly to toggle between L and M. mbre of a Sound by varying the keystrike veloc.
Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.

8 Reference Guide

Edit Song 629

Master Track
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes, initial Time Signature and the Score Key. The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List at the center of the display.

Initial parameters

Event List

bar

ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE 1. Use the cursor buttons / the events.

beat

value event type (Status)

to scroll through

resolution

2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / . 3. Use the DIAL.

INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG

The events that define the Song at the start point can be modified but not deleted. To access and modify the events press F1 (Start param).

Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact that commercially available MIDI files contain initializing events at the start of each track

PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each track, the sound, volume and pan settings are selected and controlled by the events contained in the tracks and not by the initial Performance. Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.

VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function. KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct accidentals shown in the initial key signature by setting the Key parameter to F#. TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on Sound View or Time/Tempo pages.

630 Reference Guide

Band-pass STATUS - Allows the entireVALUE band to pass. es, subtracting them from or adding them to the PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS Modifies theTEMPO phase of the Sound and is useormal decay of the Sound. Metronomic Tempo. If the The Status column shows the type of event. ful when two oscillators that read the same Tempo Rec option is enabled ssignable values: (maximum rate) can ... 0be (unOne -63 or more parameters modified for each during the recording, all tempo Wave are used. hanged) ... +63 (minimum rate). event. The table shown opposite lists the events variations are recorded. the frequenand parameters which can be modified. Parametric boost - Enhances [20 250] cies around the cutoff frequency, rendering a ELEASE: This parameter is used to adjust the PERFORMANCE Change of end. Performance sound brighter and stronger at the higher mount of time a sound continues to play after [1 8] e key has been released. This release START PARAMETERS (F1) time Parametric cut - Attenuates the frequencies VOLUME Volume variation via MIDI creases as the parameter value decreases around the cutoff frequency. (through Higher values Enters the edit of the Songs start parameters. the Common channel) egative). Maximum release times can last for renders the sound weaker at the high end. or by means of the Volume Press F1 again to return to the edit of the sucore than twenty thirty seconds after a key has Pedal. Does not record Assignable values: -63 (maximum decrease of cessive parameters. een released. Volume ... changes the cutoff frequency) ... 0 (unchanged) +63 made with the M.VOL slider. he modifications are expressed as relative val(maximum increase of the cutoff frequency). [0 127] es, subtracting them from or adding them to the SHOW... (F2) EFF. Selection of esa DSP device. ormal release of the Sound. RESONANCE: ThisDEVICE parameter, the second Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to SEL. Corresponds to CC18. ssignable values: -63 (maximum rate) ... 0 (unsential element of filter control, introduces comselect the events that will be displayed by the EFF. TYPE Type of effect assigned to the hanged) ... +63 (minimum plex harmonic overtones which are added to the Event List. rate). selected DSP. final sound. Sometimes these overtones can onlyCorresponds to Set the events that you want to mask to OFF. CC48. The tables of the be produced when the Filter Cut-Off setting is low LTER CUTOFF: In its simplest form, this is assignable effects are in the enough. Try setting the Resonance parameter e sounds most important tone control. Cut-Off Appendix. fairly high and then modifying the Cut-Off paramone half of the main filter controls, (the other EFF. DEVICE General Effect Volume of the eter while you play. The distinctive sound of a eing Resonance). Usually these two are used VOLUME effect type assigned to the resonating filter is one of the key elements in Sends combination for powerful manipulation of a DSP. The Effect many classic synthesizer sounds. (amount of effect applied) for ounds tonal character. As the parameter value decreased (negative) the filter closes alloweach track regulated in the Assignable values: -63 (least intensity) ... 0 is (unMicroscope by means of the g less of the original sound to pass through. changed) ... +63 (highest intensity). Control Change messages his generally has the effect of making the sound CC91 & CC93. armer and less fizzy. Increasing the paramNote: The higher values of resonance causes the er value (positive) opens the filter, increasing filter to enter into auto-oscillation. If used wisely, e brilliance of the sound. The action of the filter the auto-oscillation can create very suggestive synthetic sounds, but can also increase the output level aries according to the type of filter contained in excessively, causing disturbing distortion. e Sound.

INS: (X) (F3)

specified event type at the cursor poLFO RATE: This parameter can be used to adLow-pass Inserts - Cutsthe into the higher frequensition. To position the inserted event precisely, just the speed of the vibrato or modulation in a cies. As a result, if you use Sounds with a modify its locator (the parameters to the left ofIt is designed to be used in conjunction sound. low harmonic content, the notes at the highthecut. Status). with the LFO DEPTH parameter. er end will be This parameter regulates the brilliance of the Sound. Lowering the Assignable values: -63 (minimum rate) ... 0 (uncutoff frequency produces a mellow sound changed) ... +63 (maximum rate). while an increase produces a bright sound. High-pass - Cuts into the lower frequencies, LFO DEPTH: This parameter is used to set the making the sound brighter. The higher the valamount of vibrato or modulation applied to a ue, the lighter the sound. sound. If the current sound includes some type of modulation or vibrato, you can use this param

6 Reference Guide

Edit Song 631

The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status Tempo Performance Volume Eff. Dv. Sel Eff. Type Eff. Vol RotaryA RotaryB Scale Key Sign Value 120 1 64 0 0 0 Slw/Fst Slw/Fst 1 C

INS TYPE... (F4)

Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the Ins(x) function.

Press the into view.

cursor arrow to bring other events

After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.

Select the type of event and press ENTER.

DELETE (F6)
Cancels the selected event.

CATCH LOCATOR (F7)

Selects the event currently playing (when the Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.

GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the selected measure. The number can be specified with the DIAL.

Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.

632 Reference Guide

Edit PerfScore Sound/Sound Patch & Edit Score

Score Controls

he term Sound to TRACK all the SK760/880SE In the Score page, press F8 to open the Score THErefers SCORE ounds that are not Drumkits, nor contain a dyControl dialog window. The Score track is a ghost track that is added amic switch. Sound Patch is a generic term to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the sed to describe a Drumkit or a Sound containinsertion and viewing of notes (Music), words g a dynamic switch. (Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords). Edit Performance Sound and Edit Sound The Score displays a melody line and not chords. atch are both edit facilities which permit the A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes pid modification of a Sound or a Sound Patch are extracted and a melody line is generated. If you enter the edit with a track containing a y means of macro edit parameters. ROM Sound Patch, you will gain access to he modifications are associated to the tracks of THE SCORE BUTTON the Edit Sound Patch parameters. e current Performance, not to the Sound or SCORE to view the notes, ound Patch. Press This means that any Sound youlyrics and chord symbols onofthe display and/or ssign to the edited track a Performance willon an external monitor. herit the same modifications. If the same ound/Sound Patch is recalled by a different track Performance, it will not play with the same odifications. Modified Performance Sounds are entified by the symbol . Performances and Style-Performances, the 3. Modify the parameters according to your rerumkit/Sound Patch is conserved in the accomquirements. animent tracks. When you change Style or When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ES4. Press EDITCAPE or ESCAPE to exit the editor. erformance and cause a change in the accomto cancel. Press F8 (Score controls...) to select the viewaniment tracks, the Drumkit/Sound Patch also 5. If you want to store the Performance containing options and the video standard. hanges. Performances which contain a modiing the modified Sound/S.Patch parameters WhenPatch a Song containing Score ed Drumkit/Sound are identifiedaby the is in playback, for future use, save the DISPLAYED modifications by PARTS OF THE SCORE an indicator ( ) monitors the current position pressing STORE PERF then ENTER. ymbol . Select the parts of the Score to display with the of the score. If you dontSoft want to save Performance, buttons F3the F8. simply select adifferent and all your modAll Notes, one lyrics, chord symbols. ifications will be lost. HE GENERAL SOUND/S.PATCH EDIT PROCEDURE: Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display, with characters of various dimensions. Select the Performance track containing the Sound you wish to modify. Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes. This option refreshes the display very quickly Press the SOUND button (in the EDIT/NUMwhich can be useful for guitarists and bassists. BER section) to enter the MENU. To view on an external monitor, the SK760/880SE Video RGB output must be connected to the external monitor or domestic TV by means of the If you enterspecial the editcable with a track containing a supplied with the instrument. ROM Sound, you will gain accessin toEdit the prinThe Score is created Song. cipal Edit Performance Sound parameters.

4 Reference Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 33

VIDEO CONTROLS
Viewing options for an external monitor. ECHO LCD ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is shown on the SK760/880SE display. OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts (music, lyrics, chords). Options: On, Off. VIEW MODE Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only. Options: 116. VIDEO MODE RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals. CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this option is recommended. Options: RGB, CV. Y SHIFT Controls the vertical alignment. SCORE SPLIT ON: the notes are displayed on a staff. OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef are shown with the symbol (bass 8ve). CHORDS ON LYRICS If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.

SPECIAL SYMBOLS
At times, the music score will show special symbols. The octave lower symbol. The displayed note or notes are in reality one octave lower. The note too high symbol. The note at the position corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to appear in the staff. The note too low symbol. The note at the position corresponding to the displayed symbol is too low to appear in the staff. This symbol rarely appears with a standard music staff (Score split option in the Score controls window set to ON).

634 Reference Guide

Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI Text event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI HOW TO recalled ENTER EDIT SCORE dividual Sounds are using the buttons If the Display Hold (D.HOLD) function on files. Chord symbols can beis inserted into a new the SOUND 1. GROUPS section. The sounds (LED on), the SOUND GROUPS selection Press SONG and select a Song. Song using the procedure explained on the next called are assigned to the selected track of the window will remain active, allowing you to 2. Press the ST.SONG button to open the main page. urrent Performance. selected track is shown select another sound either from the same EditASong menu. 1. Press F5 (Chords) to take the cursor to ghlighted on the display. Group, or from another Group. To do this, 3. Press EDIT SCORE (F6) to enter the Score the chord line (above the staff). simply select a different SOUND GROUP Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons to page. button to open the corresponding selection open a Sound Group selection window window. showing 8 Sounds to choose from. To see your selection, press ESCAPE to close the current selection window and return to the Performance display without turning D. HOLD off. If D. HOLD is off (LED off), every time you select a Sound fromthe thesoft SOUND 2. Press buttonGROUP G (Go to loc...) to go selection, the display will return to the If the Song does not contain a score, press to a specific measure: Performance display. GET SCORE (F4) to create one (this proce-

Selecting Edit Sounds Score

INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS

Scroll through the Banks with the +/ Page/ Bank buttons [ TO EXIT ]. EDIT SCORE HOW

dure is explained afterwards).

Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft button.

You can also select Sounds directly by entering a number on the Number keypad (with the thequickest measure withto the DIAL then press KEYPAD this is the way go The currentPress Bank number is once shown the top ESCAPE toin return to the main Edit LED on); Specify ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE directly to the sound you need (see page 1.16 of to cancel. right hand corner of the selection window. Song menu, twice to return to main Edit menu thepage. Quick Guide details ofinsertion this method). 3.for Move the point to the previous or and a third time returnyoull to thesee Sound View As you scroll through the to Banks, next note using soft buttons D (Next Another way of selecting Sounds is the by recalling that most of them will contain only one or two event) E (Previous event). Performances (Real or Styleand Performances). PerSounds to choose from, others will be empformances offer4. theEach possibility selecting Sound into 1/16ths. INSERTING NOTES ty. Empty locations are shown by a string of note of is ideally subdivided combinations which you can to program asatpredashes (------). These a locations represent In addition a symbol the beginning of a To create Score, notes are the withdrawn from a ferred. Refer to the next chapter, Performances, locations where you can store your edited note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in Song track. for all relevant information. sounds or disk-based sounds. one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to 1. Press F4 (Get Score): open the symbol insertion zone:

MOVING BETWEEN FAMILIES

Sometimes you might want directly from1/16th Insertion ofto thejump symbol at the second one sound family to another when looking for a particular sound. This is best done with DISPLAY 2. Use the DIAL to select the track to transcribe. Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th HOLD on (LED on). 3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.Pressing any SOUND GROUP button will open of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th the correspondingInsertion SOUND GROUP window, showing the same The Bank as the shown previous number onselecthe left of the insertion. tion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16)

2 Reference Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 35

and F8 (>>1/16). To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). 5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The chord symbol appears, in the following form: CMaj, Dmin, E7th... 6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a pedal note, press the function button F (Extension) and play the alternative chord. The bass extension will appear in the following form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G... Press the soft buttons D (Next event or E (Previous event) to pass to another event. 7. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord. 8. You can modify a chord by transforming it, for example, from a major to minor chord to seventh. Press F7 (Root) repeatedly to alternate between the bass of the chord (the root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
The entire symbol is selected. Press F7 (Root).

INSERTING LYRICS
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files. Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the following manner: 1. Press the Lyrics button (F6) to take the cursor to the lyrics line (below the staff).

2. Press soft button G (Go to loc...) to go to a specific measure (bar):

The root note is selected. Press F7 (Root).

The chord abbreviation is selected. Press F7 (Root).

Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm or ESCAPE to cancel. 3. Move the insertion point to the previous note or the next note with the soft buttons D (Next event) and E (Previous event). 4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths. In addition to syllables at the beginning of the note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to open the syllable insertion zone.
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th

The entire symbol is selected again. Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th

Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).

Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th

The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To move the insertion point to one of the other 1/16ths, use the soft buttons H (<<1/16) and F8 (>>1/16).

636 Reference Guide

To escape and return to the note, press the soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note press the soft button D (Next event). At this point, Next event and previous event pass from 16th to 16th instead of from note to note. 5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see the paragraph entitled Alphanumeric Entry on page 1.10 of the Quick Guide). Write the required syllable using the keys of the keyboard. 6. Press soft button F (End phrase) to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the end phrase symbol I. Do not write lines consisting of more than 20 characters. This is to avoid the incorrect syllabisation of words when you are viewing lyrics in large type. For example, the word Ballgame may syllabize to Bal-lgame, or Ballg-ame or other, instead of Ball-game. 7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially. To replace one character with another, remain in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a vertical line), press note D#2 (INS/OVER) to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2 (INS/OVER); the cursor will take the form of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the DIAL, then insert the new character. Press D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.

THE EDIT SCORE PAGE

CHORDS (F5) Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the staff). LYRICS (F6) Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff). NEXT EVENT (D) Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause). PREV. EVENT (E) Previous event. Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause). GO TO LOC... (G) Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the dialog window:

Specify the measure with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

>> 1/16 (F8) Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/ 16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc.. The edit takes place in an active zone:

To escape and return to the normal edit of the note, press soft button E (Previous event). To escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D (Next event).

eference Guide

Score/Edit Score 6 37

<< 1/16 (H) See above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixteenth GET SCORE... (F4) Creates a score from the selected track from which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open the dialog window:

or by playing a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point.

END PHRASE (F)

This command inserts an End phrase symbol (I) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes Lyrics 1 Lyrics 4, when the verses that end with the End phrase symbol are reached, the next verse starts on a new line. We recommend that you write lines using not more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying incorrectly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used. This symbol can be cancelled as any other character by selecting the syllable with D (Next event) or E (Previous event). Select the symbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note F2 (DELETE).

Specify the track with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

If the track contains chords, the analyser withdraws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate notes not related to the melody. A score is obtained with excellent results from a track containing a melody line only. EXTENSION (F) This command allows you to add an alternative bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and press soft button F, then play a complete chord which contains the alternative bass root required to insert. You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or play a different chord. Play the chords below the Split Point. ROOT (F7) This command allows you to modify the root note of a chord and its related abbreviation separately. Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire chord symbol.

You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,

638 Reference Guide

Vocal Processor
The Vocal Processor function allows solo vocalists to add vocal harmonies to their Performance. Up to 4 extra melody lines can be added to any kind of sound source (voice, guitar, synth, etc.). Your SK760/880SE is fitted with the Audio Vocal Processor card which provides effect processing and vocal harmonizing features. THE VOCAL PROCESSOR FEATURES 1. Add vocal harmonies to your voice according to various Performance configurations which enrich the vocal backings automatically. 2. Implements controlling functions assignable to the Pedals and specific MIDI Controllers to control the Vocal Processor via MIDI. 3. Under Edit General, the Vocal Processor implements an Equalizer (the Mic/Line editor) which affects the Microphone signal only. 4. The rear-panel MIC/LINE INPUT 1 is predisposed to accept a Microphone signal in order to be processed by the Vocal Processor function. The Vocal Processor function is found under EDIT EFFECTS, editor N.2, VOCAL PROC. Press ENTER to gain access to the Vocal Processor menu.

CONNECTIONS
To work with the Vocal Processor, the minimum amount of equipment you will need is: A low impedance microphone with a standard jack connector on the output end of the cable. Other equipment youll be using which SK760/880SE already has (optional) is one of the switch pedals. Switch Pedal: Assign an optional pedal one of the Pedal functions to control the Vocal Processor (Vocal On/Off, Vocal Mute, Mode recall, etc.). Microphone: connect the Microphone to the MIC/ LINE 1 jack. You can regulate the microphones sensitivity (Gain) with the small knob 1. In Edit General, Mic/Line editor, you will find the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/Off options and an Equalizer which affects the microphone input signal only.

48 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 71

ACTIVATE THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

The Vocal Processor operates only if both the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal Processor On/Off options in Edit General are enabled. These are enabled by default, but should they have been disabled, heres how to activate the functions. Press the GENERAL under the Edit/Numbers selection, select the Mic/Line function and, if necessary, enable the Mic/Line On/Off and Vocal On/ Off options with the corresponding Soft buttons.

WORKING WITH THE VOCAL PROCESSOR

Select the Vocal Processor editor from the main Edit Effects menu and press ENTER to gain access to the relative functions. It is also possible to enter the editor directly using the Page scroll buttons ( ). The parameter configuration displayed depends on the mode selected. Three operating modes are available: Chord / Vocoder / Unison.

CHORD (F5)
N.B. THIS MODE IS OPERATIVE IN STYLE MODE ONLY CHORD mode recognizes the chords you play and determines the most appropriate harmony intervals for your singing. This mode produces up to four voices according to the recognized chord and chord type (Close or Smart - see Vocal Processor Edit). The harmonic voices are generated within the octaves above and below the input note with two different intervals: one interval near the input note (Close) and another further away (Extreme). The interval extensions vary according to the chord played .

Press ESCAPE or EDIT to exit Edit General and return to the Edit Effects section. The instrument will memorize the status of the selected parameters even after power down.

Edit Effect- Main Menu

Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option

72 Vocal Processor

The voices can be selected from the six availPress ENTER tofour confirm the command and 3 able: Selector. open the File Voice 1 : Extreme Lower octave The display shows the directories of the RAM Voice 2 :disk, Close octave memory and the floppy or Lower Hard Disk. Voice 3 : Extreme Upper octave In the example, the instruments RAM direc: Close Upper octave tory is shown Voice with 24 songs (with generic names). Main : doubles the input voice Bass : doubles the input If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the di- voice one octave down. rectory will be empty. If the disk is used, one or more Block be present. If you You files can may regulate the Volume and Pan paramare working on the Hard single Disk, several Block eters of each voice (F1/F2). files will be You shown. can mute or activate the various voices with

VOCODER (F6)
VOCODER mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. The VOCODER mode operates by referring to the notes played in real time on the keyboard, or reproduced by the sequencer, and the Vocal Processor responds by shifting the pitch of your voice exactly to the notes played. The Vocoder is always tied to one of the tracks (see Vocal Processor - Edit). You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. In VOCODER mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present. The assigned Vocoder track is able to receive Pitch and Modulation messages.

If necessary, select the Song that you want 4 an active using voice the shows the icon to save and its Ex: destination, directional arrows.

the function buttons A-F.

a muted voice shows the icon A selected file isHarmony shown in negative highlight. The parameter controls the general An empty destination is shown as a broken volume of the Vocal Processor: line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame. The Volume page in the same manner You can choose to select an operates existing Block as the same page in as the destination, or create aEdit new Mixer; one by in other words, you can regulate the levels selecting an empty one (broken line).with the Dial or Sliders. 5 to all The Volume and Pan controls are common Press ENTER. three operating modes. NB. Thedestination number of in voices by the If you chose an empty step produced 5 Vocal Processor is always a maximum of 4. above, youll be prompted to create a new Block. The name MAINifwill suggested au- 4 are active in Example: voices 1, 2, 3 and tomatically. order to activate the Main or Bass voice, you mustto mute one of the active Use the keyboard enter a name for thevoices. block.

Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.

A new Block directory will show the first 8 empty locations (within the new block). Up to 16 locations are available by scrolling with the cursor arrow.

Vocal Processor - Vocoder mode, Volume option

46 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 73

UNISON (F7)
UNISON mode operates both in Style mode as well as Song mode. In this mode, the Vocal Processor automatically produces the same note as the input note, doubling up to 4 Voices. Each voice is doubled with a slight detune effect above and below the input note according to the following scale. Voice 1 = +12 cents Voice 2 = + 7 cents Voice 3 = 7 cents Voice 4 = 12 cents You can regulate the Volume and Pan parameters of each single voice (F1/F2). You can mute or activate the various voices with the function buttons A-F. In UNISON mode, the Main and Bass voices are not present.

Vocal Processor - Unison mode, Volume option

EDIT (F3)
The Edit page allows you to apply a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) to the voices produced by the Vocal Processor. The modifications affect the voices globally, not individually. The parameters of the Edit page are common to all three operating modes.
ABOUT THE LFO

LFO is a periodic (repeating) control source which produces a low speed (low frequency) waveform which is applied to the voice Pitch to obtain a cyclic modulation. Because of its periodic nature, the LFO applied to the pitch creates the Vibrato effect to simulate the natural vibrations of the human voice.

Vocal Processor - Edit

74 Vocal Processor

THE EDIT PAGE PARAMETERS LAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED SONG

VOICE SET (F4)

LFO WAVE In this page, it is possible to recall up to 16 CusSong playback mode, you can play along with your recorded Song by activating one or more tracks tom configurations. Each Custom recalls a difthe waveform of the low frequency oscilot used for theSelects recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the sequencer and use ferent setting of all the Vocoder parameters (Volto play in reallation. time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not wish to hear. ume, Pan, Mute, Mode, lfo,...). The Custom setAssignable values: Off, Sinus, Triangle, Saw, tings are not programmable. he operationsSquare, can be Random, carried out before or after Sample/Hold . start, but remember, if you start after modifying the ack status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store In the You canthe usePerformance. the Custom Voice Sets as a starting xample below, the changes are carried out during playback. LFO RATE point for your configurations and, any subsequent changes to the settings can be memorized to the Determines the velocity of the LFO. Performances. Assignable values: 1 200.

Determines the depth of action of the LFO. During playback, pressvalues: the soft button Assignable 0 7. of the

Start the playback of the selected Song with LFO DEPTH PLAY or START/STOP.

track you wish to play along with as many LFO DELAY times as necessary until it is shown set for the delay before the entry of the LFO. key-playDetermines then start to play.
Entry of the LFO is gradual. If the track contains recorded notes (shown Assignable values: 0 64. with the seq.-play icon ):
PITCH FILTER

Or

2
Vocal Processor - Voice Set

press the relative soft button once to select the track; Checks the pitch of the voices. In Free mode, all pitch imperfections detected due to minor once again to mute changes inthe thetrack pitchand; of the voice rest unchanged. In to Auto mode, the imperfections are once again set Correction it to key-play. automatically corrected. The graphic example opposite illustrates how Assignable values: Free, Auto Correction. to disengage a recorded track and activate it for real time playing. CHORD TYPE different modes If the track Selects was not from usedtwo for the recording, it of harmonization according to the track chord(played. will be shown either as a muted ) Assignable Smart.. or in key-play status (values:). Close In thisand case: See also Harmony in Edit press the [relative soft button Type repeatedly toTracks/Splits]. toggle from muted to key-play and vice VOCODER TRACK versa. Selects the track exploited by the Vocoder. values: 1 the 32.playPress STOPAssignable or START/STOP to stop 3

LOCK (F8)
The LOCK function locks the current Vocal settings to protect them from subsequent Performance changes. To lock the current setting, press the function button F8 to activate the Lock. The icon is shown in negative highlight and the small lock closes.

back.

TRANSPOSE

Transposes the Vocoder track one octave above standard pitch. Assignable values: Off, Octave+.

Or
Vocal Processor - Chord mode, Volume option, Lock on

44 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 75

Additional changes
In addition to the above, the following additional modifications are implemented by the Vocal Processor:

VOCAL ON/OFF AND EQUALIZER

In Edit General, the Mic/Line editor includes an Equalizer which prompts the following window when activated: High gain Middle Freq Middle gain Low gain

PEDALS
In Edit Controllers/Pads. The following additional assignable functions are implemented for the pedals and Pads: Vocal On/Off (Pedals) Vocal Volume (Pedals Assign.) Vocal Custom 1-16 (Pedals) Vocal Mute (Pedals) Vocal Chord/Vocoder/Unison (Pedals) NB. All the parameters described above can be memorized to the Performances.

The Equalizer parameters exclusively affect the Microphone signals at input 1 of the Mic/Line interface. The Vocal On/Off option enables/disables the Vocal Processor. The Mic/Line On/Off option enables/disables the MIC/LINE interface. NB. These parameters are memorized in Edit General.

Edit Controller - Vocal Volume and Vocal On/Off assigned to the pedals

Edit General - Equalizer

76 Vocal Processor

MIDI CONTROLLERS ASSOCIATED TO THE Record aSPECIAL Song (Quick rec.) VOCAL PROCESSOR

LOADING MIDI FILES CONTAINING A VOCODER TRACK

To control Vocal Processor via MIDI, Song the folWhen a MIDI File containing a Vocoder track is K760/880SE allows youthe to record a simple multi-track using the QUICK REC recording method lowing specialIn MIDI controllers (Common Chan- can record loaded from the Vocoder track sets to track hen using existing Styles. practice, the Quick Rec method from 1 disk, to 8 real time tracks nel) by default. ccompanied by all are the available: backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack 5 Song of up to 16 tracks. You can so play along with the song during playback.
Cntrl No. Description Vocal volume Vocal On/Off 13 Value 0 127 0 Off/On (toggle) 64-127 On

12 UICK REC RECORDING

Press the SONG button.

1/2

The Song Banks display shows empty 14 Mode recall 0 = Chord mode songs as User locations. If not, you can use 1 - Vocoder mode the Restore All Songs function (in Edit Gen2 = Unison eral) to clear all songs in memory.

Select an empty location (User) with the2cor=2 responding Soft button or Function button.
3=3

15

Voice Set recall

1=1

Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.

15 = 15

The RECORD ST/SONG button turns on 16 = 16 (LED on). A new Song and Song Performance is cre1 = Voice 2 ated based on the Performance selected at = Voice 3 the time of entering Quick Rec mode. 2The 3 the = Voice 4 display appears in negative highlight with selected track in positive. 4 = Main
5 = Bass 85 Voice Mute mode 0 = Voice 1

If necessary, select a preferred Style to use as the provider of the backings for the Song.
If you want the Style to govern the PERFORMANCE sounds, press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/ Off and Lower Memory activate automatically if off). To maintain the same Performance, select the Style with SINGLE TOUCH PLAY Off then turn on the accompaniment controls (ARRANGE ON/OFF and MEMORY) if necessary.

42 Quick Guide

Vocal Processor 77

78 Vocal Processor

Loading data into RAM memory

Edit General

you have some disk-based Songs, or Styles or Performances that you wish to load into the instruents RAM memory, or you you wish to load data fromparameters the SK760/880SE Hard Disk, heres how to do it. PAGE This is where can modify global DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MENU that affect the instrument a whole he example shows how to load a Song as from Floppyand diskwhich (or Hard Disk). All other data, such6 as User at the centre: The menu page shows editors are not memorized to a Performance. A part of yles, Programmable Performances, etc., are loaded using similar procedures adapted for the type of Pedalboard/ General Controls, Tuning/Scale, the general parameter settings are conserved in ata being loaded. Computer, Date & Time, Display Controls and RAM and saved to disk as a Setup. Mic/Line In. Press the GENERAL button in the Edit/Numbers On the right hand side are 8 options which can Insert the floppy disk the drive and press section tointo gain access to the EDIT GENERAL 1 be selected with the corresponding Soft buttons the DISK button to open the main Disk Load section. F1F8: Battery & Release, Auto Help, System page. When you press GENERAL for the first time, the Info, Restore All, Restore Styles, Restore PerIf a disk is inserted in the drive but you want display shows the main menu. formances, Restore Songs, Restore Style Perto work with the Hard Disk, select the HARD formances, Restore Sounds. The GENERAL functions can be selected using DISK option with button F2methods. to open the one of soft the following After entering the editors, the options shown in Hard Disk Load page. the options column change according to the edi1) Rotate the DIAL to select the editor and tor. press ENTER; If a disk is not inserted in the drive, the Load The description of the main menu options is at 2)automatically Use the directional arrows page configures for Hard Disk to select the the end of this chapter. editor and press operations. The example refers ENTER; to a loading operation from 3) Hard Disk. Use the page scroll buttons to pass directly from one editor to another; Specify the load operation required (for 4) Specify the editor number on the keypad example, Load Single Song). (with the KEYPAD LED on) and press EN2 Use the navigational TER.arrows to navigate within the two columns of the display area and select the required command by combining one element from each column. For example, combine Single from the left column with Song from the right to specify Load Single Song. If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify Single MIDI File.

Press ENTER to confirm the command and open the File Selector.
The File selector shows one or more Blocks in the Hard Disk directory, and the directory of the destination representing the section of RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example Songs).
Edit General - Main menu

40 Quick Guide

Edit General 81

General Controls
KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY
Determines the response of the keyboard to velocity changes. Assignable values: Soft, Medium soft, Medium, Medium hard, Hard.

Tuning/Scale
MASTER PITCH
Fine tunes the instrument as a whole in fractions of 1/64 of a semitone. Assignable values: -63...+63.

KEYBOARD SCALE FOOTSWITCH POLARITY

FOOTSWITCH 1, 2, 3

Sets the polarity of the programmable pedals 1, 2, 3. Generalmusic pedals are of the NC type. Options: NC (Normally Closed), NO (Normally Open).

Provides a selection of Temperaments (Scales). Options: Equal, Inverse, Meantone, Werkmeister III, Arabian 1, Arabian 2, User1 ... User8.

USER PROGRAMMABLE SCALES

You can program your own scale using the keyboard map shown at the bottom of the display. This graphical representation shows the current pitch of the notes of an octave. The octave currently in edit is shown in the title bar directly above the keyboard (e.g. Octave C-1/B-1). Each note shows the coarse tune and fine tune status. The programming tasks allow you to alter the pitch of one or more notes by modifying the coarse and fine tuning parameters of the current scale.

Actual note Coarse tuning

Octave (select F5 for Octave Up or F6 for Octave Down).

Fine tuning in 64ths of a semitone Edit General: General controls

Edit General: Master pitch & Keyboard Scale

82 Reference Guide

Using the Midi File Player lected octaves of the keyboard, or to all octaves.

The final configuration can then be copied to se-

OCTAVE UP (F5) Selects the next highest octave to edit. OCTAVE DOWN (F6) Sets the next lowest octave to edit. CATCH NOTE... (F7) Selects the note to edit. Press F7. The following message appears:

- TO PROGRAM SCALE BY FINE TUNING ONE he MIDI FILE EXAMPLE PLAYER plays MIDI A files directly om floppy diskOR or MORE Hard NOTES: Disk without loading data 1. With Octave Up function (F5), select the to RAM memory. If athe Floppy disk containing octave to program. IDI Files is already inserted in the drive, the IDI File player floppy, otherwise 2. engages Use thethe directional arrows to select the fine e Hard Disk (if present) is engaged automatitune parameter (in this case 0) and rotate ally. the Dial to fine tune the note according to your requirements. tuning, he following example shows how toWhile use the MIDI play the note le player utilizing repeatedly. a floppy disk containing MIDI 3. saved Repeat theMIDI microtuning operation for other es. If you have some Files to your notes. ard Disk, follow the example without inserting a sk into the drive. 4. Select the Copy to oct. function (F3), select Fine Tune in the Copy parameter and Insert a disk containing MIDI Files into the ALL in the to octave parameter, then 1 press drive and press the SONG button. ENTER to confirm. The display5. shows the SONG selecWhen the scaleBANKS has been programmed, save tion window (with a pressing selectionF7 of (Save). You it to or thewithout Setup by Songs). The example 8 Songs present will be shows prompted to select a User location. in RAM memory.

Play the note to edit. SAVE... (F8) Saves the User programmed scale to the Setup. The Save dialog window is opened where you can choose from 8 User scale destinations.

THE TUNING/SCALE OPTIONS

COPY TO OCTAVE... (F3) Copies the current setting to another octave. The Copy to octave dialog window is opened where you can specify the elements to copy and the Press either of theto +/ Page/Bank ( ) octave copy the user programmed data 2 to.

Select the User scale with the DIAL. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.

buttons to activate the MIDI File player.

The MIDI File player selects the MIDI File folder contained in the disk.

Coarse&Fine - Copies both the coarse tuned notes as well as the fine.. Coarse - Copies only the coarse tuned notes. Finetune - Copies only the fine tuning. To octave - Selects the octave to copy to. Select the ALL option to copy a programmed octave to the entire keyboard.

38 Quick Guide

Edit General 83

Pedalboard/Computer
The PEDALBOARD and COMPUTER connectors cannot operate at the same time. Selecting one renders the other inoperative. To activate one of the two connectors, select the corresponding option (Pedalboard or Computer) with the cursor buttons.

Note C2 D2 E2 F#2 G#2 A#2 C3

Function Start/Stop Intro Ending Fill < Fill = Fill > Key Start

Note C#2 D#2 F2 G2 A2 B2

Function Tempo Tempo + Var 1 Var 2 Var 3 Var 4

PEDALBOARD
If you have purchased Generalmusics optional 13-note pedalboard, connect it to the Pedalboard connector and program the unit for how it will be used by pressing F8 (Mode). MODE (F8) FOR PEDALBOARD OPTIONS Options for the pedalboard. BASS SUSTAIN (F1) Sustain for the notes of the pedalboard.

COMPUTER
Instead of using the MIDI interface, you can connect via a single serial cable to a computer. Program the connector for the type of computer used by pressing F8 (Mode).

Off - Pedalboard deactivated. Pedalbass - The automatic bass of the auto-accompaniments is deactivated and the BASS track is assigned to the Pedalboard, allowing you to play the bass with the pedalboard. Pedalchord - Chord recognition on the keyboard is disabled and passed over to the pedalboard. To play minor and sevenths, play two bass notes at the same time. Alternatively, you can program the Pedals 1, 2, or 3 to select minor and sevenths. Multifunction - Each note of the pedalboard recalls a function associated to the Styles:

Edit General: PedalBoard/Computer

84 Reference Guide

ANSPOSING TRACKS COMPUTER BY OCTAVES MODE (F8) OPTIONS Options tobe communicate with a computer ny track, if selected, can instantly transposed octave steps, within the range 5 octaves.

Date & Time

Sets the internal calendar and clock.

Select the track you wish to transpose.

1
SET DATE (F1)
Sets the date in edit. Take the cursor to the day, month and year and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F1.

Off - Connection deactivated. Macintosh - To connect to an Apple Macintosh computer. A standard Mac serial cable is required to connect to the Modem port. In the computer software, set a communication velocity of 1 MHz. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setPC1 - Allows serial connection with an 2 IBM ting. computer or compatible, with a communication velocity 31250the baud. A standard PC serial An insertion screenof shows current Occable must be connected to the RS-232 port of tave setting. the computer. Press the OCTAVE + button as many times PC2 - As above, but desired with a communication veas necessary until you reach the setlocity is of expressed 38400 baud. ting. The value in semitones: 12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/ 3 seconds.

SET TIME (F2)

Sets the time in edit. Take the cursor to the hour, minute and seconds with the cursor buttons and specify the value of each parameter with the DIAL. Confirm with ENTER or F2.

Press OCTAVE button to lower the octave setting.

The current Octave setting is shown. Continue pressing the OCTAVE button as many times as necessary until you reach the desired setting. An eventual positive Octave status will be cancelled. CLEAR THE TRACK OCTAVE SETTING

Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.

The insertion screen shows the value of 0 and the tracks normal pitch is restored.

Edit General; Date & Time

36 Quick Guide

Edit General 85

Display controls
Viewing controls for the display. The settings are conserved to memory after power down. They cannot be saved to disk.

Mic/Line Input
This is where you can regulate your input signal when using the Audio Vocal Processor. This page contains bar graphs to monitor the level of signals fed into the Mic/Line inputs 1 and 2. The input signal is directed to the internal sound generator and effects processor before being directed to the LEFT and RIGHT outputs and the speaker system. You can regulate the signal gain with the GAIN knobs located next to the Mic/Line jacks. An optimum signal level can be obtained when the input signal, at maximum volume, almost touches the extreme right of the VU bar graph (the clipping zone). Regulate the maximum volume with the MIC/LINE panel slider. The M. VOL slider regulates the sum of the internal sound generator output level (SK760/880SE sounds and signal of the MIC/ LINE IN inputs). INPUT VU Monitors the level of the input signal. Controls the signal gain of the two signals fed into the Mic/ Line IN1 and IN2 jacks with the knobs 1 and 2 located next to the inputs.

CHORD LANGUAGE
Determines the viewing language (English/Italian/French/German) of the chord notation in the Score.

HELP LANGUAGE
Selects the language for the Help file. Your model may not contain a file in a different language.

DISPLAY MODE
Offers the choice of viewing black text on a white background (Positive) or white texts on a black background (Negative).

LAST SELECTION MEMORY

If enabled (ON), the last selected carried out in either Style, Performance or Sound mode is memorised. If disabled (off), the selection window of these modes to not show the last selection made.

Edit General - Display controls

Edit General - Mic/Line In

86 Reference Guide

VING TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE Maximum volume levels can produce clipping, a distortion which can be eliminated by control3 If you want to save to a different Performling the gain.
clipping ance, use the Cursor Left/Right ( / ) buttons and the Dial to configure the Performance Store display accordingly.

RESONANCE Sets the filter resonance. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. AUDIO OUT Directs the signal to the audio output outputs. Assignable values: L+R, 1+2, 1, 2.

The Cursor The Left/Right VU-meterarrows indicatesswitch the levelfrom of thethe input signal. The dark Performances (Performance) to the Style zone to the extreme right represents clipping (distortion). Performances (Style) and vice versa. VOLUME Rotating the Dial scrolls through the Groups Separate volume control for each input. in the Store to zone. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. If you are saving to the Performances, select a Group in the Store to zone and a PAN Performance in the Performance zone. Determines the position of the input signal within If you are the saving to the Style Performstereo panorama. ances, select a Style Group in the Store to Assignable values: -32 (all to the left) ... 0 (cenzone, move down to the Style zone to select tre) ... +31 (all again to the to right). a Style, then move down the Perf zone to select a Style Performance. EFF GROUP Selects the Group of effects A or B. E1 SEND Determines the amount of Reverb effect to apply to the signal. Assignable values: 0 ... 127.

MIC/LINE ON/OFF (F1)

Switch to activate/deactivate the Mic/Line IN1 and IN2 jacks. When the inputs are active, the overall polyphony is reduced by two voices; if you do not intend using the Mic/Line inputs, deactivate them in order to direct the two voices to the internal SK760/880SE sounds.

VOCAL ON/OFF (F3/F4)

Switch for the activation/deactivation of the Vocal Processor. See also the Vocal Processor chapter.

EQUALIZER (F5/F6)
The Equalizer parameters affect the Mic/Line input signals only.

Press ENTER.

E2 SEND 4 If the destination is a Performance the disDetermines the amount ,of modulation effect to play returns to the modified version of the apply to the signal. original Performance. Assignable values: 0 ... 127. If the destination is a Style Performance, pressing ENTER FILTER opens a dialog window requesting confirmation of the Style PerformSelects a either filter type. ance name. You can confirm the same Assignable name or change it. values: Off, LP (Low Pass), HP (High Pass), BP (Band Pass), PB (Parametric 5Boost), Press ENTER again to confirm the new or old PC (Parametric Cut).

Style Performance name.

If you dontCUTOFF want to save your modifications, Sets the cutoff the frequency. press ESCAPE to cancel operation. Assignable values: 0 ... 191.

34 Quick Guide

Edit General 87

The Edit General Main Menu Options

BATTERY & RE.... (F1)
This option shows the date and time of the latest release of the operating system and the charge level of the rechargeable backing battery. Press F1 once to show the release date and battery charge level:

SYSTEM INFO (F2)

This option displays information regarding the presence or absence of the various accessories that can be installed in the instrument..

Press F1 once again to show the date and time of the release:

RESTORE
The Edit General main menu offers several dedicated Restore functions, useful to reset part of all the instruments RAM. All user-programmed data (Performances, User Styles, Songs, Performance-Sounds, Sounds) can be cancelled, either as an individual block (Performances, Style-Performances, User Styles, Songs, Sounds) or entirely (All) by means of a single command. Cancelling user programmed data from memory restores the instruments original default parameter status. For example, if you use the Restore Performance command, you will cancel all user-programmed Performances and restore the original factory settings.
WARNING: use the RESTORE commands with caution because user-programmed data is irremediably lost. Make sure that you have saved any data you so not wish to cancel to disk or Hard disk before proceeding with a restore operation.

If the battery charge level is low, leave the instrument turned on for at least 15 hours to recharge the battery completely.

Options column of the main Edit General page

88 Reference Guide

Play on theRESTORE keyboardALL and(F3) listen to the Sound 3 combination. This operation cancels all user programmed data
in RAM (Performances, Depending currently on the Performance recalled, you User Styles, Songs)of and will be ableStyle-Performances, to play with a combination up restores the instrument its factory-set to 16 Sounds, either to layered together status or split(RAM empty). across the keyboard Pressingin F3 any prompts configuration. a request You to confirm the can modifyoperation the Sound with configuration ENTER or cancel to suitwith ESCAPE. your needs then store the modified Performance with the Store Perf button (explained further ahead). RESTORE STYLES (F4) This operation cancels all User Styles in RAM Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional 4/5 in (including User Style-Performances) residing selections. This time, press the Performance the User 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons of the STYLE button N.8.GROUPS. The User slots are restored to the factory-set (empty: User). The display will showconditions 8 Drawbar Performances to choose from Pressing F4 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE STYLE-PERFORMANCE (F7)

This operation cancels all user-programmed Style-Performances associated to the ROM STYLES. The status of the Style-Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. ROM Styles associated to modified StylePerformances are identified by an asterisk (*) after the Style name. Pressing F7 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

RESTORE SOUNDS (F8)

This operation restores the Sound configuration to the original factory-set situation, cancelling all User edited Sounds previously stored to user locations. This operation is particularly useful to restore the original SK760/880SE sound set (over 1,000 sounds) after loading a sound configuration from a previous series SK760/880SE disk (about 600 sounds) using the Load All Sounds or Load Block procedures. Pressing F8 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.

Select one of the 8 Drawbar Performances and play on the keyboard.

RESTORE PERFORMANCE (F5) In the example, we select the Jazz Split Performance. This operation cancels all user-programmed Performances in RAM residing in the 8 buttons of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS. The status of the Performance parameters are restored to the factory-set values. Pressing F5 prompts a request to confirm the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE. RESTORE SONGS (F6)
While you Songs play, change colour of thefactory-set memorythe is restored to the 6 staorgan sounds the 8 panel sliders. tus using (empty: User).
Pressing F6 as prompts athe request The eight sliders operate eight of draw- to confirm the operation with ENTER cancel bars of an organ. You can changeor the pitchwith ESCAPE. of each drawbar to make any footage you like. Once you have made a drawbar setting that you like, you can memorize it to the current Performance using the Store Performance operation explained on the next page. This operation cancels all Song in RAM. The

32 Quick Guide

Edit General 89

810 Reference Guide

ELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE

hen Single Touch Play is on, each SK760/ 80SE Style is associated to 8 Style Performnces which you can assign at any time before during play. SK760/880SE The Style Performances arean perincorporates on-line-help sysanent and cannot be destroyed. They are, howtem which provides brief information on the baver, rewritable (keyboard accompaniment sic functionsand of the instrument. This feature is ounds). Theirparticularly default settings can restored helpful if be you get stuck and do not th the Restore command. A Style Performance have access to the owners manual at the time. e programmed to change the keyboard sounds pressing HELPbut opens s well as the Generally, accompaniment sounds, the a page showing information regarding the currently set mode. ccompaniment patterns of the current Style reain unchanged.

Help

Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group using the procedure already described on the previous pages. Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode,
press HELP to get information concerning the default situation (main page). Similarly, if you are currently working in one of the Edit sections, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section. SomeP. Help pages consist of a General informaPress the STYLE button to gain access to 2 tion page and one or more Detail pages which the Style Performances. provide detailed information regarding the cur8 Style Performance names associated to the rent topic. current Style are displayed.

HOW TO USE HELP 1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode. A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode. 2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open a sub-page with specific details concerning the current help topic. Depending on the current mode, a NEXT page (F3/F4) may or not be available. Once you have entered a NEXT page, the PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available. Options not available will be shown with broken lines. 3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6. 4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/ F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2). 5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP page.

Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.

Buttons A/B in this example. If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on). Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the selection display.

30 Quick Guide

Utility functions 91

PANIC
MIDI communications can sometimes lock the instrument due to the transmission of an excessive quantity of data, or an incorrect MIDI message. The PANIC function sends the All notes off and Reset all Controllers messages to all external MIDI devices connected to the SK760/880SE MIDI OUT port. HOW TO ACTIVATE PANIC If your machine locks up while working with MIDI, press both Page buttons ( ) at the same time.

Display Hold
This function is active (LED on) by default. When on, you can select items from the current selection display without closing it. If off, every time you select an item from a selection window, the display will return to the main display relating to the current mode. If D. Hold is off, press the button to activate the function.

D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again. Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD. Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles, Performances and Songs SK760/880SE sends the all notes off and reset all controllers messages to all connected MIDI devices.

92 Reference Guide

ART A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO

5. With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on the TAP TEMPO button.
The tempo is set according to the timing of the last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically. The tempo adjusts itself automatically according to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.).

15

Appendix
Sound tables Drumkit tables Style tables Performance tables Effect tables Wave tables

ART AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE IN/OUT

16

MIDI Controllers MIDI Implementation Implementation System Exclusive Index (alphabetical)

6. Press the FADE IN/OUT button before starting the accompaniment with START/STOP.
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero. Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure (bar) cycle.

17

7. Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment is playing.

All the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle. During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.

LECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING THE KEYBOARD OUNDS

you want to change Style while playing without hanging the keyboard sounds, select the Style th SINGLE TOUCH PLAY off.

LED OFF

hen SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a yle changes the patterns, the sounds and efcts of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyoard sounds remain unchanged.

28 Quick Guide

ROM-Sounds
Bank PIANO group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Piano12 Piano2
2

2 PianoMk12 PianoW2
2 2

3 PickPiano2 Pianoctave Western

2 3

4 PianoStage2 PianoTine
3

5 InharPiano2 TonePiano
2

6 Grand Piano E. Grand 1 E.PianoX2 DynE.P.

1 1

Piano32 HonkyTonk E.Piano11 E.Piano2 Clavinet1 Celesta2 Glockenspl2 MusicBox Marimba1 Xylophone Santur2 Organ12 Organ21 Organ3
2 2 1 2 2 1

E.G.Piano12 DetPiano E.Piano3 SynClav1 CelestaPlk2 GlockVibes2 WineGls1 Vibes21 Marimba22 Xylophone2 SoftBell2 BarChimes1 16'1'Draw1 16'8'5'Drw1 SwOrgan Church2 Accord1
1 1 2 1 2 2

E.G.Piano22 E.Piano42 E.Piano5

2 1

AtkPiano12 AtkPiano2 RhodxFilt2 E.PianoSft LogPiano

2 2 2

ArcoPiano3 E.PianoMk2 DetuneE.P.

2

ThinRhodx2
2 2

FM Pro MezzoPiano

Rhodex 1 FM E. Piano

Harpsichor

Harpsich2

Harpsich3 WowClav2 ToyPiano2

ElPianoSeq

PercPiano2 Balarimba1 ToyOrgan2 GlockSeq1 Vibes Marimba31 SynthMarim1 VibeSeq1 Quasimodo

MALLET. group GlockChoir2 MusicBell Mallet2 XyloTribal Oohlalaa2 Climbing2 Organ1WX2 JazzOrgan32 SynOrg1 Organ42 Accord2
2 1 2 2 2 2

Vibraphone1

SynVibes2

TubularBel2

ORGAN group OrgTheatre1 Organ3W1 OrganC3

2 2

16'1'Vib32 16'1 5'1/3

1 2

8'1 4'1 2'2/3

1 2

2'1 OctaDrawbr3 FiltDrawbr

3 3

RockOrgSeq1 TheatreSus RotaryPress

ChurchOrg1 Musette
1

Organ3WX

Organ1W Accord3 Farfis

1 1

PipeOrg3 HamDrw1 Accord4

2

Hamclick Accord5
1

SixtDrawbr Trekzak
2

ReedOrgan1 Harmonica

PipeOrgan2
1

PipeChiff2

EvocativOr2 PercOrgan

Bandoneon31 Fuzztain
3

Blusette

WestHarmon OrganLfo2 VocalGtr2

Hamperc Diatonic2

DirtyOrgan

The Strat

Bandoneon1 NylonGtr1 SteelGtr

1

Cassotto1 SoloGtr1 12StrGtr

2

Bandoneon22 PedalSteel2

AccordEnv1 NylonGtr23 Mandolin21 JazzStrato2 ElGuitar32

1

OctAccordn2

GUITAR group) CrunchGt1 Mandolin

1

SteelGtr1

SteelGtr2

SteelGtr31 ElGuitar42
1

JazzGtr11 CleanGtr1 MutedGtr DistGtr1 HarmonxGtr

1 1 1

OctJzGtr1 ElGuitar11 Muted2

2 2

Hawaiian2 ChorusGtr2 Dyn.Muted 5thOverdr HeavyGt2

2 2 1

JazzGtr21 ElGuitar22 MutedWha CrunchStb LeadDist3 StratoGt

1 1 2

MutedClean1 Dyn.Clean2 MutedFunk 5thDistort JazzPick

2 3

MandolinSeq LeadDist33

Overdrive

WhaGtr1 FuzzGtr2

LeadDist23

SlowHarmx

HarmGtr3

The suffix = 3 oscillators per voice;

= 2 oscillatore per voice;

= 1 oscillators per voice;

DK

= DrumKit

A2 Appendix

ROM-Sounds Press one of the VAR buttons shown off. Note how the Bank accompaniment 9 10 pattern PIANO group changes to a different Variation. The VAR buttons control the Style Variations. 2 Each button recalls a different version of the 3 same accompaniment. Each Variation in4 cludes different5 patterns for the Basic, Intro, Fill and Ending6sections.
1 11

8
12 13 14 15 16

Press one of the 8 FILL buttons.

FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into 9 the previous Variation. 10 FILL plays the11fill cycle then continues with 12 the current Variation.
13 MALLET. group

When the accompaniment is not playing, FILL 14 can be preselected to play as an intro. 15 FILL plays the fill cycle then breaks into ORGAN group the next Variation (this button also incorpo17 rates the Tap Tempo function - see over). 18
19 cycle plays once only. If you Normally the fill hold the FILL 20 button pressed, it will repeat 21 the Fill cycle continually until release. 22 16

23 chord and start to play the 0. Play a different 24 melody with the right hand. GUITAR group) 25accompaniment pattern is Note how the transposed. 26

10
ST_Nylon1 ST_Mandolin1 ST_Steel11 ST_Steel21 ST_Steel31 ST_12Strng1 ST_Steel41

The combination 28 of sounds that play and the current keyboard 29 mode will depend on the Style selected. 30
31

27

1. Stop the Style32 by pressing the START/STOP button or the ENDING button.
START/STOP stops the Style instantly. ENDING stops the Style with an ending phrase.

11

26 Quick Guide

Tables A3

ROM-Sounds
Bank BASS group 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 AcoustcBs11 FingeredBs1 PickBass Fretless2 SlapBass11 SlapBass2 SynBass11 SynBass22 Violin1 Viola1 Cello
1 2 1

2 AcoustcBs21 Dyn.Fingrd2 Dyn.Bass2

1

3 AcousticBs32 Dyn.Bass11 PckBass2 Flanged1 SlapSynBs2 StopBass

2 2

4 Dyn.AcoBs1 Dyn.Baxx1 PkBsMute Fretless21 PckBass31 ThumBass

1 1

5 HarmAcBs1 HarmAcBs21 HarmElBs

1

6 FingerdBs21 Fretless31 WedgeBass SynBass51 ToneBass1

1 1

7 DanceBass2 FingerdBs32 SubBass

2

8 TheChopper2 LowPassed2 SerialBass2 ContraSynB2 DigiBass2

2

AcidBass12 Dyn.Bass31 WXBass

2

RezoBass1 ClickBass1 BleapBass HitBass2 SynSlapBs1

WowBass1 FingAndSlp2 DubbedRezo Popcorn2 NylonBass2

BassMik

PriorBass2 SynBass62 RazorBass2

SynBass31 SynBass42 SlowViolin1 BowedViola2 SlowCello

1

TecknoBass2 RaveBass2 ViolinOrch2 ViolaPad2 CelloEns2 Staccato1 Plectra1 EchoPizz1 Spacehar2 Dyn.Orch I'I'I2 StrgGlock2 St.SlwStrg2 SynStrg5 Strings32 SlowUuh2 SlowAah
2 2

AcoustcBs41 SynthBass2

SpaceBass12 SpaceBass22

STRINGS group)

Quartet1

Contrabass1 TremoloStr1 Pizzicato Harp1 Timpani1 Strings1 SlwStrings1 SynStrg1 Choir1 VoiceOohs SynVox2 OrchHits2 Trumpet1 Trombone Tuba
2 1 2 1 2 2 1

BowedBass2 OctTremolo2 OctPizz

2

HarpDelay2 TimpaniEFX2 StereoStrg2 StrgOrch2 SynStrg3

2

ENSEMBLE group) DualStrgs2 Strings21 OrchHits2 StrEthnic2 BackVocals1 SimStrings HitsRev2 DynSection2
1 2 1

StereoOctv3 SlwString21 SawStrings2 NoiseUuh2 PannedVox4 WideEnsemb2 StereoSlow2 OctSlowStr2 NoiseTrp3 TrombSlop2 OctBrass1
3

SynStrg22

SynStrg42 VoiceUuh2 VoiceAah Rave2 FlugelAttk1 Trombone3 ShortTuba

1 1 3 1 2

SkatVoices1

Vocoder2 Dyn.St.Hit3 FlugelHorn1 WowTromb2 WowTuba

1 2

SympMemory2

BRASS group TrombSwell ClassicBrs

1 1 2 1

TrombSwel2

MutedTrp1 Brass2

MutedTrp2 Brass22 SynBras22 SlowHorn

2

Dyn.MtTrp TotoHorns SyntHorn2 AttkHorn

2

ModernBrs BrassFall2

OctBrass23 FrenchFlut3 BrassTrp2 PercSynBrs3 SynBrass52 ColorBrass2 StereoBrs2

FrenchHorn SynBrass12 SynBrass2

2

Dyn.FrHorn

FrHrnSwell

BrassRips1

SynBrass32 SynBrass4
2

A4 Appendix

ROM-Sounds Play with Auto Accompaniment Styles

Bank BASS group 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ST_AcousBs1 ST_FngrdBs1 ST_PickBs21 ST_Fretls11 ST_Fretls21 ST_FngrBs21

K760/880SE has 192 auto accompaniment 33 Vang.Bass yles with four Variations four Intros, four Fills 34 DanceFing2 Vang.Bass2 nd four Endings 35 for each Style. You can also 2 SoftBass ad up to 32 disk 36 based User Styles of your hoice into the 4 User 37 Style banks available.

Press SINGLE TOUCH PLAY (LED turns on). 39

40 Pressing this button activates the ARRANGE STRINGS group) ON/OFF and MEMORY buttons (if not al41 ready on). 42 43 ON/OFF button enables The ARRANGE 44 the Style auto-accompaniment patterns. 45 If this button is off, only the Style Drum 46 accompaniment will play when you start 47 the Style. 48

38

ST_PickBs11 ST_SynBas42

ST_Fretls31 ST_Fretls41

Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS 49 (8 Beat, 16 Beat, Rock, etc.). 50
ENSEMBLE group 51 JAZZ in this example. The display will show 52 a selection of Styles from the first bank of the 53 selected Group. 54 55 56 BRASS group 58

Select a Style 57 from the current Bank (1).

You can also switch to Style Bank 2 with the 59 +/ (Page/Bank) buttons for an additional 60 choice of 8 ROM Styles. 61
62 Use the Soft buttons near the Style name in 63 the display to select the desired Style 64 (SWING in Bank 1 in this example).

If the Display Hold button (D.HOLD) is off, the display will show the sounds recalled for the keyboard sections and the keyboard mode will be shown as Upp/Low. If D.HOLD is on, press ESCAPE to view the current situation.

24 Quick Guide

Tables A5

ROM-Sounds
Bank REED group 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 95 Soprano1 SoftSax
1 1

2 Soprano22 SaxNoise BaritDet2 OboeChiff

2 2 2

3 SoprFilter1 SoftFilt
1 1

4 AltoSax1 LiscioSax
1

5 Safe Sax

TenorSax Oboe
1

OctaveSax

TenFilter

TouchSax2 BaritnSax21
1

BaritonSax1 EnglisHorn2 Bassoon1 Clarinet

1

BariFilter1 OboeFilter HornFilter2 BassoonFlt1 ClarFilter

1

SaxQuartet1 TenSaxSolo1 BreathSopr2 LiscioClar1 PanFilter1 ColorWind2 Panfluit

EngHorn22 Bassoon21 ClarSolo

2

FLUTE group Piccolo1 Flute

1

HardFlute12 Dyn.Flute1
2

HardFlute22 DynHiFlute Bubbler1 Dyn.Pan1 Tube

1 1 2

Recorder2 PanFlute1 BottleBlow Whistle

1 2 2

Recorder22 PanFlute22 BottleNois Shakupad

2 2

Shakuhachi Ocarina2

ShakuVoice2 Whistle3WX2 OcarinaSyn2 Pulse22 Lyle2 SynLead12 Digital

2

Whistle1WX

OcarinaPan2 Pulse12 ObxFilter2 Azimut2 Chopper Jump2 FiltRes12

4 2

SYNTH LEAD group SquareWave2 SawWave2 SynCalliop2 ChiffLead Charang2 SoloVox2 5thSawWave BassLead3 Fantasia3 WarmPad2 Polysynth2 SpaceVoice MetalPad2 HaloPad
3 2 3

ProphSaw1 TrianWave1 ClavWave1 PulseWave MiniSaw1 MiniPulse1 DigiWave1

1 1

SnapSynth1 SeqTone1 SeqWoody1 SeqStick

1

BirAttak1 Boink1 Gring1 Thin

1

RdPhas1 StrnNoise1 SevenSynth1 SynthLead MKSynth1 StlSynth1 FmIsh

1 1

Boss1 PannedSeq2 Joe4lead2 OlFaithful3 Saw-Me3 Saw-You3 PowerPop2 TooAnalog3 RichForm2 BellPad012 BellPad022
2

SoundTrk2 FiltRes22 Decay2 Obx32 PPG2 AnlgPad2 Fantasy32 Angels

2 2 2 2

Inharm11 Inharm21 Inharm3

1

Buzz1 LfxSynth1 Sharp

1

Decay1 Obx22

DigiWave21 Fantasy13 Waveaura2 Awala1 OcBreath Panch1 Bright33

2 2

Inharm41 Form11 Form21 Form31 Form4

1

Shape1 LogStr1 MarimVox2 Pad4U1 MyVox

1

BtSynth1 PrettyPad12 PrettyPad23 Fantasy43 StereoFrm1 FizzyPad2 BandSweep2 EpicPan

2

SYNTH PAD group NewAge2 Obx12 Fantasy22 VocBells Bright22 Slave

2

StereoFrm32 BellPad032 BellPad042 BellPad052 StereoFrm42

BowedGlass2

Prophet12

Prophet22 Analogic2 Atmosphere Decay32

Form51 Form61 Form7

1

PadZone11 PadZone21 PluckPad Tibet2

1

Ppg

SweepPad2

Machiner2

Waiting2

Budweis2

StereoFrm22

A6 Appendix

ROM-Sounds Use the corresponding Soft buttons to highlight the desired viewing Bank 9 choices. 10
REED group are: The viewing choices 65

6
11 12 13 14 15 16

All:

66 67 68 69

The Score shows notes, chords and lyrics on the staff;

Lyrics 1, 2, 3,70 4:

Lyrics only are shown in various different sizes 71 (Lyrics 1 is the default 72 setting); FLUTE group
73 74 75 77 78 79 80 SYNTH LEAD group 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 FatSynth2 WhaSynth Outburst Its19852 FMbefore
2 2 2 2

Chord:

Chord symbols are shown on the staff.

76 Press the ENTER button to view the results.

7
Eerie12
2

MinBitSyn12 MinBitSyn2
2 2

FxShape2 SharpBuzz MinStack

4

Vangelis1 Vangelis2 An A.Logic Spiral

2

Eerie2 Eerie3

2 2

DigGrunge1 ToneZone1 ToneZone2 ToneZone4

2 2

DigGrunge22

MajStack4 DimStack
4 4

Eerie42 VocoWah ThinWha

2

Phat Pulse Soft Seq. Soft Lead Alf's Lead

CrossShape CrossWires

Maj5Stack Maj7Stack

UTOMATIC LOADING OF SONGS AT POWER UP 2

CrossSharp2

ToneZone32
2

Min7Stack4
4

FatAttak12 FatAttak2
2

SYNTH PAD group have any Songs your SK760/880SE doesnt 2 89 IcePad1 th lyrics in memory, it is possible to load a disk2 90 IcePad2 Alf's Pad autoased Block of data (including Song data) 2 Pad2 atically at power91 up. BassPad If you haveAlf's one or more 92 ongs disks (1.44 Mb format), insert the disk into 93 e drive of your computer and change the name 94 the Block file which contains Song data to: 95 UTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). 96

ith the instrument off, insert the disk into the ive and turn the instrument on. The UTOLOAD.BLK file will be loaded to the RAM emory automatically.

WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK loading procedure replaces all the data conserved in System RAM.

22 Quick Guide

Tables A7

ROM-Sounds
Bank SYN SFX group 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 SFX group 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 GtFretNois1 BreathNois Seashore2 Bird2 Telephone1 Helicopter2 Applause2 GunShot
1 1 1

2 Noiseres2 MoonWind2 Wind

2

3 BigRoom2 Slope2 SynLead2 PopUp2

2 2

4 Submarin2 Ekoendls2 Jets

2

5 Impact1 SynRain2 SeqSnap Spect11

2 1

6 Mech-Lp1 Mech-Wv1 SeqCook Atomic2 SawModula Synthex62 HiJoe2

2 1

7 Yowww3 Stars2 Babbling Synkro2 JimisDream2 TunedNoise BlasteRel2 StarTheme43

1 1

8 HitThePipe2 StabSynth2 MetalWork2 DigiDrops2 WoodCutter2 SnapOff2 SilicaPick2 Yourimba2

IceRain3 Soundtrack2 Crystal

2

Atmosphere2 Brightness3 Goblin

2

Arp260002 WithGas2 Resonance Synthex12 StarTheme22 SitarDet2 BanjoOct2

GlockAthm2 NoGravity
2

Smak2 OnOff2 Synthex3 Synthex42 StarTheme32 Kalimba21 KalimShot1

ColorBlast2 Spect2
1

BounSync2

EchoDrops1 StarTheme2 Sitar1 Banjo2 Shamisen Koto

1 1

Synthex22 PowerBad2 SynSitar2 EthnicGtr2

2

Synthex52 Spect31

ETHNIC group

ShamSitar Kanoun
2

SynSham

TrpClarin1 SaxTrumpt1
2

Kalimba1 Bagpipe Fiddle

1 1

ShrtKalimb2 BagpipeEns Hukin

2

Kalimba31

BrassEns

FiddleBell2 VoiceSpect2 DK_STAND.2 DK_WS DK_STD.1WX DK_DANCE DK_TECHNO DK_JAZZ2 DK_M1 DK_SY77 DK_STAND.3 DK_ROOM1WX DK_POWER1WX DK_ELECT1WX DK_HOUSE1WX DK_JAZZ_WX DK_STD.2WX DK_STAND.5 DK_HOUSE2 DK_HIPHOP DK_DANCE2 DK_TEK'90A DK_ELECT.2 DK_DNC1999 DK_POLY Vang. Kit DK_ROCK DK_STAND.9 DK_STAND10 DK_TUNED DK_HYBRID2 BD_ONLY_KT

Shanai1 TinkleBell2 Agogo1 SteelDrums Woodblock Taiko2 Melo.Tom11 SynthDrum

1 2 1

BacktoWS2 DK_STAND.1 DK_ROOM DK_POWER DK_ELECT DK_HOUSE DK_JAZZ1 DK_BRUSH DK_ORCH

PERCUSSIVE group DK_ROOM2WX DK_STD'70 DKPOWER2WX DK_HYBRID1 DKELECT2WX DK_FUSION DKHOUSE2WX DK_STAND.6 DK_STAND.4 DK_STAND.7 DK_STAND.8 DK_JAZZ3

DK_TEKBRSH DK_TEK'90B

DK_BRUSHWX DK_BRUSH2 DK_ORCH_WX SD_ONLY_KT Rideit

ReverseCym1

Gtr.WhaWha|'|'|1 GtrNoise1 Zapp1 TickTack1 Scratch11 Telephone2 SynPerc32 HeartBeat2 Explosion

2 1

KeyClick1 Drop1 Water1 Door1 Clackson2 PickScrape1 Bomb2

A8 Appendix

ROM-Sounds Select the ALL DEMO option shown in the current selection window to chain 10 all demos Bank 9 displayed (Song or Style). SYN SFX group
1 1

5
11
1

12 BDJAZZ1 STICK1 SDJAZZ3

1 1

13 BDROOM11 RIM_701 SDORCH

1 1

14 BDSTD11 BD_70_P1 RIM_11 SDROOM1 ROLL_701 BD_AC_1B TOM_141 TOMLOW1 HHTGHT21 HH_CL2_DR1 SPLASH
1 1 1 1

15 BDSTD21 BD_70_F1 RIM_21 SDROOM2

1

16 BDSTD31 CLAP_MIX1 EFF_RIM1 SDSTD11 ROLL_F1 BD_AC_2B1 OPSURDO21 HHCLO21 HH_OP_DR1 SMASH1 RIDECUP1 HOUSETCON1 MUTBELL2 TRIANSHORT1 DARBKLOW1 CLAKSON1 BABYVOX1 DYTEK_TIMB2 SD_9091 SD_BR_DYN2
1 1

97 BDHOUSE1 BDHOUSE2 BDELECT1 Playback starts automatically from the first 1 1 98 BDORCH BDPOWER1 demo. Demos notBDTEKNO yet played are shown in 99 RIMSHOT11 RIMSHOT21 HOUSERIM1 negative highlight while those played return 1 1 100 SDELECT DYNSDJAZZ SDJAZZ21 positive. 101 SDSTD21 SDSTD31 SDSTD41 102 HOUSECLAP CLAP on the BD_AC_1DYN While a demo plays, all the buttons 1 1 ROLLSNARE BRUSRIG1 control panel103 (except DEMO, BRUSREV the Function 104 TOMELEC1 TOMHIGH1 TOMJAZZ1 buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled. ETHNIC group 105press HHCLO1L HHCLO1S soft HHOPEN1 To stop a demo the corresponding 6 106 HHOPEN2 HHCL_70 HHFT_70 button, or press ESCAPE.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ACOUST_KIK1 BD_KIK1

HOUSSD11 BRUSHSLP1 TOMROOM1 HHPEDAL1 HHOP_701 RIDECUP

1

HOUSESD21 BRUSHTAP1 TIMP_JM1 HHTGHT11 HH_CL1_DR1 RIDECYM

1

ROLL_F_LN2 BD_AC_2A TIMPANI1 HOUSEHH1 HH_PED_DR1 CHINA RIDE1 CONGALOW1 WHISTLE TRIANLONG1 DARBKHIGH1 LOGDRUM1 DOLLYVOX1
1 1 1 1

BD_AC_2DYN BD_AC_1A

TOM_13_DYN2 TOM_10_DYN2

107

CRASHORCH

CRASH

HOUSERIDE

1 1 108 TAMBOURINE TAMBSLP COWBELL1 If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO 1 109 closes BONGOHISL CONGALSLAP BONGOLOW1 dialogue window and the display 1 re1 1 110 operating TIMBALESmode TIMBLOW turns to the last selected. AGOGO1

VIBRASLAP1 CABASA
1

HOUSECOWB1 COWBL21 CABASAL

1

CONGAHSLAP1 CONGALSLAP1 CONGAHIGH1 MARACAS WOODBLOCK1 QUICAHIGH1 QUICALOW1 OPSURDO11 KITCHEN1 VOXTIP1
2

111

GUIROLONG1

GUIROSHORT1 CLAVES1

1 1 1 IMPORTANT: Remember 112 SHAKER to escape JINGLEBELL DEMO mode WINDCHIMES if CASTANETS1 MTSURDO1 you want to select a Performance, Style or Song, PERCUSSIVE group or enter one of the Edit modes. 1 1 1 1 1

113

FINGERSNAP DROP

NOISE2

WATER

DOOR

114 115 116 117 118 119 120 SFX group 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128

VOICES11 FINGBELL SD_STD11 SD_SH1

1 1

VOICES21 ZAPP
1

VOICES31 SCRATCH1 SD_STD31 SD_SH3

1 1

VOXHHCL1 SCRATCH2 SD_STD41 SD_FSN

1 1

VOXTAP1 TOMBRUSH SD_BB1 SD_P701 EFF_SD2

1

HOU_TOM D_SD1 SD_F701

SQCLICK SD_BR1
1

NOISEPERC1

RASPYRIDE1 SD_STD21 SD_SH2

1

CRASH_181

HARD_CLAP1

BEAT_SD1 808_OC_HH DNC_BD11

808_CL_HH

808_OPHHLP1 BD_Z21

REZO_IT3

LNG_BD11

BD_DMGD_LN1 BD_DNC2_LN1 9091_OCHH1 WhaWha41 ReverShrt11 ReverShrt2

1 1

BD_DNC31 9092_CHH1 Noisnare12 Noisnare22 Noisnare3

2

BD_Z1_LAYL2 9092_OPHH1 SD_HEAVY12 SD_HEAVY22 SD_HEAVY3

2

LONG_REVRS1 BD_Z1_LAYH2 9091_CHH1 WhaWha11 Glasses1 TekBrush Highhh1 PhoneWave1 RndEnArm GlassalG2
2 2

HH_LOOP_CL1 HH_LOOP_OP1 SD12 SD22 SD3

2

WhaWha21 ReverseBd11 ReverseBd2

1

WhaWha31 ReverSnar11 ReverSnar2 ReverSnar31 DYNA_PERC2 SD_ROCK WEEP1

2

BD_DEEP_DN2 TOMLOW22 TOMHIGH22 BORDER_12 BORDER_22 Sinus1

ReverseBd31 SCRATCH31 SCRATCH4

1

ReverShrt31 NOISE_C2HH
1

Noisnare42 HatOrSnare
2

SD_HEAVY42 BD_DN1_ZP2 BD_DN2_ZP

2

909_SD_LNG2 BD11 BD_Z1_HHC2 BD_DN3_HI

2

NOISE_C1HH1 BrokeNoise2 NOISE_OPHH1 FallingBD2 NOISE_OPRV1 WayaW2

OddSpace2

SCRATCH51 SCRATCH61

BD_ROCK2

BD_DN3_ZP2 BN_DN3_SD2

BD_DN2_HI2

BD_DMG_SD2 Empty1

20 Quick Guide

Tables A9

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

WHISTLE 110-15 GUIROSHORT 111-10 GUIROLONG 111-9 CLAVES 111-11 WOODBLOCK 111-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 QUICAHIGH 111-13 QUICALOW 111-14 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TRIANLONG 111-15 SHAKER 112-9 JINGLEBELL 112-10 WINDCHIMES 112-11 CASTANETS 112-12 MTSURDO 112-13 OPSURDO 112-14

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A10 Appendix
Drumkits

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Drumkits HE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE SOUND FROM THE REST

C3 48 49 50 51

52 53 54

you are playing in a situation where two or more ounds are displayed, before activating a muted ound you may want to listen to it alone to dede whether to activate it or not. In such a situion, you can isolate the sound from the rest sing the SOLO button in the following manner:

In this example, the sound SlowStrings is automatically activated while the previous one (Piano1) is automatically muted. Observe that the sound plays across the full keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left split in Upp/ Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected.

Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.

In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they are Solod. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point.

Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.

In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solod sound plays across the currently assigned keyboard extension. In this case, the SOLO button recognises the current Split Point.

The LED of the SOLO button turns on and the sound currently shown highlighted will play while all other sounds are automatically muted (if active).

The SOLO button finds its principal use in Multi track situations.

Press the SOLO button again to return to normal operation.

56

57

58

59

C4 60 61 62 63

64

65

The SOLO LED turns off.

66

69

70

71

18 Quick Guide

68

67

55

DK_STAND1 113-2-.1 ROLLSNARE 103-9 FINGERSNAP 113-9 ZAPP 115-10 GunShot 128-1 SCRATCH2 115-12 SCRATCH1 115-11 STICK 99-12 SQCLICK 115-15 HOUSERIM 99-11 MUTBELL 110-16 BDSTD2 97-15 BDSTD1 97-14 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDSTD1 100-16 HOUSECLAP 102-9 SDSTD4 101-11 TOMLOW 104-14 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMLOW 104-14 HHPEDAL 105-12 TOMLOW 104-14 HHOPEN2 106-9 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 CRASH 107-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 RIDECYM 107-13 CHINA 107-15 RIDECUP 107-12 TAMBSLP 108-10 SPLASH 107-14 COWBELL 108-11 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 RIDECYM 107-13 CONGASLAP 109-10 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGAHSLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBLOW 110-10 AGOGO 110-11 AGOGO 110-11 CABASA 110-12 MARACAS 110-14 WHISTLE 110-15

DK_ROOM 114-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDROOM1 97-13 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDROOM2 100-15 TOMROOM 104-12 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_POWER 115-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ELECT. 116-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_HOUSE 117-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDHOUSE2 97-10 BDHOUSE HOUSERIM 99-11 < < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZ 118-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< ------------------------- SlowStrings ------------------------------- >

Tables A11

C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < Applause 127-1

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 CONGASLAP 109-12 CONGAHIGH 109-14 CONGALOW 109-15 GUIROLONG 111-9 QUICALOW 111-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TIMBALES 110-9 AGOGO 110-11 TRIANLONG 111-15 WHISTLE 110-15 BDHOUSE1 97-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 HOUSSD1 101-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES 3 114-11 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOICES2 114-10 VOXHHCL 114-12 VOXTIP 114-14 VOXTAP 114-13 CLAKSON 113-16 DOLLYVOX 114-15 TAMBSLP 108-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDORCH 100-13 HHCLO1S 105-10 CLAVES 111-11 CONGALOW 109-15 QUICAHIGH 111-13 AGOGO 110-11 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12 STICK 99-12

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A12 Appendix
Drumkits

25 26 27 28

he SK760/880SE Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the BankSelect SB number (ControlChange 00 [CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying the absolute values C and CC numbers) on the numeric keypad. MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to elect a sound of an expander connected to the SK760/880SE MIDI OUT.

29

30

31

Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you will select Sound 96-2-1.

32

33

34

C2 36

37

39

40

Or

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

C3 48

49

2A

51

54

B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash () which acts as a separator then specify the corresponding Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify then 2.

Specify the ProgramChange of the required Sound.

Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you wish to reassign and press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric keypad.

If necessary, add a second separator () and the third part of the message (BankSelect LSB).

An insertion window activates showing the number of Sound currently assigned to the track.

56

Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.

55

53

52

2B

50

58

A: In the example, specify 4 then 9.

57

Drumkits SING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT SOUNDS

C4 60

61

62

The KEY PAD LED turns off.

63

64

67

69

70

71

16 Quick Guide

68

66

65

59

38

BDPOWER 98-11 SDELECT 100-9 SDROOM2 100-15 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 CABASA 110-12 < TAMBSLP 108-10 < COWBELL 108-11 RIMSHOT2 99-10 BDJAZZ 97-12 BRUSRIG 103-11 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 BRUSHTAP 103-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHCLO1S 105-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHPEDAL 105-12 WOODBLOCK 111-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BDSTD1 97-14 RIDECYM 107-13 SDSTD1 100-16 RIDECUP 107-12 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SPLASH 107-14 TOMROOM 104-12 CRASH 107-10 VIBRASLAP 108-12 CHINA 107-15 FINGERSNAP 113-9

35

DK_BRUSH 119-2-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLP 103-12 BRUSREV 103-10 TOMBRUSH 115-13 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 TOMBRUSH 115-13 < TOMBRUSH 115-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ORCH. 120-2-1 < < HHTGHT1 105-13 HHPEDAL 105-12 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYM 107-13 < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 BDORCH 98-10 < SDORCH 100-13 CASTANETS 112-12 SDORCH 100-13 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 TIMPANI 104-15 < < < < < CRASHORCH 107-9 < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_STAND.2 113-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD3 97-16 < < SDSTD4 101-11 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHCLO2 105-16 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_WS 114-3-1

DK_STD.1WX 115-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM2 100-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_DANCE 116-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDELECT1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDELECT 100-9 < SDROOM1 100-14 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMELEC 104-9 TOMELEC 104-9 < TOMELEC 104-9 < ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

Tables A13

C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

CONGAHIGH 109-14 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANSHORT 111-16 TIMBALES 110-9 TRIANLONG 111-15 NOISEPERC 116-9 NOISEPERC 116-9 DOOR 113-13 NOISEPERC 116-9 SDSTD2 101-9 ROLLSNARE 103-9 SDSTD3 101-10

BreathNois 122-1 VIBRASLAP 108-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9 VOICES1 114-9

< < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

< GUIRLONG 111-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1-9 BARCHIMES 16-2-1 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-13 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLACKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPY RIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY

Drumkits

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A14 Appendix

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
< BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDPOWER 98-11 SDSTD1 100-16 SDORCH 100-13 SDSTD3 101-10 HOUSSD1 101-12 SDROOM2 100-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDROOM2 100-15 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 HHPEDAL 105-12 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HHOPEN2 106-9 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HOUSEHH 105-15 CRASH 107-10 CHINA 107-15 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 CABASA 110-12 VOXHHCL 114-12 HOUSCLAP 102-9 BONGOLOW 109-11 BONGOLOW 109-11 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 CONGALOW 109-15 < < < < < < < < BDTEKNO 98-9 BDJAZZ 97-12 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < HOUSESD2 101-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHCLO2 105-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHTGHT1 105-13 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HHOPEN2 106-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 ReverseCym 120-1 < < < < HOUSECOWB 108-13 < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 SDJAZZ2 100-11 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_TECHNO 117-3-1 <

Press the Lower 2 soft button (A/B) twice to select the corresponding Sound and play a key below note F#3.

Press the F1/F2 Soft buttons to select the FULL keyboard mode and press a key anywhere along the keyboard.

You will hear two sounds for each single note played on the right hand.

Drumkits Press Upper 2 (E/F) TWICE to select and activate the Upper 2 section and play a key above note F#3.

If you play with both hands, you will hear two sounds on the right hand and two on the left.

You will hear the sounds of both Upper sections (Upper 1 and Upper 2) play layered across the full keyboard.

Activating Upper 2 introduces a second Sound (SlowString) layered with the first.

56

57 58

59 61

C4 60 63

62

64 66

TURN TO FULL KEYBOARD PLAYING

65

69 71

70

14 Quick Guide

68

67

55

DK_JAZZ2 118-3-1 < < < < < < < < < < < BDJAZZ 97-12 RIMSHOT2 99-10 SDJAZZ3 100-12 < DYNSDJAZZ 100-10 TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHTGHT1 105-13 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 HHOPEN1 105-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 TOMJAZZ 104-11 < TOMJAZZ 104-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_M1 119-3-1

DK_SY77. 120-3-1

BDSTD2 97-15 BDROOM1 97-13 BDELECT1 97-11 BDPOWER 98-11 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMLOW 104-14 TOMHIGH 104-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 BDHOUSE1 97-9 BDSTD2 97-15 SDSTD1 100-16 TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 HOUSECLAP 102-9 COWBELL 108-11 CABASA 110-12 HHCLO1S 105-10 TAMBOURINE 108-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 CRASH 107-10 ROLLSNARE 103-9 RIDECYM 107-13 RIDECUP 107-12 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 TubularBel 15-1 KITCHEN 113-14 KITCHEN 113-14 DARBKLOW 112-16 DARBKHIGH 112-15 BreathNois 122-1

DK_STAND.3 113-4-1 < < < < < < < < < < BDSTD1 97-14 BDSTD2 97-15 RIMSHOT1 99-9 SDORCH 100-13 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < HHTGHT1 105-13 < < < HHOPEN1 105-11 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < <

DK_ROOM1WX 114-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SCSTS3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

SPLIT Keyboard <---- Low 1+Low 2 ----><--------- Upper 1 + Upper 2 --------->

FULL keyboard <------------------------ Upper 1 + Upper 2 ------------------------->

Tables A15

C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A16 Appendix
Drumkits

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51

52 53 54

K760/880SE has a vast selection of instrument ounds, including orchestral, percussion and conmporary musical instruments, organized in 16 ound Groups, each consisting of 16 Banks of p to 16 Sounds in every bank.

Press a SOUND GROUPS button (PIANO GROUP button in the example).

Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).

Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.

The Sound will play across the full keyboard

If the Display Hold (D. HOLD) button is on (LED on), the Sound Group selection display will remain locked, allowing you to select another sound from the same bank. (The D. HOLD button is on by default). If you press ENTER after making the selection, the display will show the newly selected sound without turning off the D. HOLD button.

The Sound Groups display will activate showing 8 Sounds to choose from.

If D. HOLD is off, the display will return to the previous situation showing the newly selected Sound.

56

57 58 59 C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66

Select sounds

Drumkits

69

70

71

12 Quick Guide

68

67

55

DK_POWER1WX 115-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT1WX 116-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 BDSTD1 97-11 BDELECT1 97-11 < SDROOM2 110-15 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE1WX 117-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE 97-9 HOUSERIM 99-11 HOUSSD1 101-12 < SDSTD2 101-9 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSEHH 105-15 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSERIDE 107-11 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < HOUSETCON 109-16 < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 COWBELL 108-11 < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_JAZZWX 118-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDJAZZ 97-12 < SDJAZZ2 100-11 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_BRUSHWX 119-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDSTD2 97-15 < BRUSHTAP 103-13 BRUSHSLAP BRUSHREV 103-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ORCHWX 120-4-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 HHCLO1S 105-10 HHCLO1L 105-9 HHOPEN2 106-9 RIDECYMB 107-13 < BDELECT1 97-11 RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < TIMPANI 48-1 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 FINGERSNAP 113-8 SDJAZZ3 100-12 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 TIMPANI 48-1 < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

< ----------------------- FULL keyboard ----------------------- >

SELECTION DISPLAYS NOT LOCKED

SELECTION DISPLAYS LOCKED

Tables A17

C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < CABASAL 110-13 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< GUIROLONG 113-9 < < < < < < < < FINGERSNAP 113-9 CELESTA 9-1 BARCHIMES 16-2 < DARBKHIGH 112-15 DARBKLOW 112-16 DROP 113-10 WATER 113-12 VOICES1 114-9 VOXTAP 114-13 VOXTIP 114-14 CLAKSON 113-16 DOOR 113-13 RASPYRIDE 116-10 BABYVOX 114-16 EMPTY 128-16

< < < <

< = same as DK_STAND1 113-2-1

A18 Appendix
Drumkits

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51

52 54

53

The headphones jack panel is located on the left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal speakers to allow you to play in total silence without disturbing others in the same room. Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not exclude the internal speakers.

he rear connections panel includes four jacks r control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper. he Volume jack is a non-programmable port for standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaing three pedal jacks are programmable and preet to provide Performance functions.

he pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function ssignable and can be independently enabled or sabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a erformance.

Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.

he default configuration of the pedals is as folws:

l three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be proammed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Connuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume pe).

Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the headphones volume.

56 58

57

Vocal On/Off Sostenuto Damper (sustain) Volume

59 61 63

C4 60 62

64 66

65

Drumkits LAY WITH HEADPHONES

LAY WITH THE PEDALS

69

70 71

10 Quick Guide

68

= = = =

Ped1 Ped2 Damper Volume

67

55

DK_STAND2WX 113-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < < < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ROOM2WX 114-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDSTD3 101-10 < SDROOM2 110-15 < < < < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_POWER2WX 115-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDROOM1 97-13 < SDROOM1 100-14 < SDELECT 100-9 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 TOMROOM 104-12 < TOMROOM 104-12 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_ELECT2WX 116-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDELECT1 97-11 < < < SDSTD3 101-10 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 HOUSEHH 105-15 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_HOUSE2WX 117-5-1 ZAPP 115-10 ZAPP 115-10 < KITCHEN 113-14 SCRATCH1 115-12 < < < RIMSHOT1 99-9 BABYVOX 114-16 < BDHOUSE2 97-10 < SDSTD2 101-9 < SDJAZZ3 100-12 TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < TOMHIGH 104-10 < < < < < < < < < < < < HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 HOUSETCON 109-16 < TIMBALES 110-9 < < < VOXHHCL 114-12 <

DK_RIDE IT 118-5-1

VOLUME

Volume Pedal (continuous)

VOCAL ON/OFF

DAMPER SOSTENUTO

Footswitch (on/off)

Tables A19

ROM-Styles
CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style CC00 PC Style

8 BEAT
32 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Bank 1
8Beat 1 8Beat 2 8Beat 3 8Beat 4 8Beat 5 8Beat 6 8Beat 7 8Beat 8

ROCK
32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Bank 2
Rock 3 Rock 4 Shuffle SlowRock 3 SlowRock 4 Rock 5 Blues SlowBlues

POP Bank 1
32 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 32 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 70' Disco Disco 01 Disco 02 Disco 03 Disco 04 Latin D.1 Latin D.2 Rap BakerPop Harpy PartyPop EuroPop SynthDance SoulB.B. 80' Disco Open Disco

COUNTRY Bank 2
32 120 TheatreOrg 121 Org.March 122 Welkish 123 Organsel 124 Hawaiian 125 KidsMarch 126 Mod.Evngls 127 Praise

8 BEAT
32 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Bank 2
8Beat 9 8Beat 10 8Beat 11 8Beat 12 8Beat 13 SlowBeat SlowBallad 6_8Ballad

FUNK
32 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55

Bank 1
Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3 Funk 4 Funk 5 Funk 6 Funk 7 Funk 8

POP Bank 2

WORLD
33 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Bank 1
Slow Waltz Waltz 1 Waltz 2 Romagna Mazurka RealVienna Orch.Waltz ItalyMarch

16 BEAT
32 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Bank 1
16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 16Beat 5 16Beat 6 16Beat 7 16Beat 8

FUNK
32 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Bank 2
Funk 9 Funk 10 Funk 11 Funk 12 Funk 13 Funk 14 NewAge Fusion1

SWING
32 96 97 98 99

Bank 1
Swing Mid Swing Slow Swing Big Band 1

WORLD
33 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

Bank 2
Cnt.Gospel G.de.Oory CountryBop Cajun Cnt.Rock SteamTrain Cowboy Cnt.Waltz

100 Big Band 2 101 Dixieland 102 Broadway 103 Foxtrot

16 BEAT
32 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Bank 2
16Beat 9 16Beat 10 16Beat 11 16Beat 12 16Beat 13 16Beat 14 16Beat 15 16BtBallad

DANCE1
32 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

Bank 1
TMerengue PianoDance FunkDance DiscoHit FastDance Pulsing SambaDance House

SWING
32

Bank 2

ETHNIC
33 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Bank 1
Twist 1 HullyGully Reggae 1 Reggae 2 PasoDoble Polka Tarantella Pop '60

104 SwingBand 105 BourBonStr 106 EasySwing 107 LatinBand 108 QuickStep 109 BBandXmas 110 Foxtrot 2 111 Shuffle

ROCK
32 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Bank 1
Rock 1 Rock 2 R. and B. SlowRock 1 SlowRock 2 Rock'nRoll Boogie LovelyRock

DANCE1
32 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

Bank 2
DigitHall Rap'nShift DownBeat DiscoFun HeavyDance Techno DancePop DiscoPop

COUNTRY Bank 1
32 112 Gospel 1 113 Sacred 114 Gospel 2 115 Western 116 Bluegrass1 117 Bluegrass2 118 Country 119 March USA

ETHNIC
33 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Bank 2
Bajon Mex. 3_4 Charleston Germ.Polka Boehmisch Twist 2 Folk 2_4 Polka 6_8

A20 Appendix

Styles/Style Performances IALOG WINDOWS

User Styles/Songs
Song

everal types of dialog exist; generally an Style-Perf. option requires selection one or more parameters CC00 PC window Style CC00 PC CC00 PC or User Style CC00 PC LATIN 1 and Bank 1 36 ENTER 00 1 examples follow. 55 00 quire modifications confirmation with or a soft button. USER Some
33 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Bossa Nova SoftBossa ChaCha 1 ChaCha 2 Rhumba 1 Rhumba 2 Rhumba 3 Rhumba 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 44 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

LATIN 1
33 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Bank 2
Stand.Tango Samba Beguine Salsa 1 Salsa 2 Cumbia 1 Cumbia 2

USER 2 Select one of the options with the cursor buttons.

Tango 44 08 Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.

ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.

09 10 11 12 13 14

LATIN 2
33 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55

Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor. Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad. 15 Bank 1 ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications. USER 3 Press
44 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

CC00 PC Song-Perf. 64 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Merengue 1 Merengue 2 Mambo 1 Mambo 2 DiscoSamba Disco Cha Meneito 1 Meneito 2 El Tic Tac Makarena Caliente 1 Caliente 2 Limbo

LATIN 2
33 56 57 58 59 60

Bank 2 Press the soft button corresponding to the option required. USER 4
44

ARNINGS

hese are similar to61 theGipsy dialog windows, but they do not display options to 29 select. They communicate pecific messages to user (wrong operations, information on the current 62 the Guaracha 30 operation, etc.).
63 Calypso 40 31 CC00 PC User Style-Perf. 00 01 02 03 04

Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.

05 06 07

On MIDI Common channel only

8 User Guide

Tables A21

Performances (Real)
CC00 PC Performances CC00 PC Performances

Effects
CC16 DSP A/B select 0 1 48 Eff1 (Reverbs GrpA) Eff1 (Reverbs GrpB) 0 1 2 8 9 10 16 NotInLove 2010 CC Marsians Last James Ole Devil BigBrass Runaway Mozart 40 Saxy Samba Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Choir Vocal SynthPad1 SynthPad2 Ham n'Bass Swingin' Soft Organ PercusOrgan PrettySplt BluesSplit Jazz Split HrmoncSplt 32 40 41 48 56 57 64 65 72 73 80 88 89 Hall 1 Hall 2 Hall 3 Warm Hall Long Hall St. Concert Chamber Studio Room 1 Studio Room 2 Studio Room 3 Club Room 1 Club Room2 Club Room3 Vocal Metal Vocal Plate 1 Plate 2 Church Mountains Falling CC16 DSP A/B select 64 65 48 Eff2 (Mod. GrpA) Eff2 (Mod. GrpB) 0 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56 57 36 37 60 61 28 64 65 80 81 82 96 97 Mono Delay 1 Mono Delay 2 Stereo Delay 1 Stereo Delay 2 Multitap Delay 1 Multitap Delay 2 Ping Pong Pan Mix Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Ensemble 1 Ensemble 2 Phaser 1 Phaser 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Chorus Delay 1 Chorus Delay 2 Flanger Delay 1 Flanger Delay 2 Dubbing Distortion Distortion Delay Pitch Shifter 1 Pitch Shifter 2 Shift Delay Rotary 1 Rotary 2

Group 1
48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GrandPiano E.Grand1 Rhodx1 FM Piano Vibes EP PadX OrcheXtra Church E.X.Tines PianoWarm SplitAhead RagIntime Synth2X TwiceSaw CPandPad StartTrack StayWithMe Ensemble TrumpetEns Titanic Iceberg Hurts 2 be WK Time Dolce Vita Buonasera1 Buonasera2 FallinLove NoM'orGuns Europa San Tana Don't Shoot Ghostrider

Group 5
48 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Mantovani Clarinet Ahnsemble Blatter LeroyBrown MezzoPiano MezzoForte SambaParis

CC48 Rev Eff type select

CC48 Mod. Eff type select

Group 2
48 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Group 6
48 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

Group 3
48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Group 7
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

104 Early 1 105 Early 2 106 Early 3 112 Stereo P.Model

Group 4
48 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Group 8
48 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

104 EQ Jazz 105 EQ Pops 106 EQ Rock 107 EQ Classic

On MIDI Common channel only

A22 Appendix

HE DISPLAYS Wavetables EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS

CELESTA NEWPAD ACU_RIDE SWITCH FRETLES HARP STRATO STEL_GTR ORJAZZ_S OR_THEAT BARCHIME ICE_RAIN KPICK MARIMBA METRO MARTEL2 RHODX_L RHODX_H THEATR_L THEATR_H WUROLD_L WUROLD_H BASSFRET BASSPICK BASSCONT ARMONICI CLICK_BS REZOBASS BLEEP_BS DBASS HIT_BASS FINGBMS FRETW WEDGBASS SYNBASS TONE BOSMIC BRASS_T ABRASS BRASS_T ; ABRASS MARI_GM MARIM STRINGK ORCHIT CHOIRA KALI_GM

VOX_HHCL STEL_GTR HARMGT_H LOGDRUM MARTELLO HOUS_SD1 VOX_TAP CLAVINET HARMGT_L CRAS_ORC AGOGO HOUS_SD2 VOX_TIP BIRDS DIST_GTR KNELGT_L BABYVOX HOUSCLAP WATER GUN_SHOT JAZZ_GT2 APPLAUSE Edit Effects Edit MIDI BD_ELECT1 HOUSEHH WHISTLE ELICOPT GTR_KURZ HARPSI_S BD_HOUS1 HOUSRIDE WIND_CHI PHONE_1 ICE_RAIN VIOLA BD_HOUS2 JNG_BELL WOODBLCK PHONE_2 KOTO VIOLIN BD_JAZZ MARACAS DIGIT1WV SCRATCH1 OR_THEAT FKG_G_WS BD_ROOM1 MT_SURDO DIGIT2WV SCRATCH2 ORROCK_F GT_HARMO Edit Mixer Edit Controllers/Pads BD_STD_1 OP_SURDO 1685DRAW SEA SAX_BARI PIK_GRT1 BD_STD_2 QUICA_HI EL_PIAN7 TICKTACK VOC-DUKN PIK_GRT2 BD_STD_3 QUICA_LO ORGAN_2W ZAPP FLANGED WHAWHA1 BD_TECNO RIDE_CUP ORGAN_3W ELGTR_S2 BANJO WHAWHA2 BONG_SLH RIDE_CYM ORGAN_4W FAGOTTO KALIUMBA WHAWHA3 BONGO_HI RIMSHOT1 FROG_WV FLHARD_H SHAMISEN WHAWHA4 Edit Tracks Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit BONGO_LO RIMSHOT2 ORGAN_5W FLHARD_L SITAR ORCH_HIT BRUS_REV ROLL_SN ORGAN_6W FLUGE_S2 GLOCKEN PIK_GTWS BRUS_RIG SD_ELECT VIBES_2W FNKGSTOP LPN_KNH PIPE_S2 BRUSHSLP SD_JAZZ1 E_PIANO4 SCRAP_GT ELPN_KNL TROMBO_K BRUSHTAP E_PIANO5 HARP FLICORNO ORG_PIP1 Edit Style/Song SD_JAZZ2 Edit General CABASA SD_JAZZ3 FORMANT JAZZ_GT1 GTR_MUTE MARIMBA CABASA_L SD_ORCH ORGAN_1W MUTE_TR1 ELPN_MKS ORROCK_S CASTAGNT SD_ROOM1 PIP_ORG3 SPECTR_1 RHODES_H MANDOL2 CHINA SD_ROOM2 SQUARE NOISE RHODES_L BD_POWER CLAKSON SD_STD1 PULSE_O5 OBOE TRUMPET ACO_GTR2 Edit Disk / Preload Edit Sound CLAVES SD_STD2 PULSE_10 OCT_JGT VIBES STELGTR2 CON_H_SL SD_STD3 PULSE_15 PANFLUTE XILOPHNO PIANO_H CON_L_SL SD_STD4 PULSE_20 PICKBASS ACCORD2 PIANOL2 CONGA_HI SMASH PULSE_25 SOFT_SAX BRASS BRASS_2 CONGA_LO SPLASH PULSE_30 SOPRANO VOCAL_DU PIANO_D COWBELL STICK PULSE_35 TENORSAX VOCAL_BA GRNDPLUS CRASH TAMB_SLP PULSE_40 PIZZICATO FRHORN_H CP80_2 DARBK_HI TAMBOURI PULSE_45 TROMBONE FRHORN_L RHODX Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from DARBK_LO TIMB_LOW SAW VOCALBOY ELPNKURZ ELPNKURZ to 8 tracks of the current Performance. DOLLYVOX TIMBALES SINUS STRINGS A_MUSETT WUROLD Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at DROP TIMPANI SUPERSAW ACBASS_L PLECTRA FMPIANO1 e same time.FINGERSP The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative TOM_ELEC TRIANGLE ACBASS_H MANDOL CLAVINET roup name appears on the main display. TUB_WAVE GUIRO_LG TOM_HIGH HARMACBS PKBSMUTE VIBES GUIRO_SH TOM_JAZZ Performances ACCORDIO have BAGPIPE 16_1DRAW RP_PIPEfor the yle-Performances and Programmable a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks TOM_LOW ACO_STR ELBASS_H ORJAZZ_S THEATORG eyboard and 8HH_CLO1L engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up HH_CLO1S TOM_ROOM ARMONICA EL_BASS_L BD_ORCH ORGAN316 32 tracks. HH_OPEN1 TRIAN_LO BARCHIME THUMBASS FINGBELL VOICESA ometimes, a track is not assigned to a SK760/880SE Sound, but it controls an expander connected to HH_PEDAL TRIAN_SH BOTTLE HARMELBS CELLO ACOUSGTR e MIDI OUT. HH_TGHT1 In this case, VIBRASLP MIDI is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers BRS_RIP BASSLAP_H HH_CLO2 ELECTBAS MSB-LSB) on the main display when SK760/880SE is set toBASSLAP_L Multi mode. InHH_OPEN2 Full or Upper/Lower modes HH_TGHT2 VOICES_1 CASSOTTO JAZZ_GT1 nly the SoundHOU_COWB Bank name appears, and Bank Select numbers are RP_2_STR not shown. VOICES_2the ProgramChange CHOIR FRETLES DOOR HOU_TCON VOICES_3 CLARINET FLUTE KITCHEN CEMBALO

very edit environment has aHOUS_RIM relative icon: PIANO

RACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS

6 User Guide

Tables A23

Wavetables
KALI GM_DIST ; CRUNCH STRATO CRUNCH MUTEDCGT GOFUNK FARFIS HAMDRAW HAMPERC HAMCLICK FISA GLASSES TELEPH PRPSAWJM TRIAN_JM CLVWAVJM PULSE_JM MINSAWJM MINPULJM DIGI1 DIGI2 SNAPSYN SEQ_TONE SQ_WOODY SQ_STICK INHARM1 INHARM2 INHARM5 INHARM9 MBIRA BOINK GRING THIN BUZ1 LFX_SYN SHARP SHAPE RDPHAS STRNNOIS SYNTH_7 12STRWAV MKS_80 BT_SYN FMISH SQ_STLDR BOSS FORM1 FORM3 FORM4 FORM5 FORM7 FV GLASVOX WAVE44 AWALA PANCH PPG2 LOGSTRT MARIMVOX MY_VOX PAD_01 PAD_02 PLUCK_PD IMPACT SEQSNP SPECT1 SPECT3 VOXNOIZ MECH_LP MECH_WAV SQ_COOK2 12STRWAV ABRASS ABRASS1 ARMONICI AWALA BASSCONT BASSFRET BASSPICK BLEEP_BS BOINK BOSMIC BOSS BRASS_T BT_SYN BUZ1 CHOIRA CLICK_BS CLVWAVJM CRUNCH CRUNCH DBASS DIGI1

DIGI2 FARFIS FINGBMS FISA FMISH FORM1 FORM3 FORM4 FORM5 FORM7 FRETW FV GLASSES GLASVOX GM_DIST GOFUNK GRING HAMCLICK HAMDRAW HAMPERC HIT_BASS IMPACT INHARM1 INHARM2 INHARM5 INHARM9 KALI KALI_GM LFX_SYN LOGSTRT MARI_GM MARIM MARIMVOX MBIRA MECH_LP MECH_WAV MINPULJM MINSAWJM MKS_80 MUTEDCGT MY_VOX ORCHIT PAD_01 PAD_02 PANCH PLUCK_PD PPG2

PRPSAWJM PULSE_JM RDPHAS REZOBASS SEQ_TONE SEQSNP SHAPE SHARP SNAPSYN SPECT1 SPECT3 SQ_COOK2 SQ_STICK SQ_STLDR SQ_WOODY STRATO STRINGK STRNNOIS SYNBASS SYNTH_7 TELEPH THIN TONE TRIAN_JM VOXNOIZ WAVE44 WEDGBASS ACOUST_KIK(1) BD_70_F(1) BD_70_P(1) BD_AC_1A(1) BD_AC_1B(1) BD_AC_1DYN(1) BD_AC_2A(1) BD_AC_2B(1) BD_AC_2DYN(1) BD_DEEP_DN(2) BD_DMG_SD(2) BD_DMGD_LN(1) BD_DN1_ZP(2) BD_DN2_HI(2) BD_DN2_ZP(2) BD_DN3_HI(2) BD_DN3_SD(2) BD_DN3_ZP(2) BD_DNC2_LN(1) BD_DNC3(1)

BD_KIK(1) BD_ROCK(2) BD_Z1_HHC(2) BD_Z1_LAYH(2) BD_Z1_LAYL(2) BD_Z2(1) BD1(1) BROKENOISE(2) DNC_BD1(1) FALLING_BD(2) LNG_BD1(1) HOU_TOM(1) HOUSETCON(1) TIMP_JM(1) TIMPANI(1) TOM_10_DYN(2) TOM_13_DYN(2) TOM_14(1) TOMHIGH2(2) WAYAW(2) 909_SD_LNG(2) BEAT_SD(1) BORDER_1(2) BORDER_2(2) D_SD(1) EFF_RIM(1) EFF_SD2(1) HATORSNARE(2) NOISNARE1(2) NOISNARE2(2) NOISNARE3(2) NOISNARE4(2) RIM_1(1) RIM_2(1) RIM_70(1) ROLL_70(1) ROLL_F(1) ROLL_F_LN(2) SD_909(1) SD_BB(1) SD_BR(1) SD_BR_DYN(2) SD_F70(1) SD_FSN(1) SD_HEAVY1(2) SD_HEAVY2(2) SD_HEAVY3(2)

SD_HEAVY4(2) SD_P70(1) SD_ROCK(2) SD_SH1(1) SD_SH2(1) SD_SH3(1) SD_STD1(1) SD_STD2(1) SD_STD3(1) SD_STD4(1) SD1(2) SD2(2) SD3(2) TEKBRUSH(2) 808_CL_HH(1) 808_OC_HH(1) 808_OPHHLP(1) 9091_CHH(1) 9091_OCHH(1) 9092_CHH(1) 9092_OPHH(1) HH_CL1_DR(1) HH_CL2_DR(1) HH_LOOP_CL(1) HH_LOOP_OP(1) HH_OP_DR(1) HH_PED_DR(1) HHCL_70(1) HHFT_70(1) HHOP_70(1) NOISE_C1HH(1) NOISE_C2HH(1) NOISE_OPHH(1) NOISE_OPRV(1) CRASH_18(1) RIDE(1) RIDECUP2(1) CLAP(1) CLAP_MIX(1) COWBL2(1) DYNA_PERC(2) DYTEK_TIMB(2) HARD_CLAP(1) TOMLOW2(2) Glasses(1) GLASSALG(2) LONG_REVRS(1)

PHONEWAVE(1) REVERSEBD1(1) REVERSEBD2(1) REVERSEBD3(1) REVERSHRT1(1) REVERSHRT2(1) REVERSHRT3(1) REVERSNAR1(1) REVERSNAR2(1) REVERSNAR3(1) REZO_IT(3) SCRATCH3(1) SCRATCH4(1) SCRATCH5(1) SCRATCH6(1) WEEP(1)

A24 Appendix

LPHANUMERIC RECOGNIZED ENTRY CONTROL CHANGE MES- CONTROL CHANGE ON TRACKS (MIDI CONTROLLERS) Bank change. name writingSAGES situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the CC00,32 keyboard activates as a source of
CC06,38 CC07 CC10 CC11 Data Entry.

phanumericalAdata where eachmessage note of the centrala zone of the keyboard to a letter, symControlChange activates Controlller, CC01corresponds Modulation. ol or number. determined Use the / by cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone. the first ControlChange value. The ControlChange consists of three parts:
Main Volume. Pan (panorama). Expression. Vocal Volume (Vocal Processor) Vocal On/Off (Vocal Processor) Mode Recal (Vocal Processor)

status byte - (status) determines the status of the ControlChange message.

ALPHANUMERIC IN NAME-WRITING MODE data byte 1 - (value 1) CONFIGURATION MIDI Controller actiCC12 vated by the ControlChange message. This CC13 is the number byMODIFY whichAthe ControlChanges E FOLLOWING EXAMPLE SHOWS HOW TO PERRMANCE NAME: are identified in the following tables. CC14

data byte 2 - (value 2)button. value of the 4. activated CC15 characters Voice Set recall (Vocal Press the STORE PERFORMANCE Insert the desired using the key-Processor) MIDI Controller. An entry zone appears showing the status of board. Each note corresponds to a characCC16,48 Effects selection the current Performance: ter, processing command or number.
CC17,49 Effects volume

Two options appear below the name (Caps CC18,50 General Purpose (Tuning control) On/Caps Off and Insert/Overwrite) which CC32or disabled BankSelect LSB. can be enabled with notes D2 and D#2 respectively. CC64 Damper pedal. The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard CC66 Sostenuto (sustain) pedal. zone provide word processing functions:
CC67 CC71 CC72 Soft pedal.

Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate the Change name... function. A second entry zone appears where a name can be inserted. The current name appears selected (shown in negative highlight).

D2: D#2: E2: F2: G2:

Resonance. CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off; Release Time.

INS/OVER - toggles between CC73 Attack Time. Insert / Overwrite mode;

CC74 Filter Cutoff Frequency. SPACE - inserts a space

between two entries; CC80 One Shot control DELETE - cancels the selected CC81 On/Off control
CC85

character or the one after; the previous character;

Voice Mute mode (Vocal Processor)

< (BACKSPACE) - cancels CC91 Effect 1 send (E1, reverb depth).

CC93 Effect 2 send (E2, modulation depth).

To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.

CC98,99 NRPN button and cor5. Move back with the cursor rect wrongCC100-101 characters.RPN In Overwrite mode, the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight).

6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and close the window. On MIDI Common channel only

4 User Guide

Tables A25

93 98,99 100,101

Chorus depth NRPN RPN

93 Chorus depth (send) 98,99 NRPN 100,101 RPN Cntrl 80 (ONE SHOT): 0 Fill>< 1 Fill< 2 Fill> 8 Intro 16 End 24-27 Variations 0-1-2-3 40 Key start 61 Rotary 1 slow/fast [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 slow/fast [GrpB] 64 Start/Stop 66,67 Tempo inc. dec. 68,69 Perf inc. dec. Cntrl 81 OFF [0,63] ON[64,127] 0,1,2 Fill><-Fill<-Fill> 61 Rotary 1 (Off=slow) [GrpA] 62 Rotary 2 (Off=slow) [GrpB]

0 = Fill>< Off, 64 = Fill>< On 1 = Fill< Off, 65 = Fill< On 2 = Fill> Off, 66 = Fill> On

61 = Rotary 1 Slow, 125 = Rotary Fast 62 = Rotary 2 Slow, 126 = Rotary 2 Fast

Program Change True number System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages Song Position Song Select Tune Clock Commands Active sensing All Sound Off Reset All Contr. Local ON OFF All Note Off Notes

0-127 ***** o o o o o o o o o o o

0-127 o o o o o o o o o o o

0-127

Start, Stop Continue

These messages are available on the Common channel only (1) Vocal Processor Controllers Mode 1 OMNI ON - POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF - POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON - MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF - MONO

o: YES x: NO

A26 Appendix

MIDI Implementation Chart

Manufacturer: Generalmusic S.p.A. FUNCTION Transmitted Default Changed Multimode X X 0-127 ***** o o x o o Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Contr. Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) o o o 0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16,48 17,49 18,50 64 66 67 71 72 73 74 85 91 Bank change Modulation Data Entry Volume Pan Expression Controller Vocal Volume (1) Vocal On/Off (1) Mode Recall (1) Voice Set Recall (1) Effects selection Effects volume Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal Resonance Release time Attack time Filter 1 cut-off freq. Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth (send) o o 0-127 Multimode X X 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Recognized Model: SK760/880 Special Edition Remarks

Version: 1.00

7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack. The auxiliary outputs emit dry sounds (i.e. with no effects). 8. Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 1, 2 (audio inputs for Microphone or Line signals and Gain controls for the input signals). 9. Power On/Off Switch. 10. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power cord into this socket.

Basic Channel

2 MIDI IN; 2 THRU; 2 MIDI OUT EXTRA COMMON/CHORD CH.

Mode

10

Default Messages Altered

9 10

Note Number

True voice

true voice depends on selected sound

After Touch

Keys Chs

Pitch Bender

Control Change

SCSI port. Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume. Pedalboard port. Computer port (serial connector for direct computer connection (Apple Macintosh or IBM PC and compatibles). MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/ B, MIDI OUT A/B). Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard).

0,32 1 6,38 7 10 11 12 13 14 15

2 34

18,50 64 66 67

Tuning control Damper Pedal Sustain (Sostenuto) Soft pedal

EAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)

Bank change recognized on common channel, only in reception: Bank-Change P.change C#0 C#32 PC 32 0 0-95 Internal Styles 36 0 0-7 Int. Style Perfs 40 0 0-7 User Style Perfs 44 0 0-31 User Styles 48 0 0-63 Global Presets 55 0 0-15 Songs 64 0 0-7 Song-Presets C#16 DSP select 0 Eff1 Reverb GroupA 1 Eff1 Reverb Group B 64 Eff2 Mod. Group A 65 Eff2 Mod. Group B C#48 Eff Type select (See Effects charts for selection values of individual Eff types)

2 User Guide

85 91

Voice Mute Mode (1) Reverb depth

Velocity

Note ON Note OFF

Tables A27

SK760/880 Special Edition System Exclusive Implementation

UNIVERSAL NON-REAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES
SAMPLE DUMP STANDARD
The transfer of data relating to the samples contained in the sounds of the instrument ias based on the standard protocol, called SDS (Sample Dump Standard). The formats of the various commands available are as follows:

ACK (handshake message):

F0H 7EH cc 7FH pp F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID ACK ID packet number EOX

NACK (handshake message):

F0H 7EH cc 7EH pp F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID NACK ID packet number EOX

CANCEL (handshake message):

F0H 7EH cc 7DH pp F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID CANCEL ID packet number EOX

WAIT (handshake message):

F0H 7EH cc 7CH pp F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID WAIT ID packet number EOX

DUMP HEADER:
F0 7E cc 01 ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj F7 cc ss ss ee ff ff ff gg gg gg hh hh hh ii ii ii jj = = = = = = = = device ID Sample number (LSB first) Sample format(# of significant bits from 8-28) Sample period in nanoseconds (LSB first) Sample length in words (LSB first) Sustain loop start point word number (LSB first) Sustain loop end point word number (LSB first) Loop type (00=forward,01=backward/forward,7F=loop off)

DUMP REQUEST:
F0H 7EH cc 03H ss ss F7H = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DUMP REQUEST ID Request sample (LSB first) EOX

DATA PACKET:
F0H 7EH cc 02H kk <120 bytes> ll F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Non-Real Time extension device ID DATA PACKET ID running packet count (0-127) data (7 bit data format) checksum (XOR of 7E cc kk <120 bytes>) EOX

A28 Appendix

DEVICE INQUIRY GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS To be able to identify a MIDI device, the following two messages are utilized; the first used for the inquiry:
F0H = System Exclusive Message status Be sure that your = local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before 7EH Non-Real Time extension = device ID connecting cc to the mains. 06 H = INQUIRY ID DC power01cannot H =be used Identity to power Request this instrument. F7H = EOX If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall and the second for the device response: outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.

ower source INQUIRY MESSAGE:

andling theF0 power cord 7E cc 06 02 mm ff ff dd dd ss ss ss ss F7

cc the power cord = or itsdevice Never touch plugIDwith wet hands. mm = Manufactures Sistem Exclusive id code ff on ff the cord to = family code (14 bits, LSB first) Never pull remove Device it from the wall socket, always pull the plug. dd dd = Device family member code (14 bits, LSB first) ss ss ss ss = the power Softwarecord. revision (format device specific) Never forcibly bend If the power cord is scarred, REAL cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or UNIVERSAL TIME SYSTEM MESSAGES source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified DEVICE CONTROL technician. These messages are used to control the general functions of the system, without refering to a specific MIDI channel and, therefore, inserted in the

RESPONSE MESSAGE:

context of the Universal messages. water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument

Do not allow the instrument. F0H liquids = to penetrate System Exclusive Message status Do not place containers of liquids on the instru7FH or liquids = Real Time extension ment. If water penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at cc = device ID once, and contact the store where theIDunit was purchased. 04 H = Device Control 01 H = Master Volume ID As a general never open vv vvprecaution, = Volume (LSB first)the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
F7H = EOX

Master Volume:

the instrument plays in an abnormal way SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store ADDRESS DATA INTERFACE

where it was purchased. The MIDI System Exclusive capabilities of the WK Series instruments allow you to manipulate all parts of the instruments memory from a computer system. Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other The following reference to the SysEx protocol used by the WK Series instruments. This Data Address Interface is based on two principal unexpected damage is ora accident. functions: SET and GET. SET is used to set the contents of some of the instruments resources while GET is used to withdraw them.
relative checksums.

mportant notes At the reception of a GET message, the instrument replies with an appropriate SET message containing the values of the requested data and

Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it. status data EOX Before turning the instrument, be sure to set to a reasonable GET on F0 2F 3c 00 id aa1 aa2 aa3the ss1volume ss2 ss3 cc F7 level (master volume SET F0 2F 3c 01 id cf aa1 aa2 aa3 dd1 ... ddn cc F7 slider at about two thirds of the course). F0H = System Exclusive Message status Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC units; this will or malfunction. 3cH help to prevent = damage Command ID: 3 RealTime, c = Device ID (0-F) Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a aa1:3 = soft, dry cloth. ss1:3 = = Never usedd1 industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they ddn = may damage cc the instrument = finish. F7H = Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick IMPORTANT: when parameters have positive values that exceed 127 (=7FH), always enter f=2 in the cf field of the SET stream and successionEXTREMELY as thisthe places an undue onexample: the electronic transform data into nibble formatload as in the 134 = 0x86 components. becomes 0x08 0x06.
N.B.: in the following address map, the undefined value xx that parameterizes some of the addresses is the number relating to the structure (typically track or note).
cf = Get subfunction / Set subfunction Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0:1), f = Data Format (0:4) 1 c=1 checksum present, c=0 absent; starting address code (MSB first) amount of required data bytes (MSB first) Data byte : first data byte to be sent Data byte : last data byte to be sent checksum ( optional ) EOX ( End Of Exclusive )

H/01 H = eneral user00 maintenance id =

User Guide

System Exclusive A29

EXAMPLES OF EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES AND CHECKSUM CALCULATIONS (relating to the structure of the Address Data Interface) <Example 1> : The setting for the 1st Effect Type of Group A on Hall 3 using the common channel 7, the format 0 (7 bit data value) and without checksum. According to the address map relating to the Performance Parameters -EFFECTS A the address is 00 13 00H (effctnr1) and the value relating to HALL3 is 02H; therefore the set streams is as follows:

F0 (1)

2F 36 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 13 00 address

02 F7 data (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (6=7 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX

<Example 2> : The setting for the Attack of track 11 to +13 using common channel 2 (N.B. the 1st channel is 0 ), format 0 (7 bit data value) and with checksum. According to the address map relating to Performance Parameters - T_SLIDER the address relating to track 11 (the first track is 0) is 0A 1C 00H (Attack) and the value to set is 4DH; therefore the set stream is as follows:

F0 2F 31 (1) (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

10 (6)

0A 1C 00 address

4D cc=?? F7 data checksum (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=1(Yes checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX

The checksum value is obtained with an XOR of all the bytes starting from the GeneralMusic ID (2FH) included; using ^ as the operator XOR ( OR Exclusive ), then: cc=checksum = 2F ^ 31 ^ 01 ^ 00 ^ 10 ^ 0A ^ 1C ^ 00 ^ 4D = 54 the message to send is:
F0 2F 31 01 00 10 0A 1C 00 4D 54 F7 .

<Example 3> : Setting the M.Transpose to -6 using common channel 2, format 0 (7 bit data value) with and without checksum. According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters - GLOBSET the address is 00 09 02H (transpose) and the value to set is 246=18=12H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows:

F0 (1)

2F 31 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 09 02 address

12 F7 data (7)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0( No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)EOX

with the checksum, the stream will be:

F0 2F 31 01 00 10 00 09 02 12 16 F7 .

<Example 4> : setting the parameter FltCutoff of the group AUDIOIN1 to 147 ( >127 ) on command channel 2 and format 2 ( data in nibble ) with and without checksum. According to the address map relating to Global Parameters - AUDIOIN1 the address is 00 0B 05H (FltCutoff) and the value to set in nibble format is, 09 03H; infact 147=93H, therefore the value is sliced in two nibbles 9 and 3 obtaining 09 03H; therefore the set stream without checksum is as follows:

F0 (1)

2F 31 (2) (3)

01 (4)

00 (5)

02 (6)

00 0B 05 address

09 03 F7 data (7)

(1)Exclusive Status

A30 Appendix

AM RESET

BATTERY DISCHARGED MESSAGE If the instrument has been left turned off for a you want to recall the factory settings, you can long period of time, the battery will slowly disset the backed RAM. charge. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter with the checksum, the stream will be: When the battery discharges completely, it causthe Edit General menu. F0 2F 31 01 00 12 00 0B 05 09 03 09 F7 . es the total loss of all user programmed data. <Example 5> : To know the value of the parameter HighGain If theofbattery the Equalizer hasusing lost common its charge channel completely, 9 and format turn0 (7 bit data value). According to the address map relating to the Global Parameters EQUALIZER the addrress is 00 00 01H (HighGain) and the size is 00 00 01H; ing the instrument on will show the following therefore, the get stream is as follows: message:
(2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (1=2 device ID) (4)Set Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0 ( No checksum), f=2 (nibble) (7)EOX

F0 (1)

2F 38 (2) (3)

00 (4)

00 (5)

00 00 01 address

00 00 01 size

F7 (6)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(3=RealTime) + device ID (8=9 device ID) (4)Get Subfunction (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6) EOX

The message cancels after 2/3 the value requested If, for example, the value of the parameter equals 1 dB, the instrument will respond with theautomatically appropriate Set stream containing Press the soft button F4 to select the Restore and with the checksum; therefore, the stream returned will be: seconds. all command. The following dialogue window F0 2F 38 01 00 10 00 00 01 0D 0A F7. After the message cancels, be sure to save all of is displayed. your edited work to disk until after the battery has REFERENCE TABLE sufficiently charged. GLOBAL PARAMETERS Leave the instrument on for a few hours to reMIXER EQUALIZER charge the battery. One hour of charge time corAddress(H) Size (H) Range(H) responds Parameter Description to approximately one day of Default use - the 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 18 LowGain -12 -> +12 [dB] 0EH= 2dB charge remains for approximately Press ENTER to01 confirm 00 the00 initialization, 00 00 01 00 or 18 battery HighGain -12 active -> +12 [dB] 0DH= 1dB 00 00 02 00 00 01 00 0C LowFrequency 100 -> 400 [Hz] 2=150KHz 15 days of non-use. ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the pro00 00 03 00 01 00 3.0 -> 15.0 [KHz] 0 = 3KHz foresee leaving the instrument turned off cedure is confirmed, the 00 instrument can be 0C If you HighFrequency SCORE CONTROL played after few seconds. for a long period of time, be sure to save all userAddress(H) Size (H) Range(H) programmed Parameter Description Default data to disk to safeguard your data 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 04 video_display 2 01 automatic erasure dis00 01 01 00 00 01 00 03 against lyrics_fonts char sizedue to battery 00 (if video_display=3) charge.
00 01 02 00 00 01 00 15 view_mode monitor bkgrnd col 00 GENERAL CONTROLS

Address(H)
00 02 00 00 02 01

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
01 01 05 05

Parameter
dynamic a.touch

Description

Default
3=Medium 3=Medium

ARRANGE MODE

Address(H)
00 03 00 00 03 01 00 03 02 00 03 03 00 03 05 00 03 09 00 03 0B

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 03 00 00 00 15 01 02 04 04 01 01 6C

Parameter
FixCh_Mode ChordMode1 ChordMode2 ChordMode3 DynamArrg Autobacking Chord_split

Description
on/off Up/low-multi (Auto chord mode) Full keyboard (Auto chord mode) Fix chord mode on/off on/off

Default
01 01 03 01 00 01 3BH = 59

(GENERAL CONTROLS) FOOTSWITCH POLARITY

Address(H)
00 04 00

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 01

Parameter
Footswitch[1]

Description
0=Normally closed, 1=open

Default
0=NormClosd

Introduction

System Exclusive A31

00 04 01 00 04 02

00 00 01 00 00 01

00 00

01 01

Footswitch[2] Footswitch[3]

0=Normally closed, 1=open 0=Normally closed, 1=open

0=NormClosd 0=NormClosd

(GENERAL) DISPLAY CONTROLS

Address(H)
00 05 00 00 05 01 00 05 02

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00

Parameter

Description
0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = English, 1 = Italiano 0 = Positive 1 = Negative

Default
0=English 0=English 0=Positive

01ChordLanguage 01Help_Language 01Display_Mode

(GENERAL) NOTE TUNING/SCALE ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description
xx 06 00 xx 06 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 01 7F 7F coarse finetune

Default
0 -> 127 -63 -> +63;

(GENERAL) TUNING/SCALE

Address(H)
00 07 00 00 07 01 MIDI CLOCK

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
01 00 7F 0D

Parameter
Master_pitch kbd_scale

Description
-63 -> +63; 0 -> +13

Default
0 0=Equal

Address(H)
00 08 00 GLOBAL SET

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 01

Parameter
MidiClock

Description
Int/Ext

Default
0=Internal

Address(H)
00 09 02

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 30

Parameter
transpose

Description
-24 +24 [semitones]

Default
18H = 0

MIDI GENERAL SET

Address(H)
00 0A 00 00 0A 01 00 0A 02 00 0A 03 00 0A 04 00 0A 05 00 0A 06 00 0A 07 00 0A 08 00 0A 09 00 0A 0A

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 02 02 01 01 01 01 7F 01 01 01

Parameter
Common_ch Common_In Common_Out Midi_lock Clock_Send Midi_Merge MidiInTran MidiFixedDyn Midi_sysex SMF saveFrm Bank_select

Description
0=Off; 1->10 = chan 1->16 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B

Default
0 = Off 1 = In A 1 = Out A 1 = On 1 = On 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = On 0=GMidi 1

0 -> 127 0=Excl System OFF, 1=ON 0 = GMidi, 1 = smfformat

(GENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 1

Address(H)
00 0B 00 00 0B 01 00 0B 02 00 0B 03 00 0B 04 00 0B 05 00 0B 06 00 0B 07 00 0B 08 00 0B 09

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7F 01 7F 7F 05 BF 7f 3E 03 01

Parameter
Volume EffGroup Eff1Send Eff2Send FltType FltCutoff FltResonance Pan AnalogOut Mic/Line

Description
0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 191, Use nibblized if > 127 0 -> 127 -31 -> +31 On/Off

Default
7FH =127 0 40H = 64 40H = 64 0 0 0 3EH = 31 0 0

(GENERAL) MIC/LINE INPUT 2

Address(H)
00 0C 00 00 0C 01 00 0C 02 00 0C 03 00 0C 04 00 0C 05 00 0C 06

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Parameter
Volume EffGroup Eff1Send Eff2Send FltType FltCutoff FltResonance

Description
0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0 -> 127 0->191, Use nibblized if >127 0 -> 127

Default
7FH=127 0 40H= 64 40H= 64 0 0 0

7F 01 7F 7F 05 BF 7f

A32 Appendix

0C 07 00 00 01 MPORTANT00 PRELIMINARY 00 0C 08 00 00 NOTES 01 00 0C 09 00 00 01

00 00 00
3

3E 03 01

Pan AnalogOut Mic/Line

-31 -> +31 On/Off

3EH= 31 0 0

MIDI_CHANNELS ( xx =NOTES CHANNEL =0 - 1F )YOUR INSTRUMENT: BSERVE THESE IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY BEFORE USING Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description VOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near mag- Default xx 0D 00 00 00 01 01 02 Midi_IN_Port 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1=In A ets, telephones, or 01 other sources of electromagnetic The disk contents be damaged.= xx 0D 00 00 01 01 10 fields.Midi_IN_Ch 1->10could = channels 1->16 xx OPTIONAL 0D 02 00 00 01 DISK INSTALLED01 02 1= MidiOutto A, operate 2= MidiOut B 1=Out A ODELS WITH HARD theMidi_OUT_Port hard disk may appear rather xx 0D 03 00 00 01 01 10 Midi_OUT_Ch 1->10 = channels 1->16 owly the first time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of (GENERAL) MODE e internal data and tests PEDALBOARD/COMPUTER on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Description Default sk access operations. You may also find that the Hard Parameter Disk is write protected - this is merely a 00 0E 00 00 00 01 00 03 Computer Mode 0=Off, 1=Mac, 2=PC1, 3=PC3 0 = Off ecautionary measure accidental erasure files. The protection is re00 0E 01 to avoid 00 00 01 00 03of any factory-loaded Pedalb. Mode 0=Off,1=Pdbass, 2=Pdchord, 3=MFun 0 = Off oved in the Disk Utility 00 0E 02 page. 00 00 01 00 01 PcIfcPedB Mode switch 0 P-DATEABLE OPERATING - A disk theON operating system is supplied with the MIDI FILTERS IN SYSTEM ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 containing - 1F , Midi Lock ) strument. The disk can contain more recent version of the operating system than the one contained Default Address(H) Sizea (H) Range(H) Parameter Description xx 0F 00 00 00 01 00 64 filter_1 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H the instruments Flash ROM. xx 0F 01 00 00 01 00 64 filter_2 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H o load the operating system00 contained on 00 the floppy xx 0F 02 00 01 64 disk: filter_3 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H xx 0F 03 00 01 00 disk in 64the drive, filter_4 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) the 00H ) turn off the instrument, (2)00 insert the floppy (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When xx 0F 04 00 00 01 00 64 filter_5 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H essage Loading clears all memory!! ENTER tofilter_6 load, ESCAPE to 100 abort press 00H xx 0F OS-disk 05 00 00 01 00 64 0 -> (see appears, Appendix C) NTER to startxx the wait while system (6) Appendix when the mes- 00H 0FOS 06 update, 00 (5) 00 01 00 the operating 64 filter_7 is being0loaded, -> 100 (see C) age LoadingMIDI successful (Enter displayed, press ENTER. After completing this procFILTERS OUT ( to xx continue) = CHANNEL is =0 - 1F , Midi Lock ON ) ss, proceed with the power-up reset below to insure proper operation. Address(H) Size (H) that follows Range(H) Parameter Description Default xx 10 00 00 00 01 00 64 filter_1 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instruments memory has been damaged, xx 10 01 00 00 01 00 64 filter_2 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ther by beingxx exposed strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instru10 02 to the 00 effects 00 01 of a 00 64 filter_3 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ent may not operate The reset: xx 10 03 properly. 00 00 01 remedy 00is a power-up 64 filter_4 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H xx 10 04 00 00 01 00 64 filter_5 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) ) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) 00H xx 10 05 00 00 01 00 64 filter_6 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H hen the message !!WARNING!! Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR xx 10 06 00 00 Dial 01 on Power-Up 00 64 filter_7 0 -> 100 (see Appendix C) 00H ESCAPE to abort> appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY. MIDI COMMON/ARRG NoteToArrang

Address(H)
00 11 00 00 11 01 00 11 02 00 11 03

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00

Parameter
Chord Ch.1 IN_1 Chord Ch.2 !!WARNING!! Dial IN_2

Description
0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16 0=Off, 1->10 = chans 1->16

Default
0 = Off 0 0 = Off 0

on Power-Up MEMORY CLEAR !! +PADS ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F Requests MIDI CTRL ) to CLEARDescription / ESCAPE Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) < ENTER Parameter > xx 12 00 00 00 01 00 01 to abort ped_ftsw[1]
xx 12 01 xx 12 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 01 ped_ftsw[2] ped_ftsw[3]

10 01 10 01

Default
1 1 1

PORTANT INFORMATION EFFECTS A The SK760/880SE shouldSize contain items from the factory: Description Address(H) (H) the following Range(H) Parameter Default a) Instrument with power cord; 00 13 00 00 00 01 00 17 Eff_Type1 0 -> 23 5=St.Concert 13 containing 01 00the 00 01 00System 7F(OS-Disk); eff_vol1 0 -> 127 5AH = 90 b) 1 Floppy00 disk Operating 00 13 02 00 00 01 par#1_1 c) Owners manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder). 00 13 03 00 00 01 par#2_1 When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusicpar#3_1 technical assistance centre, always 00 13 04 00 00 01 provide the 00 model serial (found on the plate). 13 05name and 00 00 01 number 00 of your 1F instrument Eff_Type2 0 -> identification 31 9 = Chorus2 00 13 00 7F eff_vol2 0 -> 127 79H = 121 Generalmusic on06 Internet:00 00 01 00 13 07 00 00 01 par#1_2 http://www.generalmusic.com 00 13 08 00 00 01 par#2_2

PRESET PARAMETERS

Introduction

System Exclusive A33

00 13 09 00 13 0A EFFECTS B

00 00 01 00 00 01

00

7F

par#3_2 Eff2ToEff1

0 -> 127

Address(H)
00 14 00 00 14 01 00 14 02 00 14 03 00 14 04 00 14 05 00 14 06 00 14 07 00 14 08 00 14 09 00 14 0A

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 17 7F

Parameter
Eff_Type1 eff_vol1 par#1_1 par#2_1 par#3_1 Eff_Type2 eff_vol2 par#1_2 par#2_2 par#3_2 Eff2ToEff1

Description
0 -> 23 0 -> 127

Default
2= Hall3 37H = 55

00 00

1F 7F

0 -> 31 0 -> 127

0=MonoDelay1 79H = 121

00

7F

0 -> 127

TRACK SOUND ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 15 00 xx 15 01

Size (H)
00 00 02 00 00 01

Range(H)
0: 7F+0:F 0

Parameter
Soundnr Ctrl32

Description
Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) no sound if no zero

Default
0

MIDI CONFIGURATION ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 16 00 xx 16 01 xx 16 04 xx 16 05 xx 16 06 xx 16 07

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 01 01 01 01 03 03 02 10 02 10

Parameter
source destination Midi_In_Port Midi_In-Ch Midi_Our_Port Midi_out-Ch

Description
Track source 4 Track destination 5 1 = MidiIn A, 2= MidiIn B 1->10 = channels 1->16 1 = MidiOut A, 2= MidiOut B 1->10 = channels 1->16

Default

COMMON ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 17 00 xx 17 01 xx 17 02 xx 17 03 xx 17 04

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 7F 78 0300 07 01

Parameter
volume transp delay dyn_resp m_transp

Description
-60 -> +60 0 -> 768 Use nibblized if > 127

Default
3CH = 0 0 0 1

INTERNAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 18 00 xx 18 01 xx 18 02 xx 18 03 xx 18 04 xx 18 05 xx 18 06 xx 18 07 xx 18 08 xx 18 09 xx 18 0A xx 18 0B

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 01 7F 03 01 7F 7F 3E 07 07 0B 0C

Parameter
mode m_priority detune analog_out effect_group vol_group_A vol_group_B pan rand_pitch rand_pan Harmony PitchRange

Description
Poly.Mono -64 -> +63 Selection effects group A or B Volume sent of eff. group A Volume sent of eff. group B -31 -> +31 1 -> 11 0 -> 12

Default
0 0 40H = 0 0

3EH =31 0 0 1 0

MIDI IN FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )

Address(H)
xx 19 00 xx 19 01 xx 19 02 xx 19 03 xx 19 04 xx 19 05

Size (H)
00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01

Range(H)
00 00 00 00 00 00

Parameter
filter_in1 filter_in2 filter_in3 filter_in4 filter_in5 filter_in6

Description
0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100 0 -> 100

Default
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H

64 64 64 64 64 64

A34 Appendix

filter_in7 -> 100 envelopes, 00H very best. You can 0shape control MIDI OUT FILTER ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F )Waveforms and open and close filters with the olyphony/multitimbral capabilities Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) help of Parameter Description Default high definition graphical representations aximum polyphony: xx 1A 0064 voices. 00 00Multitimbricity: 01 00 64 filter_out1 0 -> 100 00H projected on the display. The Sound 00H Edit also xx 1A 01 00 00 01 00 64 filter_out2 0 -> 100 6 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32 parts the Sample 0 Translator, an incorporated 1A 02 00 00 01 00 64 features filter_out3 -> 100 00H ong mode). xx Each part is assigned to a track. xx 1A 03 00 00 01 00 64 Waveform filter_out4 0 -> 100 which allows 00Hyou to creating program Style/RealTime mode are xx 1A 04 8 tracks 00 00 01assigned 00 to 64 filter_out5 0 -> 100 00H createfilter_out6 new Sounds starting from disk-based samxx 1A 05 00 01 00 64 0 -> 100 00H e keyboard and the other 8 00 to the auto-accomdata received0via MIDI. xx 1A 06 00 00 01 00 64 ples or filter_out7 -> 100 00H animent section. Sample-RAM (D-RAM) LOCAL ( xx = CHANNEL = 0 - 1F ) ound generation Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) SK760/880SE Parameter Description Default is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM ased on sampled waveforms xx 1B 00 00(Wave), 00 01 modified 00 01 to allow ped_ftsw[1] the loading of disk-based samples to crexx 1B 01 00 00 01 Digitally 00 01 ped_ftsw[2] y programmable digital filters (DCF, -Sounds. The D-RAM is backed by xx 1B Waves 02 00 00 01 00 01 ate RAM ped_ftsw[3] ontrolled Filters). are assigned singua Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning off the xxmaximum = CHANNEL - 1F ) rly or in pairs SLIDER to up to( a of=30Layers, instrument. Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 xx 1C 00 00 00 01 00 7F Volatile Attack -64 +63 40H =0 Sample RAM (optional) aves per voice. xx 1C 01 00 00 01 00 7F Release -64 +63 40H = 0 to install-64 up +63 to 32 megabytes of ad- 40H = 0 00 00 01 00 7F It is possible Flt Cutoff OM-Sounds xx 1C 02 xx 1C 03 00 00 01 00 7F ditional FltSample-RAM Resonance -64 via+63 standard 72 pin com- 40H = 0 OM (permanent memory) contains xx 1C 04 00 00 01 up to 0024 7F puter SIMMs Decay (single in-line -64 +63 Memory Modules) ob- 40H = 0 xx 1C 05 which 00 00 the 01 source 00 of 7F LFO Depth -64 +63 40H = 0 egabytes of samples are tainable from most computer outlets. xx 1C 06 00 00 01 00 7F LFO Rate -64 +63 40H = 0 ver 1,000 ROM-Sounds. xx 1C 07 00 00 01 00 7F Digital LFO Delay -64 +63 40H =0 Effects Processor 00 00 02 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) 0 AM-Sounds xx 1C 08 Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in real ou can load disk-based RAM-Sounds DRUM KIT EDITING based on time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs and amples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds can modulations). A flexible matrix allows different LAYER1 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) e supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) effects Parameter Description Default to be assigned to every track. an be created xx by1D the sound editor 00user with 00 the 00 02 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Prog.Change(MSB) + Bank(LSB) Sequencer 00 127 xx 1D 01 be loaded 00 00 01 00 7F 32 track Level ogram. Sounds can from SK760/ xx series 1D 02 SK, WK, 00 00 01and WX/SX 00 7F The 32 Panorama -64 +63 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer has 80SE, previous PS xx 1D 03 00 00 01 00 7F a Microscope Transpose function -64 (microscopic +63 edit) and eries disks. xx 1D 04 00 00 01 00 7F Tune -64 +63 facility (to display chords and Lyrxx 1D 05 Patch 00 00 01 00 7F ScoreFltCutOff -64 Score, +63 dit Perf-Sound/Sound xx 1D 06 00 00 01 00 03 ics). The Exclude 00 03 QuickRec recording method allows the he Edit Perf xx Sound Patch 1D 07 and Edit 00 00Sound 01 00 7F rapid recording Effect 1 of Songs 00 127 by using existing Styles. xx 1D 08 00 00 01 00 7F Effect 2 00 127 nctions permits quick modification of Sounds 1D 09 00 00 01 00 04 Midi File Analog Out 00 04 player nd Drumkits toxx produce Performance-Sounds. DYNAMIC SWITCHin Performance The SK760/880SE models feature a MIDI File he modifications are stored Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Description Default playerParameter capable of reading any MIDI File availaacks to allow Songs, Styles or Real-Perform00 1E 00 00 00 01 00 7F ble onDynSwitch 00 127 the market and world wide web. nces to load the correct sounds. LAYER2 SOUND PATCH ( xx = NOTE = 0 - 7F ) Jukebox & Preload rawbars Address(H) Size (H) Range(H) Parameter Description Default The Jukebox function allows you to chain the xx 1F 00 00 00 02 0: 7F+0:F Soundnr Prog.Change + Bank unique set of Drawbar Performance for instant xx 1F 01 00 00 01 00 7F Songs Level 00 play 127 them one after the in memory and ccess to vintage electronic organ sounds using xx 1F 02 00 00 01 00 7F other with Panorama -64 +63 The Preload funca single command. e 8 panel sliders xx 1F as 03 drawbars, 00 00with 01 key-click, 00 7F Transpose -64 +63 list of disk-based Songs xx 1F 04 00 00 01 00 7F tion allows Tune you to create -64a +63 ercussion, etc.. xx 1F 05 00 00 01 00 7F or MIDI FltCutOff -64 them +63 all by means of a Files and play ound Edit xx 1F 06 00 00 01 00 03 singleExclude 00 03 command, without first loading all data in xx 1F 07 00 00 01 00 7F Effect 1 00 127 K760/880SE features and advanced, powerful xx 1F 08 00 00 01 00 7F memory. Effect 2 00 127 nd highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes xx 1F 09 00 00 01 00 04 Analog Out 00=track,1=L+R,2=O1+O2,3=O1,4=O2 ou deep into the heart of sound synthesis at its

xx 19 06 00 00 01 EATURES OF THE SK760SE & SK880SE

00

64

Introduction

System Exclusive A35

TRACK SELECT

Address(H)
00 20 00

Size (H)
00 00 01

Range(H)
00 1F

Parameter
Selected

Description
00 31

Default

SYSTEM OBJECT ACCESS MESSAGES

SYSTEM RESOURCE ACCESS
Messages relating to the RESOURCE ACCESS allow the transfer via MIDI of the same basic resources of the instrument that can be exported to disk, and which are:
System SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS

Each type of resource can constitute several files, in which case, before transmitting, are compacted into a single data block.. The transmission can take place in handshake mode for higher speeds and better control of the data transmitted (the system automatically recognizes the mode utilized according to the reply given or not after the transmission of the File Header Message). The MIDI message transmitted consists of the following structure:
F0H 2FH 5cH ss id cf pp <data > cc F7H = = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) 6 Subfunction ID Model ID, 00 = WK4 c = checksum (0-1), f = Data Format (0-3) packet number (optional) (optional) checksum (optional) EOX Subfunction ID : File Header File Data Resource Request Parametr Request Parameter Data ACK NACK CANCEL WAIT 01H 02H 03H 40H 41H 7 7FH 7EH 7DH 7CH

The transmission of one of the available resources starts by sending a message (File Header message) to indentify the successve blocks of data desired (File Data message). Typically the files concerned can be relatively long, therefore it is better to subdevide the information into several brief packets which can be individually tested and eventually retransmitted (in the case of using the handshake mode and the reception of an ACK reply confirms the correctness of the packet received, while a reply of the type NACK forces the retransmission of the error packet). Should it be necessar to interrupt the transmissoin, it is always possible to send the CANCEL command at any moment during the course of the communication. A WAIT command has also beed included for future implementations.

File Header message:

F0H 2FH 5cH 01H 00 03H <data > F7H = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = FILE HEADER Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 3 (octect) 3 octects 8 EOX

File Data message:

F0H 2FH 5cH = = = System Exclusive Message status ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F)

A36 Appendix

02 H 00 13 H pp <data > cc F7H

=Vocal Processor Subfunction 7. ID 1 = FILE DATA = ID, 00 = WK4 features 7. 1 TheModel Vocal Processor = checksum, format 3 (octect) Connections 7.(00:7fH) 1 = packet number Activate the Vocal Processor 7. 2 = 15 octects = checksum Working with the Vocal Processor 7. = EOX 7. 2 Chord

Vocoder 7. 3 Resource Request message: Unison 7. 4 F0H = System Edit 7. 4 Exclusive Message status
2FH 5cH 03 H 00 00 tt ss F7H

Description ofID the Main Menu page 8. 1 Subfunction = RESOURCE REQUEST Model ID, 00 = WK4 8. 2 Keyboard sensitivity not checksum, format8. 0 2 Footswitch polarity Resourse ID General Controls 8. 2 all files(0), selected(>0) 9 Master Pitch 8. 2 EOX Keyboard Scale 8. 2 Resource ID : System SETUP 0 User programmable Scales 8. 2 SOUNDS 1 Tuning/Scale GLOBAL 8. 2 PRESETS 2 Pedalboard/Computer 8. 4 STYLE PRESETS 3 4 Pedalboard USER 8. 4 STYLES 5 Computer 8.SONGS 4 Date & Time 8. 5 ACK message: Set date 8. 5 F0H = Exclusive Set System time 8. 5 Message status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer Display controls 8. 6 ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Chord Language 8. 6 7FH = Subfunction ID = ACK Help language 6 00 = Model ID, 00 = 8. WK4 Display mode 8. 6 0 00 = not checksum, format pp = number (00:7fH) 8. 6 Lastpacket Selection Memory F7H = EOX Mic/Line Input 8. 6 Mic/Line On/Off 8. 7 NACK message: Vocal On/Off 8. 7 F0H = System Exclusive Equalizer 8. 7 Message status 2FH = number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL TheID Edit General Main Menu Options MUSIC 8. 8 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Battery & release 8. 8 7EH = Subfunction ID = NACK System Info 8. 8 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 Restore 8. 8 format 0 00 = not checksum, pp = packet number (00:7fH) Restore All 8. 9 F7H = EOX Styles 8. 9 Restore Restore Performance 8. 9 CANCEL message: Restore Songs 8. 9 F0H = System Exclusive Message status Restore Style-Performance 8. 9 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERAL MUSIC Restore Sounds 8. 9
5cH 7D H 00 00 pp F7H = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) =Help 9. Subfunction ID = CANCEL 1 = Model ID, Help 00 = WK4 How to use 9. 1 = not checksum, format 0 Panic 9. 2 = packet number (00:7fH) How to activate PANIC 9. 2 = EOX

= =Edit = = = = = =

General 8. 1ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Command

Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC

Display Hold 9. 2 WAIT message: Appendix A. 1 F0H = System Exclusive Message ROM Sound tables A. 2status 2FH = ID number (manufacturer Drumkit tables A. 10 ID) = GENERAL MUSIC 5cH = Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) ROM Style tables A. 20 7C H = Subfunction ID = WAIT Performance tables 00 = Model ID, 00 = WK4 A. 22 Effects tables format A. 22 00 = not checksum, 0 pp = packet number (00:7fH) Wave tables A. 23 F7H = EOX Recognized Control Change messages A. 25 MIDI Implementation chart A. 26/27 System Exclusive Implementation A. 28 Index (alphabetical) A. 45

Contents

System Exclusive A37

EXAMPLES of Resource Request message compositions <Example 1> : System Setup request:

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

00 (7)

00 (8)

F7 (9)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID (0=Setup ) (8)not used for Setup Req (7)EOX

<Example 2> : System Sound request:

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

01 (7)

00 (8)

F7 (9)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID (1=Sound ) (8)Selected ( 00 = All files) (7)EOX

<Example 3> : Request for the 3rd Song in the System:

F0 (1)

2F 50 (2) (3)

03 (4)

00 (5)

00 (6)

05 (7)

03 (8)

F7 (9)

(1)Exclusive Status (2)manufacturer ID=GENERAL MUSIC (3)Command ID(5=RESOURCE ACCESS) + device ID (0=1 device ID) (4)Subfunction ID (3=RESOURCE REQUEST) (5)Model ID (0=WK4) (6)c=0(No checksum),f=0(7 bit data value) (7)Resource ID (5=Song ) (8)Selected ( 3 = 3^ file selezionato) (7)EOX

DEVICE PARAMETER ACCESS

Messages relating to the DEVICE PARAMETERS ACCESS allows access to specific information relating to the instrument; the protocol invludes the transmission of a request message which will be followed by the eventual reply.

Parameter Request message:

F0H 2FH 5cH 40H 00 00 tt bs ps F7H = = = = = = = = = = System Exclusive Message status Manufacturer ID = GENERAL MUSIC Command ID: 5=Resource Access, c=device ID(0-F) Subfunction ID = PARAMETER REQUEST Model ID, 00 = WK4 not checksum, format 0 Parameter ID Bank Select PrChange Select (only for SOUND) EOX Parameter ID : STATUS of the system SOUND Name GLOB PRST. Name STYLE PRST. Name USER STYLE Name SONG Name 0 1 2 3 4 5

A38 Appendix

Parameter Data message: 3. 23 Store Performance Saving to the current Performance 3. 23 F0H = System Exclusive Message status To save to a different Performance 3. 24 2FH = ID number (manufacturer ID) = GENERALMUSIC
5cH 41 H 00 cf pp <data > cc F7H Subfunction ID = PARAMETER Selecting the storage device DATA 4. 1 Model ID, 00 = WK4 Choose the desired Disk command 4. 1 checksum=1, format (5 per Status, 0 altrimenti) Thepacket file selector 4. 2 number (00:7fH) The general Disk procedure 4. 3 = checksum Load Operations 4. 5 = EOX Load WX/SX Songs and Styles 4. 10 Save operations 4. 11 below. The data sent refer to the structure as described Erase operations 4. 17 Status Data.Copy The data relates to the contained in the following fields (the quantities of memory are expressed in Kbyte): operations 4. parameters 18 Move operations 4. 20 bytes rel.addr. name description Utility 4. 22 1 0 iClass see classification in Tab.1 Floppy disk utility 4. 22 1 1 iSubClass see classification in Tab.1 Hard Disk Utility 4. 23 1 2 iRelease instrument release Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI 4. AV=b0 26 1 3 peripherals HD=b1, 4 4 totalSysRam Total 4. System Multicopy SCSI to H.Disk 27 Memory 4 8 freeSysRam Freee System memory SCSI utility 4. 28 4 12 totalBackedRam Backed Sample Ram Memory FAST zip 100/250 format 4. 28 4 16 freeBackedRam Free Backed Sample Ram Memory ZIP 100/250 FORMAT 4. 4 20 totalVolRam Total 28 Volatile Sample Ram Memory FAST JAZ 1G/2G format 28 Sample Ram Memory 4 24 freeVolRam Free4. Volatile JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT 4. 28 iClass / iSubClass 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Additional Disk 4. 29 SK76 1 - Synth Expander S2 S3functions S2 Box SK88 DiskMK88 handling information 4. 31 2 - Masterkeyboards 3 - Keyboards WS2 WS1 WX2 WX2Box CD Styles 5. 1 4 - Pianos WS400 RPro1 RPro2 RPprox 5 - Home Organs About the SK760/880SE ROM Styles 5. 1 6 - Classic OrgansFlash Styles 5. 1 7 - Accessories Selecting andAS-1 playing the Styles 5. 1 WX400 Ps2500 WK4 PS1500 SX2 SX3 WK3 =Disk = = = = Command ID: 5=Resource - Hard disk - SCSI 4. 1 Access, c=device ID(0-F)

The functions which control the Styles 5. 1 Arrange On/Off 5. 1 Parameter Data. In this case the streams relating to the parameter names requested are returned and all the data is identifed by the following Arrange Mode 5. 1 16 bytes: Memory 5. 1 0 1 Memory 5. 1 2 3-15 Lower Parameter ID Bank SelectPerf Select Parameter Name (13 char Max) Tempo Lock 5. 2 Mixer Lock 5. and 2 ps (prChange select) contained in the request vary according to the parameter as in Tab.2, taking into The parameters bs (bank select) Bass to Lowest 5. 2 followed only in the case in which what has been requested is actually present in the system; to be able accound that the request will have effectively to request all the values available for a 5. given Harmony On/Off 2 parameter, it is sufficient to send the values bs=00 e ps=00. Style Lock 5. 2 STATUS SOUND REAL PERF. STYLE SONG Single Touch 00 Play 5. 2 Bank Select Range 1 - 16 1-8 1 - 96 1 - 16 Style Performance 5. 12- 128 not used (nu) PrCh Select Range 00 nu nu (Tab.2) Arrange Mode options 5. 3 Auto Chord and Fixed Chord modes 5. 3 Chord APPENDIX ARecognition modes 5. 3 Dynamic Arrange 5. 4 DATA FORMAT Autobacking 5. 4 The messages used to controlthe the split system exclusives Changing point 5. 4 accept data in the following formats:

(TAB.1)

User Styles 5. : 5 format =0 (7 bit data value) the natural data format with values from 0 to 127. Does not require any form of treatment.
format =1 (7 bit wide word : the What is a LSB_J) Riff? 5. 5 value of the data present in the stream has a range defined by the number of bytes transmitted. For example, to transmit the hexadecimal value F123 (61731 decimal) three bytes configured as follows are required: Recording 5. 6 03 62 23. This format is useful to transmit single data (byte, short, int, long, float, double) which do not fall within the range 0-127.

The basic structure of a Style 5. 5

Restoring the User Styles memory 5. 7

Time Signature 5. only 9 4 significant bits but which can represent much greater values. for example, to transmit the hexadeciformat =2 (nibble) : single byyes contain Scale Conversion 5. 9 four bytes configured as: 0F 01 02 03; i practice, each single byte is sliced in two and transmitted on mal value F123 (61731 decimal) would require two bytes with theQuantize four most significant 5. 9 bits at 0.
format =3 (octect): the bytes are groups in sets of 8 Bytes with 7 significant bits to represent 7 real bytes in 8 MIDI bytes (56 bit). This format allows, Style 5. 13 compactness of the data to transmit in cases of data consisting of a large number of bytes whose priory value is not therefore, toEdit achieve maximum known. Entering Edit Style 5. 13

Scale Conversion tables 5. 11

Contents

System Exclusive A39

The procedure is as follows: from each bytes of the 7 in sequence, the least significan bit is extracted and saved in an eighth byte, therefore the same byte is shifted to the right; finally all is transmitted in the order. For example: 7 real bytes = 0x11 0x22 0x33 0x44 0x55 0x66 0x77 then shifting to the right and memorizing in a byte the extracted bits:
0x11 = 0x09 + 1 (b0) 0x22 = 0x11 + 0 (b1) 0x33 = 0x1A + 1 (b2) 0x44 = 0x22 + 0 (b3) 0x55 = 0x2B + 1 (b4) 0x66 = 0x33 + 0 (b5) 0x77 = 0x3C + 1 (b6) 8byte: 0x01 0x01 0x05 0x05 0x15 0x15 0x55

8 byte Midi = 0x09 0x11 0x1A 0x22 0x2B 0x33 0x3C 0x55.

format =4 (nibble data dump): the single bytes containing only 4 significant bits to be able to represent any data stream. For example, the stream ciao corresponds to the ASCII data 0x63 0x69 0x61 0x6f and will, therefore, be represented by the following bytes: 0x06 0x03 0x06 0x09 0x06 0x01 0x06 0x0f. format =5 (BCD data dump): the single bytes are subdivided in two nibbles and subsequently converted in BCD; this is a format particularly useful with numerical data which does not permit direct visualization. For example, the number 0x12345678 corresponds to the ASCII data 0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78 which subdevided in nibbles give:
0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08

which when conve rted in BCD give:

0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38

which when shown on the terminal gives the stream 12345678, representing the initial data. Observations: The Set function of the System Exclusive is able to automatically identify the amount of the field to update, regardless of the format with which the data is sent with the following exceptions: the format 0 always modifies a bytes relating to the addres of the variable to update, therefore, if for example, we want to modify with format 0 a variable of 32 bits of the current value equalling 0x12345678 (hexadecimal value), after sending the data 0x7F we will obtain the variable updated to the value 0x7F345678. The correct method to update a variable with a value greate than 7 bit (correspnding to the decimal value 127) is to use the format 1 or 2; in the way, to update a 16 bit variable to the hexadecimal value 0x1234 you can send:
format 1: format 2: 0x24 0x34 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 (2 data bytes) (4 data bytes).

the formats 4 and 5 do not consider the limits accepted by the filed in memory for which case should be taken not to send a numder of data higher than the accepted limit.

APPENDIX B
Creation of RESOURCE ACCESS files.
To control the resources via system exclusive (RESOURCE ACCESS) makes use of the solution of packaging the various files which constitute the same resource into a single buffer. Generally, therefre, we would have the following situation:
Resource File = FILE.000 FILE.001 FILE.002 ... FILE.00n

for a total of (n+2) files (with n which can also be 0). Each file can be identified by a set of three numbers which represente their own description:
File ID = type (Resource ID) bank (0xFF if not exist) perf (0xFF if not exist)

This document wants to indicate how to identify the files concerned for each resource to be accessed, how to operate to manipulate these files and, finally, the effective transmission mode.

A40 Appendix

Types of Resources EFERENCE GUIDE

The resources can be classified as follows:

Sounds 2. 1

for each of which concern various files

GMX Banks 1, 2 and 3 Resource 2. 1 ID: Banks 4 - 16 2. 1 Drum Kits and Drum Sounds 2. 1 Selecting Sounds 2. 2 Moving Between Families 2. 2 The sound group families 2. 3

system SETUP SOUNDS GLOBAL PRESETS STYLE PRESETS USER STYLES SONGS

0 1 2 3 4 5

Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 2. 4

For each of the resourcces available, itSound is possible send a command requesting all the resources which make up the part of that groups (all the Edit Performance 2.to5 SOUNDS, all the SONGS, ...), or, it is possible Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 to refer to a single resource of the currently selected group (send the selected SONG, the selected STYLE, ...). Save the modifications to a Performance 2. 12 Referring to Advanced the Resource EditRequest Sound Message 2. 13 command detailed above, setting the value of 0 in the field ss we will obtain all the resources, while specifying a number greaterEDIT than 0 we will obtain Entering SOUND 2. the 13 transmission of the single resource required. for each group of rerouces the possible selection values are the following: Procedure 2. 13

Temporary escape from Edit Sound 2. 14 Resourse ID Max Select Number Permanent escape without saving 2. 14 16 TheSOUNDS Edit Sound main Menu 2. 14 GLOBAL PRESETS 8 Layers 2. 15 STYLE PRESETS 96 TheUSER Algorithms STYLES 2. 16 32 SONGS 2. 17 16 Waveform Volume e Balance 2. 19 Creation of the Resource File Volume 2. 19 Volume Tracking (F2)to write 2. 20 To create the Resource File it is necessary for each single file of a chunk consisting of a desription of the file and of the data that consistutes Balance 2. 21 the file; the format of each chunk is the following: Balance Tracking (F2) 2. 21 bytes rel.addr. name description Programming a tracking envelope 2. 22 4 0 chunck id data 10 & Balance Envelope Amplitude Envelope 2. 23 4 4 chunck len es.: 30 Amplitude 1 8 file type Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 24 1 9 file bank Programming Key On and Key Off Envelopes 2. 25 1 10 file perf Envelope Tracking 2. 26 Amplitude 1 11 not used Balance Envelope 2. 26 20 12 F_HEAD vedi sotto Balance Key On & Key Off 2. 27 len-28 32 < dataEnvelope > byte data Balance Envelope Tracking 2. 28 therefore the Resource FilterFile 2.can 29be represented as: Filter Cutoff Tracking 2. 30 data len0 ... < data > for FILE.000 Filter Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 31 data len1 = len0+4 ... < data > for FILE.001 Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 data len2= len0+len1+8 ... < data > for FILE.002 Pitch Envelope 2. 32 data len3= len0+len1+len2+12 ... < data > for FILE.003 Pitch Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 33 data len_n = S[len(i)] + 4*n ... < data > for FILE.00n Pitch Envelope Tracking 2. 33 LFOlength (Lowof Frequency Oscillator) 2. 34 To calculate the totale the Resource File it is sufficient sum of the lengths of each file (Li) with the length of each single header chunk (32 Pan 2. 36 bytes): Pan Envelope Key On & Key Off 2. 37 Resource File Length = S[Li] + n*32; Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37 Storingpresent Sounds 2. to 40 The variable F_HEADER refers the internal structure of how the file is effectively memorized within the system; to identify it we refer
directly to the stuctures C used internally:

Sample Translator 2. 44

union TIME_INF Sample {loading methods 2. 44 struct part { Entering Sample Translator 2. 44 unsigned short hour : 5; Selecting Samples from the waveform display unsigned short min : 6; Loading samples 2. 46 sec : 5; unsigned short Loading samples from disk or SCSI device 2. }; ushortSamples time; Loading and Programs 2. 47 }; total Receiving Samples via a Dump //2. 482 bytes

2. 45 46

Assigning samples 2. 48 union DATE_INF { Cancelling samples 2. 50 struct part { unsigned short year : 7; Sample Editing 2. 51 unsigned short month : 4; General notes on Sample editing unsigned short day : 5; Sample MIDI Dump 2. 54

2. 52

Contents

System Exclusive A41

}; ushort date; }; // total 2 bytes

struct F_HEAD { unsigned char name[8],ext[3],flags; // 12 TIME_INF time; DATE_INF date; long length; };

// 2 // 2 // 4 // total 20 bytes

For completion, the description of the file inside the HEADER.hdr refers instead to a more complex stucture:
struct F_HEADER { F_HEAD char long }; f; name[16]; offset;

Creation of the Resource Header

Before sending the Resource File, a Resource Header is sent which describes the entire Data File which is then sent. The Format of the file is the following:
bytes 1 1 4 15 rel.addr. 0 1 2 6 name resource type nfile len name description Resource ID number of file total length of the effective binary resource file name of the complete structure associated to the file

for a total length of files equal to 21 bytes.

A42 Appendix

APPENDIX C
MIDI FILTERS conversion table
N. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Description Filter off Prg. change Pitch Mono touch Poly touch 0 Bank sel 1 Modulation 2 Breath cnt. 3 Undef. cnt. 4 Foot cnt. 5 Portamento time 6 Data en. MSB 7 Main vol. 8 Balance 9 Undef. cnt. 10 Panorama 11 Expression 12 Control 1 13 Control 2 14 Undef. cnt. 15 Undef. cnt. 16 Gen. purp. c.1 17 Gen. purp. c.2 18 Gen. purp. c.3 19 Gen. purp. c.4 20 Undef. cnt. 21 Undef. cnt. 22 Undef. cnt. 23 Undef. cnt. 24 Undef. cnt. 25 Undef. cnt. 26 Undef. cnt. 27 Undef. cnt. 28 Undef. cnt. 29 Undef. cnt. 30 Undef. cnt. 31 Undef. cnt. 64 Damper ped. 65 Portamento 66 Sostenuto 67 Soft pedal 68 Legato foot 69 Hold 2 70 S.C. (Sn.v.) 71 S.C. (Res.) 72 S.C. (Rel.) 73 S.C. (Att.) 74 S.C. (Cut.) 75 S.C. (Undef.) 76 S.C. (Undef.) N. 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Description 77 S.C. (Undef.) 78 S.C. (Undef.) 79 S.C. (Undef.) 80 Gen. purp. c.5 81 Gen. purp. c.6 82 Gen. purp. c.7 83 Gen. purp. c.8 84 Portam. cnt. 85 Undef. cnt. 86 Undef. cnt. 87 Undef. cnt. 88 Undef. cnt. 89 Undef. cnt. 90 Undef. cnt. 91 Eff. 1 (Rev.) 92 Eff. 2 93 Eff. 3 (Chor.) 94 Eff. 4 95 Eff. 5 96 Data incr. 97 Data decr. 98 NRPN LSB 99 NRPN MSB 100 RPN LSB 101 RPN MSB 103 Undef. cnt. 104 Undef. cnt. 105 Undef. cnt. 106 Undef. cnt. 107 Undef. cnt. 108 Undef. cnt. 109 Undef. cnt. 110 Undef. cnt. 111 Undef. cnt. 112 Undef. cnt. 113 Undef. cnt. 114 Undef. cnt. 115 Undef. cnt. 116 Undef. cnt. 117 Undef. cnt. 118 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 119 Undef. cnt. 120 All snd. off 121 Reset all c. 122 Local cnt. 123 All note off 124 Omni m. off 125 Omni m. on 126 Mono m. on 127 Poly m. on

Stock Code 271329

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

PRINTED IN ITALY

1 2

see Appendix A on Data Format 0=Echo LCD, 1=All, 2=All on 2 lines, 3=Lyric only, 4=Chord only 3 The values 00H-0FH relatve to the Midi Port-A and 10H-1FH to Port-B 4 00=No Midi, No Keyboard, 1=only Keyboard, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Keyboard 5 00=N0 Midi, No Generation, 1=only Generation, 2=only Midi, 3=Midi & Generation 6 see Appendix A on Data Format 7 see paragraph Device Parameter Access 8 Infact the Resource File Header is composed of 21 byte (see Appendix B) 9 See Appendix B regarding the composition of the various resources available 10 28 + byte data number

ales Division: I -47848 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy Via delle Rose, 12 el. +39 541 959511 fax +39 541 957404 tlx 550555 GMUSIC I

nternet: http://www.generalmusic.com

System Exclusive A43

A44 Appendix

Index CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK A DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash measures, with arrowhead Delete Edit symbol, Song 6.within 24 an equilateral triangle, is intended Edit to alert the 5. user Delete measures, Style 19to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage Detune, Edit Preset 3. 19 within the products enclosure may be sufficient magnitude Dialog that windows 1.of8 to constitute Disk a risk 4. of electric shock to persons. 1 The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is Display 1.the 12, 1. 31, of 2.important 2, 9. 2 intended to alert the Hold user to presence Drum Kit editing 2. 8 operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the Drum Kits 2. literature accompanying the 1 product.

Drum mask, Edit Style 5. 24 Amplitude Envelope 2. 23 Drumkits A. 10 Amplitude Envelope Tracking 2. 26 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Dynamic Arrange, Styles 5. 4 Arrange Mode 5. 1 Dynamic layer, Edit Sound Patch 2. 8 Arrange Mode functions 5. RISK 3 NSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS Dynamic switch 2. 9 Arrange On/Off 1. 24, 5. 1 Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and3. FCC product. Arrange On/Off, Global Presets 2 if applicable) before using the E wet basement) and do not expose to Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or Assigning samples, Sample Translator 2. 48 Edit Menu, Presets programming 3. 3 rain. Attack, Edit Preset sound 2. 5 Edit Preset Sound 2. be 5 used with the This product Auto should be used only 5. with or should Chord mode 3 a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, Edit Score 6. 33, 6. 35 components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly Auto Preload 6. 6 Edit Song 6. 14 instructions found at the back of the manual. Autobacking, Styles 5. 4 Sound 2. be 13 This product,Autoload whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones orEdit speakers, may capable of producing 1. 22 Edit Sound menu 2. 14

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC Advanced Edit Sound (OR 2. 13 SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER BACK). NO Algorithms,PARTS Edit Sound 2. 16 REFER USER-SERVICEABLE INSIDE. Alphanumeric entry 1. PERSONNEL. 4 SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE

Adjust the sound volumes separately 1. 17

Disk procedure 4. 3

. . .

File selector, Disk 4. 2 Computer, General 8. 4 Fill In 1. 26 ContinuousSAVE Control Pedals 3. 15 THESE INSTRUCTIONS Filter Control, Edit Sound 2. 29 Controllers, Edit Preset 3. 15 Filter Cutoff, Edit Preset sound 2. 6 Copy Edit Song 19 The information in this events, publication has been6. carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline liability for Filter Cutoff Tracking 2.all 30 Copy events, Edit Style 5. 16 may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication inSound part or in whole without prior Filter, Edit 2. 29 Copy operations, Disk Generalmusic 4. 18 written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications Filter Envelope Tracking 2. 31 Copy Sound 4. without 18 prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability t considers necessary to Single any of its products for damage to property or persons Filters connected in parallel 2. 29 Copy track, Preset 3. 22 resulting from improper use of Edit the instrument. Filters connected in series 29 Make sure that all Create internal track, electronic options are installed with an 2. authorized Edit Preset 3. 22 by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check Fixed Chord mode 5. 3 Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center. Cutoff Frequency, Edit Sound 2. 29 Flash Styles 1. 29, 5. 1 Copyright Generalmusic 2000. All rights reserved. D Floppy disk 4. 1 Floppy disk (Preload) 6. 6 MS-DOS, roducts and brandDecay, names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, Edit Preset sound 2. 5 Floppy disk owners. utility 4. 22Publisher/s and ample Vision, Windows, Zip) Preset may either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective The Delay, Edit 3. be 22 Footswitch polarity 8. 2 Author/s make no claim to these trademarks. Delay/Modulation 3. 12

sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a Edit Sound Patch 2.an 8 audiologist. B level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult Edit Sound/Sound Patch 2. could 4 walk Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 21 WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one Edit Style 5. 13 on, trip over or roll anything over 2. power Balance Envelope 23 or connecting cords of any kind. Style procedure 5. 14, 6. 15 Sound 2. does 26 not interfere with its proper Edit This product Balance should beEnvelope, located so Edit that its location ventilation. Effect Send 3. 13 Tracking 2. 28 This product Balance should beEnvelope located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other that produce heat. Effects, Edit products Preset 3. 12 Balance, S.M.F. Player 6. 8 This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or marked on Effects, enable/disable 1.as37 the product. Balance Tracking 2. 21 Effects Programming 3. 13 Balancing 1. 17 This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). is a safety feature. 7. If you EntringThis the Vocal Processor 2 are Bass unable to insert the Sustain plug into8. the4wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Equalizer, General 8. 7 Bass to Lowest 5. 2 purpose of the plug. Equalizer, Vocal Processor 7. 6 Battery & Release 8. 8 The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for Style long periods Erase, Edit 5. 15 of time. Erase events, Edit Song 6. 16 C taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure Care should be through openings. Erase operations, Disk 4. 17 This product Cancelling should be serviced by qualified service personnel assignments, Sample Translator 2. when: 50 Erase Single Song 4. 17 a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; Cancelling samples, Sample Translator 2.or50 Erase track, Edit Preset 3. 23 b) objects have fallen, or Edit liquid has been spilled into the product; or Catch note, Sound Patch 2. 10 c) the product has been exposed to rain; or Escape Edit Sound, temoprary 2. 14 CC#0 (ControlChange) 3. 18 d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; Exclude, Editor Sound Patch 2. 9 CC#32 (ControlChange) 3. 18 e) the product has been dropped, Exit Edit Sound 2. 14 Change disk name or 4. the 22 enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance Expand, instructions. Edit Sound All servicing Patch should 2. 10 be Channel A effects 3. 12 referred to qualified service personnel. Export sample, Sample Translator 2. 53 Channel B effects 3. 12 options Some products may have benches accessory suppliedmonotor as part ofviewing the product or as6. 34 Chord mode, Vocal and/or Processor 7. 2 mounting fixtures that are eitherExternal optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where Chord Recognition 5. 3 F applicable) are well secured before use. Common Channel, Edit Preset 3. 5 Fadeprocessing In/Out 1. technology 28 Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic (S.W.P.) that Common channel, Edit Preset 3. 8 product utilises digital sample wave FAST JAZ 1G/2G format for 4. additional 28 may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owners manual Compare, Edit Sound Patch 2. 11 FAST zip 100/250 format 4. 28 information. Computer 8. 4

Index A45

Format Hard Disk 4. 23 Format MS-DOS disk 4. 22 Formatting Floppy disks 4. 22 Forward >> button, Song 6. 2 Front Panel 1. 1 Full keyboard playing 1. 14

G
General Edit 8. 1 Global Presets, selection 3. 1 Global Presets, selection & play 1. 31 Grand Piano Preset 1. 9

H
Hard disk 4. 1 Hard disk (Preload) 6. 6 Hard Disk Backup 4. 24 Hard Disk Check/Recovery 4. 23 Hard Disk Protection 4. 24 Hard Disk Restore 4. 25 Hard Disk sleep time 4. 24 Hard Disk Utility 4. 23 Hardcopy (Pads) 3. 18 Harmony 3. 21 Harmony On/Off 5. 2 Harmony Type 5. 2 Harmony type 3. 21 Headphones 1. 10 Help 9. 1 How to use HELP 9. 1

Load All, Disk 4. 9 Load Group, Disk 4. 7 Load Group User Style, example 4. 8 Load Operations, Disk 4. 5 Load Single, Disk 4. 5 Load Single Sound, example 4. 6 Load songs to memory 6. 1 Load WX/SX Songs & Styles 4. 10 Loading data into RAM 1. 40 Loading samples, Sample Translator 2. 46 Local ON, Local Off, Edit Preset 3. 10 Locator, Song 6. 3 Low Frequency Oscillator 2. 34 Lower Memory, Styles 5. 1 Lyrics on an external monitor 1. 23 Lyrics on display 1. 21

M
Macintosh 8. 5 Mask, Edit Style 5. 24 Master Pitch, General 8. 2 Master Track event edit, Edit Song 6. 30 Melody Off 6. 8 Memory, Styles 5. 1 Mic/Line On/Off, General 8. 7 Microscope event edit, Edit Song 6. 27 Microscope event editing, Edit Style 5. 21 MIDI channel configuration, Edit Preset 3. 5 MIDI Channels 3. 5 Midi Clock, Edit Preset 3. 6 MIDI Dump, Edit Preset 3. 9 MIDI, Edit Preset 3. 5 Midi File Player 1. 38, 6. 7 MIDI File, saving 4. 12 MIDI filters, Edit Preset 3. 6 MIDI Implementation Chart A. 27 MIDI Lock, Edit Preset 3. 10 MIDI Merge, Edit Preset 3. 6 Midi Panic 9. 2 MIDI Sample Dump Standard 2. 54 Mixer, Edit Preset 3. 10 Mixer Lock 5. 2 Mode (F8) for Pedalboard options 8. 4 Models with Optional Hard Disk Installed iv Modulation 3. 15 Monophonic mode, Edit Preset 3. 20 Move events, Edit Song 6. 18 Move events, Edit Style 5. 16 Move operations, Disk 4. 20 Move Single Sound 4. 20 Multi Track List 3. 3 Multicopy H.Disk to SCSI 4. 26 Multicopy options 4. 27 Multicopy SCSI to H.Disk 4. 27 Multifunction 8. 4 Multimedia 1. 21

I
Important Preliminary Notes iv Insert measures, Edit Song 6. 23 Insert Measures, Edit Style 5. 19 Inserting a score (notes and chords) 6. 33 Inserting chord symbols, Edit Score 6. 35 Inserting lyrics, Edit Score 6. 36 Inserting notes, Edit Score 6. 35 Isolate a single sound 1. 18

J
JAZ 1G/2G FORMAT 4. 28 Jukebox 6. 4

K
Key Assign 3. 18 Key On/Key Off Amp. Envelopes 2. 24 Key On/Key Off Balance envelope 2. 27 Key On/Key Off Envelope programming example 2. 25 Key On/Key Off Filter Envelope 2. 31 Key On/Key Off Pan Envelope 2. 37 Key On/Key Off Pitch Envelope 2. 33 Key range, Edit Preset 3. 22 Key Start 1. 27 Keyboard Scale, General 8. 2 Keyboard sensitivity, General 8. 2

L
Last Selection Memory 8. 6 Layer dynamic range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layer key range, Edit Sound 2. 38 Layers, Edit Sound 2. 15 LFO, Edit Preset sound 2. 6 LFO, Edit Sound 2. 34

O
Overlapping samples, Sample Translator 2. 49

P
Pads 1. 11, 3. 18 Pan, Edit Sound 2. 36 Pan Envelope Control 2. 36 Pan Envelope Tracking 2. 37

A46 Index

PC1 (Computer) 8. 5 PC2 (Computer) 8. 5 Ped./Pad 3. 18 Pedalbass 8. 4 Pedalboard 8. 4 Pedalchord 8. 4 Pedals programming 3. 15 Performance 1. 6 Performance tables A. 22 Pitch Envelope 2. 32 Pitch Envelope Control 2. 32 Pitch Envelope Tracking 2. 33 PitchBend 3. 15 Play (Preload) 6. 7 Play along with a Song 1. 44 Play button, Song 6. 2 Playback all the songs or MIDI files on disk 6. 5 Preload 6. 5 Preload functions 6. 6 Presets 3. 1 Priority, Edit Preset 3. 20 Programmable Pads 1. 11 Programming Presets 3. 3

S
Sample Editing, Sample Translator 2. 51 Sample loading methods 2. 44 Sample MIDI Dump 2. 54 Sample Translator 2. 44 Sample Translator, entering 2. 44 Sample trimming 2. 53 Save All, Disk 4. 15 Save data to disk or Hard Disk 1. 45 Save Group, Disk 4. 13 Save Group Style Preset, example 4. 14 Save MIDI File procedure, example 4. 13 Save modifications to a Performance 2. 12 Save new Edit Sound 2. 39 Save operations, Disk 4. 11 Save Single, Disk 4. 11 Score 6. 33 SCSI 4. 1 SCSI utility 4. 28 Search Resource, Disk 4. 30 Search S.M.F. 6. 8 Searching files using Search 4. 30 Select all (Preload) 6. 7 Select sounds 1. 12 Set date, General 8. 5 Set time, General 8. 5 Setup 8. 8 Single Touch Play 1. 24, 5. 2 Slope, Edit Sound 2. 43 SMF Save format, Edit Preset 3. 7 SOLO button 1. 18 Song 6. 1 Song (Preload) 6. 6 Song Name 6. 15 Song playback 6. 1 Song position pointer 6. 3 Sound Banks 1. 13, 2. 1 Sound editing hints 2. 42 Sound families 2. 1 Sound Groups 2. 1 Sound Search, Disk 4. 30 Sound/S.Patch edit procedure 2. 4 Sounds 2. 1 Sounds, editing and changing 2. 3 Sounds, selection 2. 2 Specifications ii Split keyboard 1. 13 Split point, changing 5. 4 Status of a track 1. 7 Stereo panorama 2. 36 Stop button, Song 6. 2 Storage device selection, Disk 4. 1 Store (salvataggio sound) 2. 11 Store Performance 1. 33 Store Preset 3. 23 Storing Samples, Sample Translator 2. 55 Storing Sounds to the Sound Library 2. 40 Style Lock 1. 31, 5. 2 Style Lock, Global Presets 3. 2 Style Name, Edit Style 5. 14 Style Performance 1. 30 Style Preset 5. 2 Style tables A. 20

Q
Quantize events, Edit Song 6. 21 Quantize events, Edit Style 5. 18 Quantize, Song recording 6. 13 Quick Rec Song record method 6. 9

R
RAM reset vi RAM Waveforms, Sample Translator 2. 44 Random pitch, Edit Preset 3. 19 Range(H) A. 32 Rear Panel 1. 2 Rechargeable battery v Recognized Control Change messages A. 25 Record a Song, (Quick Rec method) 1. 42 Record Song method 6. 10 Recording a Song 6. 9 Recording a User Style 5. 6 Release, Edit Preset sound 2. 6 Reset list 6. 6 Resetting at Power Up iv Resonance, Edit Preset sound 2. 6 Resonance, Edit Sound 2. 29 Restore All, General 8. 9 Restore all tracks, Edit Preset sound 2. 7 Restore Preset, General 8. 9 Restore Songs, General 8. 9 Restore Sounds, General 8. 9 Restore Style-Preset, General 8. 9 Restore Styles, General 8. 9 Restore track, Edit Preset sound 2. 7 Restoring the Songs memory 6. 13 Reverbs 3. 12 Rewind << button, Song 6. 2 Riff, User Styles 5. 5 ROM Styles 5. 1 Rom Waveform library 2. 17 ROM-Sound tables A. 2

Index A47

Styles 5. 1 Styles, selection and play 1. 24 Switch action pedals 3. 15 Switch sounds 2. 8 System Exclusive, Edit Preset 3. 7 System Exclusive Impolmentation A. 28

T
Tabelle Styles A. 21 Tap Tempo 1. 28 Tempo Lock 5. 2 Time Signature, Song 6. 4 Time Signature, Song recording 6. 12 Touch Sensitivity, Edit Preset 3. 19 Track 1. 6 Track configuration, Edit Preset 3. 5 Track Icons 1. 7 Tracking envelope, programming example 2. 22 Tracks/Splits, Edit Preset 3. 19 Transpose, Edit Preset 3. 19 Transpose events, Edit Song 6. 26 Transpose events, Edit Style 5. 21 Transposing tracks by octaves 1. 36 Tuning/Scale, General 8. 2

U
Undo 5. 13, 6. 14 Unison mode, Vocal Processor 7. 4 Up-dateable operating system iv User programmable Scales 8. 2 User Styles, programming 5. 5 Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 1. 16 Utility, Disk 4. 22

V
Variation style 1. 26 Velocity, Edit Song 6. 25 Velocity, Edit Style 5. 20 Velocity range, Edit Preset 3. 20 Video controls, Score 6. 34 Vocal On/Off, General 8. 7 Vocal Processor 7. 1 Vocal Processor, activation 7. 2 Vocal Processor Edit 7. 4 Vocoder mode, Vocal Processor 7. 3 Voice Set, Vocal Processor 7. 5 Volume (Edit Sound) 2. 19 Volume e Balance (Edit Sound) 2. 19 Volume Tracking 2. 20

W
WAIT (handshake message): A. 28 Warnings 1. 8 Wave Library, Sample Translator 2. 44 Wheels 1. 11, 3. 15

Z
ZIP 100/250 FORMAT 4. 28

A48 Index